JP2022031464A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine enabling a suitable arrangement of displacement members to a game board.

SOLUTION: A pachinko machine includes a left side first design piece 51 and a right side first design piece 52 capable of being displaced from a closed state to an open state. Further, the pachinko machine includes a left side second design piece 53 and a right side second design piece 54 disposed at positions different from the left side first design piece 51 and the right side first design piece 52 and capable of being displaced from a closed state to an open state. The left side second design piece 53 and the right side second design piece 54 includes interlocking projection portions 97, 98 enabling a displacement of the left side second design piece 53 and the right side second design piece 54 from the closed state to the open state, when the left side first design piece 51 and the right side first design piece 52 are displaced from a closed state to an open state, due to an application of an external force to the left side second design piece 53 and the right side second design piece 54 from the left side first design piece 51 and the right side first design piece 52.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing a game ball given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game ball stored in the dish storage section is guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the game balls surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-59585

Here, it is necessary to play games favorably in a gaming machine such as the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preferably performing a game.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball and a predetermined detection means.
A game value-adding means that is electrically connected to the predetermined detection means and executes a process for adding a game value to the game.
A processing execution means that is electrically connected to the game value-adding means and executes a predetermined process,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game value-adding means is
A first reference information storage means for storing reference information, which is information used in the process for imparting the game value and is information referred to for the detection of the predetermined detection means.
The reference stored in the first reference information storage means after the predetermined supply of power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started. A first transmission means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the information to the processing execution means, and
A second transmission means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on the ball entry information, which is information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, to the processing execution means.
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the game suitable.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view of a game board. It is a perspective view of the design unit which shows a part of the structure of the front side and the structure of the back side by disassembling. It is a perspective view of the base body and the upper design piece which is separated from the base body. It is a front view of the design unit shown separately from the game board. It is an end view of the cut surface of the design unit in line AA of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the design unit shown cut in line BB of FIG. (A) is a front view of the upper rear passage forming body, (b) is a rear view of the upper rear passage forming body, and (c) is a left side view of the upper rear passage forming body. (A1)-(d2) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between the flow-down position of a game ball in the upper passage part and the upper rear passage part, and the movement of a design piece. It is a front view of the design unit which shows the state which a plurality of game balls exist at the same time in a passage part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the composition regarding the discharge of the game ball which flowed down in a game area. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the detection result of the ball entry detection sensor input to the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric composition of the payout control device and various devices communicating with the payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the management IC. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of the management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the correspondence memory. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed by the management side CPU. (A) to (d) It is a time chart which shows how the information of the correspondence relation between the 1st to 15th buffers and a signal type is stored in the correspondence relation memory. It is a flowchart which shows the management output processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU. (A) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the data output processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output executed by the management side CPU. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the design unit shown separately from the game board. It is a perspective view of the design unit shown by disassembling. It is a perspective view of the back side of a housing. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of a design unit shown by cutting the rear vicinity of a plate-shaped front part. It is a top view of the design unit. (A) is a front view of the design unit in which the two switching windows are both open, and (b) is a vertical sectional view of the design unit showing the rear vicinity of the plate-shaped front portion in the state. (A) is a front view of the design unit in which the lower switching window portion is open, and (b) is a vertical sectional view of the design unit showing the rear vicinity of the plate-shaped front portion in the state. (A) It is a front view of the design unit in which a game ball is placed on both the upper guide plate portion and the lower guide plate portion, and (b) in this state, the rear vicinity of the plate-shaped front portion is cut. It is a vertical sectional view of the design unit shown. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of the management side I / F in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed by the management side CPU. (A) to (h) It is a time chart which shows how the information of the correspondence relation between the 1st to 12th buffers and a signal type is stored in the correspondence relation memory. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the management IC in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of the management side I / F. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure correspondence processing executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure correspondence processing which is executed by the management side CPU in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing an opportunity specifying process executed by the main CPU in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the trigger identification process which is executed by the main CPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU in 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the history memory in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the MPU of the main control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the main control device in 12th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of the management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor in 13th Embodiment to a main CPU and a management IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the main control device and the voice emission control device in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process which is executed by the sound light side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start processing executed by the main CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the normal counter area, the open / close execution mode counter area, and the high frequency support mode counter area provided in the main RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the check process executed by the main CPU. (A) It is a front view of a special figure display part, (A) it is an explanatory view for explaining the display content of a special figure display part, (b) it is a front view of a general figure display part, and (B) it is normal. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating display contents of a figure display part. It is a flowchart which shows the check waiting process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during display of the check result executed by the main CPU. (A) to (g) are time charts showing how the check waiting period and the check result display period progress. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main CPU. (A)-(j) It is a figure which individually shows the symbol which is variable-displayed by the symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is a figure which shows the display surface of the symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus in the check waiting period or the check result display period. It is a flowchart which shows the check process executed by the main CPU in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during display of the check result executed by the main CPU. (A) to (g) are time charts showing how the check waiting period and the check result display period progress. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port provided in the MPU of the voice light emission control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the corresponding relation area provided in the sound light side ROM. It is a flowchart which shows the management output processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process which is executed by the sound light side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the normal counter area, the open / close execution mode counter area, and the high frequency support mode counter area provided in the sound light side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the sound light side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the check process which is executed in the sound light side CPU. It is a front view of the main control device in 17th Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. It is a front view of the slot machine in 18th Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. It is a front view of a housing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is a front view of the display window part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between the combination of the symbol which becomes a prize, and the privilege given when it becomes a prize. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode established when the lottery table for a normal mode is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 1st RT mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode established when the lottery table for 1st RT mode is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 2nd RT mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode established when the lottery table for 2nd RT mode is selected. It is a flowchart which shows the correspondence process at the end of a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transition chance management process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ART state processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game management process which is executed in the main MPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lighting process which is executed in the main MPU. (A), (b) is a time chart showing the relationship between the opening angle of the front door and the control state of the lighting device. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of the lighting apparatus in the case where the front door is an open state and the opening angle is not more than a predetermined opening angle, and (b) the opening angle of a front door is the maximum opening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of the lighting apparatus in the case of an angle.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. Have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration for the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as to be in a locked state. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. As a guide rail is configured. The game ball B1 launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail. The game ball B1 is made of iron and has a diameter of 11 mm.

Incidentally, the game ball launch mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball B1 stored in the precision plate 111a described later on the launch rail 27a, and a launch rail 27a. It is equipped with a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball B1 supplied above toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball B1 is launched.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and one each is provided for the others.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball B1 is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls B1 are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when one game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 or one game ball B1 enters the second operating port 34. In that case, one prize ball is paid out, and when one game ball B1 is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out and a special electric prize is awarded. When one game ball B1 enters the device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 may be smaller than that in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out opening 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and the game ball B1 that has not entered the various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball B1, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball B1 passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the embodiment in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the game area PA after passing through the opening. It also includes an embodiment in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged from the game area PA. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball B1 into the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate The entry of the game ball B1 into 35 is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first actuating port 33 and the second actuating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a universal electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball B1 cannot win a prize in the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, a prize can be won in the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the game ball B1 in the flow direction with respect to the second operating port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball B1 that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball B1 that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and a normal drawing of the normal drawing unit 38 provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball B1 does not pass. A variable display of the pattern is performed on the display unit 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the electric service opening, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the general electric opening state. In the open state of the normal electric power, the public electric accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The number of the game balls B1 that have won the through gate 35 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the general drawing reservation display unit 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display unit 37a, a winning lottery is performed triggered by a prize in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34, so that a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display unit 37a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed. Is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure hold display unit 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display unit 37a. The number of winning balls B1 in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure holding display unit 37b.

About the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a DRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, when the special symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of upper, middle, and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas, and the numbers "1" to "9" are added to each symbol row. The symbols are scrolled and displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display in all the symbol columns is started first, the scroll display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol column → the lower symbol column → the middle symbol column, and finally the predetermined symbol display is specified in each symbol column. It ends with the symbol still displayed. Then, for example, in a game round in which the game result is a big hit result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset effective line on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first actuating port 33 or the second actuating port 34, but also the display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. Will be. Further, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the game times 1 until the predetermined result is displayed and ended. Equivalent to times. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and may be configured such that only numbers are variablely displayed as the symbol, for example.

If a big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. The special electric winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and is provided with an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball B1 cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball B1 can win a prize when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It is designed to be used. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the transition is made when a hit result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult for the prize to occur than in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 3, game area PAs on which the game ball B1 can flow down are provided on both the left and right sides of the display surface 41a. Of these, the right region PA1 provided on the right side of the display surface 41a is provided with a design unit 44 that opens and closes the design pieces 51 to 54 with the inflow of the game ball B1.

<Structure of design unit 44>
Next, the design unit 44 will be described below.

FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the design unit 44 showing a part of the configuration on the front side and the configuration on the back side in an exploded manner. As shown in FIG. 4, the design unit 44 is fixed to the plate-shaped base body 45, a plurality of passage forming bodies 46 to 48 fixed to the front side of the base body 45, and the back side of the base body 45. It includes a pair of upper and lower rear passage forming bodies 49, 50, and a plurality of design pieces 51 to 54 fixed at positions facing the upper and lower rear passage forming bodies 49, 50 with the base body 45 interposed therebetween.

First, the passage portions 46a to 50a provided on the front side and the back side of the base body 45 will be described below.

FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the base body 45 and the upper design pieces 51 to 54 separated from the base body 45, and FIG. 6 is a front view of the design unit 44 separated from the game board 24. .. As shown in FIG. 5, the base body 45 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape using a transparent resin material such as polycarbonate, and extends in the vertical direction. The horizontal dimension of the base body 45 is approximately 4 times the diameter of the game ball B1 (FIG. 3), and the vertical dimension of the base body 45 is approximately 10 times the diameter of the game ball B1. As shown in FIG. 6, the upper passage forming body 46 in which the upper passage portion 46a (FIG. 4) is formed is fixed to the upper center of the base body 45.

First, the upper passage portion 46a will be described below with reference to FIGS. 4 to 8. 7 is an end view of the cut surface of the design unit 44 along the line AA of FIG. 6, and FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the design unit 44 cut along the line BB of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 4, the upper passage forming body 46 is formed by using a transparent resin material such as polycarbonate, and has a rectangular region 46b and a protruding region 46c protruding downward from the lower portion of the rectangular region 46b. It has an upper front plate portion 46d. On the back surface of the rectangular region 46b of the upper front plate portion 46d, the left peripheral portion is integrally formed by erecting the left peripheral portion, and the right peripheral portion is integrally formed by erecting the right peripheral portion. ..

The left and right plate portions 46e and 46f extend in the vertical direction and face each other in the lateral direction. As a result, in the upper passage forming body 46, the front side, the left side, and the right side are partitioned by the upper front plate portion 46d, the left side plate portion 46e, and the right side plate portion 46f, and the upper passage portion 46a is formed. The upper passage portion 46a extends vertically downward, and is opened upward, downward, and rearward in a state where the upper passage forming body 46 is separated from the base body 45.

Fixing portions 55 and 56 that enable the upper passage forming body 46 to be fixed to the base body 45 are integrally formed on the side surfaces of the left and right plate portions 46e and 46f opposite to the upper passage portion 46a. The left and right fixed portions 55 and 56 project in the direction opposite to the upper passage portion 46a, and extend from an intermediate position slightly behind the upper front plate portion 46d to the same rear position as the left and right plate portions 46e and 46f. is doing. The left side fixing portion 55 provided on the left side plate portion 46e and the right side fixing portion 56 provided on the right side plate portion 46f are paired left and right and have the same horizontal dimension.

The fixing portions 55 and 56 are formed with screw holes (not shown) extending from the back surface to a front intermediate position. Further, in the vicinity of the upper end of the base body 45, a pair of left and right upper fixing holes 45a corresponding to the screw holes formed in the left and right fixing portions 55 and 56 are formed.

As shown in FIG. 6, in the upper passage forming body 46, the fixing portions 55 and 56 are screwed from the rear of the base body 45 in such a manner that the upper end coincides with the upper end of the base body 45, and the front side of the base body 45 is sided. It is fixed to. In this state, the upper passage portion 46a (FIG. 7) is open upward, and the game ball B1 (FIG. 3) flowing down the right side region PA1 (FIG. 3) can flow in.

The rear side of the upper passage portion 46a (FIG. 7) is closed by the base body 45. As shown in FIG. 4, in the region of the front surface of the base body 45 that divides the rear side of the upper passage portion 46a, the game ball B1 (FIG. 3) that flows into the upper passage portion 46a and flows downward. A guide protrusion 45b with the flow position toward the front is integrally formed. The guide protrusion 45b extends from an intermediate position in the height direction of the base body 45 to the same height position as the lower ends of the left and right plate portions 46e and 46f.

As shown in FIG. 4, the lateral dimension of the upper passage portion 46a and the depth dimension of the upper passage portion 46a at the height position where the guide protrusion portion 45b is provided are slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 (FIG. 3). big. Since the guide protrusion 45b is not provided near the upper end of the upper passage portion 46a, the depth dimension near the upper end of the upper passage portion 46a is slightly larger than the depth dimension at the height position where the guide protrusion 45b is provided. The size is large, and the game ball B1 can easily flow into the upper passage portion 46a.

In the entire vertical direction of the upper passage portion 46a, the dimension of the upper passage portion 46a in the direction orthogonal to the passage direction is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 (FIG. 3), and the game ball B1 moves downward in the upper passage portion 46a. It is possible to flow down.

As shown in FIG. 8, on the front side of the base body 45, an upper rear guide portion 57 for guiding the game ball B1 (FIG. 3) to the rear is provided vertically below the upper passage portion 46a. Further, in the base body 45, at the rear position of the upper rear guide portion 57, an upper through hole 58 that penetrates the base body 45 in the front-rear direction and has a substantially rectangular hole cross section is formed.

Next, the upper rear guide portion 57 and the upper through hole 58 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 7, and 8.

As shown in FIG. 8, the upper through hole 58 is formed over the entire lateral direction of the upper passage portion 46a, and the base body 45 is formed from the lower ends of the left and right plate portions 46e and 46f in the upper passage forming body 46. It is formed over a height position approximately in the center of.

As shown in FIG. 5, the upper rear guide portion 57 is a rectangular plate-shaped pedestal extending in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B1 (FIG. 8) flowing down the upper passage portion 46a (FIG. 8). A portion 59 and a rear guide protrusion 61 provided on the upper plane of the pedestal portion 59 are provided. The pedestal portion 59 is provided at a height position at the center of the upper through hole 58, and the left end portion and the right end portion at the rear end of the pedestal portion 59 are the left peripheral portion and the right peripheral portion of the upper through hole 58 in the base body 45. It is integrally formed.

The upper through hole 58 is divided into upper and lower parts by the pedestal portion 59, and the game ball B1 moves to the front and back of the base body 45 in both the region above the pedestal portion 59 and the region below the pedestal portion 59. It has vertical and horizontal dimensions that make it possible.

The rear guide protrusion 61 is provided at a position where it can come into contact with all the game balls B1 flowing vertically downward from the upper passage portion 46a (FIG. 7), and the upper plane of the pedestal portion 59 is projected upward and integrated. It is formed. The rear upper portion of the rear guide protrusion 61 is inclined downward toward the rear, and the front upper portion of the rear guide protrusion 61 is inclined toward the rear more than the front upper portion.

As shown in FIG. 7, the protruding region 46c of the upper front plate portion 46d protrudes to a height position near the upper end of the rear guide protrusion 61, and is slightly forward of the rear guide protrusion 61. .. The gap between the protruding region 46c and the rear guide protrusion 61 makes it impossible for the game ball B1 to pass through. A protruding region 46c exists in front of the game ball B1 that has flowed down to the height position of the upper rear guide portion 57, and the forward movement of the game ball B1 is restricted.

Design pieces 51 and 52 (FIG. 5) that can be opened and closed exist on the left and right sides of the rear guide protrusion 61, and move to the left and right of the game ball B1 that has flowed down to the height position of the upper rear guide portion 57. Movement is restricted. The game ball B1 that cannot move to the left or right is guided backward by the upper rear guide portion 57, and moves to the rear of the base body 45 through the upper through hole 58.

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper rear passage forming body 49 (FIG. 7) in which the upper rear passage portion 49a is formed is fixed at a position facing the upper rear guide portion 57 with the upper through hole 58 interposed therebetween. .. The upper rear passage portion 49a will be described below with reference to FIGS. 4, 5, and 7 to 9. 9 (a) is a front view of the upper rear passage forming body 49, FIG. 9 (b) is a rear view of the upper rear passage forming body 49, and FIG. 9 (c) is a left side of the upper rear passage forming body 49. It is a plan view.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the upper rear passage forming body 49 is formed by using a colored opaque resin material such as ABS resin, and includes a housing portion 49b in which the upper rear passage portion 49a is formed. ing. The housing portion 49b is formed in a box shape opened forward by the back wall portion 49e (FIG. 9B), the upper wall portion 49f, the lower wall portion 49g, the left side wall portion 49j, and the right side wall portion 49i. ing. In the housing portion 49b, the rear side, the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side are partitioned by these five wall portions 49e to 49g, 49i, 49j to form an upper rear passage portion 49a. The upper rear passage portion 49a extends vertically downward, and is opened forward in a state where the upper rear passage forming body 49 is separated from the base body 45.

The left side wall portion 49j and the right side wall portion 49i are integrally formed with a left side fixing portion 49p and a right side fixing portion 49q that enable the upper rear passage forming body 49 to be fixed to the base body 45 (FIG. 4). The left side fixing portion 49p is provided so as to project outward from the left side wall portion 49j, and the right side fixing portion 49q is provided so as to project outward from the right side wall portion 49i. The fixing portions 49p and 49q are formed with fixing through holes 49r and 49s that penetrate the fixing portions 49p and 49q back and forth. Further, a pair of left and right bosses (not shown) are integrally formed at a height position at a substantially center of the upper through hole 58 on the back surface of the base body 45 (FIG. 4) corresponding to the fixing through holes 49r and 49s. There is. The boss is provided on the left and right sides of the upper through hole 58, and the boss is formed with a screw hole (not shown) extending from the back surface to an intermediate position in front of the boss. As shown in FIG. 7, in the upper rear passage forming body 49, the fixing portions 49p and 49q (FIG. 9A) are screwed to the boss from the rear and fixed to the base body 45. In this state, the front ends of the upper wall portion 49f, the lower wall portion 49g, the left side wall portion 49j, and the right side wall portion 49i (FIG. 9A) are in contact with the peripheral edge portion of the upper through hole 58 in the base body 45 from the rear. I'm in contact.

As shown in FIG. 8, the entire area of the upper through hole 58 is continuous with the upper rear passage portion 49a (FIG. 9A). As shown in FIG. 9A, a front guide protrusion 66 for guiding the game ball B1 forward is provided at the lower end of the upper rear passage portion 49a. The front guide protrusion 66 is provided at a position where it can come into contact with all the game balls B1 flowing down the upper rear passage portion 49a, and is integrally formed by projecting the upper plane of the lower wall portion 49g upward.

As shown in FIG. 7, the posterior half of the upper part of the front guide protrusion 66 is inclined downward toward the front, and the front half is inclined downward toward the front, which is smaller than the posterior half. All the game balls B1 flowing down the upper rear passage portion 49a are guided forward by the front guide protrusion 66, and return to the front of the base body 45 through the upper through hole 58. A central passage forming body 47 having a central passage portion 47a into which the game ball B1 returned to the front of the base body 45 flows is fixed at a position facing the front guide protrusion 66 with the upper through hole 58 interposed therebetween. There is.

Next, the central passage portion 47a will be described below with reference to FIGS. 4, 5, 7, and 8.

As shown in FIG. 4, the central passage forming body 47 is formed by using a transparent resin material such as polycarbonate, and has a rectangular region 47b and an upper protruding region 47c protruding upward from the upper portion of the rectangular region 47b. A central front plate portion 47e having a lower protruding region 47d projecting downward from the lower portion of the rectangular region 47b is provided. On the back surface of the central front plate portion 47e, a pair of left and right left section portions 67 and right side section 68 that partition the left side and the right side of the central passage portion 47a are integrally formed.

The left and right compartments 67 and 68 have the same depth dimension as the left and right plate portions 46e and 46f provided in the upper passage forming body 46. The left and right compartments 67 and 68 are formed so as to be laterally spaced apart from each other at predetermined intervals, and the upper protruding region 47c of the central front plate portion 47e from the lower ends of the left and right peripheral edges of the central front plate portion 47e. It extends to a height position near the upper end. The right side surface of the left side section 67 and the left side surface of the right side section 68 extend in the vertical direction, and the two side surfaces face each other in the lateral direction.

In the central passage forming body 47, the front side, the left side, and the right side are partitioned by the central front plate portion 47e, the left partition portion 67, and the right partition portion 68, and the central passage portion 47a is formed. The central passage portion 47a extends vertically downward. Further, the central passage portion 47a is opened upward, downward, and rearward in a state where the central passage forming body 47 is separated from the base body 45.

The horizontal dimensions of the left and right compartments 67 and 68 are substantially the same as the horizontal dimensions of the left and right fixed portions 55 and 56 provided in the upper passage portion 46a. The left side compartment 67 and the right side compartment 68 are formed with screw holes (not shown) extending from the back surface to a front intermediate position.

As shown in FIG. 5, at a height position slightly above the lower end of the upper through hole 58 in the base body 45, corresponding to the screw holes (not shown) formed in the left and right compartments 67 and 68, A pair of left and right central fixing holes 45c are formed. The left and right central fixing holes 45c are formed on the left and right sides of the upper through hole 58, and penetrate the base body 45 back and forth.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the central passage forming body 47, the compartments 67 and 68 (FIG. 4) are screwed from the back surface side of the base body 45 and fixed to the base body 45. In this state, the central passage portion 47a is located vertically below the upper rear guide portion 57, and the upper protruding region 47c of the central front plate portion 47e is provided in the upper rear passage portion 49a with the base body 45 interposed therebetween. It faces the plumb bob protrusion 66.

The gap between the upper protruding region 47c and the upper rear guide portion 57 makes it impossible for the game ball B1 to pass through the gap. The upper protruding region 47c is located in front of the game ball B1 which is guided by the front guiding protrusion 66 and returned to the front of the base body 45.

As shown in FIG. 5, on the front surface of the base body 45, the left outer edge portion and the right outer edge portion below the upper through hole 58 are integrally formed with the left side regulation wall portion 69 and the right side regulation wall portion 71. As shown in FIG. 8, the left and right regulation wall portions 69 and 71 are formed from the front surface of the base body 45 to the front end of the pedestal portion 59, and are formed from the lower end of the pedestal portion 59 to the left and right in the central passage forming body 47. It extends to the upper ends of the compartments 67 and 68.

As shown in FIG. 8, the left and right regulation wall portions 69, 71 and the left and right partition portions 67, 68 are left and right of the game ball B1 which is guided by the front guide protrusion 66 and returns to the front of the base body 45. It exists in the direction. The game ball B1 whose movement to the front, left, and right is restricted flows downward and flows into the central passage portion 47a (FIG. 7).

As shown in FIG. 7, the rear side of the central passage portion 47a is closed by the base body 45. On the front surface of the base body 45, a guide protrusion 45d for guiding the game ball B1 flowing into the central passage portion 47a toward the front is integrally formed in the region partitioning the rear side of the central passage portion 47a.

As shown in FIG. 8, the guide protrusion 45d extends from below the lower end of the upper through hole 58 to a height position near the lower end of the left and right compartments 67 and 68. As shown in FIG. 4, the lateral dimension and the depth dimension of the central passage portion 47a are the same as the lateral dimension and the depth dimension of the upper passage portion 46a already described, and the game ball B1 can flow down the central passage portion 47a. ..

As shown in FIG. 7, the depth dimension in the vicinity of the upper end of the central passage portion 47a is slightly larger than the depth dimension in the lower portion, so that the game ball B1 easily flows into the central passage portion 47a. The game ball B1 flows downward while the flow position is changed to the front by the guide protrusion 45d.

On the front surface of the base body 45, a lower rear guide portion 72 that guides the game ball B1 flowing down the central passage portion 47a to the rear is integrally formed vertically below the central passage portion 47a. The configuration of the lower rear guide portion 72 is the same as the configuration of the upper rear guide portion 57 already described. Due to the presence of the lower rear guide portion 72, the game ball B1 flowing down the central passage portion 47a is guided backward along the inclination of the upper surface of the lower rear guide portion 72.

Here, as described above, the base body 45 is formed by using a transparent resin material. On the front surface of the base body 45, the regions other than the upper and lower rear guide portions 57 and 72 are colored and opaque, and the rear is invisible. On the other hand, the upper and lower rear guide portions 57 and 72 are transparent, and the game ball B1 guided by the rear guide portions 57 and 72 can be visually recognized from the front.

The lower protruding region 47d of the central front plate portion 47e protrudes to a height position near the upper end of the lower rear guide portion 72, and exists at a position slightly forward of the lower rear guide portion 72. The gap between the lower protruding region 47d and the lower rear guide portion 72 makes it impossible for the game ball B1 to pass through. A lower protruding region 47d exists in front of the game ball B1 that has flowed down to the height position of the lower rear guide portion 72, and the forward movement of the game ball B1 is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 7, a lower through hole 73 is formed in the rear position of the lower rear guide portion 72 in the base body 45, and a position facing the lower rear guide portion 72 across the base body 45. The lower rear passage forming body 50 in which the lower rear passage portion 50a is formed is fixed to the. The configuration of the lower through hole 73, the lower rear passage portion 50a, and the lower rear passage forming body 50 is the same as the configuration of the upper through hole 58, the upper rear passage portion 49a, and the upper rear passage forming body 49 described above. Is.

Design pieces 51 and 52 that can be opened and closed exist on the left and right sides of the lower rear guide portion 72, and the game ball B1 discharged from the central passage portion 47a and flowed down to the height position of the lower rear guide portion 72. Movement to the left and right is restricted. As shown in FIG. 7, the game ball B1 that cannot move to the left or right is guided backward by the lower rear guide portion 72 and flows into the lower rear passage portion 50a. The game ball B1 flowing down the lower rear passage portion 50a is guided by the front guide protrusion portion 76 provided at the lower end and returns to the front of the base body 45.

As shown in FIG. 5, the left outer edge portion and the right outer edge portion of the lower portion of the lower through hole 73 are restricted from moving to the left and right of the game ball B1 (FIG. 7) that has returned to the front of the base body 45. The left and right regulation wall portions 77 and 78 are integrally formed. The regulation wall portions 77 and 78 are provided on the left outer edge portion and the right outer edge portion of the lower portion of the upper through hole 58, which have already been described, in that the regulation wall portions 77 and 78 extend to substantially the lower end of the lower through hole 73. , 71 is different. As shown in FIG. 7, the lower passage forming body 48 in which the lower passage portion 48a is formed is fixed at a position facing the front guide protrusion portion 76 with the base body 45 interposed therebetween.

Next, the lower passage portion 48a will be described below with reference to FIGS. 4 and 7.

As shown in FIG. 4, the lower passage forming body 48 is formed by using a transparent resin material such as polycarbonate. The lower passage forming body 48 includes a lower front plate portion 48d having a vertically long rectangular region 48b and an upper protruding region 48c projecting upward from the upper portion of the rectangular region 48b. On the back surface of the lower front plate portion 48d, the left peripheral portion is integrally formed with the left peripheral portion upright, and the right peripheral portion is integrally formed with the right peripheral portion upright.

The left and right plate portions 48e and 48f have the same depth dimension as the left and right plate portions 46e and 46f in the upper passage forming body 46. The left and right plate portions 48e and 48f extend in the vertical direction and face each other in the lateral direction. As a result, in the lower passage forming body 48, the front side, the left side, and the right side are partitioned by the lower front plate portion 48d, the left side plate portion 48e, and the right side plate portion 48f, and the lower passage portion 48a is formed. The lower passage portion 48a extends vertically downward, and is open upward, downward, and rearward in a state where the lower passage forming body 48 is separated from the base body 45.

Fixing portions 79, 81 that enable the lower passage forming body 48 to be fixed to the base body 45 are integrally formed on the side surfaces of the left and right plate portions 48e, 48f opposite to the lower passage portion 48a. The left and right fixed portions 79 and 81 project in the direction opposite to the lower passage portion 48a, and extend from an intermediate position slightly behind the lower front plate portion 48d to the same rear position as the left and right plate portions 48e and 48f. is doing.

The left side fixing portion 79 provided on the left side plate portion 48e and the right side fixing portion 81 provided on the right side plate portion 48f are a pair of left and right, and the left and right fixing portions 55 and 56 provided on the upper passage forming body 46. Has the same horizontal dimensions as. The fixing portions 79 and 81 are formed with screw holes (not shown) extending from the back surface to a front intermediate position.

A pair of left and right lower fixing holes 45e are formed in the vicinity of the lower end of the base body 45 so as to correspond to the screw holes (not shown) provided in the fixing portions 79 and 81. The lower fixing hole 45e penetrates the base body 45 back and forth. In the lower passage forming body 48, the fixing portions 79 and 81 are screwed from the rear of the base body 45 and fixed to the base body 45.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower passage forming body 48 is fixed vertically below the lower rear guide portion 72. The gap between the upper protruding region 48c of the lower front plate portion 48d and the lower rear guide portion 72 prevents the game ball B1 from passing through the gap. The forward movement of the game ball B1 is restricted by the upper protruding region 48c located in front of the game ball B1 guided by the front guide protrusion portion 76. Further, the movement of the game ball B1 to the left and right is restricted by the regulating wall portions 77 and 78 provided on the left and right outer edge portions of the lower through hole 73.

Since the movement of the game ball B1 returning to the front of the base body 45 to the front, left, and right is restricted, the game ball B1 flows into the lower lower passage portion 48a. In a state where the lower passage forming body 48 is fixed to the base body 45, the rear side of the lower passage portion 48a is closed by the base body 45.

The lower passage portion 48a has the same lateral dimension as the lateral dimension of the upper passage portion 46a described above, and also has the same depth dimension as the depth dimension of the upper passage portion 46a in the vicinity of the upper end. The ball B1 can flow down. The game ball B1 is guided vertically downward by the lower passage portion 48a, and then discharged downward.

In the upper passage portion 46a, the upper rear passage portion 49a, the central passage portion 47a, the lower rear passage portion 50a, and the lower passage portion 48a, the passage portions 46a to 50a in the direction orthogonal to the passage direction (horizontal direction). The size of is less than twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and it is impossible for the plurality of game balls B1 to pass through the passage portions 46a to 50a in a state where the plurality of game balls B1 are arranged in the horizontal direction.

As described above, the game ball B1 is configured to pass through the passage portions 46a to 50a provided alternately on the front side and the back side of the base body 45, so that the game ball B1 moves in the front-rear direction at the timing. The downward movement speed of the game ball B1 can be reduced. As a result, the flow time in the passage portions 46a to 48a of the game ball B1 can be extended while suppressing the vertical dimension of the design unit 44. Further, it is possible to suppress the influence of the speed when the game ball B1 enters the upper passage portion 46a and average the flow time of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 6, the upper passage forming body 46, the central passage forming body 47, and the front plate portions 46d, 47e, 48d of the lower passage forming body 48 fixed to the front side of the base body 45 have transparent regions. It is divided into a plurality of regions including one or more, and the plurality of regions are arranged in the horizontal direction. Specifically, in each of the front plate portions 46d, 47e, and 48d, a central region 83 that is transparent and the rear is visible, and a left side region 82 and a right side region 84 that are opaque and the rear is invisible are set. Has been done.

As described above, the passage forming bodies 46 to 48 including the front plate portions 46d, 47e, and 48d are formed by using a transparent resin material. An opaque design 44a is attached to the entire left side region 82 and the right side region 84 of the front plate portions 46d, 47e, 48d, and the game ball B1 passing behind the front plate portions 46d, 47e, 48d can be visually recognized from the front. Area is limited to the central area 83.

The central region 83 covers a part of the game ball B1 passing through the passage portions 46a to 48a from the front in the entire area in the flow direction of the three passage portions 46a to 48a (FIG. 7) provided on the front surface side of the base body 45. It has a horizontal dimension that makes it visible. By making a part of the game ball B1 flowing down the three passage portions 46a to 48a always visible, the player can grasp the movement of the game ball B1 without losing sight of it.

When the entire area of the front plate portions 46d, 47e, and 48d is regarded as a transparent region and the entire game ball B1 passing through the passage portions 46a to 48a is visible from the front, the region where the design 44a can be displayed on the front surface of the design unit 44. Becomes smaller. On the other hand, in the design unit 44 of the present embodiment, the lateral dimension of the central region 83 is suppressed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball B1 (FIG. 7), so that the movement of the game ball B1 can be grasped from the front. The design 44a can also be displayed in the left and right areas 82 and 84.

As shown in FIG. 4, a plurality of design pieces 51 to 54 are fixed on the front side of the base body 45 in a height range substantially the same as the upper and lower rear passage portions 49a and 50a (FIG. 7). .. The configuration of the plurality of design pieces 51 to 54 fixed in the substantially same height range as the lower rear passage portion 50a is such that the plurality of design pieces 51 to fixed in the substantially same height range as the upper rear passage portion 49a. It is the same as the configuration of 54. Hereinafter, a plurality of design pieces 51 to 54 fixed in a height range substantially the same as the upper rear passage portion 49a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 5, the design unit 44 (FIG. 4) has a pair of left and right first rotation shafts 85 fixed to the front surface side of the base body 45 and a mode in which the design unit 44 can be rotated to the first rotation shaft 85. A pair of left and right first design pieces 51 and 52 to be fixed, a pair of left and right second rotation shafts 86 fixed in the vicinity below the left and right first rotation shafts 85, and a second rotation shaft 86 to rotate. It includes a second design piece 53, 54 that is fixed in a possible manner and rotates outside the first design piece 51, 52. Note that FIG. 5 shows only the upper design pieces 51 to 54 and the rotation shafts 85 and 86.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the left side of the left side design pieces 51 and 53 and the right side of the right side design pieces 52 and 54 (the left side and the right side of the design unit 44) are described as the outside, and the left side is described. The right side of the design pieces 51 and 53 and the left side of the right side design pieces 52 and 54 (center side of the design unit 44) are referred to as the inside.

First, the first design pieces 51 and 52 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 4 to 8.

As shown in FIG. 5, the first design pieces 51 and 52 are formed by using a transparent resin material such as polycarbonate. The first design pieces 51 and 52 are provided with an opaque design 44a (FIG. 6) over the entire front surface, and are provided with plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a that make the rear invisible. The left plate-shaped front portion 51a included in the left side first design piece 51 and the right plate-shaped front portion 52a included in the right side first design piece 52 are paired left and right. Note that FIG. 6 omits the illustration of the design 44a.

On the outer upper part of the left and right first design pieces 51, 52, when the first design pieces 51, 52 rotate around the first rotation shaft 85, the plate-shaped front portions 51a, 52a form the upper passage forming body 46. The downward recessed portions 51b and 52b are formed so as to avoid contact with the fixed portions 55 and 56 (FIG. 4) of the above.

On the back surface of the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a, the upright wall portions 51c and 52c are integrally formed by erecting the peripheral portions of the recessed portions 51b and 52b. At the rear ends of the standing wall portions 51c and 52c, fixing portions 87 and 88 that allow the first design pieces 51 and 52 to be fixed around the first rotation shaft 85 are integrally formed.

The fixing portions 87 and 88 include plate-shaped base portions 87a and 88a protruding upward from the rear end of the concave surface of the upright wall portions 51c and 52c, and disk portions 87b and 88b formed on the upper back surface of the base portions 87a and 88a. have. The disk portions 87b and 88b have a predetermined thickness dimension in the front-rear direction, and a first shaft made of metal formed in a columnar shape can be inserted into the disk portions 87b and 88b. Insertion holes 87c and 88c are formed. The first shaft insertion holes 87c and 88c penetrate the base portions 87a and 88a and the disk portions 87b and 88b back and forth.

On the front surface of the base body 45, at a height position substantially equal to the upper end of the upper through hole 58, a pair of left and right rear accommodating portions 45f, 45g capable of accommodating the rear end portions of the left and right first rotating shafts 85 are provided. It is integrally formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a pair of left and right front side accommodating portions 89, 91 capable of accommodating the front end portion of the first rotation shaft 85 are located in the front lower portion of the left and right fixed portions 55, 56 in the upper passage forming body 46. Is integrally formed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the front and rear accommodating portions 45f, 45g, 89, 91 have a predetermined thickness dimension in the front-rear direction and face each other in the front-rear direction. The facing surfaces of the front and rear accommodating portions 45f, 45g, 89, 91 are recessed in a manner capable of accommodating the end portion of the first rotating shaft 85.

The first rotating shaft 85 is accommodated in the base body 45 and the upper passage forming body 46 in such a manner that the rear end portion is housed in the rear side accommodating portion 45f, 45g and the front end portion is accommodated in the front side accommodating portion 89, 91. It is being pinched. The front surfaces of the front accommodating portions 89 and 91 provided in the upper passage forming body 46 are colored and opaque, and the first rotating shaft 85 is invisible from the front.

The left and right first rotation shafts 85 are fixed at equal distances to the left and right from the center of the base body 45 in the lateral direction. The first design pieces 51 and 52 have the first rotation shaft 85 inserted into the first shaft insertion holes 87c and 88c and are fixed to the front surface side of the base body 45, and rotate around the first rotation shaft 85. It is possible.

In the first design pieces 51, 52 fixed around the first rotation shaft 85, the left and right plate-shaped front portions 51a, 52a are closed in front of the upper rear guide portion 57 and the upper rear passage portion 49a, and the design 44a ( In the closed state displaying FIG. 6), the game ball B1 in which the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a are open outward and guided by the upper rear guide portion 57 and the game ball B1 passing through the upper rear passage portion 49a (FIG. 6). 7) can be switched between the open state and the open state where it can be visually recognized from the front. First, the first design pieces 51 and 52 in the closed state will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 6, in the standing wall portions 51c and 52c (FIG. 5), the front surface of the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a is the upper passage forming body 46, the central passage forming body 47, and the lower portion with the base body 45 as a reference. It has a depth dimension that allows it to exist at substantially the same front position as the front plate portions 46d, 47e, and 48d of the passage forming body 48. In a state where the first design pieces 51 and 52 are fixed around the first rotation shaft 85 (FIG. 5), the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a extend in the vertical direction parallel to the front surface of the base body 45. ..

The plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a extend to a height position in the middle of the central passage forming body 47. An upward lower recessed portion 92 is formed in the inner lower portion of the left and right plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a so as to avoid the upper protruding region 47c in the central front plate portion 47e. The lower recessed portion 92 is formed along the peripheral edge of the central front plate portion 47e. At the height position except near the lower end of the lower recessed portion 92, the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a are inclined outward, and at the height position near the lower end of the lower recessed portion 92, the plate-shaped front portion is formed. 51a and 52a extend in the vertical direction.

A downward upper recessed portion 93 is formed on the inner upper portion of the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a so as to avoid the protruding region 46c of the upper front plate portion 46d. The upper recessed portion 93 is formed along the peripheral edge portion of the protruding region 46c. The upper recessed portion 93 is provided so that the inner upper portion of the left and right plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a is inclined downward toward the inside.

In the left and right plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a, the inner side portions 94 and 95 connecting the lower end of the upper recessed portion 93 provided in the inner upper portion and the upper end of the lower recessed portion 92 provided in the inner lower portion extend in the vertical direction. It exists. The inner side portions 94 and 95 of the left and right plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a are close to each other at the center front of the upper rear passage portion 49a. Therefore, when the first design pieces 51 and 52 are in the closed state, substantially the entire upper rear guide portion 57 and the upper rear passage portion 49a are invisible from the front.

As shown in FIG. 5, the first design pieces 51 and 52 are in contact with the game ball B1 (FIG. 7), and in order to shift the first design pieces 51 and 52 from the contacted game ball B1 to the open state. It is provided with rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d for obtaining a required force. The rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d are integrally formed by erecting the peripheral edge portion on the back surface side of the upper recessed portion 93 (FIG. 6) in the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a. The left and right rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d are inclined downward inward, similarly to the peripheral edge portion of the upper recessed portion 93.

At the inner lower end of the left and right rotating standing wall portions 51d and 52d, the rod-shaped contact portion 51e that contacts the game ball B1 guided by the upper rear guide portion 57 and keeps the first design pieces 51 and 52 open. , 52e are integrally formed. The left rod-shaped contact portion 51e provided on the left first design piece 51 extends slightly behind the front end of the upper rear passage portion 49a (FIG. 7), and the right side provided on the right first design piece 52. The rod-shaped contact portion 52e extends slightly rearward from the center of the upper rear passage portion 49a.

At the rear ends of the left and right rod-shaped contact portions 51e and 52e, a plate-shaped rear portion in which the game ball B1 contacts the game ball B1 passing through the upper rear passage portion 49a to keep the first design pieces 51 and 52 open. The contact portions 51f and 52f are integrally formed. Since the right rod-shaped contact portion 52e has a larger length than the left rod-shaped contact portion 51e, the left rear contact portion 51f provided on the left rod-shaped contact portion 51e has an upper rear passage portion 49a (FIG. 7). ) Is present in approximately half of the front side, and the right rear contact portion 52f provided in the right rod-shaped contact portion 52e is present in approximately half of the rear side of the upper rear passage portion 49a. That is, the left side first design piece 51 and the right side first design piece 52 have the same or substantially the same position in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 on the front surface thereof, whereas the left rear contact portion 51f and the right rear contact portion The 52f has a positional relationship shifted back and forth in the upper rear passage portion 49a.

In the region extending from the left rotating standing wall portion 51d to the left rear contact portion 51f, when the left first design piece 51 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 8, from the upper left corner of the upper rear passage portion 49a to the lower right. The tip of the left rear contact portion 51f is on the right side of the lateral center of the upper rear passage portion 49a and exists at a position behind the upper rear guide portion 57. Further, the left rear contact portion 51f is located at a position displaced rearward by the length dimension of the left rod-shaped contact portion 51e with respect to the left rotation standing wall portion 51d. As a result, the left-side rotating upright wall portion 51d exists in front of the front surface of the base body 45, that is, in the region where the upper passage portion 46a is extended downward, while the left-side rear contact portion 51f is the base. It enters behind the front surface of the body 45, that is, in the upper rear passage portion 49a.

In the region extending from the right-side rotating standing wall portion 52d to the right rear contact portion 52f, when the right first design piece 52 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 8, from the upper right corner of the upper rear passage portion 49a to the lower left. The tip of the right rear contact portion 52f extends toward the left side of the lateral center of the upper rear passage portion 49a and exists at a position behind the upper rear guide portion 57. Further, the right rear contact portion 52f is located at a position displaced rearward by the length dimension of the right rod-shaped contact portion 52e with respect to the right rotating upright wall portion 52d. As a result, the right-side rotating upright wall portion 52d exists in front of the front surface of the base body 45, that is, in the region where the upper passage portion 46a is extended downward, while the right-side rear contact portion 52f is the base. It enters behind the front surface of the body 45, that is, in the upper rear passage portion 49a.

As described above, the region extending from the left rotating standing wall portion 51d to the left rear contact portion 51f and the region extending from the right rotating standing wall portion 52d to the right rear contact portion 52f are present, so that the first design piece When the 51 and 52 are in the closed state, the left rear contact portion 51f and the right rear contact portion 52f are in a state of intersecting in a front view in a positional relationship shifted back and forth. In this case, the left rotating upright wall portion 51d and the right side rotating upright wall portion 52d are the end portion on the left rear contact portion 51f side and the right rear contact portion 52f side when the first design pieces 51 and 52 are in the closed state. The end portion of the ball is located above the rear guide protrusion 61, and the distance between these ends is less than the diameter of the game ball B1, and more specifically, the radius or less. Further, the distance from the upper passage portion 46a to the end portion of the left rotation standing wall portion 51d on the left rear contact portion 51f side with respect to the lateral center position of the passage region extending from the upper passage portion 46a to the rear guide protrusion 61, and the right rotation. The distance to the end on the right rear contact portion 52f side of the moving standing wall portion 52d is the same or substantially the same. Further, the game ball B1 flowing down the upper passage portion 46a is restricted to a position closer to the front by the guide protrusion portion 45b provided on the upper passage portion 46a, and the plate surface and the right rotation of the left rotation standing wall portion 51d. The plate surface of the moving standing wall portion 52d extends to the rear of the position of the center of gravity of the game ball B1 flowing down the front position. Further, the lateral dimension of the passage region extending from the upper passage portion 46a to the rear guide protrusion 61 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball B1, but smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball B1. , More specifically, it is set to a size smaller than 1.5 times. With the above configuration, regardless of the position of the game ball B1 in the lateral direction in the passage area, the game ball B1 moves backward as it moves toward the rear guide protrusion 61. Before coming into contact with the guide protrusion 61, the plate surface of the left rotating upright wall portion 51d and the plate surface of the right side rotating upright wall portion 52d are in contact with each other from above. Further, both the plate surface of the left-side rotating upright wall portion 51d and the plate surface of the right-side rotating upright wall portion 52d are inclined downward toward the center in the lateral direction of the passage region, and the inclination angle thereof is further. Although they are symmetrical, they are the same or almost the same. Therefore, the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the plate surface of the left rotating upright wall portion 51d and the plate surface of the right side rotating upright wall portion 52d from above is guided to the center in the lateral direction of the passage region.

Although the details will be described later, in the initial state where the game ball B1 is not in contact, the first design pieces 51 and 52 are arranged in the closed state, but the plate surface of the left side rotating upright wall portion 51d and the right side rotating upright wall. When the game ball B1 comes into contact with the plate surface of the portion 52d from above, the first design pieces 51 and 52 rotate outward toward the open state. In this case, as described above, the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the plate surface of the left rotating standing wall portion 51d and the plate surface of the right rotating standing wall portion 52d from above is guided to the center in the lateral direction of the passage region. It will be. When the game ball B1 flows down in the center in the lateral direction, the game ball B1 determines the distance between the position where the game ball B1 abuts on the plate surface of the left rotating standing wall portion 51d and the center of gravity of the game ball B1. The distance between the position of the right-side rotating standing wall portion 52d in contact with the plate surface and the center of gravity of the game ball B1 is the same or substantially the same. Therefore, the external force from the game ball B1 is evenly applied to the plate surface of the left side rotating upright wall portion 51d and the plate surface of the right side rotating upright wall portion 52d, and the left side first design piece 51 and the right side first design piece 52 Will rotate outward in a symmetrical manner.

By being pushed by the downward movement of the game ball B1 and rotating outward toward the position where the first design pieces 51 and 52 are in the open state, the game ball B1 is directed toward the rear guide protrusion 61. It moves and rests on the rear guide protrusion 61 while maintaining a state of being in contact with the plate surface of the left rotating upright wall portion 51d and the plate surface of the right side rotating upright wall portion 52d. The game ball B1 mounted on the rear guide protrusion 61 moves backward by flowing down a downward slope toward the rear on the upper surface of the rear guide protrusion 61. With this backward movement, the contact target of the game ball B1 is the left side rod-shaped contact portion 51e and the right side rod-shaped contact portion 52e from the plate surface of the left rotating upright wall portion 51d and the plate surface of the right side rotating upright wall portion 52d. In the situation where it flows into the upper rear passage portion 49a, it changes to the plate surface of the left rear contact portion 51f and the plate surface of the right rear rear contact portion 52f. Then, the game ball B1 flows vertically downward through the upper rear passage portion 49a while maintaining the state of being in contact with the plate surface of the left rear contact portion 51f and the plate surface of the right rear contact portion 52f. The state in which the game ball B1 is in contact with the tip of the left rear contact portion 51f and the tip of the right rear contact portion 52f is the open state of the first design pieces 51 and 52.

When the first design pieces 51 and 52 rotate outward from the open position, the left side wall portion 49j and the right side wall portion 49i of the upper rear passage forming body 49 (FIG. 9A). Further rotation is restricted by contacting with. As a result, even if the game ball B1 vigorously contacts the first design pieces 51 and 52, the outward rotation position of the first design pieces 51 and 52 can be limited to a predetermined position.

The game ball B1 flowing down the upper rear passage portion 49a is located below the upper rear guide portion 57 and above the front guide protrusion 66, and has a plate surface and a right rear contact portion of the left rear contact portion 51f. It will not come into contact with the plate surface of 52f. When the first design pieces 51 and 52 are not in contact with each other, the external force of the game ball B1 is not applied to the first design pieces 51 and 52. Therefore, the first design pieces 51 and 52 return to the closed state by the urging force described later. Will be done. Then, the rotation of the first design pieces 51 and 52 toward the closed state is restricted by abutting from the outside on the central passage forming body 47 fixed to the base body 45. This regulated position is the closed position.

Next, the second design pieces 53 and 54 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 5, 6 and 8.

As shown in FIG. 5, the second design pieces 53 and 54 are formed by using a colored opaque resin material such as ABS resin, and are substantially square with an opaque design 44a (FIG. 6) on the front surface. It is provided with columnar main body portions 53a and 54a. At the upper rear end of the main body portions 53a and 54a, fixing portions 53c and 54c in which the second shaft insertion holes 53b and 54b through which the second rotation shaft 86 can be inserted are formed are integrally formed. The fixing portions 53c and 54c have a predetermined thickness dimension in the front-rear direction, and the second shaft insertion holes 53b and 54b penetrate the fixing portions 53c and 54c back and forth.

The second rotation shaft 86 is made of metal and has a columnar barrel shaft portion 86a and a disk-shaped head portion 86b provided at one end of the barrel shaft portion 86a and having a diameter larger than that of the barrel shaft portion 86a. It is equipped with. In the base body 45, the left and right second rotating shafts 86 can be fixed in the lower vicinity of the pair of left and right rear accommodating portions 45f, 45g in which the rear end portions of the left and right first rotating shafts 85 are accommodated. A pair of left and right second shaft fixing portions 45h and 45i are integrally formed.

The second shaft fixing portions 45h and 45i project to the front and rear of the base body 45, and are formed in a disk shape in the front and rear of the base body 45. The forward protrusion dimension of the second shaft fixing portions 45h and 45i is set to be smaller than the thickness dimension of the rear accommodating portions 45f and 45g. In the body shaft portion 86a of the second rotating shaft 86, a screw thread is formed at the end opposite to the head head 86b, and the second shaft fixing portions 45h and 45i have screws corresponding to the screw thread. Holes 45j and 45k are formed. The screw holes 45j and 45k are formed from the front surface to the vicinity of the back surface of the second shaft fixing portions 45h and 45i.

The second rotating shaft 86 is screw-fixed to the second shaft fixing portions 45h and 45i from the front surface side of the base body 45. In the second design pieces 53, 54, the barrel shaft portion 86a of the second rotation shaft 86 is inserted into the second shaft insertion holes 53b, 54b and fixed around the second rotation shaft 86, and the second rotation is performed. It can rotate around the shaft 86. A washer 96 is inserted between the fixed portions 53c and 54c of the second design pieces 53 and 54 and the head portion 86b of the second rotation shaft 86, and is accompanied by the rotation of the second design pieces 53 and 54. Therefore, the possibility that the second rotation shaft 86 rotates is reduced.

After the second design pieces 53, 54 are fixed, the first design pieces 51, 52 are fixed in front of the second design pieces 53, 54, so that the second design pieces 53, 54 have a plate-shaped front portion 51a. , 52a and the base body 45 are in a state of being present. In this state, the fixing portions 87, 88 and the plate-shaped front portions 51a, 52a of the first design pieces 51, 52 are present in front of the second rotation shaft 86, and the second rotation shaft 86 is from the front. It is invisible.

Interlocking protrusions 97, 98 that enable the second design pieces 53, 54 to rotate in conjunction with the first design pieces 51, 52 are integrally formed on the inner upper portion of the second design pieces 53, 54. ing. The interlocking protrusions 97, 98 are in contact with the plate-shaped bases 97a, 98a extending inward and upward from the main bodies 53a, 54a, and the end portions of the bases 97a, 98a opposite to the main bodies 53a, 54a. The parts 97b and 98b are provided.

The base portions 97a and 98a are provided at the rear ends of the main body portions 53a and 54a, and the contact portions 97b and 98b stand upright from the front surface of the base portions 97a and 98a. The left side contact portion 97b provided on the left side second design piece 53 and the right side contact portion 98b provided on the right side second design piece 54 are attached to the left side rotating upright wall portion 51d and the right side rotating upright wall portion 52d from the outside. Are in contact.

As shown in FIG. 8, in the situation where the first design pieces 51 and 52 are in the closed state, the main body portions 53a and 54a extend to substantially the same height position as the left and right compartment portions 67 and 68 in the central passage forming body 47. It exists. Upward recesses 53d and 54d (FIG. 5) are formed in the lower portion of the main bodies 53a and 54a on the back surface side to prevent the main bodies 53a and 54a from coming into contact with the compartments 67 and 68.

As shown in FIG. 6, the outer peripheral peripheral portions 99 and 101 of the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a in the first design pieces 51 and 52 extend in the vertical direction. The main body portions 53a, 54a of the second design piece 53, 54 project outward. Most of the main body portions 53a and 54a overlap with the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a from the rear, and cannot be visually recognized from the front. On the other hand, the outer lower portion of the main body portions 53a and 54a protrudes outward from the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a, and the design 44a attached to the outer lower portion can be visually recognized from the front.

A hemispherical protrusion (not shown) that reduces the contact area between the second design piece 53, 54 and the base body 45 is integrally formed on the back surface of the outer lower portion of the main body portions 53a, 54a. By limiting the contact range between the main body portions 53a and 54a and the base body 45 to the protrusions, the friction generated between the second design pieces 53 and 54 rotating around the second rotation shaft 86 and the base body 45. The force is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 5, the volume of the interlocking protrusions 97 and 98 is set to be smaller than the volume of the main bodies 53a and 54a, and the weight of the interlocking protrusions 97 and 98 is smaller than the weight of the main bodies 53a and 54a. It's getting smaller. As shown in FIG. 8, the interlocking protrusions 97 and 98 are inclined so that the main body portions 53a and 54a do not exist inside the second rotation shaft 86 when the first design pieces 51 and 52 are in the closed state. It has corner and length dimensions. With these configurations, the center of gravity of the second design piece 53, 54 is set to the outside of the second rotation shaft 86.

When the first design pieces 51 and 52 rotate outward to be in the open state, an outward force is applied from the rotating standing wall portions 51d and 52d to the interlocking protrusions 97 and 98. In this case, the second design pieces 53 and 54 also open outward in conjunction with the first design pieces 51 and 52. At this time, the center of gravity of the second design pieces 53 and 54 further moves outward.

The center of gravity of the second design pieces 53, 54 is always located outside the second rotation shaft 86, and the gravity acting on the second design pieces 53, 54 always turns the second design pieces 53, 54 inward. It acts to move. As described above, the interlocking protrusions 97 and 98 of the second design pieces 53 and 54 are in contact with the rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d of the first design pieces 51 and 52 from the outside. Therefore, an inward force is always applied to the first design pieces 51 and 52 from the second design pieces 53 and 54. Specifically, the inward force is applied in the upper right direction from the interlocking protrusions 97 and 98 that are in contact with the left rotating upright wall portion 51d, and is in contact with the right rotating upright wall portion 52d. A force is applied in the upper left direction from the interlocking protrusions 97 and 98.

Here, the torsional moment generated around the first rotation shaft 85 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 6 and 8.

As shown in FIG. 8, when the first design pieces 51 and 52 are not in contact with the game ball B1, the twisting moment due to gravity acting on the first design pieces 51 and 52 and the twisting moment around the first rotation shaft 85 and A torsional moment is generated by the force applied from the interlocking protrusions 97 and 98 to the rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the torsional moment due to gravity acting on the first design pieces 51 and 52 is described as the torsional moment due to the first design pieces 51 and 52, and the rotating upright wall portion 51d from the interlocking protrusions 97 and 98. The torsional moment due to the force applied to 52d is referred to as the interlocking torsional moment.

Most of the first design pieces 51 and 52 are located inside the first rotation shaft 85 to which the first design pieces 51 and 52 are fixed, and the center of gravity of the first design pieces 51 and 52 is the first. It exists inside the rotation shaft 85. Since the gravity of the first design pieces 51 and 52 acts downward, the torsional moment by the first design pieces 51 and 52 causes the first design pieces 51 and 52 to rotate outward.

The contact points between the interlocking protrusions 97 and 98 and the rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d exist inside the left and right first rotating shafts 85. Further, as already described, an inward force is always applied to the rotating standing wall portions 51d and 52d of the first design pieces 51 and 52 from the interlocking protrusions 97 and 98 of the second design pieces 53 and 54. Therefore, the interlocking torsional moment attempts to rotate the first design pieces 51 and 52 inward opposite to the torsional moment by the first design pieces 51 and 52.

In the design unit 44 of the present embodiment, the shapes of the first design pieces 51, 52 and the second design pieces 53, 54 are adjusted so that the twisting moment for interlocking is larger than the twisting moment by the first design pieces 51, 52. Has been done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, by suppressing the depth dimension of the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a in the first design pieces 51 and 52, the weight of the first design pieces 51 and 52 is reduced, and the weight of the first design pieces 51 and 52 is reduced. 1 The torsional moment due to the design pieces 51 and 52 is reduced.

As described above, the position of the center of gravity of the second design piece 53, 54 is set outside the second rotation shaft 86 by adjusting the inclination angle and the length dimension of the interlocking protrusions 97, 98. In this configuration, by setting a large distance between the plate-shaped front portions 51a, 52a and the base body 45, the main body portion 53a, in which most of the plate-shaped front portions 51a, 52a and the base body 45 are accommodated, It is possible to set a large depth dimension of 54a. By increasing the volume of the second design piece 53, 54, the gravity acting on the second design piece 53, 54 is increased.

With the above configuration, the torsional moment for interlocking is increased and becomes larger than the torsional moment by the first design pieces 51 and 52. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, when the first design pieces 51 and 52 are not in contact with the game ball B1 (FIG. 8), the first design pieces 51 and 52 rotate inward and are closed. Become. At this time, the second design pieces 53 and 54, which apply an inward force to the first design pieces 51 and 52, are also closed in conjunction with each other.

When the game ball B1 (FIG. 8) comes into contact with the rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d, a force newly applied from the game ball B1 to the rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d is applied around the first rotation shaft 85. A torsional moment is generated. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the twisting moment will be referred to as a twisting moment due to the game ball B1.

As described above, the contact positions between the game ball B1 and the rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d are inside the first rotating shaft 85. The twisting moment due to the game ball B1 attempts to rotate the first design pieces 51 and 52 outward. The torsional moment acts in the same direction as the torsional moment by the first design pieces 51 and 52, and also acts in the opposite direction to the interlocking torsional moment.

In the design unit 44 of the present embodiment, the second design pieces 53 and 54 have a sum of the twisting moment of the game ball B1 and the twisting moment of the first design pieces 51 and 52 larger than the twisting moment for interlocking. The distance from the contact position between the material and the rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d of the game ball B1 to the first rotating shaft 85 is adjusted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, by fixing the left and right first rotation shafts 85 apart from the flow position of the game ball B1 to the left and right, the rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d of the game ball B1 are formed. The distance from the contact position of the first rotation shaft 85 to the first rotation shaft 85 is set to be long. As a result, the torsional moment due to the game ball B1 is increased. Further, while the game ball B1 is made of iron, the second design pieces 53 and 54 are made of resin having a smaller specific gravity than iron, so that the twisting moment for interlocking with the twisting moment of the game ball B1 is increased. It's getting smaller.

With the above configuration, the sum of the torsional moment due to the game ball B1 and the torsional moment due to the first design pieces 51 and 52 is larger than the torsional moment for interlocking. Therefore, when the game ball B1 comes into contact with the rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d, the first design pieces 51 and 52 rotate outward and are in the open state. Further, the second design pieces 53 and 54 rotate outward while interlocking with the first design pieces 51 and 52 to be in the open state.

In the design unit 44 of the present embodiment, the force of the design pieces 51 to 54 to return to the closed state due to their own weight is guided to the rear guide portion while contacting the left and right rod-shaped contact portions 51e and 52e. The shapes and sizes of the second design pieces 53 and 54 are adjusted so as not to interfere with the movement and the movement of the game ball B1 flowing down the upper rear passage portion 49a while in contact with the left and right rear contact portions 51f and 52f. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the outward protrusion dimension of the second design piece 53, 54 is suppressed. As a result, the weight of the second design piece 53, 54 is suppressed, and the center of gravity of the second design piece 53, 54 is set closer to the second rotation shaft 86.

When the first design pieces 51 and 52 are returned to the closed state only by the first design pieces 51 and 52 without using the second design pieces 53 and 54, the center of gravity of the first design pieces 51 and 52 in the closed state is used. Must be present at the same position as the first rotation shaft 85 in the lateral direction, or outside the first rotation shaft 85. In this case, the first design pieces 51 and 52 have a large volume on the outside of the first rotation shaft 85.

On the other hand, in the design unit 44 of the present embodiment, the second design pieces 53 and 54 are used, and the second design pieces 53 and 54 are arranged between the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a and the base body 45. By doing so, it is possible to return the first design pieces 51, 52 and the second design pieces 53, 54 to the closed state while suppressing the lateral dimension of the design unit 44.

Here, how the first design pieces 51, 52 and the second design pieces 53, 54 operate with the flow of the game ball B1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (a1) to 10 (d2). 10 (a1) to 10 (d2) are explanatory views for explaining the correspondence between the flow position of the game ball B1 in the upper passage portion 46a and the upper rear passage portion 49a and the movement of the design pieces 51 to 54. be.

As shown in FIGS. 10 (a1) and 10 (a2), the game ball B1 flowing down the upper passage portion 46a comes into contact with the left and right rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d before coming into contact with the upper rear guide portion 57. do. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10 (b1) and 10 (b2), the game ball B1 moves downward to the upper rear guide portion 57 while in contact with the left and right rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d. In this case, the left and right rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d rotate outward as the left and right first design pieces 51 and 52 receive an external force from the game ball B1, and the left and right rotating upright wall portions 51d, The left and right interlocking protrusions 97 and 98 are pushed outward by the 52d, so that the left and right second design pieces 53 and 54 rotate outward. Further, the tilt angle and the length dimension in the tilt direction of the left and right rotating standing wall portions 51d and 52d are left-sided rotating standing when the game ball B1 flows down to a height position guided by the upper rear guide portion 57. Until the entire game ball B1 exists between the lower end of the wall portion 51d and the lower end of the right-side rotating standing wall portion 52d, and substantially the entire upper rear passage portion 49a becomes visible from the front. The left and right first design pieces 51 and 52 and the left and right second design pieces 53 and 54 are set to be in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 10 (b2), in a situation where the game ball B1 is in contact with the upper rear guide portion 57, the entire game ball B1 is present between the left and right rod-shaped contact portions 51e and 52e. In this situation, the first design pieces 51, 52 and the second design pieces 53, 54 are in the open state, and the height positions of the rod-shaped contact portions 51e and 52e are guided by the upper rear guide portion 57. It is almost the same as the height position of the center of gravity of. As shown in FIGS. 10 (c1) and 10 (c2), the game ball B1 is guided by the upper rear guide portion 57 and moves backward while being in contact with the left and right rod-shaped contact portions 51e and 52e. In this process, the left and right rod-shaped contact portions 51e and 52e rotate inward, that is, the left and right first design pieces 51 and 52 and the second design pieces 53 and 54 rotate in the direction of returning to the closed state. Is blocked by the game ball B1 existing between the left and right rod-shaped contact portions 51e and 52e. Therefore, the open state of the first design piece 51, 52 and the second design piece 53, 54 is continued until the game ball B1 flows into the upper rear passage portion 49a. As described above, in the open state, the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a do not exist in front of the upper rear guide portion 57, and the player visually recognizes the game ball B1 guided to the upper rear passage portion 49a from the front. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 10 (d1) and 10 (d2), the game ball B1 that has flowed into the upper rear passage portion 49a flows downward while in contact with the left and right rear contact portions 51f and 52f. In this process, the left and right rear contact portions 51f and 52f rotate inward, that is, the left and right first design pieces 51 and 52 and the second design pieces 53 and 54 rotate in the direction of returning to the closed state. Is blocked by the game ball B1 existing between the left and right rear contact portions 51f and 52f. The rear contact portions 51f and 52f have a length dimension in which the contact state between the game ball B1 and the rear contact portions 51f and 52f is eliminated while the game ball B1 is being guided to the front guide protrusion 66. Therefore, the first design pieces 51 and 52 and the second design pieces 53 and 54 are kept open until the game ball B1 reaches the height position of the forward guide protrusion 66. As described above, in the open state, the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a do not exist in front of the upper rear passage portion 49a, and the player visually recognizes the game ball B1 flowing down the upper rear passage portion 49a from the front. can do.

After that, when the contact state between the game ball B1 and the rear contact portions 51f and 52f is canceled, the force for maintaining the open state of the first design pieces 51 and 52 and the second design pieces 53 and 54 is lost. Will be. In this case, the first design pieces 51 and 52 are pushed inward from the second design pieces 53 and 54 arranged on the outside and rotate inward, and the second design pieces 53 and 54 also rotate inward accordingly. Rotate inward. Then, the first design pieces 51, 52 and the second design pieces 53, 54 are returned to the closed positions. As described above, the game ball B1 guided by the front guide protrusion 66 and returning to the front of the base body 45 is visible from the central region 83 set in the central front plate portion 47e. Therefore, even if the first design pieces 51, 52 and the second design pieces 53, 54 return to the closed state while the game ball B1 is being guided to the front guide protrusion 66, the game ball B1 can be visually recognized from the front. There is no timing that makes it impossible. The player can always visually recognize at least a part of the game ball B1 and can grasp the movement of the game ball B1.

As described above, a pair of left and right first design pieces 51 and 52 and a pair of left and right second design pieces 53 and 54 are provided at the front position of the lower rear passage portion 50a. As shown in FIG. 4, the configurations of the first design pieces 51, 52 and the second design pieces 53, 54 provided in front of the lower rear passage portion 50a are such that the first design pieces 51, 52 and the second design pieces 53, 54 are provided in front of the upper rear passage portion 49a. The configuration is the same as that of the first design piece 51, 52 and the second design piece 53, 54. The description of the front configuration of the lower rear passage portion 50a will be omitted.

A case where the game ball B1 flows down from the upper passage portion 46a to the lower passage portion 48a will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, when one game ball B1 flows into the upper passage portion 46a, the game ball B1 flows down the upper passage portion 46a and comes into contact with the rotating standing wall portions 51d and 52d, and then the upper rear portion. The design pieces 51 to 54 existing in front of the upper rear passage portion 49a are in an open state until they come into contact with the front guide protrusion 66 of the passage portion 49a (FIG. 9A). The design pieces 51 to 54 return to the closed state while the game ball B1 is guided by the front guide protrusion 66.

After that, from the time when the game ball B1 flowing down the central passage portion 47a comes into contact with the rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d until it comes into contact with the front guide protrusion portion 76 of the lower rear passage portion 50a (FIG. 5), the lower part is lowered. The design pieces 51 to 54 existing in front of the side rear passage portion 50a are in the open state. The design pieces 51 to 54 return to the closed state while the game ball B1 is guided by the front guide protrusion 76. At least a part of the game ball B1 is always visible from the front until the game ball B1 flowing into the upper passage portion 46a is discharged from the lower passage portion 48a.

By arranging the design pieces 51 to 54 capable of switching between the closed state and the open state at a plurality of locations of the passage portions 46a to 50a (FIG. 7), the design pieces 51 to 54 can be passed by one game ball B1. The opening / closing operation can be generated multiple times. By frequently changing the front surface of the design unit 44, the design unit 44 can attract the attention of the player.

A situation may occur in which a plurality of game balls B1 are simultaneously present in the passage portions 46a to 50a (FIG. 7) of the design unit 44. For example, the first game ball B1 (FIG. 8) comes into contact with the rotating upright wall portions 51d, 52d (FIG. 8) of the upper first design pieces 51, 52, and the first design pieces 51, 52 are opened. The first design in which the second game ball B1 is in the open state before the first game ball B1 reaches the front guide protrusion 66 (FIG. 8) of the upper rear passage portion 49a after the state is reached. A situation may occur in which the pieces 51 and 52 come into contact with the rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d. In this case, one or more game balls B1 exist between the left and right first design pieces 51 and 52 until the second game ball B1 reaches the front guide protrusion 66 of the upper rear passage portion 49a. Since it is in the open state, the open state of the first design pieces 51 and 52 is continued.

A situation may occur in which different game balls B1 are in contact with the upper and lower first design pieces 51 and 52. FIG. 11 is a front view of the design unit 44 showing a state in which a plurality of game balls B1 are simultaneously present in the passage portions 46a to 50a. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11, the upper and lower design pieces 51 to 54 are opened at the same time. The design unit 44 in the present embodiment can always make at least a part of the game ball B1 visible from the front for all the game balls B1 passing through the passage portions 46a to 50a (FIG. 7).

As shown in FIG. 3, a pair of left and right design members 105 are provided on the left side and the right side of the design unit 44. The design member 105 includes a design portion 105b (FIG. 11) having the design 105a on the front surface, and a support portion 105c (FIG. 11) that supports the design portion 105b in front of the game board 24. Note that FIG. 11 omits the illustration of the design 105a.

The support portion 105c (FIG. 11) is screwed to the game board 24 from the back side of the game board 24 and is fixed to the vicinity of the upper left and the vicinity of the upper right of the design unit 44. The support portion 105c projects from the front surface of the game board 24 to a position forward of the front surface of the design unit 44. The design portion 105b (FIG. 11) is provided at the front end of the support portion 105c, and extends vertically downward to a position substantially the same height as the lower end of the design unit 44.

As shown in FIG. 3, when the design pieces 51 to 54 of the design unit 44 are in the closed state, the entire design pieces 51 to 54 are housed inside the left and right design portions 105b (FIG. 11). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, when the design pieces 51 to 54 are in the open state, a part of the outside of the opened design pieces 51 to 54 is hidden behind the design portion 105b and cannot be visually recognized. As described above, by inclining the rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d, the amount of rotation of the first design pieces 51 and 52 when shifting from the closed state to the open state is suppressed. As a result, the area of the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a, which are hidden behind the design portion 105b and cannot be visually recognized in the open state, is reduced. As shown in FIG. 3, by arranging the design unit 44 and the design member 105 side by side in the right side area PA1, a wide area in which the designs 44a and 105a (FIGS. 3 and 6) can be always displayed is secured. There is. This makes it possible to enhance the appearance decoration of the game board 24 while avoiding the game ball B1 from becoming invisible from the front.

As shown in FIG. 6, unit fixing bosses 102 that enable the design unit 44 to be fixed to the game board 24 are integrally formed at the four corners of the back surface of the base body 45. Screw holes (not shown) are formed in the four unit fixing bosses 102 from the back surface to the front halfway position. In the front surface of the game board 24 (FIG. 3), the configuration on the back side of the design unit 44 (base body 45, rear passage forming bodies 49, 50, and unit fixing boss 102) is provided in the right side region PA1 (FIG. 3). A recessed portion (not shown) that can be accommodated is provided.

As shown in FIG. 3, in the design unit 44, the unit fixing boss 102 (FIG. 6) is screwed from the back side of the game board 24 in a state where the configuration on the back side is housed in the recessed portion (not shown). As a result, it is fixed to the front side of the game board 24. In this state, the front surface of the base body 45 (FIG. 6) exists on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 24. The game ball B1 discharged from the lower passage portion 48a (FIG. 7) smoothly flows down and returns to the right side region PA1.

In the right side region PA1, a plurality of left side guide nails 103 for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down the upper left side of the upper passage part 46a (FIG. 7) to the upper passage part 46a are provided above the left side of the design unit 44. At the same time, a plurality of right-side guide nails 104 for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down the upper right side of the upper passage portion 46a to the upper passage portion 46a are provided above the right side of the design unit 44. A plurality of guide nails 103 and 104 provided on the left and right are in a row, and the row of the left guide nail 103 is inclined downward from the left end of the right region PA1 toward the right, and the right guide nail 104. The column slopes downward from the right edge of the right region PA1 toward the left.

By providing the left side guide nail 103 and the right side guide nail 104, all the game balls B1 flowing down the upstream of the design unit 44 in the right side region PA1 are guided by the left side guide nail 103 and the right side guide nail 104. Enter the upper passage portion 46a (FIG. 7). By inducing a large number of game balls B1 to the design unit 44, it is possible to increase the frequency of switching between the closed state and the open state in the design pieces 51 to 54. As a result, the attention of the player can be attracted to the design unit 44. Further, by providing the left side guide nail 103 and the right side guide nail 104, it is prevented that the game ball B1 flowing into the right side region PA1 enters the left side and the right side of the design unit 44. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B1 from colliding with the design pieces 51 to 54 of the design unit 44 from the outside and the game ball B1 from colliding with the design member 105.

FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of the game ball B1 that has flowed down the game area PA.

As described above, the game ball B1 that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball B1 launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. By entering the crab, it will be discharged from the game area PA. The game ball B1 that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 122 to 128 are formed corresponding to each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. .. The game ball B1 that has flowed into the discharge passages 122 to 128 is guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the flowed discharge passages 122 to 128, and is not shown. Will be collected at. Then, the game ball B1 collected by the discharge ball collection unit is discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 122a to 128a for detecting the game ball B1 are provided in the discharge passage portions 122 to 128. The discharge passage portions 122 to 128 and the detection sensors 122a to 128a will be described below. Since four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, discharge passage portions 122 to 124 exist corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 31. In this case, one detection sensor 122a, one for each of the first discharge passage portion 122 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 123 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 on the right side thereof. 123a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 122a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 122, and the detection range is provided in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 123. The second winning opening detection sensor 123a is provided so as to exist. The game ball B1 that entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 was detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 122a while passing through the first discharge passage portion 122, and entered the general winning opening 31 to the right of the first winning opening detection sensor 122a. The game ball B1 is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 123a on the way through the second discharge passage portion 123. Further, a third discharge passage portion 124 formed so as to join the two general winning openings 31 on the right side at an intermediate position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 124 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and has one outlet side region when the inlet side regions merge in the middle. is doing. The third winning opening detection sensor 124a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the outlet side region in the third discharge passage portion 124. The game ball B1 that has entered any of the two general winning openings 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 124a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 124.

The fourth discharge passage portion 125 exists corresponding to the special electric winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 125a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 125, and the game ball B1 that has entered the special electric winning device 32 is on the way through the fourth discharge passage portion 125. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 125a. A fifth discharge passage portion 126 exists corresponding to the first actuating port 33. The first actuating port detection sensor 126a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 126, and the game ball B1 that has entered the first actuating port 33 is the fifth discharge passage portion 126. Is detected by the first actuating port detection sensor 126a on the way through. A sixth discharge passage portion 127 is present corresponding to the second actuating port 34. The second operating port detection sensor 127a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharging passage portion 127, and the game ball B1 that has entered the second operating port 34 is the sixth discharging passage portion 127. Is detected by the second actuating port detection sensor 127a on the way through. The seventh discharge passage portion 128 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. The out port detection sensor 128a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 128, and the game ball B1 that has entered the out port 24a is on the way through the seventh discharge passage portion 128. It is detected by the out port detection sensor 128a.

The game ball B1 that is the target of detection by any one of the various detection sensors 122a to 128a is not the target of detection by the other detection sensors 122a to 128a. Further, the gate detection sensor 129a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball B1 passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 129a.

As the various detection sensors 122a to 129a, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used, but any sensor can be used as long as the game ball B1 can be detected individually. Further, the various detection sensors 122a to 129a are electrically connected to the main control device 140 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 122a to 129a are output to the main control device 140. Specifically, the various detection sensors 122a to 129a output a LOW level signal when the game ball B1 is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball B1 is detected. The relationship between HI and LOW is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 131 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 131 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 132 is fitted therein. The window panel 132 is colorless and transparently formed by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 132. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 133 is provided above the window unit 131. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 134 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the game state. Further, below the window portion 131, an upper bulging portion 111 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 136 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 111a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 111, and a lower plate 136a also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 136. The upper plate 111a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls B1 paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 136a has a function of storing the surplus game ball B1 in the upper plate 111a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 140 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 140 includes a main control board 141 housed in a board box 140a. The substrate box 140a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 140a are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is configured, or an adhesive layer remains on the bonding target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 140a can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 140. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 152 made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 153 and a control device collective unit 154 are attached to the back pack 152.

The payout mechanism unit 153 includes a tank 155 to which the game ball B1 supplied from the island facility of the game hall is sequentially replenished, and a payout device 156 for paying out the game ball B1 stored in the tank 155. There is. The game ball B1 paid out from the payout device 156 is discharged to the upper plate 111a or the lower plate 136a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 156. The payout mechanism unit 153 is mounted with a back pack board having, for example, a main power supply of 24 volts AC and a power switch for performing an ON operation and an OFF operation of the power supply.

The control device collective unit 154 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 157 having a function of controlling the payout device 156 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It is equipped with a power supply / launch control device 158 for controlling the launch of the game ball B1. The payout control device 157 and the power supply / launch control device 158 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 157 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 140 includes a main control board 141 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 147 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 142 is mounted on the main control board 141. The MPU 142 has a main CPU 144, a main RAM 145, and a management IC 146, in addition to the main CPU 143, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 142 has a built-in interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 144 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used only for reading. The main ROM 144 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main CPU 143.

The main RAM 145 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 145 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the main ROM 144 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 145 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 144.

The management IC 146 is a management device that manages the entry mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main CPU 143. The details will be described later, but the management IC 146 grasps the entry history of the game ball B1 into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. According to the grasped ball entry history, the frequency of entry into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is grasped.

The MPU 142 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 147 and a payout control device 157 provided in the main control device 140 are connected to the input side of the MPU 142. A power supply / emission control device 158 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 147, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 142 via the power failure monitoring board 147.

Various sensors such as various ball entry detection sensors 122a to 129a are connected to the input side of the MPU 142. As described above, the various ball entry detection sensors 122a to 129a include a first winning opening detection sensor 122a, a second winning opening detection sensor 123a, a third winning opening detection sensor 124a, a special electric detection sensor 125a, and a first operating opening detection sensor. 126a, a second operating port detection sensor 127a, an out port detection sensor 128a, and a gate detection sensor 129a. Based on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 129a, the main CPU 143 determines the entry into each entry portion. Further, in the main CPU 143, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33, and various lottery is executed based on the winning of the second operating port 34.

A power failure monitoring board 147, a payout control device 157, and a voice emission control device 161 are connected to the output side of the MPU 142. In the payout control device 157, for example, a prize ball command is issued based on the fact that the game ball B1 has entered the prize ball corresponding entry unit corresponding to the payout of the game ball B1 in the above-mentioned entry unit. It is output. Various commands such as fluctuation commands, type commands, and opening commands are output to the voice emission control device 161.

On the output side of the MPU 142, there is a drive unit 32b for special electric power that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for general electric power that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. The figure unit 37 and the normal figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a and a special figure hold display unit 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 142. Similarly, the normal map unit 38 is provided with a normal map display unit 38a and a normal map hold display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 142. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 141, and the MPU 142 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the main CPU 143 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed. Further, when the open state of the utility accessory 34a is won, the drive control of the drive unit 34b for the utility is executed by the main CPU 143 so that the utility accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed by the main CPU 143. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly shown, the display control of the general drawing display unit 38a is executed by the main CPU 143. Further, when a prize is awarded to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when the variable display is started on the special figure display unit 37a, the display control of the special figure hold display unit 37b is performed on the main CPU 143. Is executed, and when a prize is awarded to the through gate 35, or when the variable display is started in the normal figure display unit 38a, the display control of the normal figure hold display unit 38b is executed in the main CPU 143.

The power failure monitoring board 147 relays between the main control board 141 and the power supply / emission control device 158, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 158. The payout control device 157 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 156 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 140.

The power supply / launch control device 158 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 141, the payout control device 157, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply / emission control device 158 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storage retention is supplied to the main RAM 145 of the control device 140 and the payout control device 157. Further, the power supply / launch control device 158 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The voice emission control device 161 drives and controls the display light emission unit 133 and the speaker unit 134 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 140, and also controls the display control device 162. Is. The display control device 162 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the voice emission control device 161.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main CPU 143>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery by the main CPU 143 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 143 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a setting of the display of the special figure display unit 37a, a setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, a setting of the display of the normal figure display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of hits, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the display duration in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 are determined. The variable type counter CS is used. Further, the general electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the general electric accessory open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 145b of the main RAM 145.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the main RAM 145 as an acquisition information storage means when a prize is won in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved storage area 145a.

The hold storage area 145a includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is recorded in the winning history of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. At the same time, the combination of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as the hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second Each numerical information is stored in the order of the holding area RE2 → the third holding area RE3 → the fourth holding area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball B1 to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be held and stored. There is.

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to four, and may be any other, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 37a, and is the start of one game. At that time, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric utility opening counter C4 will be described. The general electric utility opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the general electric holding area 145c of the main RAM 145 at the timing when the game ball B1 wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the utility accessory 34a to the open state by the value of the stored utility accessory opening counter C4.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when the game ball B1 is continuously launched into the game area PA in the same manner, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of being in the open state is relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal-electricity open state in the general-purpose electric power opening lottery using the general-purpose electric goods opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general-purpose accessory 34a is opened when the general-purpose electric accessory 34a is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one opening time is set longer. Has been done. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the open state of the general electric power is won and the open state of the public electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next public-electric open lottery to be held after one public-electric open lottery is performed (that is, the general-purpose map), compared to the low-frequency support mode. The duration of one display on the display unit 38a) is set short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than that of the first operating port 33. The probability that a prize will be awarded to the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a prize is won in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls B1 are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. It can be performed.

In addition, the configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the open state per unit time is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode, and the configuration is not limited to the above. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the public electric open state. In addition, the secured time secured for the next Fuden opening lottery after one Fuden opening lottery is performed (for example, is executed by the Fuzu display unit 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is easier to select or the average reservation time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. May be good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next public power opening lottery after one public power opening lottery is held is shortened. By applying any one of the conditions or any combination of the conditions of shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 145a of the main RAM 145 at the timing when the game ball B1 wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 144 as a winning / failing table. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 145a at the timing when the game ball B1 wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of big hit results are (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) the first after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing differences in the three conditions of the support mode in the universal electric accessory 34a of the two operating ports 34.

As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high and low. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in either the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode, the game is executed up to a predetermined number of round games.

Here, in the round game, until either the condition that the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls B1 wins the special electric winning device 32 is satisfied. It is a game that continues. Further, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the maximum number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special electric winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from the opening to the closing of the special electric winning device 32. Specifically, a long-time mode in which the opening duration is set to 29 sec, which is a long time, and a short-time mode in which the opening duration is set to 0.06 sec, which is shorter than the long time, are set. Has been done.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball B1 is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Be controlled. In addition, the maximum number of end conditions for round games is set to nine. Then, in the long-time mode of the above-mentioned opening mode, the opening duration is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball B1 and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration is set to be shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball B1 and one round game, and more specifically, the opening duration is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball B1. There is. Therefore, when the opening is performed once in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will be awarded the maximum number of prizes in one round game, and 1 in the short-time mode. When the number of times is opened, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will not be awarded, or even if the winning is generated, the number will be about one.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game according to the long-time mode. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a short-time mode.

In addition, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high-frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above values and is arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is higher than that of the low frequency winning mode. Is.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 144 as a distribution table. Then, a low probability jackpot result, a low winning high probability jackpot result, and a most advantageous jackpot result are set as such distribution destinations.

The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition.

The low-winning high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / fail lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. be. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state.

The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state.

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state is not an open / close execution mode, but a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. Further, as a game result, a configuration in which a low winning high probability jackpot result is not set may be used. Further, in the open / close execution mode in the low winning high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than in the case of the low probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the low accuracy jackpot result, and "10 to 14" corresponds to the low winning high accuracy jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is a symbol display device 41 that is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying variable symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is given as a result of a game that results in a predetermined jackpot. In the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol in the above is started, it means a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the grant correspondence result. Specifically, regarding the grant correspondence result, the combination of symbols with the same number on any of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the grant response result in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of a symbol is performed in a symbol column is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows, or a plurality of symbol rows. In the situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol row, the mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Further, a background screen having a predetermined mode different from the previous mode and a symbol on the symbol row having a predetermined mode different from the previous mode are also included. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 144 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. ..

On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the advance notice is performed not by the main control device 140 but by the voice emission control device 161. In this case, in the voice emission control device 161, the notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the missed result, and the notice display having a low appearance rate is displayed. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that are likely to occur. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the main CPU 143 to determine the display duration on the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display duration on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the special symbol display unit 37a and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 143>
Next, each process executed for advancing the game on the main CPU 143 will be described. The processing of the main CPU 143 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is started. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. After that, the access of the main RAM 145 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 143 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply / emission control device 158 is manually operated (step S104), and further, whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 145. Determination (step S105). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S106). Step S107).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the start of business of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the main RAM 145 is cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 145 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 161. Further, after executing the process of step S109, the recognition process for causing the management IC 146 to recognize various information (step S110), and the data output for outputting various data to the reading device connected to the MPU 142. The process is executed (step S111). Details of these recognition processes and data output processes will be described later.

Although the main CPU 143 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S111 is completed and the process of step S112 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 is started, the data output processing in step S111 is completed, and the timer interrupt processing is not executed until the stage before the processing in step S112 is started. Therefore, until the situation is reached, the main CPU 143 does not start the process for advancing the game.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S112 to S115. That is, although the main CPU 143 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, a residual time is generated between the timer interrupt processing of one and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S112 to S115 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S112 to S115 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S113, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed in step S114. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 145, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S115, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S115, the process returns to step S112, and the processes of steps S112 to S115 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, in a 4 msec cycle).

First, the power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 147, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, an infinite loop occurs after executing the power failure processing. Become. In the power failure processing, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 145, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, the lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility release counter C4, and the read numerical information was added by 1 to each. Later, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S113, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S114.

After that, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 145. In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the utility should be started and the state should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, the reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

After that, the ball entry detection process is executed (step S209). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 129a are read, and based on the read result, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating port 33 are read. , The presence or absence of a ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the ball entry detection process will be described later.

After that, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 145 is executed (step S210). In this case, the timer counters to which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are collectively handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are collectively performed. It may be configured.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball B1 is executed (step S211). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball B1 is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined firing cycle. In the following step S212, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of each ball entry detection sensor 122a to 129a and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208. I do.

After that, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S213). In the special figure special electric control process, when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 in a situation where the number of reserved information stored in the holding storage area 145a is less than the upper limit number, the prize is awarded. The processing of storing the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time point in the hold storage area 145a in time series is executed as the hold information. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponds to the big hit winning on the condition that the hold information is stored and not during the game rotation or the open / close execution mode. Processing, and if it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the distribution determination processing for determining which jackpot result the pending information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, not only the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination process, but also whether or not the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence when the hold information does not correspond to the big hit winning. The determination reach determination process is executed, and the process of selecting the duration of the game round is executed by using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. Then, a variable command including information on the duration according to the result of each of these processes and a type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the voice emission control device 161 and the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is displayed. Start the variable display. The voice emission control device 161 receives the variation command and the type command, and causes the display light emission unit 133 and the speaker unit 134 to start the effect for the game round corresponding to the contents of these commands. Further, the voice emission control device 161 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command to the display control device 162. By receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 162 causes the symbol display device 41 to start the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the content of the variation pattern command. As a result, one game round is started.

In the special figure special electric control process, whether or not it is the end timing of the game round is determined by determining whether or not the continuation period of the game round determined at the start of the game round has elapsed during the execution of one game round. Is determined. If it is the end timing, the process of ending the game is executed with the display corresponding to the game result displayed. In this case, if the game times this time correspond to the occurrence of any of the jackpot results, the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. When the game times correspond to the out-of-game result, the pattern corresponding to the out-of-game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the voice emission control device 161. Upon receiving the final stop command, the voice emission control device 161 ends the production for the current game round in the display light emission unit 133 and the speaker unit 134. Further, the voice emission control device 161 transmits a final stop command to the display control device 162. By receiving the final stop command, the display control device 162 ends the effect of the current game round on the symbol display device 41.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the process for starting the open / close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 161. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When the round game is started, the special electric winning device 32 is opened, and when the round game is finished, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 161 and a closing command indicating that the round game is ended is transmitted to the voice emission control device 161. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the open / close execution mode is terminated, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the voice emission control device 161. The voice emission control device 161 causes the display light emitting unit 133 and the speaker unit 134 to execute the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the voice emission control device 161 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the open / close execution mode to the display control device 162. The display control device 162 causes the symbol display device 41 to execute an effect for the open / close execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the open / close execution mode. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening / closing execution mode is terminated, the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is terminated correspond to the type of jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode. Execute the process to enter the mode.

After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S213 in the timer interrupt process, the normal figure normal electric control process is executed (step S214). In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when a prize has been won in the through gate 35, a process for acquiring the hold information on the Fuzu side is executed, and the hold information on the Fuzu side is stored. In addition, a release determination is made for the reserved information, and further, a process for performing an effect for a normal drawing is executed with the opening determination as an opportunity. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Further, in the case of the open / close execution mode, even if the support mode immediately before that is the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is set.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the reserved information related to the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure reservation display unit 37b is set. , The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the reserved information related to the normal figure display unit 38a in the normal figure hold display unit 38b is set. Further, in step S215, output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display contents of the normal figure display unit 38a are set. Set the output information for updating.

After that, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 157 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S216). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Further, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S218). After that, the management output process for outputting the information corresponding to the entry result of the game ball B1 in the game area PA to the management IC 146 is executed (step S219). The details of the management output processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 143, based on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 129a, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through. A configuration for specifying whether or not the game ball B1 has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 129a are input to the main CPU 143.

The main CPU 143 is provided with an input port 143a. The input port 143a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled at the same time. An area in which information of "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7 are provided as the area. Further, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 143a, but in order to limit the targets to be input at the same time to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 143a depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control.

In the ball entry detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), the signal group to be input to the input port 143a is set to the signal group from each ball entry detection sensor 122a to 129a. In the situation where such a setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 122a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 123a. The second bit D2 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 124a, and the third bit D3 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 125a. , The 4th bit D4 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the 1st actuating port detection sensor 126a, and the 5th bit D5 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the 2nd actuating port detection sensor 127a. The 6-bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the out port detection sensor 128a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 129a.

When each of the above-mentioned ball entry detection sensors 122a to 129a does not detect the passage of the game ball B1, it outputs a LOW level signal indicating that it is not detected as a detection signal, and detects the passage of the game ball B1. If so, an HI level signal indicating that detection is being performed is output as a detection signal. Then, the input port 143a stores the information of "0" for the corresponding bit when the LOW level signal is received, and "1" for the corresponding bit when the HI level signal is received. Store information about. That is, in the situation where the passage of the game ball B1 is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 129a, the information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating that the corresponding bit is not detected is stored, and the game ball B1 is stored. In the situation where the passage is detected, the information of "1" corresponding to the information indicating that the detection is being performed is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the first winning opening detection sensor 122a. It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first output flag provided in the main RAM 145 (step S302), and the value of the 10 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S303). .. The first output flag is for the main CPU 143 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 122a should be executed for the management IC 146. It is a flag of. The 10-prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 143 to specify the number of times the 10 game balls B1 should be paid out. When the value of the 10-prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10-prize ball command is output to the payout control device 157 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), and the 10-prize ball command is output to the payout control device 157. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 157 receives the 10 prize ball commands, the payout control device 157 drives and controls the payout device 156 so that the 10 game balls B1 are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the second winning opening detection sensor 123a. It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second output flag provided in the main RAM 145 (step S305), and the value of the 10 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S306). .. The second output flag is for the main CPU 143 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 123a should be executed for the management IC 146. It is a flag of.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the third winning opening detection sensor 124a. It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the third output flag provided in the main RAM 145 (step S308), and the value of the 10 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S309). .. The third output flag is for the main CPU 143 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 124a should be executed for the management IC 146. It is a flag of.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball B1 is confirmed by the special electric detection sensor 125a. Is detected (step S310: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the special electric winning flag provided in the main RAM 145 (step S311), and "1" is set in the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 145 (step S312). The value of the 15 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S313). The special electric winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 143 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the special electric winning device 32 in the round game in the open / close execution mode. By confirming that "1" is set in the special electric winning flag in the special electric special electric control processing (step S213) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16), one game ball B1 to the special electric winning device 32 It is specified that the ball has been entered, and the number of remaining balls that can be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the round game is subtracted by 1. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 143 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 125a should be executed for the management IC 146. be. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the 15 game balls B1 should be paid out by the main CPU 143. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 157 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), and the 15 prize ball is output to the payout control device 157. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counters is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 157 receives the 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 157 drives and controls the payout device 156 so that the 15 game balls B1 are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the 4th bit D4 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the first operation port detection sensor 126a. It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 145 (step S315), and "1" is set in the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 145 (step S316). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S317). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 143 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the first operation port 33. In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), it is stored in the hold area RE of the hold storage area 145a by confirming that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag. The process of newly storing the pending information is executed on condition that the number of pending information being held is less than the upper limit of four. When it is confirmed that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag in the special electric special electric control process (step S213) and the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The fifth output flag is for the main CPU 143 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first operating port detection sensor 126a should be executed for the management IC 146. It is a flag of. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 143 to specify the number of times one game ball B1 should be paid out. When the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, the one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 157 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), and one prize ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of one prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 157 receives one prize ball command, the payout control device 157 drives and controls the payout device 156 so that one game ball B1 is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the fifth bit D5 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the second operation port detection sensor 127a. It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 145 (step S319), and "1" is set in the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 145 (step S320). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 143 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the second operation port 34. In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), it is stored in the hold area RE of the hold storage area 145a by confirming that "1" is set in the second operation winning flag. The process of newly storing the pending information is executed on condition that the number of pending information being held is less than the upper limit of four. Confirm that "1" is set in the second operation winning flag in the special electric control process (step S213), and clear the second operation winning flag "0" when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed. .. The sixth output flag is for the main CPU 143 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 127a should be executed for the management IC 146. It is a flag of.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the 6th bit D6 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is used by the out-port detection sensor 128a. It is determined that B1 has been detected (step S322: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 145 (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 143 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the out port detection sensor 128a should be executed for the management IC 146. Is.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the 7th bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, the gate detection sensor 129a confirms that one game ball B1. Is detected (step S324: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 145 (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 143 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the through gate 35. In the normal power control process (step S214) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), by confirming that "1" is set in the gate winning flag, the normal power storage in the normal power holding area 145c is confirmed. On condition that the number of pending information on the side is less than 4, which is the upper limit, the process of storing the numerical information of the current general electric utility release counter C4 in the general electric holding area 145c as the holding information on the normal drawing side. To execute. It is confirmed that "1" is set in the gate winning flag in the Fuzu Fuden control process (step S214), and the gate winning flag is cleared to "0" when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed.

Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is started at a cycle of 4 msec as described above, when the detection of one game ball B1 is started by one ball entry detection sensor 122a to 129a, the entry is concerned. It is the main side to specify that one game ball B1 is detected by the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 129a in the situation where the ball detection sensors 122a to 129a continue to detect the one game ball B1. It is performed by the CPU 143. Therefore, it is sufficient that one of the first to seventh output flags is provided.

Next, the processing contents executed by the payout control device 157 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of various devices that communicate with the payout control device 157 and the payout control device 157 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The payout control device 157 includes an MPU 171. The MPU 171 includes a payout side ROM 173, a payout side RAM 174, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like, in addition to the payout side CPU 172 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit.

The payout side ROM 173 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used only for reading. The payout side ROM 173 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 172.

The payout side RAM 174 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 174 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout side ROM 173 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 174 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 173.

The payout side CPU 172 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 143. By receiving the prize ball command from the main CPU 143, the payout side CPU 172 drives and controls the payout device 156 so that the number of game balls B1 corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 172 monitors whether or not the game ball B1 can be paid out normally, and if it is determined that the game ball B1 cannot be paid out normally, the payout side RAM 174 Even in the situation where the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored, the payout device 156 is stopped. Further, the payout side CPU 172 transmits a payout restriction command indicating that the payout cannot be normally performed in this way to the main side CPU 143. When the main CPU 143 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 133, and the speaker unit 134 notify that the game ball B1 cannot be paid out normally. A notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 161 so as to be executed. As a state in which it is not possible to pay out the game ball B1 normally, there are a state in which the lower plate 136a is full with the game ball B1 and a state in which the tank 155 is not replenished with the game ball B1. There are an abnormal payout state in which the payout device 156 does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is released from the inner frame 13. is doing.

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball B1 passage leading from the payout device 156 to the lower plate 136a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 172. The payout side CPU 172 identifies that the game ball B1 is in a full tank state when the game ball B1 is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and cancels the state in which the game ball B1 is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor. When it is done, it is specified that the full tank state is released.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball B1 passage leading from the tank 155 to the payout device 156, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 172. The payout side CPU 172 identifies that the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and the state in which the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor is released. It is specified that the ballless state is canceled in the case.

The payout device 156 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the game ball B1 paid out from the payout device 156, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 172. The payout side CPU 172 specifies that one game ball B1 has been paid out from the payout device 156 when the game ball B1 is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, the payout side CPU 172 is in a payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball B1 even though the payout device 156 is driven and controlled so that the game ball B1 is paid out. It is specified, and when the state in which the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled, it is specified that the payout abnormal state is canceled.

A front door opening sensor 175 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 175 is input to the payout side CPU 172. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 175 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 172, and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 175 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 172. When the payout side CPU 172 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the closing detection signal is received from the front door opening sensor 175, and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 175. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 172 sends a front door opening command to the main side CPU 143 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state from the closed state, and the front door frame 14 is specified to be in the closed state from the open state. A front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 143 at the same timing. The main CPU 143 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when the front door opening command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the front door closing command is received.

A main body opening sensor 176 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 176 is input to the payout side CPU 172. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 176 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 172, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 176 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 172. The payout side CPU 172 identifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 176, and receives the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 176. It is specified that the main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 172 sends a main body opening command to the main CPU 143 at the timing when it is specified that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and has specified that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. The main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 143 at the timing. The main CPU 143 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when the main body opening command is received, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when the main body closing command is received.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 172 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

First, the full tank process is executed (step S401). In the full tank processing, as described above, it is specified whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and if the tank is full, the payout of the game ball B1 is stopped. Along with executing the process, a command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main CPU 143. Further, when the full tank state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 143.

After that, the ball unnecessary process is executed (step S402). In the ball-free process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the ball is in a ball-free state based on the detection result of the ball-free detection sensor, and if the ball is in a ball-free state, the process for stopping the payout of the game ball B1. Is executed, and a command indicating that the ball is not in a state is transmitted to the main CPU 143. Further, when the ball-free state is released, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a command indicating that the ball-free state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 143.

After that, the payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the payout abnormality state is present based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if the payout abnormality state is present, the process of stopping the payout of the game ball B1 is executed. At the same time, a command indicating that the payout is abnormal is transmitted to the main CPU 143. Further, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 143.

After that, the front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S404). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state is specified based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 175, and if the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the front door frame 14 is in the open state. A process of stopping the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 143. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 143.

After that, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S405). In the main body open monitoring process, as described above, whether or not the game machine main body 12 is in the open state is specified based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 176, and if the game machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball. While executing the process of stopping the payout of B1, the main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 143. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the gaming ball B1 is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 143.

After that, the command reading process is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command transmitted by the main CPU 143 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 174. Then, after executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 174 (step S407), the game ball B1 by the payout device 156 is executed. A payout control process for controlling payout execution is executed (step S408). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 174 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 156 is driven and controlled, and one game ball B1 is used by the payout detection sensor. When it is detected, the value of the prize ball number information is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 156 is stopped. After that, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S409).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 177. The external terminal board 177 is provided with a large number of external terminals, and some of the external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 143 and some of the external terminals are external terminals. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 172. Since each of the main CPU 143 and the payout side CPU 172 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 177 in this way, as shown in FIG. 19, the main side CPU 143 and the payout side CPU 172 externally send information to the hall computer HC. It is possible to output.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 177 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 175, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 177 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 176. In detail about the configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 178 is provided at an intermediate position of the signal path from the front door opening sensor 175 to the payout side CPU 172. The signal relay board 178 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 directed from the front door opening sensor 175 toward the payout side CPU 172. Then, the branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal board 177. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result in the front door opening sensor 175 is input not only to the payout side CPU 172 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal board 177. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 172.

Regarding the main body open sensor 176, in detail, the signal relay board 178 is provided with a branch path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 directed from the main body open sensor 176 to the payout side CPU 172. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 177. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result in the main body opening sensor 176 is input not only to the payout side CPU 172 but also to the external terminal for opening the main body in the external terminal board 177. As a result, it is possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without the control by the payout side CPU 172.

Next, the contents of the information output externally from the main CPU 143 and the payout side CPU 172 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of the information output externally from the main CPU 143 to the hall computer HC will be described.

The main CPU 143 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 143 on the external terminal board 177 in the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16). As the information output from the main CPU 143 to the external terminal board 177, the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, and one game round are completed. Information indicating that, and a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls B1 pass through any of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball B1 has entered the first operating port 33, information indicating that the game ball B1 has entered the second operating port 34, and information indicating that the game ball B1 has entered the second operating port 34 are included. It has been.

The payout side CPU 172 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 172 on the external terminal board 177 in the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20). The information output from the payout side CPU 172 to the external terminal board 177 includes information indicating that the ten game balls B1 have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of paying out the game ball B1 in the pachinko machine 10 according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 177. for example,
-The payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of payouts of the game balls B1 generated until 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. (Hereinafter, this ball ejection rate is referred to as "B").
・ Ball ejection rate in the open / close execution mode ・ Ball ejection rate in the high frequency support mode ・ Number of game times executed until 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio) Is "S")
BS × "Number of prize balls for winning prizes in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34"
The number of balls B1 entering the first operating port 33 generated until 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “S1”).
The number of balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 generated until 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “S2”).
B- (S1 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + S2 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
Etc. are calculated. This makes it possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the corresponding ball entry portion.

<Structure for managing the winning mode of the game ball B1>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball B1 by using the management IC 146 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 146 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As described above, the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 includes a main CPU 143, a main ROM 144, a main RAM 145, and a management IC 146. In addition to these, the MPU 142 also includes an I / F 101 and a reading terminal 182.

The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from an external device of the MPU 142. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 143 via the internal bus 183. The detection results from the sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 129a and the commands from the payout side CPU 172 are input to the MPU 142 through the input port of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. As described above, various processes are executed by the main CPU 143. Further, when various processes are executed by the main CPU 143 and a signal is output to a device such as a drive unit 32b for special electric power, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101 and the main side. When a command is output to the payout side CPU 172 and the voice emission control device 161 as a result of executing various processes in the CPU 143, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

The reading terminal 182 is a terminal for electrically connecting the reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, to the MPU 142, and is provided so that the connection terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 142. .. However, as described above, the main control board 141 on which the MPU 142 is mounted is housed in the board box 140a, and the reading terminal 182 faces the wall portion of the board box 140a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control device 140. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 182, it is necessary to open the board box 140a to expose the MPU 142. This makes it possible to prevent the reading device from being illegally electrically connected to the reading terminal 182. The substrate box 140a is not limited to this, and the substrate box 140a is formed with an opening for exposing the reading terminal 182 to the outside of the main control device 140, so that the substrate box 140a can be read without being damaged. The configuration may be such that the reading device can be electrically connected to the terminal 182.

The management IC 146 includes a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 192, a management side ROM 193, a management side RAM 194, an RTC 195, a correspondence-related memory 196, and a history memory 197. Each of these devices is connected so as to be capable of bidirectional communication through an internal bus 146a provided in the management IC 146.

The management side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 143 via the signal path group 198 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 142, and also receives the signal path group 199 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 142. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 182 via the reading terminal 182. Various signals from the main CPU 143 are input to the input port of the management side I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 182 are output from the output port of the management side I / F 111. The main CPU 143 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182 via the signal path group 200 for bidirectional communication built in the MPU 142.

The management side CPU 192 is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management side ROM 193 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as NOR type flash memory and NAND type flash memory, and is used only for reading. The management side ROM 193 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management side CPU 192. The management-side RAM 194 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The management side RAM 194 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the management side ROM 193 when compared with the same data capacity. The management side RAM 194 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the management side ROM 193.

The RTC195 is a real-time clock, and has a configuration capable of constantly measuring date information and time information, and outputting the measured date information and time information according to an instruction from the management side CPU 192. The RTC195 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure the date information and the time information even while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

Correspondence-related memory 196 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 196 is for storing information on the correspondence between the buffers 202a to 202p provided in the input port 201 of the management side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to those buffers 202a to 202p. Used for. The details of the contents of the correspondence memory 196 will be described later.

The history memory 197 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention, and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 197 is used to store information regarding the entry of the game ball B1 received from the main CPU 143 through the management side I / F 111. The details of the contents of the history memory 197 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 201 provided on the management side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 201 of the management side I / F 111.

The input port 201 is provided with a plurality of buffers 202a to 202p. Specifically, the first to 16th buffers 202a to 202p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to 16th buffers 202a to 202p through the signal paths 198a to 198p, and each of the first to 16th buffers 202a to 202p is an input target signal. When is at the LOW level, the information of "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is at the HI level, the information of "1" is stored as the second data. The relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 122a is input to the first buffer 202a. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level first signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 122a, and one by the first winning opening detection sensor 122a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the first signal of the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 192 to specify that the first signal of the HI level is input to the first buffer 202a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 123a is input to the second buffer 202b. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level second signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 123a, and one by the second winning opening detection sensor 123a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the second signal of the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 192 to specify that the second signal of the HI level is input to the second buffer 202b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 124a is input to the third buffer 202c. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level third signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 124a, and one by the third winning opening detection sensor 124a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the HI level third signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 192 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 202c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 125a is input to the fourth buffer 202d. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level fourth signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the special electric detection sensor 125a, and one game ball B1 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 125a. In that case, the HI level fourth signal is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 192 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 202d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 126a is input to the fifth buffer 202e. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the first operating port detection sensor 126a, and one by the first operating port detection sensor 126a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the HI level fifth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 192 to specify that the HI level fifth signal is input to the fifth buffer 202e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 127a is input to the sixth buffer 202f. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level sixth signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the second operating port detection sensor 127a, and one by the second operating port detection sensor 127a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 192 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 202f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 128a is input to the seventh buffer 202g. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level 7th signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the out port detection sensor 128a, and one game ball B1 is output by the out port detection sensor 128a. When detected, the HI level 7th signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 192 to specify that the HI level 7th signal is input to the 7th buffer 202g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 202h. In this case, the main CPU 143 continuously outputs the LOW level 8th signal when it is not in the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 8th signal when it is in the open / close execution mode.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 202i. In this case, the main CPU 143 continuously outputs the LOW level 9th signal when it is not in the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 9th signal when it is in the high frequency support mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 202j. In this case, the main CPU 143 continuously outputs the LOW level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues the HI level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is open. And output.

An output instruction signal for causing the management side CPU 192 to recognize an opportunity to output the history information stored in the history memory 197 to the reading terminal 182 is input to the 16th buffer 202p. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs an HI level output instruction signal over a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 192 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 202p.

Although the 11th buffer 202k, the 12th buffer 202l, the 13th buffer 202m, the 14th buffer 202n, and the 15th buffer 202o can input the signal from the main CPU 143, the normal signal is not input in the pachinko machine 10. It is blank. As described above, as the input port 201 of the management side I / F 111, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a larger number of buffers 202a to 202p than the types of signals output from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146. The management IC 146 can be diverted to a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 146. Incidentally, signal paths 198a to 198p are formed between the main CPU 143 and each of the first to 16th buffers 202a to 202p so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the first to 16th buffers 202a to 202p. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 198k to 198o may not be formed between the buffers 202k to 202o to be blanked.

It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 146 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 202p in the input port 201 of the management side I / F 111, and the management side CPU 192 does not receive an instruction from the main side CPU 143. Can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 202p. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 146, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 143. This is specified by the management side CPU 192. The specification of these signal types in the management side CPU 192 will be described in detail later, but when the control is started in the main side CPU 143 and the management side CPU 192 with the supply of the operating power to the MPU 142, the main side CPU 143 to the management side CPU 192. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the corresponding memory 196, and when the management side CPU 192 specifies the types of various signals in a situation where the operating power is supplied. The information stored in the correspondence memory 196 is referred to.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 196. In the correspondence-related memory 196, the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 203a to 203o are associated with the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o provided in the input port 201 of the management side I / F111 on a one-to-one basis. It is provided.

In the first correspondence area 203a, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 192 to specify the type of the signal input to the first buffer 202a. Further, in the first correspondence area 203a, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is provided and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one gaming ball B1 enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces). ) Is also stored. In the second correspondence area 203b, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 192 to specify the type of the signal input to the second buffer 202b. Further, in the second correspondence area 203b, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one gaming ball B1 enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces). ) Is also stored. In the third correspondence area 203c, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 192 to specify the type of the signal input to the third buffer 202c. Further, in the third correspondence area 203c, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one gaming ball B1 enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces). ) Is also stored.

In the fourth correspondence area 203d, information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 192 to specify the type of the signal input to the fourth buffer 202d. Further, in the fourth correspondence area 203d, information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is used and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the special electric winning device 32 (15 pieces). ) Is also stored. In the fifth correspondence area 203e, information indicating that the first operating port 33 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 192 to specify the type of the signal input to the fifth buffer 202e. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 203e, information indicating that the first operating port 33 is provided and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 ( 1) is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 203f, information indicating that the second operating port 34 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 192 to specify the type of the signal input to the sixth buffer 202f. Further, in the sixth correspondence area 203f, information indicating that the second operating port 34 is provided and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the second operating port 34 ( 1) is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 203g, information indicating that the out port 24a is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 192 to specify the type of the signal input to the seventh buffer 202g.

In the eighth correspondence area 203h, information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set is stored as information for the management side CPU 192 to specify the type of the signal input to the eighth buffer 202h. In the ninth correspondence area 203i, information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set is stored as information for the management side CPU 192 to specify the type of the signal input to the ninth buffer 202i. In the tenth correspondence area 203j, information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 192 to specify the type of the signal input to the tenth buffer 202j.

In the eleventh correspondence area 203k, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the eleventh buffer 202k by the management side CPU 192, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored. In the twelfth correspondence area 203l, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the twelfth buffer 202l by the management side CPU 192, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored. In the thirteenth correspondence area 203m, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the thirteenth buffer 202m by the management side CPU 192, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored. In the 14th correspondence area 203n, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the 14th buffer 202n by the management side CPU 192, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored. The fifteenth correspondence area 203o stores information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of the information for specifying the type of the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 202o by the management side CPU 192.

As described above, what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o can be specified by the management side CPU 192 by receiving an instruction from the main side CPU 143. , The management IC 146 can be diverted to a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 146.

Further, each time the signals corresponding to the storage of the history information are output to the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o, the information for recognizing the signal type is not output, but the signal type is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 196 by the management side CPU 192. It is a configuration. As a result, compared to the configuration in which the information for recognizing the type of the signal is output each time the signal corresponding to the storage of the history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o, the signal is mainly output each time. It is possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 143 to the management side CPU 192.

Further, the management side CPU 192 outputs information for specifying the type of the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o at the start of supply of the operating power. Thereby, in the situation where the game is started by the pachinko machine 10, the type of the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o can be specified by the management side CPU 192.

Further, the information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 202p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 146. As a result, the type of signal input to the 16th buffer 202p is specified for the output instruction signal that is surely used not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other types of pachinko machines that use the management IC 146. It is possible to omit the processing for this. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the processing load of the processing for specifying the type of the signal.

Next, the history memory 197 of the management IC 146 will be described. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 197.

The history memory 197 is provided with a history area 204 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 204, a plurality of pointer information is set in sequence, and a history information storage area 205 is set in which each pointer information is associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. The history information storage area 205 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 205 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and as an area for storing correspondence information. One byte of data capacity is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information according to the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o (actually, the first to tenth buffers 202a to 202j of the pachinko machine 10). First, the date information and the time information measured in the current RTC195 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information of the history information storage area 205 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 202a to 202o that triggered the information storage this time is read from the correspondence areas 203a to 203o corresponding to the buffers 202a to 202o in the correspondence memory 196, and the read correspondence information is read. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 205 corresponding to the pointer information currently to be written.

Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 205, signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a are input to the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g as described above. Therefore, the information corresponding to the types of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence relation areas 203a to 203g in the correspondence relation memory 196. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of the ball entry unit corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence related areas 203a to 203g. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 122a to 124a all detect the game ball B1 that has entered the general winning opening 31, and therefore these first to third winning openings are won. Information indicating that each of the first to third correspondence areas 203a to 203c corresponding to the mouth detection sensors 122a to 124a is a general winning opening 31 is stored. Further, the fourth correspondence area 203d stores information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is used, and the fifth correspondence area 203e stores information indicating that the first operating port 33 is used. , The sixth correspondence area 203f stores information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 203g stores information indicating that it is the out port 24a. When the buffers 202a to 202o that triggered the information storage this time are any of the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g, the information on the type of the ball entry portion corresponding to the buffers 202a to 202g is the first to the first. It is read from any of the seventh correspondence areas 203a to 203g, and the read information on the type of the ball entry portion is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 205.

On the other hand, the 8th buffer 202h is input with a signal indicating whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode, the 9th buffer 202i is input with a signal indicating whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode, and the 10th buffer 202j is input with a signal indicating whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input. Therefore, the 8th correspondence area 203h stores information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set, and the 9th correspondence area 203i stores information indicating that the high frequency support mode is used. Information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is stored in 203j.

As described above, the main CPU 143 continuously outputs the LOW level 8th signal in the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 8th signal in the open / close execution mode. The side CPU 192 specifies that the open / close execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the open / close execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Is possible. Then, in both the case where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and the case where the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 192 generates an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 205. Identify as done. That is, when the 8th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information storage area 205 includes not only the information indicating that the open / closed execution mode is read from the 8th correspondence area 203h but also the start information. Store in the area for storing the correspondence information of. Further, when the 8th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information storage area 205 includes not only the information indicating that the open / closed execution mode is read from the 8th correspondence area 203h but also the end information. Store in the area for storing the correspondence information of.

As described above, the main CPU 143 continuously outputs the LOW level 9th signal when it is not in the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 9th signal when it is in the high frequency support mode. , The management CPU 192 identifies that the high frequency support mode was started when the 9th signal changed from the LOW level to the HI level, and ended the high frequency support mode when the 9th signal changed from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to identify that it has been done. Then, in both the case where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and the case where the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 192 generates an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 205. Identify as done. That is, when the 9th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information storage area includes not only the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is read from the 9th correspondence area 203i but also the start information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of 205. Further, when the 9th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information storage area includes not only the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is read from the 9th correspondence area 203i but also the end information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of 205.

As described above, the main CPU 143 continuously outputs the LOW level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and outputs the HI level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is open. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 192 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the 10th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Can identify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, in both the case where the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and the case where the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management side CPU 192 generates an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 205. Identify as done. That is, when the 10th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is read from the 10th correspondence area 203j but also the opening start information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 205. Further, when the 10th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is read from the 10th correspondence area 203j but also the opening end information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 205.

The history information storage area 205 stores all the history information generated during the 10 consecutive business days in which the launch of the game ball B1 in the pachinko machine 10 is continued from the opening to the closing of the store. It is provided for a few minutes to allow it. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 205 are provided. Thereby, all the history information can be stored and retained in the history memory 197 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 197 is provided with a pointer area 206 in addition to the history area 204. In the pointer area 206, information for specifying the pointer information currently to be written in the history memory 197 by the management side CPU 192 is stored. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating the pointer information of "0" as a writing target is set in the pointer area 206. Then, every time one history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 205, the information in the pointer area 206 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the pointer information in the last order is the writing target and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 205 corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information of "0" is the writing target. The information in area 206 is updated. As a result, when the number of history information that can be stored is exceeded and an opportunity to store the history information occurs, the new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 205 in which the old history information is stored. Become.

Further, when the history information is read from the history memory 197 by the reading device, all the history information storage areas 205 are cleared to "0", and the pointer information of "0" is to be written. The information in the pointer area 206 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that was once read as the read target from being read again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball B1 by using the management IC 146 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o provided in the input port 201 of the management side I / F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 196 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a recognition process executed by the main CPU 143. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 15).

First, "15" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 145 (step S501). The recognition output counter determines the remaining required number of times of information output for the management side CPU 192 to recognize which type of signal each buffer 202a to 202p of the input port 201 in the management side I / F 111 corresponds to. It is a counter for specifying by the main CPU 143. As described above, 15 of the 1st to 15th buffers 202a to 202o are the recognition targets of the signal type, so "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

After that, the output process of the identification start command is executed (step S502). The main CPU 143 outputs various commands to the management side CPU 192 in order to make the management side CPU 192 recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o correspond to. In outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 202a to 202h are used. That is, the first to fifteenth buffers 202a are used by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 198a to 198h) used to instruct the management side CPU 192 to store the history information. A command output is performed to make the management CPU 192 recognize which type of signal the ~ 202o corresponds to. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the signal paths for outputting the command are provided separately from the signal paths 198a to 198p for outputting signals to the first to 16th buffers 202a to 202p. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 202a to 202h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started in order to make the management CPU 192 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification start command and the period for maintaining the output state of the 9th signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 192 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the 9th signal. Has been done. Upon receiving the identification start command, the management CPU 192 should start the process for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o and the signal type in the correspondence memory 196. Identify.

After that, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 145 is read from the main ROM 144 (step S503). In this case, the first buffer 202a corresponds to the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o so that the first buffer 202a is the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1 buffer is the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer. The recognition setting of the signal type to be performed is performed. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is "15" to "13", the general winning opening 31 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls are read, and if the recognition output counter is "12", the special electric prize is won. Read the type identification command indicating that it is the device 32 and the number of prize balls, and if the recognition output counter is "11", read the type identification command indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls. If the recognition output counter is "10", it means that it is the second operating port 34, and if the recognition output counter is "9", it means that it is the out port 24a. Read the type identification command shown, read the type identification command indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode if the recognition output counter is "8", and read the high frequency support mode if the recognition output counter is "7". If the recognition output counter is "6", the type identification command indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is read, and if the recognition output counter is "5" to "1", it is blank. Read the type identification command indicating that.

After that, the output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity similar to the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 202a to 202h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started in order to make the management side CPU 192 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification type command and the period for maintaining the output state of the 9th signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 192 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the 9th signal. Has been done. By receiving the identification type command, the management CPU 192 corresponds to the identification type command in the corresponding related areas 203a to 203o corresponding to the buffers to be set this time among the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o. Store information to be used.

After that, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 145 is subtracted by 1 (step S505), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S506). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S506: NO), the process for outputting the type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed (step S503 and). Step S504).

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S506: YES), the output process of the identification end command is executed (step S507). The identification end command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 202a to 202h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 192 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification end command and the period for maintaining the output state of the 9th signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 192 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the 9th signal. Has been done. By receiving the identification end command, the management CPU 192 specifies that the process for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o and the signal type in the correspondence memory 196 has been completed. do.

Next, the management process executed by the management side CPU 192 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 192 is started. The processing speed of the management side CPU 192 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 143, and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16) is performed after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16) is started in the main side CPU 143. Is started, the combination of the processes after step S606 in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 143 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 194 is cleared to "0" (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter for specifying the type of the buffers 202a to 202o, which is the setting target of the signal type, by the management side CPU 192. The first buffer 202a is the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1th buffer is the signal type setting target after the nth buffer.

After that, on condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 143 (step S603: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, the type identification received this time is performed in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 194 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 203a to 203o of the correspondence memory 196. Stores information on the signal type set in the command. After that, the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 194 is added by 1 (step S605).

When a negative determination is made in step S603, or when the process of step S605 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 143 (step S606). If the identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and on condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 143 (step S603: YES), steps S604 and S605 are performed. Execute the process again.

When the identification end command is received from the main CPU 143 (step S606: YES), the processes of step S607 and step S608 are repeatedly executed. Although the details will be described later in step S607, a history setting process for storing the history information corresponding to the type of the signal received from the main CPU 143 in the history memory 197 is executed. Although the details will be described later in step S608, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 197 to the reading terminal 182 is executed.

FIG. 27 is a time chart showing how the correspondence relationship information between the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o and the types of signals input to these buffers 202a to 202o is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 196. FIG. 27A shows a period in which a command is output from the main CPU 143 to the management CPU 192 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 198a to 198h), and FIG. 27A shows FIG. 27 (a). b) shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 27 (c) shows the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o and these buffers 202a to 202o. The execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence relationship is executed is shown, and FIG. 27D shows the timing at which the correspondence relationship setting process (step S604) is executed by the management side CPU 192.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 and the management CPU 192 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 27 (a). To. Further, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 27 (b). After that, at the timing of t2 in which the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 27 (b). The management side CPU 192 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 143 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 202a to 202h. By confirming the information in, the content of the command received from the main CPU 143 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management side CPU 192 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S601 of the management process (FIG. 26). After that, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 27 (a).

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 27 (b). After that, at the timing of t5, which is the situation where the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 27 (b). The management side CPU 192 identifies that the command was transmitted from the main side CPU 143 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 202a to 202h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 143 can be grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management side CPU 192 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 27 (d) at the timing of t5. In the correspondence relationship setting process, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used and information on the number of prize balls thereof are stored in the first correspondence relationship area 203a of the correspondence relationship memory 196. After that, at the timing of t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 27 (a).

After that, in each of the timing of t7 to t9, the timing of t10 to the timing of t12, the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, and the timing of t16 to the timing of t18, the main timing is the same as the timing of t4 to t6. The management side CPU 192 executes the correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 143. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the 15th type identification command is completed from the timing of t16 to the timing of t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 27 (b). After that, at the timing of t20, which is the situation where the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 27 (b). The management side CPU 192 identifies that the command was transmitted from the main side CPU 143 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 202a to 202h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 143 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification end command is received, the identification state of the management side CPU 192 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. 27 (c). After that, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 27 (a).

In order to instruct the management side CPU 192 to store the history information by making the management side CPU 192 recognize whether or not the command is being output using the ninth signal as described above. It is clear to the management side CPU 192 that the command is output even if the command is output using the 1st to 8th signals (that is, the 1st to 8th signal paths) to be used. It becomes possible to recognize.

Next, a processing configuration for storing the history information in the history memory 197 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by the main CPU 143. The management output process is executed in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16).

First, "10" is set in the managed target counter provided in the main RAM 145 (step S701). The management target counter specifies on the main CPU 143 whether or not there is a management target that is not a specific target of whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 192 should be changed in the current management output process. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 143 to specify whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 192 should be changed for any management target. The management targets for which the main CPU 143 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 192 should be changed in one management output process are the seven ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a. There are a total of 10 cases of whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is executed, whether or not the high-frequency support mode is executed, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened / closed. Therefore, first, "10" is set in the managed counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management side CPU 192 for the management target corresponding to the value of the current management target counter is at the HI level (step S702). When it is not the HI level (step S702: NO), by determining whether or not the value of the managed target counter is 4 or more, the managed target corresponding to the value of the managed target counter is 7 ball entry detection sensors 122a. It is specified whether it is any of ~ 128a (step S703).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the output flag of the main RAM 145 corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S704). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 122a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first output flag. When the value of the managed counter is "9" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 123a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second output flag, and the value of the managed counter is determined. Is "8" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 124a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third output flag, and the value of the managed counter is "7". Yes When the special electric detection sensor 125a is supported, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fourth output flag, the value of the managed counter is "6", and the first operating port detection sensor 126a. If it corresponds to, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fifth output flag, the value of the management target counter is "5", and it corresponds to the second actuating port detection sensor 127a. In that case, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the 6th output flag, and if the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the out port 24a, "1" is set in the 7th output flag. It is determined whether or not "1" is set. As already described, these 1st to 7th output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 18).

When "1" is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. (Step S705). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

When a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the HI level (step S707). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether or not the transition to the open / close execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is "2", it is high. It is determined whether or not the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and when the value of the management target counter is "1", it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the HI level (step S708).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level (step S709). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 4 or more and the current management target is any of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a, the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is used. It is determined whether or not the HI output duration period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the corresponding signal was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set in the management side CPU 192 to be longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (FIG. 26), and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level is set. It is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management side CPU 192. Further, when the value of the managed target counter is "3" and the current managed target is the open / close execution mode, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode has ended, and the value of the managed target counter is "2". When the current management target is the high frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode has ended, the value of the management target counter is "1", and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In that case, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. When an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level (step S709: YES). Step S710).

When a negative determination is made in step S704, when the process of step S706 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S707, when the process of step S708 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S709, or in step. When the process of S710 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main RAM 145 is decremented by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S712). When the value of the managed target counter is 1 or more (step S712: NO), the processes after step S702 are executed for the managed target corresponding to the value of the new managed target counter.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 192 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 26).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 192 among the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o is set in the confirmation target counter provided in the management side RAM 194 (step S801). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 196 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 203a to 203o are blank is stored is specified, and the identification thereof is specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, information other than the information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 203a to 203j as described above. Therefore, in step S801, “10” is set in the confirmation target counter. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the 1st to 15th buffers 202a to 202o is changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 143 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth buffers 202a to 202o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth buffer 202j is the confirmation target of the numerical information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 202e is the confirmation target of the numerical information. ..

If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC195 (step S803). Then, the writing process to the history memory 197 is executed (step S804). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 204 currently being written is specified by referring to the pointer area 206 of the history memory 197, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S803 is written in the history information storage area 205 of the history area 204. Further, the correspondence relation information is read from the correspondence relation areas 203a to 203o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, and the correspondence relation information is written in the history information storage area 205 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, when the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set, the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is used, the above Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 205 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth correspondence area 203a to 203o is the target for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth correspondence area 203j is the target for reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 203e is the correspondence relation. Information is to be read out.

When the writing process is executed as described above, the value of the confirmation target counter is any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. In the history information storage area 205 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 The combination of the correspondence information indicating that the information is one of the above and the correspondence information is stored as history information. Further, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 205 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. The combination of the correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

After that, the target pointer update process is executed (step S805). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 206 of the history memory 197 is read and added by 1. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 204. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 206 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 206 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

When a negative determination is made in step S802, or when the process of step S805 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level in the corresponding related areas 203a to 203o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter is determined. It is determined whether or not the correspondence information to be confirmed is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the value of the current confirmation target counter is "8" to "10", the corresponding corresponding area 203h to 203j is provided with information indicating that the open / close execution mode is used, and the high frequency support mode is used. Since either the information indicating that the door frame is present or the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S806.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o is changed from "1" to "0". By confirming whether or not the buffer has been output, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 143 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S807). If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the RTC information is read (step S808) and a write process to the history memory 197 is executed (step S809) in the same manner as in step S803. In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 205 of the history area 204 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, the correspondence relation information is read from the correspondence relation areas 203a to 203o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, and the correspondence relation information is written in the history information storage area 205 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 205 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the pointer information to be written is supported. In the history information storage area 205, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as history information. It will be in the state of being done. After that, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S805 (step S810).

When a negative determination is made in step S806, a negative determination is made in step S807, or the process of step S810 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 194 is subtracted by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S812). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S812: NO), the processing after step S802 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

Next, the state in which the history information is stored in the history memory 197 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 30A shows a period in which the HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g, and FIG. 30B shows the period in which the HI level signal is input to the eighth buffer 202h. 30 (c) shows the period during which the HI level signal is input to the 9th buffer 202i, and FIG. 30 (d) shows the period during which the HI level signal is input to the 10th buffer 202j. The period is shown, and FIG. 30 (e) shows the timing of writing the history information to the history memory 197.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 30A, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 197 at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 30 (e). After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 30A, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level. However, since the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g and the switching of the LOW level is not the storage target of the history information, FIG. 30 (at the timing of t2) As shown in e), the writing of history information is not executed.

After that, at the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 30A, the first to seventh buffers 202a The output state of the signal input to any of ~ 202g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 30 (e).

As shown in FIG. 30B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 202h becomes the HI level from the timing of t4 to the timing of t7. The eighth buffer 202h corresponds to the presence / absence of the open / close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (e), the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 202h is switched to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to the LOW level. History information is written at each of the timings of t7. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t4 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t7 includes the end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the open / close execution mode by checking the history information of the history memory 197.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 197 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, is the history information indicating that the ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the open / close execution mode? It is possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the ball is in the open / close execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 30 (c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 202i becomes the HI level from the timing of t8 to the timing of t11. The ninth buffer 202i corresponds to the presence / absence of the occurrence of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30E, the timing of t8, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 202i switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. History information is written at each of the timings of t11. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t8 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t11 includes the end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the high-frequency support mode by checking the history information of the history memory 197.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 197 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that the ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the high frequency support mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the ball is in the high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 30D, the output state of the signal input to the 10th buffer 202j becomes the HI level from the timing of t12 to the timing of t15. The tenth buffer 202j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30E, the timing of t12, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the 10th buffer 202j is switched to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to the LOW level. History information is written at each of the timings of t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t12 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t15 includes the end information. This makes it possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state by checking the history information of the history memory 197.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 197 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that the ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is being opened. It is possible to distinguish whether it is a thing or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the door is open.

Next, a processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 197 to the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 182 of the MPU 142 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by the main CPU 143. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 15).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182 is received from the reading terminal 182 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when it is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182, and when the connection signal is received through the reading terminal 182, a positive determination is made in step S901. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, the data output process is terminated as it is. In this case, in order for the data output process to be executed, it is necessary to restart the supply of the operating power to the MPU 142. As a result, in order for the history information to be output externally, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the MPU 142 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 182. .. Since the power supply operation unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 142 is provided on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, in order to perform these stop operations and start operations, the outer frame 11 is used. It is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 to expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to enable external output of history information, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 142 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 182. With a certain configuration, even if a person other than the manager of the game hall tries to perform the operation of reading the history information, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the operation.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 182 is made to the main ROM 144 by determining whether or not the control information confirmation signal is received from the reading terminal 182. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the confirmation of the control information (program and data) of (step S902). The reading device has a configuration capable of both checking the control information and checking the history information, and when the checking of the control information is selected by the manual operation of the reading device, the reading device is used to check the control information. A signal is transmitted, and if confirmation of history information is selected by manual operation on the reading device, a signal for checking history is transmitted from the reading device. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the reading device for checking the control information and the reading device for checking the history may be separately configured. In this case, if a reading device for checking control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182, a signal for checking control information is transmitted from the reading device, and a reading for checking history is sent to the reading terminal 182. When the device is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading device.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In the output process, the program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 144, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 182. As a result, the control information can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 182, and it is confirmed whether the control information is legitimate or normal. Can be done.

If a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management side CPU 192 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state is continued for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 192 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 202p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management side CPU 192 executes a process for outputting history information. The process will be described in detail later.

When the process of step S903 is executed or the process of step S904 is executed, it is determined whether or not the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 182 is continued (step S905). If it is continued (step S905: YES), it waits in step S905 as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 182 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 182 is disconnected (step S905: NO), the data output process is terminated.

Next, the external output process executed by the management CPU 192 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 26).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 143 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1001: YES), a process for outputting the history information after step S1002 is executed. Specifically, first, in the history area 204 of the history memory 197, by counting the number of the history information storage areas 205 in which the correspondence information indicating that the out port 24a is stored is stored, the out port 24a is reached. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1002). Further, by counting the number of the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 204 of the history memory 197, the ball is entered into the general winning opening 31. The number is calculated (step S1003). Further, by counting the number of the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is stored in the history area 204 of the history memory 197, the ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32. The number is calculated (step S1004). Further, by counting the number of the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information indicating that the operation port 33 is the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 204 of the history memory 197, the first operation port 33 can be reached. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1005). Further, by counting the number of the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information indicating that the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 204 of the history memory 197 is stored, the second operation port 34 can be reached. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1006).

After that, in the history area 204 of the history memory 197, the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating that the front door frame 14 is used. By referring to the history information storage area 205 existing in the period between the history information storage area 205 and the history information storage area 205 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out port generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The number of balls entered into each of the 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1007). In the history area 204 of the history memory 197, the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, the correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, and the correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 is used. The period between the end information and the history information storage area 205 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 205. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored and the correspondence relationship indicating that the front door frame 14 is used. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 205 in which the information and the end information are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 205 exists. If the history information storage area 205 in which is stored does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 205 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 205 is stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered while the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1007 is open is subtracted from the number of balls entered in each of steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered in step S1002 is defined as the number of balls entered K1 and calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered calculated in step S1003. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 is defined as the number of balls entered K2, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered in step S1004 is defined as the number of balls K3. The difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered in step S1005 was defined as the number of balls entered K4, and was calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered calculated in step S1006. The difference in the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 is defined as the number of balls entered K5.
1st parameter: Total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K3 x "number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "first operating port""Number of prize balls for winning 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning second operating port 34") / Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio) Is "D1")
-Second parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entered into the general winning opening 31 K2 / Ratio of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5)-Third parameter: To the special electric winning device 32 Total number of game balls B1 K3 / Ratio of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ・ Fourth parameter: Total number of game balls B1 into the first operating port 33 K4 / Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D2").
Fifth parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 K5 / Ratio of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3"). do)
6th parameter: D1- (D2 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + D3 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
7th parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x ""Number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating opening" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning 34") ・ Eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x "general winning opening 31""Number of prize balls for winning" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Prize for winning the second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of balls") After that, it is necessary to extract all the history information that is the target of this calculation by using the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 204 of the history memory 197. The total time is calculated (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all the history information stored in the history area 204 of the history memory 197 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 182. Further, the various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 182, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 182. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 182, each information to be output in the first output process is read.

After that, in the history area 204 of the history memory 197, the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored, the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode, and the correspondence information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set. By referring to the history information storage area 205 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 205 and the history information storage area 205 in which the end information is stored, the out opening 24a and the general winning opening 31 that occurred in the open / closed execution mode. , The number of balls entered into each of the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1011). In the history area 204 of the history memory 197, the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored, and the correspondence information and the end information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored. The period between the history information storage area 205 and the history information storage area 205 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 205. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the open / close execution mode is stored, the correspondence information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set, and the correspondence information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set are stored. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 205 in which the end information is stored, the total number of balls entered in the sections is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the open / close execution mode is stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 205 exists. When the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are not stored in the stored history information storage area 205, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 205 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 205 is stored is treated as in the open / close execution mode.

After that, during the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1011, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the out port 24a, which occurred when the front door frame 14 was in the open state, The number of balls entering each of the second actuating openings 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as that of step S1007, except that the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1011 is premised.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1011 and S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of each ball entered while the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1012 is open is subtracted from each number of balls entered in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1012 is defined as the number of balls K11, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1011 is entered. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls entered K12. Let the difference in the number of balls entered in 32 be the number of balls entered K13, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1011. The number K14 is defined, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1012 is defined as the number of balls K15.
11th parameter: Total number of game balls B1 paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "first operating port""Number of prize balls for winning 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning second operating port 34") / Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio) Is "D11")
12th parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entered into the general winning opening 31 K12 / Ratio of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) 13th parameter: To the special electric winning device 32 Total number of game balls B1 K13 / Ratio of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) 14th parameter: Total number of game balls B1 to the first operating port 33 K14 / Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D12").
Fifteenth parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 K15 / Ratio of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D13"). do)
16th parameter: D11- (D12 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + D13 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K15 x "number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K12 x ""Number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of winning balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Second operating opening" Ratio of (number of prize balls for winning 34) 18th parameter: K13 x "number of prize balls for winning special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K12 x "general winning opening 31""Number of prize balls for winning" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Prize for winning the second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of balls") Then, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 182. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 182, each information to be output in the second output process is read.

After that, in the history area 204 of the history memory 197, the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating that the high frequency support mode is set. By referring to the history information storage area 205 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 205 and the history information storage area 205 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out port 24a generated in the high frequency support mode, general The number of balls entered into each of the winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1015). The history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set in the history area 204 of the history memory 197, the correspondence information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the correspondence information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set are stored. The period between the end information and the history information storage area 205 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 205. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is stored and the correspondence relationship indicating that the high frequency support mode is used are stored. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 205 in which the information and the end information are stored, the total number of balls entered in the sections is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 205 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 205 exists. If the history information storage area 205 in which is stored does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is stored are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 205 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 205 is stored is treated as in the high frequency support mode.

After that, during the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1015, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating port 33 that occurred when the front door frame 14 was in the open state. And the number of balls entering each of the second actuating openings 34 is calculated (step S1016). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as that of step S1007, except that the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1015 is premised.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1015 and S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, from each number of balls entered in step S1015, the number of balls entered while the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1016 is open is subtracted. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of balls entered K21, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1015 is entered. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls entered K22, and the special electric winning device calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls entered in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1015. Let the difference in the number of balls entered in 32 be the number of balls entered K23, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1015. The number K24 is defined, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1016 is defined as the number of balls K25.
21st parameter: Total number of game balls B1 paid out (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K23 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "first operating port""Number of prize balls for winning 33" + K25 x "Number of prize balls for winning second operating port 34") / Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio) Is "D11")
22nd parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entered into the general winning opening 31 K22 / Ratio of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ・ 23rd parameter: To the special electric winning device 32 Total number of game balls B1 K23 / Ratio of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ・ 24th parameter: Total number of game balls B1 into the first operating port 33 K24 / Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D22").
25th parameter: Total number of game balls B1 inserted into the second operating port 34 K25 / Ratio of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”). do)
26th parameter: D21- (D22 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + D23 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
After that, the third output process is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 182. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 182, each information to be output in the third output process is read. After that, the clearing process is executed (step S1019). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 205 of the history memory 197 are cleared by "0", and the pointer area 206 is cleared by "0". As a result, the history area 204 is in the initialized state.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The design unit 44 has a closed state in which the design 44a can be displayed in front of the rear guide portions 57, 72 and the rear passage portions 49a, 50a, and the game ball B1 and the rear passage portion 49a guided by the rear guide portions 57, 72. It is provided with design pieces 51 to 54 capable of switching the game ball B1 flowing down the 50a from the open state that can be visually recognized from the front. As a result, the design 44a whose state can be switched can be displayed in front of the flow path of the game ball B1, and the appearance decoration of the game board 24 can be improved.

A pair of left and right first design pieces 51 and 52 that rotate at the same time are fixed to the left and right of the rear passage portions 49a and 50a. With this configuration, the movement of the design surface accompanying the movement of the game ball B1 is complicated as compared with the configuration in which the first design pieces 51 and 52 are independently fixed to only one side of the rear passage portions 49a and 50a. It becomes possible to make it. This makes it easier to attract the attention of the player to the design unit 44.

The combination of the pair of left and right first design pieces 51, 52 and the pair of left and right second design pieces 53, 54 in contact with the first design pieces 51, 52 from the outside is the upstream side and the downstream side of the design unit 44. It is possible to generate the opening / closing operation of the design pieces 51 to 54 a plurality of times for one game ball B1 by the configuration in which a plurality of the design pieces are arranged in parallel. Further, by allowing all the game balls B1 flowing down the right area PA1 to flow into the design unit 44, the frequency of entering the upper passage portion 46a of the game balls B1 flowing down the right area PA1 is increased. .. With these configurations, the frequency of state switching of the design pieces 51 to 54 in the design unit 44 is increased, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player to the design unit 44.

The design pieces 51 to 54 are opened when the game ball B1 comes into contact with the first design pieces 51 and 52, and the contact state between the game ball B1 and the first design pieces 51 and 52 is canceled in the open state. Will continue until. Therefore, the design pieces 51 to 54 are opened only during the period in which the game ball B1 passes through the rear positions of the first design pieces 51 and 52 in the closed state without using a sensor or the like for detecting the game ball B1. be able to. As a result, the configuration of the design unit 44 can be simplified as compared with the configuration using a sensor or the like, and the space occupied by the design unit 44 in the game board 24 can be reduced.

The state of the design pieces 51 to 54 arranged side by side along the flow direction of the game ball B1 is switched in order from the upstream side. Therefore, by checking the open design pieces 51 to 54 from the front, it is possible to grasp the rough flow position of the game ball B1 without paying attention only to the design unit 44.

The second design pieces 53 and 54 are used to apply an inward force to the first design pieces 51 and 52 to return the first design pieces 51 and 52 to the closed state. Therefore, as the shape of the first design pieces 51 and 52, it is possible to adopt a shape that cannot be returned to the closed state by itself. As a result, the degree of freedom in design is increased with respect to the shapes of the first design pieces 51 and 52. As the shape of the first design pieces 51 and 52, the lateral dimension of the design unit 44 is suppressed by adopting a shape in which the distance from the left end of the left side first design piece 51 to the right end of the right side first design piece 52 is shortened. This makes it possible to reduce the space occupied by the design unit 44 in the game board 24.

When the second design pieces 53, 54 are in the closed state, the main body portions 53a, 54a exist directly below the second rotation shaft 86 and outside the second rotation shaft 86. The second design piece necessary for returning the first design pieces 51 and 52 to the closed state by having the main body portions 53a and 54a not having a region existing inward of the second rotation shaft 86. The volumes of 53 and 54 are suppressed. As a result, the lateral dimension of the design unit 44 is suppressed.

By suppressing the depth dimension of the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a in the first design pieces 51 and 52, the volume inside the first design pieces 51 and 52 is suppressed from the first rotation shaft 85. The weight of the second design piece 53, 54 required to return the first design piece 51, 52 to the closed state is suppressed. In this configuration, the second design pieces 53, 54 are housed in the first design pieces 51, 52 by accommodating most of the second design pieces 53, 54 between the plate-shaped front portions 51a, 52a and the base body 45. Compared with the configuration in which the first design pieces 51 and 52 are arranged outside the first design pieces 51 and 52 without overlapping in the front-rear direction, the lateral protrusion dimension of the second design pieces 53 and 54 is reduced, and the lateral direction of the design unit 44 is reduced. The dimensions have been reduced.

The design unit 44 that guides the game ball B1 downward is provided with rear guide portions 57, 72 that guide the game ball B1 backward, and front guide protrusions 66, 76 that guide the game ball B1 forward. .. By moving the game ball B1 guided downward back and forth, the game ball B1 can be decelerated. As a result, the period in which the design pieces 51 to 54 are in the open state can be extended, and the time for the player to visually recognize the game ball B1 passing through the rear passage portions 49a and 50a from the front can be secured.

Further outward rotation of the first design pieces 51 and 52, which are already in the open state, is restricted by the left side wall portion 49j and the right side wall portion 49i of the upper rear passage forming body 49. This makes it possible to always shift the design pieces 51 to 54 to a predetermined open state without being affected by the flow speed of the game ball B1 when it comes into contact with the rotating standing wall portions 51d and 52d. ..

Further inward rotation of the first design pieces 51 and 52, which are already closed, is restricted by the central front plate portion 47e. As a result, even when the balance of the forces that the left and right design pieces 51 to 54 try to rotate inward is lost, the left and right plate-shaped front portions 51a, which are always in front of the center in the lateral direction of the upper rear passage portion 49a, It can be in a predetermined closed state in which 52a is closed.

In the front plate portions 46d, 47e, 48d of the passage portions 46a to 48a provided on the front surface side of the base body 45, the transparent region where the game ball B1 passing through the passage portions 46a to 48a can be visually recognized from the front is the game ball B1. It is limited to the central region 83, which is smaller in width than the diameter of. By limiting the range visible from the front to a part of the game ball B1, the movement of the game ball B1 can be grasped from the front, and the lateral dimension of the central region 83 in which the design 44a cannot be attached on the front surface of the design unit 44. It is possible to secure a wide area where the design 44a can be attached to the front surface of the design unit 44.

When the game ball B1 enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating opening 34, the game ball B1 is paid out, so that the player can use these entry sections. The game is played while expecting that the game ball B1 enters one of them. In the configuration, the game ball B1 is inserted into any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as a history target ball entry section). When a sphere is generated, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 197 of the management IC 146. This makes it possible for the pachinko machine 10 to store and retain information for managing the number of balls and the frequency of balls of the game ball B1 in each history target ball entry section, and this managed information is used. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the ball entry mode of the game ball B1 into each history target ball entry section. Further, since the history information is stored and retained by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information.

All the ball entry portions that discharge the game ball B1 from the game area PA are subject to execution of the storage process of the history information and are subject to management using the history information. This makes it possible to manage the ball entry frequency for any history target ball entry unit by using the history information. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of the game balls B1 to each history target ball entry unit to the number of the game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA by using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information which is information corresponding to the timing when the game ball B1 enters the history target ball entry portion which is an opportunity to store the history information. As a result, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the ball entry history of the game ball B1 to the history target ball entry section.

In the history memory 197, not only the history information corresponding to the entry of the game ball B1 into the history target entry portion, but also the history information indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in the open / closed execution mode, and in the high frequency support mode. History information indicating whether or not there is, and history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open are stored. This makes it possible to distinguish whether or not each of these situations is the case, and to manage the ball entry mode of the game ball B1 into the history target ball entry section.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 197 to a reading device which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information with the reading device and analyze the ball entry mode of the game ball B1 into the history target ball entry section using the read history information.

The MPU 142 is provided with a reading terminal 182, and a program can be read from the main ROM 144 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 182. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 197 is externally output by using the reading terminal 182 for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to output the history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

It is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 182 is the program or the history information, and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 182. As a result, in a configuration in which history information is externally output using the reading terminal 182 for externally outputting the program, the pachinko machine 10 determines which of the program and the history information is the target information for external output. It is specified on the side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, even if the reading terminal 182 is also used, it is possible to read only the necessary information.

Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 182, it is specified which of the program and the history information is the information to be output from the reading terminal 182. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of information to be output externally from becoming complicated.

The MPU 142 having the main ROM 144 storing the program in advance has the management IC 146 and the reading terminal 182. As a result, the signal path for the reading terminal 182 can be integrated in the MPU 142. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 182.

A main process for executing a process for paying out the game ball B1 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. A management side CPU 192 is provided separately from the side CPU 143, and the management side CPU 192 executes a process for storing the history information in the history memory 197. This makes it possible to manage the ball entry mode of the game ball B1 into each history target ball entry section while preventing the processing load of the main CPU 143 from increasing extremely.

The main CPU 143 and the management CPU 192 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 142. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 143 and the management CPU 192.

The main CPU 143 inputs information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a to each buffer of the input port 201 of the management IC 146 by using the signal path corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a. It is transmitted to 202a to 202g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 143 corresponds to each buffer 202a to 202g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management side CPU 192 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

The main CPU 143 has information corresponding to whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode, information corresponding to whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode, and information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Is transmitted to the buffers 202h to 202j of the input port 201 of the management IC 146 by using the signal path corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to each of these situations correspond to the buffers 202h to 202j (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information on the management side CPU 192 is simplified. It becomes possible.

The main CPU 143 transmits to the management side CPU 192 the correspondence information indicating which type of information each buffer 202a to 202j (that is, each signal path 198a to 198j) corresponds to. As a result, it is not necessary to store the correspondence information in the management IC 146 in advance. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 146.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146. As a result, in a situation where the game ball B1 may enter the history target ball entry section, the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the main CPU 143 and the history target entry section can be specified by the management IC 146. It is possible to make it.

Correspondence-related information is transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146 by using the signal paths 198a to 198g for transmitting information indicating whether or not the game ball B1 has entered the history target ball entry unit. This makes it possible to simplify the communication-related configuration as compared with the configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence information is provided.

The management IC 146 is provided with a correspondence memory 196, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146 is stored in the correspondence memory 196. As a result, every time the main CPU 143 transmits the information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a, the information that enables the history target ball entry unit corresponding to the transmission target information to be specified by the management IC 146 is transmitted. No need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a transmitted from the main CPU 143.

By switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146 from the LOW level to the HI level, information is output from the management IC 146 to the reading terminal 182. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 202p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management side CPU 192 without receiving the correspondence information from the main side CPU 143. .. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 146 is provided with a number of buffers 202a to 202p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 143, which is larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146. Has been done. As a result, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration related to the buffers 202a to 202p. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 146.

When the history information is transmitted from the management IC 146 to the reading terminal 182, the corresponding history information includes the correspondence information indicating the type of the history target ball entry unit corresponding to the history information. This makes it possible to specify the ball entry mode of the game ball B1 into each history target ball entry portion by using the read history information.

By using the history information stored in the history memory 197 in the management IC 146, various parameters (1st to 8th, 11th to 18th) corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in a predetermined period are used. , 21-26 parameters) are calculated. This makes it possible to externally output various parameters that are the result of calculation using the history information.

Various parameters are calculated in a state where the history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. In addition, various parameters corresponding to the situation of the open / close execution mode and the situation of the high frequency support mode are calculated. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the entry mode of the game ball B1 according to each situation.

When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 197 is initialized by executing the clearing process of the history memory 197. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 197 becomes a storage target in the history memory 197, and the history information that should be stored and retained is erased by overwriting. Can be made less likely to occur.

When various parameters are output to the reading terminal 182, the history information stored in the history memory 197 is also output to the reading terminal 182. This makes it possible to refer not only to the various parameters but also to the history information that is the basis for the calculation of the various parameters when the various parameters are read out and the entry mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is analyzed. ..

The management side CPU 192 calculates various parameters when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of calculating various parameters.

It is specified by the main CPU 143 that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182, and when the output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 143, various parameters are calculated by the management IC 146. , Various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 182. This makes it possible to output various parameters to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on the instruction from the main CPU 143.

Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182 is specified by the process at the start of supply of the operating power executed by the main CPU 143, and the reading device is electrically connected. Is specified, the output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146. As a result, in a situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed by the main CPU 143 or the like, that is, in a situation before the normal processing for advancing the game is started in the main CPU 143, various situations are required. The calculation of the parameters and the external output of various parameters of the calculation results are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation result in the situation where the game ball B1 may enter the history target ball entry section, and the processing load of the management IC 146. Can be reduced.

In a configuration in which when the game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the corresponding external output is performed through the external terminal board 177, the history information is stored in the history memory 197. To. As a result, by using the information output externally through the external terminal board 177, the number and frequency of the game balls B1 entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be easily grasped. By using the history information stored in the history memory 197, it is possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of the game balls B1 entering the history target entry portion.

<Another form of the first embodiment>
-The configuration for suppressing the flow speed of the game ball B1 is not limited to the configuration in which the game ball B1 is guided downward while moving back and forth. For example, a bent portion may be provided in the upper passage portion 46a and the central passage portion 47a. By guiding the game ball B1 downward while moving it left and right in the upper passage portion 46a, the game ball B1 immediately before coming into contact with the upper first design pieces 51 and 52 can be decelerated, and the game is played in the central passage portion 47a. By guiding the ball B1 downward while moving it left and right, it is possible to decelerate the game ball B1 immediately before contacting the lower first design pieces 51 and 52. By bringing the decelerated game ball B1 into contact with the design pieces 51 to 54, the duration of the open state of the design pieces 51 to 54 is extended, and the player can play the game from between the left and right first design pieces 51 and 52. It is possible to make the sphere B1 easily visible.

The left and right plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a may be configured to have an opaque region having an opaque design 44a and a transparent transparent region. Specifically, a plurality of opaque regions are discretely set on the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a made of transparent resin. On the other hand, in the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a, the region other than the opaque region is a transparent region in which the rear can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the left and right first design pieces 51 and 52 are in the closed state, the rear portion of the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a is partially visible from the transparent region. In this case, by shifting the first design pieces 51 and 52 from the closed state to the open state, the peripheral areas of the rear guide portions 57 and 72 and the rear passage portions 49a and 50a are changed from a difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state. It will be possible to migrate.

-The number of transparent regions set in the front plate portions 46d, 47e, 48d of the upper passage forming body 46, the central passage forming body 47, and the lower passage forming body 48 fixed to the front side of the base body 45 is two or more. May be. For example, by setting a transparent region in which the rear can be seen in the vicinity of the left end and the right end of the front plate portions 46d, 47e, and 48d, the left part and the right part of the game ball B1 can be visually recognized at the same time. be able to. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp the movement of the game ball B1 from the front while securing an area in which the design 44a can be displayed on the front surface of the front plate portions 46d, 47e, 48d.

The left side that allows the duration of the open state to be extended until the game ball B1 is guided by the front guide protrusion 66 and returns to the front of the base body 45 instead of the left side first design piece 51 and the right side first design piece 52. It may be configured to include an extension design piece and a right extension design piece. Specifically, the extension design piece is provided with an extension rear contact portion in place of the rear contact portions 51f and 52f, and the extension contact portion is integrally formed at the lower end of the extension rear contact portion. It is different from the above-mentioned first design pieces 51 and 52.

In the upper rear passage portion 49a, the right extension rear contact portion provided on the right extension design piece extends slightly below the left extension rear contact portion provided on the left extension design piece. The left and right extension contact portions provided in the left and right extension rear contact portions extend to substantially the same front position as the upper through hole 58 provided in the base body 45. The left and right extended contact portions are offset vertically. This prevents the left and right extension contact portions from coming into contact with each other in the process of opening and closing the extension design piece.

Further, the left and right extended contact portions are inclined downward toward the front. As a result, it is avoided that the left and right extension contact portions come into contact with the front guide protrusion 66 in the process of opening and closing the extension design piece. The left and right extended contact portions are not tilted laterally. Therefore, when the left and right extension design pieces are moved to the open state, the left extension contact portion moves to the vicinity of the left wall portion 49j of the upper rear passage forming body 49, and the right extension contact portion is the upper rear passage forming body 49. It moves to the vicinity of the right side wall portion 49i.

In a situation where the game ball B1 flowing down the upper rear passage portion 49a moves forward while being guided by the front guide protrusion 66, the left and right extended contact portions are present at a height position capable of contacting the game ball B1. At the same time, it exists on the left side and the right side of the game ball B1 in a manner of sandwiching the game ball B1. The game ball B1 passes between the left and right extended contact portions and returns to the front of the base body 45 while contacting the left and right extended contact portions.

In this process, the game ball B1 prevents the left and right extended design pieces from rotating in the direction of returning to the closed state. By providing the extension contact portion and extending the duration of the open state of the extension design piece, it is possible to facilitate the visual recognition of the game ball B1 guided by the front guide protrusion 66 from the front.

A lighting device that emits light according to the passage of the game ball B1 may be provided behind the rear passage forming bodies 49 and 50. Specifically, the rear passage forming bodies 49 and 50 are formed by using a resin material that can transmit light such as polycarbonate.

The depth dimension of the recessed portion (not shown) of the game board 24 in which the rear passage forming bodies 49 and 50 are housed is set to be larger than the depth dimension of the rear passage forming bodies 49 and 50, and the rear passage forming body 49 is set. A LED substrate in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged on the front side is fixed behind the 50. The upper LED board provided behind the upper rear passage forming body 49 and the lower LED board provided behind the lower rear passage forming body 50 are individually connected to the main control board 141. The main CPU 143 individually controls the light emission of the upper and lower LED boards.

In the game board 24, a distance measuring unit provided with a detection unit is provided at a position behind the design portion 105b of the right design member 105 and hidden behind the main body portion 54a of the right second design piece 54 in the open state. A sensor is provided. The distance measuring sensor is accommodated and fixed in a recess formed on the front side of the game board 24 in such a manner that the detection unit is present at a front position substantially the same as the front surface of the game board 24.

When the design pieces 51 to 54 are in the closed state, the design portion 105b is present in front of the detection portion. On the other hand, when the design pieces 51 to 54 are in the open state, the colored opaque second design piece 54 on the right side is present in the vicinity of the front of the detection unit. Therefore, the detection distance of the distance measuring sensor becomes short in the transition from the closed state to the open state and becomes long in the return from the open state to the closed state. The detection distance in the closed state and the detection distance in the open state are experimentally obtained, and the main ROM 144 stores an intermediate value between the detection distance in the closed state and the detection distance in the open state as a reference value for determining the state. Has been done.

The upper ranging sensor for determining the state of the upper design pieces 51 to 54 and the lower ranging sensor for determining the state of the lower design pieces 51 to 54 are individually connected to the main control board 141. The main CPU 143 receives the detection results of the upper and lower ranging sensors in the read process (S208 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16)).

The main CPU 143 lights the LED provided on the corresponding LED board when the detection distance of each distance measuring sensor changes from a state shorter than the reference value to a state longer than the reference value, and the detection distance is longer than the reference value. The LED provided on the corresponding LED board is turned off when the state changes from 1 to short. Therefore, the upper rear passage forming body 49 is illuminated during the period when the upper design pieces 51 to 54 are in the open state, and the lower rear passage forming body 50 is illuminated during the period when the lower design pieces 51 to 54 are in the open state. Is illuminated.

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the game ball B1 that passes through the region extending from the rear guide portions 57 and 72 to the rear passage portions 49a and 50a. As the game ball B1 moves, the illuminated object switches from the upper rear passage forming body 49 to the lower rear passage forming body 50, so that the player can roughly position the game ball B1 flowing down in the design unit 44. Can be easily grasped.

-Instead of the design unit 44 that opens and closes the design pieces 51 to 54 by using the gravity acting on the game ball B1, an electric design unit that opens and closes the electric ready design piece by using an electric drive device is provided. May be. Specifically, the design unit 44 described above is provided with a pair of left and right electric ready design pieces and a left and right motors in place of the left and right first rotation shafts 85. Is different from.

The left and right motors have a housing-shaped main body portion and a rotating shaft portion extending forward from the front surface of the main body portion, and are screw-fixed to the back surface side of the base body 45. The rotation shaft portion of the motor is inserted into a through hole formed in the base body 45, and projects vertically forward from the front surface of the base body 45. The rotation shaft portions of the left and right motors are present at the same positions as the left and right first rotation shafts 85 in the first embodiment.

The left and right electric preparation pieces are provided with electric fixing portions instead of the fixing portions 87 and 88, and the rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d, rod-shaped contact portions 51e and 52e, and rear contact portions 51f and 52f. Is different from the above-mentioned first design pieces 51 and 52 in that the above-mentioned is not provided.

The electric fixing portion is provided with a fixing hole having substantially the same diameter as the rotating shaft portion, and the rotating shaft portion is fixed by an adhesive or the like while being inserted into the fixing hole. The electric preparation piece rotates integrally with the rotating shaft portion by driving the motor and rotating the rotating shaft portion. The pair of left and right electrically prepared design pieces are located at the same positions as the upper first design pieces 51 and 52 and at the same positions as the lower first design pieces 51 and 52, respectively, in the first embodiment. It is fixed in pairs.

The motor is connected to the main control board 141. Further, on the back side of the base body 45, the upper detection sensor is fixed at the rear position of the upper passage portion 46a, and the lower detection sensor is fixed at the rear position of the lower passage portion 48a. The upper detection sensor can detect the game ball B1 flowing into the upper passage portion 46a, and the lower detection sensor can detect the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet 267. The upper detection sensor and the lower detection sensor are connected to the main control board 141.

The main RAM 145 is provided with a game ball counter that counts the number of game balls B1 existing in the passage area extending from the upper passage portion 46a to the lower passage portion 48a. In the read process (S208 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16)), the main CPU 143 receives signals from the upper detection sensor and the lower detection sensor and updates the game ball counter.

The main CPU 143 adds "1" to the game ball counter when the detection signal received from the upper detection sensor rises from the non-detecting LOW state to the detecting HI state, and also from the upper outflow detection sensor. When the detection signal to be received rises from the LOW state during non-detection to the HI state during detection, "1" is subtracted from the game ball counter. Therefore, the value of the game ball counter becomes "0" in the situation where the game ball B1 does not exist in the passage area described above, and "1" in the situation where the game ball B1 exists in the passage area. It becomes more than.

When the main CPU 143 determines that the value of the game ball counter has changed from "0" to "1", the main CPU 143 drives and controls the motor on the left side so that the rotation shaft portion rotates clockwise, and rotates. Drive and control the motor on the right side so that the shaft rotates counterclockwise. As a result, the left and right electric preparation pieces are opened. The electric preparation piece is opened in the process in which the upper detection sensor detects the game ball B1 and then the game ball B1 flows down to the height position of the upper electric preparation piece.

A gap slightly larger than that of the game ball B1 is generated between the left and right electric design pieces that have been opened. As a result, after being guided by the upper rear guide portion 57, the game ball B1 flowing down the upper rear passage portion 49a can be visually recognized from between the left and right electric preparation pieces provided on the upper side, and the lower rear plan. After being guided to the inside 72, the game ball B1 flowing down the lower rear passage portion 50a becomes visible from between the left and right electric preparation pieces provided on the lower side.

When the main CPU 143 determines that the value of the game ball counter has changed from "1" to "0", the main CPU 143 drives and controls the motor on the left side so that the rotation shaft portion rotates counterclockwise, and also rotates. Drive and control the motor on the right side so that the drive shaft rotates clockwise. As a result, the left and right electric preparation pieces are returned to the closed state.

As described above, by driving and controlling the motor, the electric preparation piece can be opened and closed regardless of the position of the center of gravity of the electric preparation piece with respect to the rotating shaft portion. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the shapes and dimensions of the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a, and enhance the decorativeness of the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a.

The configuration for opening and closing the design pieces 51 to 54 is not limited to the configuration in which the design pieces 51 to 54 rotate around the rotation shafts 85 and 86. For example, a pair of left and right slide design pieces slide along a pair of left and right rails (groove forming bodies) that are inclined downward toward the inward direction (direction from the left and right of the design unit 44 toward the center). It may be configured to open and close.

Specifically, a pair of left and right upper groove forming bodies and a pair of left and right lower groove forming bodies are fixed to the left and right of the upper through hole 58 on the front surface of the base body 45. The upper groove forming body on the left side is paired up and down with the lower groove forming body on the left side, and the upper groove forming body on the right side is paired up and down with the lower groove forming body on the right side. Each groove forming body is formed in a plate shape and stands upright from the front surface of the base body 45. Grooves capable of guiding the slide design piece are formed on the lower plane of the upper groove forming body and the upper plane of the lower groove forming body.

The slide design piece is formed by providing a slide protrusion portion that fits into the groove formed in the groove forming body in a slidable manner in place of the fixing portions 87 and 88 on the first design pieces 51 and 52 described above. Has been done. The left and right slide protrusions are provided on the outer upper part of the left and right slide design pieces and are fitted into the grooves of the upper groove forming body, and are inclined downward inward along the upper groove forming body. .. The lower portions of the left and right plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a are slidably fitted in the grooves of the lower gutter forming body, and are inclined downward inward along the lower groove forming body.

The upper and lower groove forming bodies provided on the left and right of the upper through hole 58 are inclined downward inward, and the slide design piece is inwardly oriented in a situation where the slide design piece is not in contact with the game ball B1. I will guide you towards. As a result, the slide design piece is closed in front of the upper rear guide portion 57 and the upper rear passage portion 49a.

Instead of the above-mentioned rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d, the left and right slide design pieces come into contact with the game ball B1 and the left slide design piece slides to the left, and the right slide design piece slides to the right. It is equipped with a slide upright wall that allows it to slide on. The configuration of the slide upright wall portion is the same as the configuration of the rotating upright wall portions 51d and 52d. The left and right slide upright wall portions exist between the upper passage portion 46a and the upper rear guide portion 57, and are inclined downward toward the inside.

The force applied to the slide upright wall portion on the left side by the game ball B1 flowing down and contacting the upper passage portion 46a contains a component in the left direction, and the game ball B1 in contact applies to the slide upright wall portion on the right side. The force contains a component in the right direction. Therefore, the left and right slide design pieces slide left and right along the grooves of the upper and lower groove forming bodies to be in the open state. As a result, the game ball B1 existing between the left and right slide design pieces can be visually recognized from the front.

The left and right slide design pieces are provided with the rod-shaped contact portions 51e and 52e described above, and are provided with a slide rear contact portion. The slide rear contact portion differs from the above-mentioned rear contact portions 51f and 52f in that it extends in the vertical direction in both the closed state and the open state.

While the game ball B1 is guided by the upper rear guide portion 57 and moves backward, the left and right slide design pieces of the game ball B1 existing between the left and right rod-shaped contact portions 51e and 52e are in a closed state. Prevents sliding in the direction of returning to. Further, while the game ball B1 is flowing down the upper rear passage portion 49a until it starts to be guided by the front guide protrusion portion 76, the game ball B1 existing between the left and right slide rear contact portions is the left and right slide design pieces. Prevents it from sliding in the direction of returning to the closed state. Therefore, the left and right slide design pieces are maintained in the open state from the time when the game ball B1 is guided to the upper rear guide portion 57 until the game ball B1 starts to be guided to the front guide protrusion portion 76, and the game ball is maintained. B1 becomes visible from the front.

After that, the contact state between the game ball B1 guided by the front guide protrusion 76 and moving forward and the slide rear contact portion is eliminated, so that the force for maintaining the open state of the slide design piece is lost. Therefore, the left and right slide design pieces slide inward along the groove forming body and are closed.

As described above, in the configuration in which the slide design piece slides along the groove forming body, it is possible to return to the closed state by the slide design piece alone, so that the passage portion 46a to the passage portion 46a while suppressing the lateral dimension of the design unit 44. The game ball B1 flowing down the 50a can be visually recognized from the front.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the design unit 211 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

33 is a front view of the game board 212 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 34 is a front view of the design unit 211 shown separately from the game board 212. As shown in FIG. 33, in the right side region PA1 of the game board 212, an opaque design 211a (FIG. 34) is displayed and the rear is invisible, and the game ball B1 flowing down the rear is visible. A design unit 211 having switching windows 213 and 214 that can be switched between the open state and the open state is provided.

FIG. 35 is a perspective view of the design unit 211 shown in an exploded manner. In addition, in FIG. 35, the illustration of the design 211a (FIG. 34) is omitted. As shown in FIG. 35, the design unit 211 includes a plate-shaped base body 215, a housing 216 in which switching window portions 213 and 214 are provided vertically and fixed to the front side of the base body 215, and a base body. Upper and lower design pieces that rotate around the upper and lower rotating shafts 217 and 218 sandwiched between the 215 and the housing 216 to switch the state of the upper and lower switching windows 213 and 214. It is provided with 219,221 and a weight 222 attached to each design piece 219,221 so that the switching window portions 213 and 214 can be returned to the closed state.

The housing 216 is formed by using a transparent resin material such as polycarbonate, and is a plate having a horizontally long substantially rectangular region 216a and a rectangular protruding region 216b protruding downward from the lower left side of the substantially rectangular region 216a. It is provided with a rectangular front portion 216c. The front surface of the plate-shaped front portion 216c is a vertical surface. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the back side of the housing 216. As shown in FIG. 36, housing fixing bosses 223 are integrally formed at the four corners of the back surface of the plate-shaped front portion 216c, and the housing fixing boss 223 has screws extending from the back surface to the front halfway position. A hole 223a is formed.

As shown in FIG. 35, the base body 215 is formed in a rectangular shape using a colored opaque resin material such as ABS resin, and has the same horizontal dimension as the horizontal dimension of the substantially rectangular region 216a in the plate-shaped front portion 216c. And has the same vertical dimension as the vertical dimension from the upper end of the substantially rectangular region 216a to the lower end of the protruding region 216b. At the four corners of the base body 215, base through holes 215a that penetrate the base body 215 back and forth corresponding to the screw holes 223a (FIG. 36) formed in the housing fixing boss 223 are formed.

The housing 216 is fixed to the base body 215 by screwing the housing fixing boss 223 (FIG. 36) from the back surface side of the base body 215. In this state, the entire back surface of the plate-shaped front portion 216c faces the front surface of the base body 215 at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 (FIG. 33).

FIG. 37 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the design unit 211 shown by cutting the rear vicinity of the plate-shaped front portion 216c. As shown in FIG. 37, a flow space 224 through which the game ball B1 can pass is provided on the back side of the plate-shaped front portion 216c (FIG. 35) of the housing 216. On the back surface of the plate-shaped front portion 216c, on the right side of the center in the lateral direction, the upper right partition wall portion 225 and the lower right partition wall portion 226 that partition the right side of the flow space 224 are integrally formed. These two partition wall portions 225 and 226 stand upright from the back surface of the plate-shaped front portion 216c to the front surface of the base body 215.

The two compartment wall portions 225 and 226 are vertically separated from each other, and an upper opening 227 is formed between the two compartment wall portions 225 and 226 so that the upper design piece 219 can be inserted. There is. The two compartment wall portions 225 and 226 are intermittently formed over the entire vertical direction of the plate-shaped front portion 216c (FIG. 36), and the upper opening 227 is above the vertical center of the plate-shaped front portion 216c. It is formed closer to each other. The details of the upper design piece 219 and the upper opening 227 will be described later.

On the back surface of the plate-shaped front portion 216c (FIG. 35), to the left of the center in the lateral direction, the upper left partition wall portion 228, the left central partition wall portion 229, and the left lower partition wall portion 231 that partition the left side of the flow space 224. Is integrally formed. Of these, the upper left section wall portion 228 extends vertically downward from the upper end of the plate-shaped front portion 216c to an intermediate position. By providing the upper left partition wall portion 228 so as to be separated from the upper right partition wall portion 225 to the left, an entrance 232 opened upward is formed in the upper right part of the flow space 224.

The entrance 232 is a rectangular opening having a horizontal dimension that is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1 and a depth dimension that is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. The horizontal dimension of the entrance 232 is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1, and the game ball B1 can enter the flow-down space 224 from the entrance 232. Since the lateral dimension of the entrance 232 is set large, it is easy for the game ball B1 flowing down the right side region PA1 (FIG. 33) to enter the entrance 232, and the ball stays in the vicinity of the entrance 232 of the game ball B1. Is prevented.

The left central partition wall portion 229 and the lower left partition wall portion 231 are provided vertically separated from the upper left partition wall portion 228, and are below between these two partition wall portions 229 and 231. A lower opening 233 is formed to allow the side design piece 221 to be inserted.

The left central partition wall portion 229 and the lower left partition wall portion 231 are formed intermittently from a height position slightly above the lower end of the upper left partition wall portion 228 to the lower end of the plate-shaped front portion 216c (FIG. 36). The lower opening 233 is formed below the center of the plate-shaped front portion 216c in the vertical direction. The details of the lower design piece 221 and the lower opening 233 will be described later.

The depth dimension of the flow-down space 224 is one size larger than the diameter of the game ball B1, and the game ball B1 that has entered the entrance 232 can flow down the flow-down space 224. Further, since the depth dimension of the flow-down space 224 is less than twice the diameter of the game ball B1, it is impossible to flow down the flow-down space 224 with a plurality of game balls B1 arranged in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 36, an inclined wall portion 234 that guides the game ball B1 (FIG. 37) that has entered the entrance 232 to the right end of the flow-down space 224 is integrally formed on the back surface of the plate-shaped front portion 216c. The inclined wall portion 234 stands upright to the front surface of the base body 215 (FIG. 37), and extends from the upper end of the left central partition wall portion 229 to the intermediate position in the lateral direction of the entrance 232 via the lower end of the upper left partition wall portion 228. It is postponed.

As shown in FIG. 37, the inclined wall portion 234 is inclined downward toward the right, and the tip of the inclined wall portion 234 is located in the upper right section at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. It faces the wall part 225. Between the inclined wall portion 234 and the upper right section wall portion 225, a flow opening 235 through which the game balls B1 can pass in one row is provided.

The downward flow start position of the game ball B1 that has entered the entrance 232 is limited to the flow opening 235 by the inclined wall portion 234. As shown in FIG. 34, in the entire lateral direction of the inlet 232 in the upper part of the plate-shaped front portion 216c, the game ball B1 from entering the inlet 232 to falling downward from the flow opening 235 (FIG. 37). A recessed portion 236 is formed so that a part of the upper side of the surface can be visually recognized from the front.

As shown in FIG. 34, the region located in front of the flow-down space 224 (FIG. 37) in the plate-shaped front portion 216c is visible so that at least a part of the game ball B1 flowing down the flow-down space 224 is always visible from the front. The area is 237. In the visible area 237, the upper switchable state can be switched between a closed state in which the opaque design 211a is displayed and the rear is invisible, and an open state in which the game ball B1 flowing down the rear is visible. A window portion 213 and a lower switching window portion 214 are provided. These two switching window portions 213 and 214 are provided so as to be vertically separated from each other.

The switching window portions 213 and 214 have a trapezoidal shape and are provided over substantially the entire lateral direction in the visible region 237. The distance from the right end of the flow space 224 (FIG. 37) to the right end of the switching windows 213 and 214 and the distance from the left end of the flow space 224 to the left end of the switching windows 213 and 214 are both smaller than the diameter of the game ball B1. .. Therefore, even when the game ball B1 exists at the left and right ends of the flow-down space 224, the game ball B1 can be visually recognized from the switching windows 213 and 214.

Further, in the visible area 237, in order to make at least a part of the game ball B1 flowing down in the area other than the switching window portions 213 and 214 visible from the front in the flow-down space 224, a plurality of pieces whose rear is always visible. Windows 238 and 239 are also provided.

As described above, the housing 216 including the plate-shaped front portion 216c is made of a transparent resin material. The housing 216 has an opaque design 211a on the front surface of the plate-shaped front portion 216c except for the window portions 238 and 239 and the switching window portions 213 and 214. As a result, on the front surface of the design unit 211, the area where the game ball B1 flowing down the flow space 224 (FIG. 37) can be visually recognized from the front is limited to the window portions 238, 239 and the switching window portions 213, 214. .. The detailed shapes of the window portions 238 and 239 and the switching window portions 213 and 214 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 37, a left side accommodation space 241 and a right side accommodation space 242 are provided on the left and right sides of the flow-down space 224 on the back side of the plate-shaped front portion 216c (FIG. 35). The left and right accommodation spaces 241,242 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 37, between the flow-down space 224 and the right side accommodation space 242, the upper right section wall portion 225 and the lower right section wall portion 226 already described exist, and both spaces 224 and 242 are left and right. It is separated. Further, between the left accommodation space 241 and the flow-down space 224, the upper left partition wall portion 228, the inclined wall portion 234, the left central partition wall portion 229, and the lower left partition wall portion 231 already described exist. Spaces 241,224 are separated to the left and right.

As shown in FIG. 36, on the back surface of the plate-shaped front portion 216c, a right space partition wall portion 243 that partitions the upper side, the right side, and the lower side of the right side accommodation space 242 is integrally formed, and the left side accommodation space 241 is formed. The left space partition wall portion 244 that partitions the upper side, the left side, and the lower side of the space is integrally formed. The right space partition wall portion 243 is located on the upper, right, and lower sides of the substantially rectangular region 216a (FIG. 35) of the plate-shaped front portion 216c in the region to the right of the upper right partition wall portion 225 and the lower right partition wall portion 226. The peripheral edge portion is formed upright to the front surface of the base body 215. Further, the left space partition wall portion 244 is larger than the upper left partition wall portion 228, the left center partition wall portion 229, and the left lower partition wall portion 231 in the substantially rectangular region 216a and the protruding region 216b (FIG. 35) of the plate-shaped front portion 216c. The upper, left, and lower peripheral edges in the left region are formed upright to the front surface of the base body 215 (FIG. 35).

As shown in FIG. 37, the design unit 211 rotates around the upper rotation shaft 217 and the upper rotation shaft 217 accommodated in the upper part of the right side accommodation space 242 to switch the state of the upper switching window portion 213. The design piece 219 is provided, and the state of the lower rotation shaft 218 accommodated in the lower part of the left side accommodation space 241 and the lower rotation shaft 218 are rotated around the lower rotation shaft 218 to switch the state of the lower switching window portion 214. It is equipped with a lower design piece 221.

The right accommodation space 242 is closed except for the upper opening 227, and the left accommodation space 241 is closed except for the lower opening 233. As a result, foreign matter is prevented from entering the accommodation spaces 241,242, and the possibility that the foreign matter interferes with the rotation operation around the rotation shafts 217 and 218 of the design pieces 219 and 221 is reduced. ing.

Next, the upper and lower design pieces 219 and 221 will be described. In the following, when the configuration common to the upper and lower design pieces 219 and 221 is described, it is simply described as "design pieces 219 and 221".

As shown in FIG. 35, the design pieces 219 and 221 are formed by using a transparent resin material such as polycarbonate. The rotation shafts 217 and 218 to which the design pieces 219 and 221 are rotatably fixed are made of metal and are formed in a columnar shape. The design pieces 219 and 221 are provided with design piece fixing portions 219b and 221b having shaft insertion holes 219a and 221a through which the rotation shafts 217 and 218 can be inserted. The design piece fixing portions 219b and 221b are formed in a columnar shape and extend in the front-rear direction, and the shaft insertion holes 219a and 221a penetrate the design piece fixing portions 219b and 221b in the front-rear direction.

In the front surface of the base body 215, in the upper part of the right side accommodation space 242 (FIG. 37) and the lower part of the left side accommodation space 241 (FIG. 37), the front center can accommodate one end of the rotation shafts 217 and 218. The upper and lower rear accommodating portions 245 and 246 that are recessed are integrally formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 36, at a position facing each rear accommodating portion 245, 246 (FIG. 35) on the back surface of the plate-shaped front portion 216c, the center of the back surface is a rotation shaft 217, 218 (FIG. 35). The upper and lower front accommodating portions 247 and 248, which are recessed in a manner capable of accommodating the other end portion, are integrally formed. These accommodating portions 245 to 248 project toward the accommodating spaces 241,242.

As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the front and rear accommodating portions 245 and 247 provided in the right accommodating space 242 have an upper right compartment wall portion 225 and a lower right compartment wall portion 226 that partition the left side of the right accommodating space 242. It is provided at a height position substantially equal to that of the upper opening 227 formed between the two. Further, the front and rear accommodating portions 246 and 248 provided in the left accommodating space 241 are formed between the left central partition wall portion 229 and the lower left partition wall portion 231 that partition the right side of the left accommodating space 241. It is provided at substantially the same height as the side opening 233.

As shown in FIG. 35, the rotating shafts 217, 218 have a rear end portion accommodated in the rear accommodating portions 245, 246 and a front end portion accommodated in the front accommodating portion 247, 248 (FIG. 36). It is sandwiched between the base body 215 and the plate-shaped front portion 216c. The design pieces 219 and 221 are fixed to the rotation shafts 217 and 218 with the rotation shafts 217 and 218 inserted through the shaft insertion holes 219a and 221a, and can rotate around the rotation shafts 217 and 218. It has become. The design piece fixing portions 219b and 221b exist from the vicinity of the front end of the rear accommodating portions 245 and 246 to the vicinity of the rear end of the front accommodating portions 247 and 248, and the design pieces 219 and 221 do not move in the front-rear direction. , Regulated by front accommodations 247,248 and rear accommodations 245,246.

Connection plate portions 219c and 221c extending in the horizontal direction toward the flow-down space 224 (FIG. 36) are integrally formed on the peripheral surfaces of the design piece fixing portions 219b and 221b. The connecting plate portions 219c and 221c are provided in the entire area in the front-rear direction of the design piece fixing portions 219b and 221b at the central height position of the design piece fixing portions 219b and 221b. The upper connecting plate portion 219c provided in the upper design piece 219 extends to the upper opening 227 (FIG. 37), and the lower connecting plate portion 221c provided in the lower design piece 221 extends to the lower opening 233 (the lower opening 233 (FIG. 37). It extends to Fig. 37).

At the ends of the connection plate portions 219c and 221c on the openings 227 and 233 (FIG. 37) sides, stepped portions 219d and 221d that project downward and have an enlarged vertical dimension are integrally formed. Further, at the lower end of the step portions 219d and 221d on the flow-down space 224 (FIG. 37) side, guide plate portions 219e and 221e for guiding the game ball B1 (FIG. 37) in the flow-down space 224 are integrally formed. The stepped portions 219d and 221d are formed in the entire area in the front-rear direction of the connecting plate portions 219c and 221c, and the guide plate portions 219e and 221e are provided in the entire area in the front-rear direction of the stepped portions 219d and 221d. The guide plate portions 219e and 221e have the same thickness as the connection plate portions 219c and 221c.

The stepped portions 219d and 221d are locations that collide with the upper ends of the openings 227 and 233 (FIG. 37) as the design pieces 219 and 221 rotate. The stepped portions 219d and 221d have a thickness dimension larger in the vertical direction than the guide plate portions 219e and 221e and the connecting plate portions 219c and 221c existing on the left and right of the stepped portions 219d and 221d. Since the strength of the stepped portions 219d and 221d is increased, the possibility that the design pieces 219 and 221 are damaged due to repeated collisions with the upper ends of the openings 227 and 233 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 37, the upper guide plate portion 219e provided on the upper design piece 219 exists from the right end to the left halfway position of the flow space 224, and is provided on the lower design piece 221. The lower guide plate portion 221e exists from the left end of the flow space 224 to the right halfway position. The upper guide plate portion 219e is slightly inclined downward toward the left, and the tip of the upper guide plate portion 219e is located at a space slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 at the left central partition wall portion 229. Facing. The game ball B1 guided by the upper guide plate portion 219e can flow downward from the gap between the upper guide plate portion 219e and the left central partition wall portion 229.

Further, the lower guide plate portion 221e is slightly inclined downward toward the right, and the lower end of the lower guide plate portion 221e is located at the lower right at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. It faces the partition wall portion 226. The game ball B1 guided by the lower guide plate portion 221e can flow downward from the gap between the lower guide plate portion 221e and the lower right partition wall portion 226. The inclined wall portion 234 has a length dimension that is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1 in the inclined direction of the inclined wall portion 234.

The upper guide plate portion 219e is located below the flow-down opening 235. Therefore, the game ball B1 flowing down from the flow-down opening 235 along the upper right section wall portion 225 collides with the upper guide plate portion 219e. FIG. 38 is a plan view of the upper side of the design unit 211. As shown in FIG. 38, below the left side region of the entrance 232, there is an inclined wall portion 234 that guides the game ball B1 (FIG. 37) that has entered the entrance 232 to the flow opening 235 (FIG. 37). .. The game ball B1 that flows down the right side region PA1 (FIG. 33) and enters the flow-down space 224 (FIG. 37) comes into contact with the inclined wall portion 234 and decelerates. As a result, the impact when the game ball B1 collides with the upper design piece 219 is alleviated, and the possibility that the upper design piece 219 is damaged due to repeated collisions with the game ball B1 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 35, on the front side of the guide plate portions 219e and 221e, switching plate portions 219f and 221f that move up and down behind the switching window portions 213 and 214 to switch the state of the switching window portions 213 and 214 are integrated. It is formed. The upper switching plate portion 219f provided on the upper design piece 219 is formed so as to correspond to the upper switching window portion 213, and the lower switching plate portion 221f provided on the lower design piece 221 is the lower switching window portion. It is formed corresponding to 214.

The switching plate portions 219f and 221f have the same shape as the corresponding switching window portions 213 and 214, and are formed to have a size slightly smaller than the corresponding switching window portions 213 and 214. The front surface of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f is parallel to the back surface of the plate-shaped front portion 216c. The region near the lower end of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f is connected to the region on the tip end side of the guide plate portions 219e and 221e, and the switching plate portions 219f and 221f have the switching window portions 213 and 214 in the closed state. In addition, it exists behind substantially the entire area of the corresponding switching window portions 213 and 214.

At the lower part of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f on the rotation shaft 217 and 218 sides, the rotation stop position when the design pieces 219 and 221 rotate in the direction in which the switching plate portions 219f and 221f move downward is fixed. The stopper portions 219g and 221g are integrally formed. The stopper portions 219g and 221g are formed in a protruding shape so as to project downward from the lower peripheral edges of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f.

As shown in FIG. 37, in the lower right vicinity of the upper opening 227 in the lower right partition wall portion 226 and in the lower vicinity of the lower opening 233 in the lower left partition wall portion 231, the design piece 219 is in contact with the stopper portions 219 g and 221 g. , 221 rotation stop walls 249 and 251 are integrally formed. The left and right rotation stop walls 249 and 251 project horizontally to a position in the middle of the flow space 224 toward the center, and are inclined downward from the middle position toward the center of the flow space 224 in the horizontal direction. There is.

The right rotation stop wall portion 249 formed in the lower right partition wall portion 226 extends to an intermediate position to the right of the center of the flow space 224, and the left turn formed in the lower left partition wall portion 231. The motion stop wall portion 251 extends to an intermediate position to the left of the center of the flow-down space 224.

FIG. 39 (a) is a front view of the design unit 211 in which the two switching window portions 213 and 214 are both open, and FIG. 39 (b) is a cut in the rear vicinity of the plate-shaped front portion 216c in this state. It is a vertical sectional view of the design unit 211 shown. In addition, in FIG. 39 (a) and FIG. 39 (b), the illustration of the design 211a is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), when the game ball B1 is mounted on the guide plate portions 219e and 221e, the design pieces 219 and 221 are in the direction in which the switching plate portions 219f and 221f move downward. It rotates and stops in a state where the stopper portions 219g and 221g are in contact with the rotation stop wall portions 249 and 251. By contacting the stopper portions 219g and 221g with the rotation stop wall portions 249 and 251 to stop the rotation of the design pieces 219 and 221, the design piece when the game ball B1 is placed on the guide plate portions 219e and 221e. The amount of rotation of 219 and 221 can always be constant. As a result, the switching window portions 213 and 214 can be opened in the same manner each time.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the vicinity of the center of the lower peripheral edge portion of the upper switching plate portion 219f, there is an interlocking protrusion 252 that enables the lower design piece 221 to be rotated in conjunction with the upper design piece 219. It is integrally formed. As shown in FIG. 37, when the game ball B1 is not mounted on the upper and lower guide plate portions 219e and 221e, the interlocking protrusion portion 252 extends downward and comes into contact with the vicinity of the center of the upper peripheral portion of the lower switching plate portion 221f. ing.

As shown in FIG. 39B, when the game ball B1 is placed on the upper guide plate portion 219e and the upper design piece 219 rotates counterclockwise, the lower design piece 221 is pushed downward from the interlocking protrusion 252. Then, it rotates clockwise in conjunction with the upper design piece 219. The interlocking protrusion 252 has the same thickness as the switching plate portions 219f and 221f, and is thinly formed so as not to interfere with the movement of the game ball B1 rolling on the lower guide plate portion 221e.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), at the timing when the upper switching window portion 213 is opened, the lower switching window portion 214 can also be opened in conjunction with the upper switching window portion 213. It has become. As shown in FIG. 39 (b), in the configuration, the length dimension of the interlocking protrusion 252, the position of the interlocking protrusion 252 in the upper switching plate portion 219f, and the interlocking protrusion 252 and the lower switching plate portion 221f. The contact position is the lower side provided on the lower design piece 221 when the upper design piece 219 rotates until the upper stopper portion 219 g provided on the upper design piece 219 comes into contact with the right side rotation stop wall portion 249. The lower design piece 221 is adjusted to rotate until the stopper portion 221g comes into contact with the left rotation stop wall portion 251.

As a result, even when the upper switching window portion 213 (FIG. 39 (a)) is linked to the open state, the lower switching window portion is in the same manner as when the game ball B1 is placed on the lower guide plate portion 221e. It is possible to open 214 (FIG. 39 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 35, in the design unit 211, the design pieces 219 and 221 rotated until the stopper portions 219 g and 221 g contact the rotation stop wall portions 249 and 251, and the step portions 219d and 221d have openings 227 and 233. It is provided with a columnar weight 222 that can be rotated in the opposite direction until it comes into contact with the upper end. The design piece fixing portions 219b and 221b are integrally formed with weight fixing portions 219h and 221h capable of fixing the weight 222. The weight fixing portions 219h and 221h are provided on the opposite side of the flow space 224 (FIG. 37) where the game ball B1 (FIG. 37) comes into contact with the guide plate portions 219e and 221e with the rotation shafts 217 and 218 sandwiched between them. ing.

The weight 222 is made of metal and is formed in a columnar shape. The weight of the weight 222 is set to be smaller than the weight of the game ball B1. The weight fixing portions 219h and 221h are formed in a columnar shape and extend over the entire area of the design piece fixing portions 219b and 221b in the front-rear direction. A recessed portion 236 capable of accommodating the weight 222 is formed in the center of the back surface of the weight fixing portions 219h and 221h, and the weight 222 is fixed by an adhesive or the like while being accommodated in the recessed portion 236. There is.

Here, the torsional moment around the rotation shafts 217 and 218 of the design pieces 219 and 221 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 37, when the upper and lower guide plate portions 219e and 221e are not in contact with the game ball B1, the design pieces 219 and 221 act on the rotation shafts 217 and 218 of the design pieces 219 and 221. There is a torsional moment due to gravity and a torsional moment due to gravity acting on the weight 222. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the torsional moment due to gravity acting on the design pieces 219 and 221 is described as the torsional moment due to the design pieces 219 and 221, and the torsional moment due to gravity acting on the weight 222 is described as the torsional moment due to the weight 222. do.

In the design pieces 219 and 221 excluding the weight 222, the configuration on the flow-down space 224 side of the rotation shafts 217 and 218 (connection plate portions 219c, 221c, step portions 219d, 221d, guide plate portions 219e, 221e, and switching plate). The portions 219f and 221f) have a larger volume and weight than the configuration (weight fixing portions 219h and 221h) on the accommodation space 241,242 side. Therefore, the center of gravity of the design pieces 219 and 221 is located on the flow-down space 224 side of the rotation shafts 217 and 218, and the torsional moment by the design pieces 219 and 221 is the direction in which the switching plate portions 219f and 221f move downward. The design pieces 219 and 221 are rotated.

On the other hand, the weight 222 is fixed on the side opposite to the center of gravity of the design pieces 219 and 221 with the rotation shafts 217 and 218 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the twisting moment by the weight 222 rotates the design pieces 219 and 221 in the opposite direction (the direction in which the switching plate portions 219f and 221f move upward). The torsional moment of the weight 222 can be increased by increasing the weight of the weight 222.

In the design unit 211 of the present embodiment, the weight of the weight 222 is adjusted with respect to the weight of the design pieces 219 and 221 so that the twisting moment by the weight 222 is larger than the twisting moment by the design pieces 219 and 221. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is not mounted on the upper guide plate portion 219e, the upper design piece 219 rotates clockwise until the stepped portions 219d and 221d come into contact with the upper end of the upper opening 227. Further, in the lower design piece 221, when the game ball B1 is not mounted on either the upper guide plate portion 219e or the lower guide plate portion 221e, the step portions 219d and 221d are in contact with the upper end of the lower opening 233. Rotate counterclockwise.

As shown in FIG. 39 (b), when the game ball B1 is mounted on the upper guide plate portion 219e, the twisting moment due to the above-mentioned design pieces 219 and 221 and the twisting moment around the upper rotation shaft 217 of the upper design piece 219 and the above-mentioned design pieces 219 and 221. In addition to the torsional moment due to the weight 222, the torsional moment due to gravity acting on the game ball B1 mounted on the upper guide plate portion 219e and the torsional moment due to the drag force applied from the lower design piece 221 to the interlocking protrusion 252. Occurs. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the torsional moment due to gravity acting on the game ball B1 mounted on the guide plate portions 219e and 221e is described as the torsional moment due to the game ball B1 and acts on the interlocking protrusion 252 from the lower design piece 221. The torsional moment due to drag is described as the interlocking torsional moment.

The game ball B1 comes into contact with the upper guide plate portion 219e on the flow-down space 224 side of the rotation shafts 217 and 218. Therefore, the twisting moment by the game ball B1 rotates the upper design piece 219 in the direction in which the upper switching plate portion 219f moves downward, similarly to the twisting moment by the design pieces 219 and 221. The torsional moment due to the game ball B1 can be increased by setting a long distance from the contact point between the game ball B1 and the upper guide plate portion 219e to the upper rotation shaft 217.

The interlocking protrusion 252 is in contact with the lower design piece 221 on the flow-down space 224 side of the rotation shafts 217 and 218. Further, the drag acting on the lower design piece 221 from the interlocking protrusion 252 is upward. Therefore, the twisting moment for interlocking is the same as the moment due to the weight 222, which rotates the upper design piece 219 in the direction in which the upper switching plate portion 219f moves upward. The interlocking torsional moment can be reduced by reducing the weight of the weight 222 fixed to the lower design piece 221. Further, the moment due to the weight 222 can be reduced by reducing the weight of the weight 222 fixed to the upper design piece 219.

In the design unit 211 of the present embodiment, the sum of the twisting moment of the game ball B1 and the twisting moment of the upper design piece 219 is larger than the sum of the twisting moment of the weight 222 and the twisting moment for interlocking. The distance from the right end of the flow space 224 to the rotating shafts 217 and 218 and the weight of the weight 222 are adjusted. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is placed on the upper guide plate portion 219e, the upper design piece 219 rotates counterclockwise and lowers until the upper stopper portion 219 g comes into contact with the right side rotation stop wall portion 249. The lower design piece 221 rotates clockwise until the side stopper portion 221g comes into contact with the left rotation stop wall portion 251.

The distance from the left end of the flow space 224 to the lower rotation shaft 218 is the same as the distance from the right end of the flow space 224 to the upper rotation shaft 217, and the weight 222 fixed to the lower design piece 221. The weight of is the same as the weight of the weight 222 fixed to the upper design piece 219. The lower design piece 221 does not have the interlocking protrusion 252. In this case, the lower design piece 221 does not generate a twisting moment for interlocking. Therefore, the lower design piece 221 is more likely to rotate in the direction in which the lower switching plate portion 221f moves downward as compared with the case of the upper design piece 219 described above. When the game ball B1 is placed on the lower guide plate portion 221e, the lower design piece 221 rotates clockwise until the lower stopper portion 221g comes into contact with the left rotation stop wall portion 251.

The guide plate portions 219e and 221e guide the game ball B1 in a direction away from the rotation shafts 217 and 218. During this time, the torsional moment due to the game ball B1 increases. Therefore, the upper design piece 219 keeps the upper stopper portion 219g in contact with the right side rotation stop wall portion 249 until the contact state between the upper guide plate portion 219e and the game ball B1 is eliminated, and lower. The side design piece 221 keeps in a state where the lower stopper portion 221g is in contact with the left rotation stop wall portion 251 until the contact state between the lower guide plate portion 221e and the game ball B1 is eliminated.

Next, the detailed shapes of the switching window portions 213 and 214 and the switching plate portions 219f and 221f will be described below with reference to FIGS. 34, 37 and 39.

As described above, the switching window portions 213 and 214 have a trapezoidal shape and are provided in substantially the entire lateral direction of the visible region 237. As shown in FIG. 34, the left peripheral edge portion and the right side peripheral edge portion of the switching window portions 213 and 214 extend in the vertical direction. The upper peripheral edge portion of the upper switching window portion 213 is inclined upward toward the left, and the lower peripheral edge portion is inclined downward toward the left side. Further, the upper peripheral edge portion of the lower switching window portion 214 is inclined downward toward the left, and the lower peripheral edge portion is inclined upward toward the left side.

As shown in FIG. 34, the switching window portions 213 and 214 are divided into three parts: an upper window area 253, 256, a middle window area 254, 257, and a lower window area 255, 258. All of the three regions 253 to 258 exist over the entire lateral direction of the switching window portions 213 and 214. As described above, the housing 216 (FIG. 35) including the plate-shaped front portion 216c provided with the switching window portions 213 and 214 is formed of a transparent resin material. Of the three regions 253 to 258 provided in the switching window portions 213 and 214, the middle region regions 254 and 257 are provided with an opaque design 211a. On the other hand, the upper window area 253, 256 and the lower window area 255, 258 are transparent so that the rear can be visually recognized.

As described above, the switching plate portions 219f and 221f (FIG. 37) have the same shape as the corresponding switching window portions 213 and 214, and have a size slightly smaller than the corresponding switching window portions 213 and 214. Have. The game ball B1 is not mounted on the upper and lower guide plate portions 219e and 221e (FIG. 37), and the stepped portions 219d and 221d (FIG. 37) of the upper and lower design pieces 219 and 221 are the upper ends of the openings 227 and 233 (FIG. 37). In the state of being in contact with, the entire upper switching plate portion 219f (FIG. 37) overlaps with substantially the entire upper switching window portion 213 from the rear, and the entire lower switching plate portion 221f (FIG. 37) is rearward. It overlaps with substantially the entire lower switching window portion 214.

As shown in FIG. 37, the switching plate portions 219f and 221f correspond to the upper window regions 253 and 256, the middle stage regions 254 and 257, and the lower window regions 255 and 258 (FIG. 34) of the switching window portions 213 and 214. Therefore, the upper corresponding area 261,264, the middle corresponding area 262, 265, and the lower corresponding area 263, 266, which have substantially the same shape as each area 213a to 213c and 214a to 214c, are set.

The upper corresponding area 261,264 and the lower corresponding area 263, 266 are set to be slightly smaller than the corresponding upper window area 253, 256 and the lower window area 255, 258 (FIG. 34), and the upper window area is set slightly smaller in the closed state. It fits behind 253, 256 and lower window areas 255, 258. On the other hand, the middle-stage corresponding area 262,265 has a slightly larger vertical dimension than the corresponding middle-stage area 254,257 (FIG. 34). In the closed state, the middle-stage corresponding regions 262 and 265 slightly protrude above and below the middle-stage regions 254 and 257 behind the middle-stage regions 254 and 257.

As described above, the design pieces 219 and 221 including the switching plate portions 219f and 221f are formed of a transparent resin material. As shown in FIG. 37, in the switching plate portions 219f and 221f, an opaque design 211a is attached to the upper corresponding regions 261,264 and the lower corresponding regions 263 and 266. Therefore, the rear is invisible from the upper corresponding areas 261,264 and the lower corresponding areas 263 and 266. On the other hand, the middle-stage corresponding areas 262 and 265 are transparent so that the rear can be visually recognized. Incidentally, the guide plate portions 219e and 221e are connected to the opaque lower corresponding areas 263 and 266. As a result, it is possible to switch the state of the switching window portions 213 and 214 while making the guide plate portions 219e and 221e invisible from the front.

When the step portions 219d and 221d are located at the upper ends of the openings 227 and 233, as shown in FIG. 34, the upper window regions 253 and 256 and the lower window regions 255 and 258 have the upper corresponding regions 261 and The design 211a attached to the 264 and the lower corresponding area 263, 266 (FIG. 37) is displayed, and the rear portion is invisible. Further, as described above, the opaque design 211a is attached to the middle regions 254 and 257 of the switching window portions 213 and 214. Therefore, the switching window portions 213 and 214 are in a closed state in which the rear cannot be visually recognized from the entire area.

As described above, when the game ball B1 is mounted on the guide plate portions 219e and 221e, the design pieces 219 and 221 rotate until the stopper portions 219g and 221g come into contact with the rotation stop wall portions 249 and 251. As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), the respective regions 253 to 258 in the switching window portions 213 and 214 and the corresponding regions 261 to 266 in the switching plate portions 219f and 221f are in the upper stage in this state. It has a shape capable of opening the window areas 253 and 256 and the lower window areas 255 and 258.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, the middle-stage regions 254 and 257 are larger than the upper-stage window regions 253 and 256 and the lower-stage window regions 255 and 258 at each position in the lateral direction regarding the shape of the switching window portions 213 and 214. It has a large vertical width. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), when the design pieces 219 and 221 rotate until the entire upper corresponding area 261 and 264 is located behind the middle area 254 and 257. It is possible to create a state in which transparent middle-stage corresponding areas 262 and 265 are overlapped from the rear in substantially the entire lower window areas 255 and 258. At this time, the switching plate portions 219f and 221f do not exist behind the upper window regions 253 and 256. Therefore, the switching window portions 213 and 214 are in an open state in which the rear can be visually recognized from the entire upper window region 253 and 256 and substantially the entire lower window region 255 and 258.

The vertical dimensions of the three areas 253 to 258 provided with the switching window portions 213 and 214 are the distances from the guide plate portions 219e and 221e at each position in the lateral direction to the lower ends of the upper window regions 253 and 256 in the open state. It is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when the switching window portions 213 and 214 are in the open state, the game ball B1 that rolls on the guide plate portions 219e and 221e connected to the lower corresponding regions 263 and 266 of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f It becomes visible from both the upper window area 253, 256 and the lower window area 255, 258.

When the design pieces 219 and 221 rotate around the rotation shafts 217 and 218, the amount of movement of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f on the rotation tip side is larger than the movement amount on the rotation base end side. Corresponding to this, in the corresponding regions 253 to 258 of the switching window portions 213 and 214 and the corresponding regions 261 to 266 of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f, the dimensions in the moving direction on the rotation tip side are on the rotation base end side. It is set larger than the dimension in the moving direction. Therefore, in the open state, it is possible to superimpose the entire upper corresponding area 261,264 from the rear to the middle area 254,257, and substantially the entire middle corresponding area 262,265 from the rear to the lower window area 255,258. It is possible to stack on. As a result, when the switching window portions 213 and 214 are opened, the game ball B1 passing behind from the entire area of the upper window area 253 and 256 and substantially the entire area of the lower window area 255 and 258 can be visually recognized. Can be done.

Assuming that the entire switching window portions 213 and 214 are transparent regions and the entire switching plate portions 219f and 221f are opaque regions, the entire switching plate portions 219f and 221f are set to open the switching window portions 213 and 214. It is necessary to move to the outside of the switching window portions 213 and 214, and it is necessary to secure a wide space around the switching window portions 213 and 214 so that the switching plate portions 219f and 221f can be moved. In this case, it is necessary to greatly separate the two switching window portions 213 and 214, and the vertical dimension of the design unit 211 becomes large.

On the other hand, like the design unit 211 of the present embodiment, the transparent areas and the opaque areas are alternately set in the switching window portions 213,214 and the switching plate portions 219f, 221f, and the switching window portions 213,214 By arranging the transparent region and the transparent region of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f so as to be offset in the moving direction of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f, a part of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f is arranged in the switching window portions 213 and 214. It is possible to move the switching window portions 213 and 214 from the closed state to the open state by moving them to the outside (downward) of the above.

By reducing the protrusion dimension of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f from the switching window portions 213 and 214 in the open state, the distance between the two switching window portions 213 and 214 can be reduced, and the design unit 211 can be reduced. The vertical dimension of is reduced. As a result, the occupied area of the game board 212 (FIG. 33) of the design unit 211 is suppressed.

Since the movement amount of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f is suppressed, the difference between the movement amount of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f on the rotation tip side and the movement amount on the rotation base end side is reduced. Therefore, the difference between the dimension on the rotation tip side and the dimension on the rotation base end side of the switching window portions 213 and 214 in the moving direction of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f can be made small.

When one switching window unit 213,214 is opened, different parts of the game ball B1 can be visually recognized from the plurality of transparent areas set in the switching window unit 213,214. Therefore, the movement of the game ball B1 can be grasped from the front while suppressing the area of each transparent region and ensuring a wide area where the design 211a can always be displayed in the design unit 211.

Next, the behavior of the game ball B1 in the flow space 224 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 40A is a front view of the design unit 211 in which the lower switching window portion 214 is open, and FIG. 40B is a design in which the rear vicinity of the plate-shaped front portion 216c is cut off in that state. It is a vertical sectional view of a unit 211. In addition, in FIG. 40 (a) and FIG. 40 (b), the illustration of the design 211a is omitted.

As described above, the game ball B1 that has entered the entrance 232 flows down from the flow-down opening 235 to the upper guide plate portion 219e along the upper right section wall portion 225. When the game ball B1 is placed on the upper guide plate portion 219e, the upper and lower design pieces 219 and 221 rotate until the upper and lower switching window portions 213 and 214 are opened.

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), in this situation, the upper guide plate portion 219e is inclined downward toward the left, and the upper guide plate portion 219e and the left central partition wall portion 229. There is a gap between the ball and the ball B1 through which the game ball B1 can pass. The game ball B1 is gradually guided downward while being guided to the left by the upper guide plate portion 219e, and falls downward from the gap between the upper guide plate portion 219e and the left central partition wall portion 229. At this time, since the contact state between the upper guide plate portion 219e and the game ball B1 is eliminated, the upper switching window portion 213 returns to the closed state.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the game ball B1 flows down to the lower guide plate portion 221e along the left central partition wall portion 229. In the situation where the game ball B1 is placed on the lower guide plate portion 221e, the lower guide plate portion 221e is inclined downward toward the right, and the lower guide plate portion 221e and the lower right partition wall portion 226 There is a gap between them through which the game ball B1 can pass. The game ball B1 is gradually guided downward while being guided to the right by the lower guide plate portion 221e, and flows downward through the gap between the lower guide plate portion 221e and the lower right partition wall portion 226. At this time, since the contact state between the lower guide plate portion 221e and the game ball B1 is eliminated, the lower switching window portion 214 returns to the closed state.

An outlet 267 of the flow-down space 224 is provided below the game ball B1 that flows down from the lower guide plate portion 221e. At the right end of the left rotation stop wall portion 251, an outlet partition wall portion 268 defining the left side of the outlet 267 is integrally formed. The exit section wall portion 268 extends vertically downward from the right end of the left rotation stop wall portion 251 to the lower end of the plate-shaped front portion 216c, and extends from the lower end along the lower side portion of the plate-shaped front portion 216c (FIG. 35). It extends to the right. The right end of the exit section wall portion 268 faces the lower end of the lower right section wall portion 226 at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. The area sandwiched between the exit partition wall portion 268 and the lower right partition wall portion 226 is an opening that is downwardly downward, and an outlet 267 of the flow-down space 224 is formed.

In a situation where the game ball B1 flows downward from the lower guide plate portion 221e, the distance between the lower guide plate portion 221e and the exit partition wall portion 268 is smaller than that of the game ball B1, and the entry of the game ball B1. Is not possible. Since the lateral movement of the game ball B1 is restricted, the game ball B1 flows down to the exit 267 and is discharged to the right side region PA1 (FIG. 33).

On the front surface of the design unit 211, when the game ball B1 reaches the upper guide plate portion 219e, the upper and lower switching window portions 213 and 214 simultaneously shift to the open state. By significantly changing the front surface of the design unit 211, the player's attention can be drawn to the design unit 211. After that, the game ball B1 moves from the upper guide plate portion 219e to the lower guide plate portion 221e, so that the range in which the rear can be visually recognized is limited to the lower switching window portion 214. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp from the front that the game ball B1 has moved to the lower part of the design unit 211.

When one or more game balls B1 are mounted on the upper guide plate portion 219e, the upper switching window portion 213 and the lower switching window portion 214 are in an open state. Further, when the game ball B1 is not mounted on the upper guide plate portion 219e and one or more game balls B1 are mounted on the lower switching window portion 214, only the lower switching window portion 214 is in the open state. It is a composition.

41 (a) is a front view of the design unit 211 in which the game ball B1 is mounted on both the upper guide plate portion 219e and the lower guide plate portion 221e, and FIG. 41 (b) is a front view of the design unit 211 in that state. It is a vertical sectional view of the design unit 211 which cuts and shows the rear vicinity of the plate-shaped front part 216c. In addition, in FIG. 41 (a) and FIG. 41 (b), the illustration of the design 211a is omitted. As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), even if a plurality of game balls B1 exist in the flow space 224, a part of all the game balls B1 that have flowed into the flow space 224. Can always be seen from the front.

If the game ball B1 is configured to flow down the flow space 224 only downward, the game ball B1 accelerates in the flow space 224, so that the staying time of the game ball B1 in the flow space 224 is shortened. On the other hand, the design unit 211 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the game ball B1 is guided downward while being guided left and right, as described above. By guiding the game ball B1 diagonally and reversing the moving direction of the game ball B1 on the way, the moving speed of the game ball B1 in the flow space 224 can be suppressed.

As a result, the movement path of the game ball B1 in the design unit 211 can be extended while suppressing the vertical dimension of the design unit 211. Therefore, the flow time of the game ball B1 can be extended so that the player can visually recognize the game ball B1 from the switching windows 213, 214, and the occupied area of the design unit 211 in the game board 212 can be reduced. can.

Assuming that the moving source side of the game ball B1 guided by the guide plate portions 219e and 221e is the upstream side and the moving destination side is the downstream side, as shown in FIG. 34, the upper switching window portion in the visible area 237. Above the upstream side of 213, an upper right window that allows at least a part of the game ball B1 flowing down from the entrance 232 to the upper guide plate portion 219e (FIG. 37) along the upper right section wall portion 225 (FIG. 37) to be visible from the front. A portion 238 is provided. Further, below the downstream side of the upper switching window portion 213 and above the upstream side of the lower switching window portion 214, after being guided by the upper guide plate portion 219e, along the left central partition wall portion 229 (FIG. 37). A lower left window portion 239 is provided so that at least a part of the game ball B1 flowing down to the lower guide plate portion 221e (FIG. 37) can be visually recognized from the front. These two window portions 238 and 239 are always in an open state where the rear can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 34, the upper right window portion 238 and the lower left window portion 239 have a lateral dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball B1. As described above, the lateral dimension of the gap between the inclined wall portion 234 and the upper right partition wall portion 225 and the gap between the upper guide plate portion 219e and the left center partition wall portion 229 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Is set to. As a result, as shown in FIG. 37, the flow path of the game ball B1 from the flow opening 235 to the upper guide plate portion 219e and the flow path of the game ball B1 from the upper guide plate portion 219e to the lower guide plate portion 221e Limited.

Therefore, even if a small width dimension is set for the windows 238, 239 (FIG. 34) located in front of the flow path, it is possible to make a part of the game ball B1 passing behind visible from the front. ing. By suppressing the width dimension of the window portions 238 and 239, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the design 211a (FIG. 34) can always be displayed on the front surface of the design unit 211.

As shown in FIG. 34, the distance from the lower end of the recessed portion 236 provided in the plate-shaped front portion 216c to the upper end of the upper right window portion 238, the distance from the lower end of the upper right window portion 238 to the upper switching window portion 213, and the upper side. The distance from the lower end of the switching window 213 to the upper end of the lower left window 239, the distance from the lower end of the lower left window 239 to the upper end of the lower switching window 214, and the distance from the lower end of the lower switching window 214 to the exit 267. The distance is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball B1.

The game ball B1 flowing down from the entrance 232 to the upper guide plate portion 219e (FIG. 37), the game ball B1 guided by the upper guide plate portion 219e, and flowing down from the upper guide plate portion 219e to the lower guide plate portion 221e (FIG. 37). A part of the game ball B1 to be guided, the game ball B1 guided by the lower guide plate portion 221e, and the game ball B1 flowing down from the lower guide plate portion 221e to the exit 267 (FIG. 37) are always visible from the front. It is a configuration that does not cause a moment when the entire game ball B1 passing behind the plate-shaped front portion 216c becomes invisible from the front. As a result, the player can grasp the movement of the game ball B1 in the flow-down space 224 from the front without losing sight of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 34, unit fixing bosses 269 are integrally formed at the four corners of the back surface of the base body 215. The four unit fixing bosses 269 are provided in the left and right base through holes 215a (FIG. 35) provided below the left and right base through holes 215a (FIG. 35) provided in the upper part of the base body 215 and in the lower part of the base body 215. It is provided above. The unit fixing boss 269 is formed with a screw hole (not shown) extending from the back surface to a front intermediate position.

In the right side region PA1 (FIG. 33) of the game board 212, a recessed portion (not shown) capable of accommodating the configuration on the back side of the design unit 211 (base body 215 including the unit fixing boss 269) is formed. As shown in FIG. 33, the design unit 211 is screwed from the rear of the game board 212 and fixed to the front side of the game board 212 in a state where the configuration on the back side is housed in the recessed portion. In this state, the front surface of the base body 215 (FIG. 37) and the front surface of the game board 212 are on the same plane, and the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet 267 (FIG. 37) of the flow space 224 is smoothly. It flows down and returns to the right area PA1.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the right side region PA1, the left side guide nail 271 and the right side guide nail 272 that guide the game ball B1 flowing upstream to the entrance 232 are located on the upper left side and the upper right side of the entrance 232 (FIG. 37). There are multiple. The left and right guide nails 271,272 are arranged in a row, the row of left guide nails 271 is inclined downward to the right, and the row of right guide nails 272 is to the left. It is tilted downward.

The guide nails 271,272 guide all the game balls B1 flowing down the right side region PA1 to the entrance 232. By inducing a large number of game balls B1 to the design unit 211, the frequency of switching between the open state and the closed state is increased in the switching window portions 213, 214 (FIG. 34), and the player's attention is drawn to the design unit 211. Can be done.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the upper design piece 219 rotates so that the upper switching window portion 213 is in the open state, the lower design is interlocked with the upper design piece 219 so that the lower switching window portion 214 is opened. The piece 221 is configured to rotate. As a result, at the timing when the game ball B1 exists in the upper part of the flow-down space 224, the front surface of the design unit 211 can be significantly changed to attract the attention of the player to the design unit 211.

When the game ball B1 moves from the upper guide plate portion 219e to the lower guide plate portion 221e, the upper switching window portion 213 returns to the closed state, and only the lower switching window portion 214 is opened. At the timing when the game ball B1 moves to the lower part of the flow-down space 224, the game ball B1 moves to the lower part of the design unit 211 by limiting the switching window portions 213 and 214 in the open state to the lower switching window portion 214. It is possible to easily grasp this from the front.

By setting the entrance 232 of the design unit 211 to be wide, it is easy for the game ball B1 to enter the flow-down space 224, and it is prevented that the game ball B1 stays in the vicinity of the entrance 232. In this configuration, by providing the inclined wall portion 234 below the inlet 232, the flow start position of the game ball B1 in the flow space 224 is limited, and the flow path of the game ball B1 is limited. As a result, the area of the window portions 238 and 239 provided in the plate-shaped front portion 216c is suppressed so that the game ball B1 can be visually recognized from the front, and the design 211a can be displayed on the front surface of the design unit 211. A large area is secured.

The game ball B1 that accelerates downward and enters the entrance 232 comes into contact with the inclined wall portion 234 provided below the entrance 232 and decelerates. As a result, the impact applied to the upper design piece 219 made of resin is suppressed, and the possibility of damaging the design unit 211 is reduced.

In the flow space 224, the game ball B1 is guided downward while being guided left and right. By guiding the game ball B1 diagonally and reversing the moving direction of the game ball B1 on the way, the moving speed of the game ball B1 in the flow space 224 can be suppressed. As a result, the movement path of the game ball B1 in the design unit 211 can be extended while suppressing the vertical dimension of the design unit 211. Therefore, the flow time of the game ball B1 can be extended so that the player can visually recognize the game ball B1 from the switching windows 213, 214, and the occupied area of the design unit 211 in the game board 212 can be reduced. can.

The switching window portions 213 and 214 and the switching plate portions 219f and 221f are divided into a transparent region and an opaque region. , The switching plate portions 219f and 221f are arranged so as to be offset in the moving direction. Therefore, the amount of rotation of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f required for switching the state of the switching window portions 213 and 214 is reduced as compared with the configuration in which the switching window portions 213 and 214 are entirely transparent. As a result, the amount of protrusion of the switching plate portions 219f and 221f from the switching window portions 213 and 214 is reduced, and the distance between the two switching window portions 213 and 214 can be reduced to suppress the dimensions of the design unit 211. It has become.

In a configuration in which the design pieces 219 and 221 are rotated around the rotation shafts 217 and 218 to switch the state of the switching window portions 213 and 214, the peripheral portion on the rotation tip side of the switching window portions 213 and 214 is rotated. A length dimension larger than that of the peripheral edge on the base end side is set. As a result, in the open state of the switching window portions 213 and 214, the rear game ball B1 can be visually recognized from the entire area of the upper window areas 253 and 256 and substantially the entire area of the lower window areas 255 and 258.

By opening the switching windows 213 and 214, a plurality of locations of the game ball B1 can be visually recognized from a plurality of transparent areas set apart from each other. Compared with a configuration in which a part of the game ball B1 can be visually recognized from one transparent area, it is easy to grasp the movement of the game ball B1 while suppressing the area of the transparent area where the design 211a cannot always be displayed. Can be done.

By utilizing the weight of the game ball B1 mounted on the guide plate portions 219e and 221e, when the game ball B1 is mounted on the guide plate portions 219e and 221e, the switching window portions 213 and 214 are shifted to the open state and the game is played. When the contact state between the sphere B1 and the guide plate portions 219e and 221e is resolved, the switching window portions 213 and 214 are returned to the closed state. Therefore, while the detection means of the game ball B1 and the drive means of the design pieces 219 and 221 are not provided, the switching window portions 213 and 214 are limited to the timing when the game ball B1 passes behind the switching window portions 213 and 214. Can be opened. The configuration of the design unit 211 can be simplified as compared with the configuration using the detection means and the drive means, and the area occupied by the design unit 211 in the game board 212 can be reduced.

The return positions of the design pieces 219 and 221 are kept constant by the upper ends of the openings 227 and 233. This prevents the positional relationship between the switching window portions 213 and 214 and the switching plate portions 219f and 221f in the closed state from shifting. Further, in the configuration, the vertical dimensions of the stepped portions 219d and 221d are set to be larger than the vertical dimensions of the connecting plate portions 219c and 221c and the guide plate portions 219e and 221e. As a result, the possibility that the design pieces 219 and 221 are damaged due to repeated collisions with the upper ends of the openings 227 and 233 is reduced.

By bringing the stopper portions 219g and 221g into contact with the rotation stop wall portions 249 and 251 so that the design pieces 219 and 221 can always be rotated to the same rotation position. Further, it is possible to prevent the rotation position of the design pieces 219 and 221 from changing with the movement of the game ball B1 that rolls while in contact with the guide plate portions 219e and 221e. As a result, while the game ball B1 is in contact with the guide plate portions 219e and 221e, it always rolls on the guide plate portions 219e and 221e from the entire upper window region 253 and 256 and substantially the entire lower window region 255 and 258. The moving game ball B1 can be made visible.

The right side accommodation space 242 accommodating the upper rotation shaft 217 and its surroundings, and the left side accommodation space 241 accommodating the lower rotation shaft 218 and its surroundings are closed except for openings 227 and 233. .. As a result, the possibility that foreign matter is mixed in the vicinity of the rotation shafts 217 and 218 is reduced, and the possibility that the foreign matter interferes with the rotation of the design pieces 219 and 221 is reduced.

<Another form of the second embodiment>
The downstream region (left side region) of the upper guide plate portion 219e inclined downward toward the left is greatly inclined downward than the upstream region (right side region), and is downstream of the upper guide plate portion 219e. The side end portions may be configured to approach the lower guide plate portion 221e at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. In this case, the transition period from the state in which the game ball B1 is mounted on the upper guide plate portion 219e to the state in which the game ball B1 is mounted on the lower guide plate portion 221e is shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower guide plate portion 221e, which has been in a state where no external force is applied during the transition period, from temporarily moving upward, and the lower switching window portion 214 is closed. It is possible to continue continuously.

-In a state where the design pieces 219 and 221 are not in contact with the game ball B1, the arrangement direction of the rotation shafts 217 and 218 and the weight 222 may not be the horizontal direction. Specifically, by arranging the weight fixing portion 219h of the upper design piece 219 in the vicinity of the upper right of the upper rotating shaft 217, the protrusion dimension of the weight fixing portion 219h to the right can be suppressed. Further, by arranging the weight fixing portion 221h of the lower design piece 221 in the vicinity of the upper left of the lower rotating shaft 218, the protrusion dimension of the weight fixing portion 221h to the left can be suppressed. In this case, in the first embodiment described above, the housing fixing boss 223 arranged in the protruding region 216b of the plate-shaped front portion 216c can be arranged in the lower left side of the substantially rectangular region 216a, and the design unit 211 can be arranged. It is also possible to suppress the vertical dimension of. With these configurations, it is possible to reduce the space occupied by the design unit 211 in the game area PA and reduce the restrictions on the installation location of the design unit 211.

A follow-up design unit having a follow-up design piece that follows the lower design piece 221 may be provided instead of the upper design piece 219. The follow-up design piece is different from the upper design piece 219 in the second embodiment in that the weight fixing portion 219h is not provided. The weight 222 is not fixed to the following design piece, and the following design piece has no volume to the right of the upper rotation shaft 217. Therefore, the center of gravity of the following design piece exists on the flow-down space 224 side of the upper rotating shaft 217, and the following design piece tends to rotate in the direction in which the upper switching plate portion 219f moves downward due to its own weight.

In the following design unit, the weight of the weight 222 fixed to the lower design piece 221 is such that the upper switching plate portion 219f and the upper switching plate portion 219f and the lower design piece 221 are not in contact with the game ball B1. The weight is adjusted to the minimum required to rotate the following design piece and the lower design piece 221 so that the lower switching plate portion 221f moves upward together. In the follow-up design unit, when the game ball B1 is placed on at least one of the upper and lower guide plate portions 219e and 221e, the follow-up design piece and the lower portion so that the upper switching plate portion 219f and the lower switching plate portion 221f both move downward. The side design piece 221 rotates. As a result, both the upper and lower switching windows 213 and 214 are opened.

Since the following design piece does not have the weight fixing portion 219h, the following design piece does not return to the initial position even if the game ball B1 moves from the upper guide plate portion 219e to the lower guide plate portion 221e. When the game ball B1 flows down from the lower guide plate portion 221e to the outlet 267, the lower design piece 221 rotates so that the lower switching plate portion 221f moves upward. At this time, when the interlocking protrusion 252 is pushed upward from the lower switching plate portion 221f, the following design piece also rotates so that the upper switching plate portion 219f moves upward. As a result, both the upper and lower switching windows 213 and 214 return to the closed state.

As described above, by using only the weight 222 fixed to the lower design piece 221 to return the upper and lower switching window portions 213 and 214 to the closed state, the upper and lower switching window portions 213 and 214 Can be simultaneously moved to the open state and simultaneously returned to the closed state. Further, since the following design piece does not protrude to the right of the upper rotating shaft 217, the lateral dimension of the following design unit can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce restrictions on the place where the design unit 211 can be installed in the game area PA.

A switching display device (liquid crystal display device, organic EL) capable of switching the display content between a situation in which the game ball B1 exists in the flow area extending from the flow opening 235 to the outlet 267 and a situation in which the game ball B1 does not exist in the flow area. It may be configured to include a display device, a dot matrix display, or the like). For example, a plate-shaped liquid crystal display surface may be provided on the left and right sides of the visible area 237 on the front surface of the plate-shaped front portion 216c.

Specifically, the left and right liquid crystal display surfaces are fixed to the plate-shaped front portion 216c so as to face forward, and are connected to the voice emission control device 161. The voice emission control device 161 has a first image when the game ball B1 is present in the above-mentioned flow area and a first image when the game ball B1 is not present in the flow area as images that can be displayed on the liquid crystal display surface. Two images are stored.

On the back side of the base body 215, the inlet side detection sensor is fixed at the rear position of the flow opening 235, and the outlet side detection sensor is fixed at the rear position of the outlet 267. The inlet-side detection sensor can detect the game ball B1 flowing into the flow-down space 224 from the flow-down opening 235, and the exit-side detection sensor can detect the game ball B1 discharged from the outlet 267. The inlet side detection sensor and the exit side detection sensor are connected to the main control board 141. The main RAM 145 includes a game ball counter that counts the number of game balls B1 existing in the flow-down space 224.

The main CPU 143 is a game ball when the detection signal received from the upper detection sensor rises from the non-detecting LOW state to the detecting HI state in the reading process (S208 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16)). "1" is added to the counter, and "1" is subtracted from the game ball counter when the detection signal received from the lower detection sensor rises from the non-detecting LOW state to the detecting HI state. As a result, the value of the game ball counter becomes "0" in the situation where the game ball B1 does not exist in the above-mentioned flow area, and "1" in the situation where the game ball B1 exists in the flow area. That is all.

When the main CPU 143 determines that the value of the game ball counter has changed from "0" to "1", the existing command is set as an output target, and the value of the game ball counter is changed from "1" to "0". If it is determined that the command has changed to, the non-existent command is set as the output target. The audio emission control device 161 switches the image displayed on the liquid crystal display surface to the above-mentioned first image when the presence command is received, and switches to the above-mentioned second image when the non-existence flag is received. ..

As described above, by providing the liquid crystal display surface, it is possible to display a moving image or the like in front of the plate-shaped front portion 216c. As a result, the design surface that can be displayed in front of the plate-shaped front portion 216c is enriched as a variety, and the player's attention can be attracted to the design unit 211. Further, by switching the image displayed on the liquid crystal display surface according to the presence / absence of the game ball B1 existing in the flow area, it is possible to facilitate the player to grasp the presence / absence of the game ball B1.

Further, the installation location of the switching display device capable of switching the state according to the presence or absence of the game ball B1 existing in the flow area is not limited to the game area PA. For example, the liquid crystal display surface described above may be provided in the vicinity above the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This makes it possible for the player looking at the display surface 41a to easily know that the game ball B1 has flowed into the above-mentioned flow area.

The plate-shaped front portion 216c described above may be provided with a design switching window portion in which the area of the displayed design 211a is switched as the design pieces 219 and 221 rotate. For example, in the plate-shaped front portion 216c, a design switching window portion may be provided in front of the entire front surface of the weight 222 of the upper design piece 219 which is not in contact with the game ball B1. Specifically, the design switching window portion is set to have the same circular shape as the front surface of the weight 222. The opaque design 211a is not attached to the design switching window portion, and the rear side can be visually recognized from the design switching window portion. The upper design piece 219 includes a weight fixing portion for design instead of the weight fixing portions 219h and 221h in the second embodiment. The weight fixing portion for design is different from the weight fixing portion 219h in the second embodiment in that the weight 222 is fixed from the back surface side of the weight fixing portion for design. On the front surface of the weight fixing portion for design, a plate-shaped design display portion having an opaque design 211a is formed on the front surface. The design display portion is parallel to the plate-shaped front portion 216c and exists in the vicinity of the rear of the plate-shaped front portion 216c. The design display unit rotates around the upper rotation shaft 217 while maintaining a posture parallel to the plate-shaped front portion 216c as the upper design piece 219 rotates. The design display unit has a shape and dimensions that can always exist behind the design switching window unit while the upper design piece 219 rotates from the closed state to the open state of the upper switching window unit 213. is doing. In a situation where the upper design piece 219 is not in contact with the game ball B1, the first area of the design display unit can be visually recognized from the design switching window unit. When the upper design piece 219 comes into contact with the game ball B1 and rotates, the second region of the design display portion different from the first region can be visually recognized from the design switching window portion. With these configurations, the area of the design display unit displayed on the design switching window unit can be switched from the first area to the second area at the timing when the upper switching window unit 213 is switched from the closed state to the open state. By increasing the area of the switchable area on the front surface of the design unit 211, it is possible to greatly change the front surface of the design unit 211 to facilitate the attention of the player to the design unit 211.

The configuration in which the upper design piece 219 and the lower design piece 221 can be interlocked by the interlocking protrusion 252 can be applied to other than the design unit 211 that enhances the appearance decoration of the game board 212. For example, by switching the inclined state of the passage between the first state and the second state, the switching passage unit that switches between the state in which the game ball B1 is difficult to enter the through gate 35 and the state in which it is easy to enter. The configuration may be applied.

Specifically, in the game area PA, a switching passage unit is provided above the through gate 35. The switching passage unit includes a base body 215 already described in the second embodiment and a passage housing fixed to the front surface side of the base body 215. The passage housing has a space outlet having a larger lateral dimension than the outlet 267 in the second embodiment, and the entire visible area 237 set in the plate-shaped front portion 216c is transparent and forward. It differs from the above-mentioned housing 216 in that the flow-down space 224 can be visually recognized.

In the right accommodation space 242, the upper passage piece is fixed so as to be rotatable around the upper rotation shaft 217. The upper passage piece is not provided with the upper switching plate portion 219f, the stopper portion 219g, and the weight fixing portion 219h, and the interlocking contact portion is integrally formed with the upper guide plate portion 219e instead of the interlocking protrusion 252. In that respect, it differs from the above-mentioned upper design piece 219.

The switching passage unit includes a motor instead of the lower rotating shaft 218. The motor includes a housing-shaped main body portion and a rotating shaft portion protruding forward from the front surface of the main body portion, and is connected to the main control board 141. The main body portion is fixed to the back surface side of the base body 215, and the rotation shaft portion is inserted into a through hole formed in the base body 215 and protrudes vertically forward from the front surface of the base body 215. The position of the rotating shaft portion is the same as the position of the lower rotating shaft 218 in the first embodiment.

An electric passage piece is fixed to the rotating shaft portion so as to be rotatable around the rotating shaft portion. The electric passage piece is provided with a passage piece fixing portion having the same outer shape as the design piece fixing portion 221b instead of the design piece fixing portion 221b, and the lateral dimension of the lower guide plate portion 221e is shortened. It is different from the lower design piece 221 in the second embodiment in that the lower switching plate portion 221f, the stopper portion 221g, and the weight fixing portion 221h are not provided.

An insertion hole is formed in the passage piece fixing portion, and the rotating shaft portion is fixed by an adhesive in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole. The main CPU 143 drives and controls the electric motor so that the rotation shaft portion rotates clockwise according to the game situation, and drives the electric motor so that the rotation shaft portion rotates counterclockwise. Control. At this time, the electric passage piece rotates integrally with the rotating shaft portion.

The upper guide plate portion 219e of the upper passage piece extends to the left through the upper opening 227 to the middle position of the flow space 224, and the lower guide plate portion 221e passes through the lower opening 233 and is in the middle of the flow space 224. It extends to the right to the position.

In the first state, the upper guide plate portion 219e is slightly inclined downward toward the left, and the lower guide plate portion 221e is slightly inclined downward toward the right. The interlocking contact portion is integrally formed at the rear end near the left end of the upper guide plate portion 219e, extends downward, and is in contact with the upper rear end of the lower guide plate portion 221e. The upper passage piece has a volume only on the left side of the upper rotation shaft 217, and the center of gravity of the upper passage piece exists on the left side of the upper rotation shaft 217. Therefore, in the first state, the upper guide plate portion 219e that tends to move downward due to its own weight is supported by the lower guide plate portion 221e through the interlocking contact portion.

In the first state, the game ball B1 flowing into the flow-down space 224 is slowly guided to the left by the upper guide plate portion 219e, and then slowly guided to the right by the lower guide plate portion 221e and discharged from the space outlet. .. The horizontal dimension of the space exit is approximately twice that of the game ball B1. Since the lower guide plate portion 221e has a gentle inclination, the game ball B1 cannot be sufficiently accelerated on the lower guide plate portion, and is easily discharged from the left side of the space exit. The through gate 35 is provided on the lower right side of the space exit. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the space outlet in the first state enters the through gate 35 is lower than in the case of the second state.

The main CPU 143 switches the inclined state of the passage in the flow-down space 224 from the first state to the second state by driving and controlling the electric motor so that the rotation shaft portion rotates clockwise. Due to the rotation of the rotation shaft portion, the lower passage piece rotates around the rotation shaft portion so that the lower guide plate portion 221e moves downward. As the lower guide plate portion 221e moves downward, the upper passage piece supported by the lower guide plate portion 221e through the interlocking contact portion rotates upward so that the upper guide plate portion 219e moves downward due to its own weight. It rotates around the shaft 217.

By rotating the upper and lower guide plate portions 219e and 221e, the downward inclination of the upper and lower guide plate portions 219e and 221e becomes large, and the inclined state of the passage is switched to the second state. As described above, since the flow-down space 224 is visible from the front, it is also possible to visually recognize the state in which the inclined state of the passage is switched in the flow-down space 224 from the front. In the second state, the upper and lower guide plate portions 219e and 221e are inclined downward, so that the flow speed of the game ball B1 is faster than in the first state. In this case, since the game ball B1 sufficiently accelerates on the lower guide plate portion, the discharge position of the game ball B1 at the space exit is to the right. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the space exit can easily enter the through gate 35 provided on the lower right side of the space exit.

The main CPU 143 drives and controls the electric motor so that the rotation shaft portion rotates counterclockwise. As a result, the lower passage piece rotates around the rotation shaft portion so that the lower guide plate portion 221e moves upward. At this time, the interlocking contact portion is pushed upward by the lower guide plate portion 221e that moves upward. Therefore, the upper passage piece rotates around the upper rotation shaft 217 so that the upper guide plate portion 219e moves upward. As a result, the inclined state of the passage returns from the second state to the first state.

By making it possible to switch between the first state and the second state in which the game ball B1 is more likely to win the through gate 35 than the first state, the switching passage unit can improve the interest of the game. .. In this configuration, only the lower passage piece is electric, and the rotation of the upper passage piece is linked to the rotation of the lower passage piece by using the interlocking contact portion, so that one electric motor can be used. It is possible to switch between the tilted states of the two guide plate portions 219e and 221e at the same time. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration of the switching passage unit as compared with the configuration using the same number (two) of electric motors as the guide plate portions 219e and 221e.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to 16th buffers 202a to 202p of the input port 201 on the management side I / F 111, the type of buffer whose input signal type is determined in the design stage of the management IC 146 is described above. It is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 143 in order to make the management CPU 192 specify the type of the input signal is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 201 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

A signal of the same type as that of the first embodiment is input to the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g and the sixteenth buffer 202p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 122a is input to the first buffer 202a, and the second buffer 202b corresponds to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 123a. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 124a is input to the third buffer 202c, and a fourth corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 125a is input to the fourth buffer 202d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 126a is input to the fifth buffer 202e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 127a is input to the sixth buffer 202f. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 128a is input to the seventh buffer 202g, and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 202p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 202h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 202i as the ninth signal. The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 202j as the tenth signal, but in the present embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the 13th buffer 202m as the open / close execution mode signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the 14th buffer 202n as the high frequency support mode signal. , The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the 15th buffer 202o as a signal during door opening.

An open / close execution mode signal is input to the 13th buffer 202m, a high frequency support mode signal is input to the 14th buffer 202n, a door opening signal is input to the 15th buffer 202o, and a th. It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 146 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16 buffer 202p, and the management CPU 192 does not receive an instruction from the main CPU 143, and the management CPU 192 has these 13th to 16th buffers 202m to 202p. It is possible to specify that each of the above signals corresponding to each is input to. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to twelfth buffers 202a to 202l has not been determined at the design stage of the management IC 146, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 143. This is specified by the management side CPU 192. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 and the management CPU 192 is started, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a recognition process of the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 143. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 15) as in the first embodiment.

First, "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 202a to 202l to be recognized for the signal type, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 145 (step S1101). After that, the output processing of the identification start signal is executed (step S1102). In the output process, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 202a, the open / closed execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 202m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 202n. Is set to the HI level to start the output of the identification start signal. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 192 to recognize the output state of these signals.

After that, the information of the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 145 is read from the main ROM 144, and the information of the read number of outputs is set in the output counter provided in the main RAM 145 (. Step S1103). The output count counter is a counter for specifying the output count of the type identification signal by the main CPU 143.

In the present embodiment, when the management side CPU 192 recognizes the type of the signal input to the first buffer 202a to the twelfth buffer 202l, the number of prize balls set for the ball entry unit corresponding to the signal type. Outputs the type identification signal the same number of times as. The management side CPU 192 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 202a to the twelfth buffer 202l in the first to twelfth correspondence related areas 203a to 203l of the correspondence relation memory 196. .. That is, the type of the signal input to the first buffer 202a to the twelfth buffer 202l is grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry unit corresponding to the signal type.

In step S1103, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of "12", "11", and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the output count counter. .. When the value of the recognition output counter is "9", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output count counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is "8", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33 is set in the output count counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is "7", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is set in the output count counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "6", even if the game ball B1 enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the game ball B1 is not paid out, so that the output is performed. Set "0" in the count counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of "5" to "1", the corresponding ball entry portion does not exist and the ball is blank, so "0" is set in the output count counter.

After that, the output processing of the start trigger signal is executed (step S1104). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 202a to the HI level. The period for maintaining the first signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 192 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

After that, on the condition that the value of the output count counter of the main RAM 145 is not "0" (step S1105: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output count counter in step S1103. The process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the output processing of the type identification signal is executed. In the output process, the output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 202b to the HI level. The period for maintaining the second signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 192 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

After that, the value of the output count counter of the main RAM 145 is subtracted by 1 (step S1107), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1108). If the value of the output count counter is 1 or more (step S1108: NO), the process returns to step S1106.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1105, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, the end trigger signal output process is executed (step S1109). In the output process, the output of the end trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 202c to the HI level. The period for maintaining the third signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 192 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

After that, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 145 is subtracted by 1 (step S1110), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1111). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1111: NO), the process returns to step S1103 and the process for recognizing the signal type corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed. do.

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S1111: YES), the output processing of the identification end signal is executed (step S1112). In the output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 202c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 202m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 202n. Is set to the HI level to start the output of the identification end signal. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 192 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 192 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 192 is started as in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 143 is completed (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 194 is cleared to "0" (step S1202). After that, the process proceeds to step S1204 on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 143 (step S1203: YES). In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 143. When the type identification signal is received (step S1204: YES), the value of the reception count counter provided in the management side RAM 194 is added by 1 (step S1205). The reception count counter is a counter for the management side CPU 192 to specify the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main side CPU 143. The value of the reception count counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S1203.

When a negative determination is made in step S1204 or when the process of step S1205 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 143 (step S1206). If the end trigger signal has not been received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1204, and if the end trigger signal has been received (step S1206: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1207). In the correspondence setting process, the reception count counter is set in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 194 among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 203a to 203l of the correspondence memory 196. Stores the value that has been set. In this case, "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first correspondence area 203a, the second correspondence area 203b, and the third correspondence area 203c, and the fourth correspondence area 203d is set. Is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32, and "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 is set in the fifth correspondence area 203e, and the sixth correspondence relationship. In the area 203f, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is set. Further, "0" is set in the 7th to 12th correspondence related areas 203g to 203l. After that, the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 194 is added by 1 (step S1208).

When a negative determination is made in step S1203, or when the process of step S1208 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 143 is completed (step S1209). If the reception of the identification end signal is not completed (step S1209: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and the processing after step S1204 is performed on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 143 (step S1203: YES). Execute. When the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 143 is completed (step S1209: YES), the history setting process in step S1210 and the external output process in step S1211 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 45 is a time chart showing how the correspondence relationship information between the first to twelfth buffers 202a to 202l and the types of signals input to these buffers 202a to 202l is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 196. FIG. 45 (a) shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 45 (b) shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level. ) Indicates the period during which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 45 (d) indicates the period during which the output state of the signal during the open / close execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. 45 (e) shows the period. The period during which the output state of the signal during the high frequency support mode is at the HI level is shown, and FIG. 45 (f) shows the types of signals input to the first to twelfth buffers 202a to 202l and these buffers 202a to 202l. FIG. 45 (g) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, FIG. 45 (g) shows the timing at which the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 194 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 45 (h) shows the timing. The timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S1207) is executed by the management side CPU 192 is shown.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 and the management CPU 192 is started, the first signal is shown at the timing of t1 as shown in FIGS. 45 (a), 45 (d) and 45 (e). , The output state of the signal in the open / close execution mode and the signal in the high frequency support mode is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 143 to the management CPU 192 is started. After that, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 143 to the management CPU 192 is stopped. At the timing of t2, the management side CPU 192 makes an affirmative determination in step S1201 of the management process (FIG. 44), so that the identification state is set as shown in FIG. 45 (f).

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 45A from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 192. Then, as shown in FIG. 45B, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing of t5 to the timing of t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 192. In this case, at the timing of t6, the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 194 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 45 (g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 45 (c) from the timing of t8 to the timing of t10. As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 192. In this case, at the timing of t9, the management side CPU 192 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 45 (h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "1" is provided as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 203a to 203l to be set this time in the correspondence memory 196. Information is stored.

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 45A from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 192. Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, the timing of t16 to the timing of t18, the timing of t19 to the timing of t21, and the timing of t22 to the timing of t24 are second. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 192. In this case, the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 194 is incremented by 1 at each of the timing of t14, the timing of t17, the timing of t20, and the timing of t23, as shown in FIG. 45 (g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 45 (c) from the timing of t25 to the timing of t27. As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 192. In this case, at the timing of t26, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management side CPU 192 as shown in FIG. 45 (h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "10" is used as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 203a to 203l to be set this time in the correspondence memory 196. Information is stored.

After that, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 45 (c), 45 (d), and 45 (e), the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are LOW. The level is changed to the HI level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 143 to the management CPU 192 is started. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 143 to the management CPU 192 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management side CPU 192 makes an affirmative determination in step S1209 of the management process (FIG. 44), so that the identification state is released as shown in FIG. 45 (f).

In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 197 corresponds to the prize ball corresponding to the ball entry portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of pieces is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of ball entry portions having the same number of prize balls, it is not possible to distinguish between the ball entry portions in the history information. Specifically, since the number of prize balls is one in both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, it is possible to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls may be different between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. This makes it possible to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information even in the configuration in which the history information is stored as in the third embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, "15" is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 194 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o are to be confirmed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal, but also the information corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect, the information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect, and the front door. Regarding the information corresponding to whether or not the frame 14 is open, it is possible for the management side CPU 192 to specify that the signal path corresponds to these information without receiving the correspondence information from the main side CPU 143. It has become. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a is the information that needs to be recognized by the management side CPU 192 from the main side CPU 143 the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 198a to 198g. Become. Then, when the management side CPU 192 is made to recognize the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of prize balls corresponding to the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a is generated from the main side CPU 143 to the management side CPU 192 by using the second signal. Is output to. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the trigger for executing the calculation of various parameters using the history information is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 46 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 146 in the present embodiment. The management IC 146 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 192, a management side ROM 193, a management side RAM 194, an RTC 195, a correspondence-related memory 196, and a history memory 197, as in the first embodiment. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 146 is provided with a calculation result memory 207. In the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when a calculation trigger occurs, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 192 using the history information stored in the history memory 197 at that time. Then, the various calculated parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 207. Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 207 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 182.

The calculation trigger of various parameters occurs before the timing when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182. As a result, it is possible to make the timing of calculating various parameters different from the timing of externally outputting to the reading device, and it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Further, since the calculation result memory 207 for storing the calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only the various parameters for one calculation trigger but also the various parameters for multiple calculation triggers are collectively collected. It becomes possible to memorize it. This makes it possible to shorten the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation trigger.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 201 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

The same type of signal as in the first embodiment is input to the first to tenth buffers 202a to 202j and the sixteenth buffer 202p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 122a is input to the first buffer 202a, and the second buffer 202b corresponds to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 123a. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 124a is input to the third buffer 202c, and a fourth corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 125a is input to the fourth buffer 202d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 126a is input to the fifth buffer 202e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 127a is input to the sixth buffer 202f. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 128a is input to the seventh buffer 202g, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 202h, and the ninth buffer is input. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the buffer 202i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the 10th buffer 202j, and an output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 202p.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the 15th buffer 202o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 143 in order to provide a calculation trigger for various parameters to the management side CPU 192. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the 15th buffer 202o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 146 in the same manner as the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 202p, and is an instruction from the main CPU 143. The management side CPU 192 can specify that each of the above signals corresponding to the 15th to 16th buffers 202o to 202p is input to the 15th to 16th buffers 202o to 202p without receiving the signal. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to 14th buffers 202a to 202n has not been determined at the design stage of the management IC 146, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 143. This is specified by the management side CPU 192. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 and the management CPU 192 is started, as in the first embodiment.

Next, a processing configuration for causing the management side CPU 192 to execute various parameter calculations in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 143. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16).

In the power failure information storage process, when the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 147 (step S1301: YES), the output process of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1302). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 202o in the input port 201 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a sufficient period for the management CPU 192 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level. After that, after executing the power failure processing in step S1303, an infinite loop occurs, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the main CPU 143 is completely stopped. In the power failure processing, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 145, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by the management side CPU 192. The power failure response process is configured to be executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 26). In the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 143 (step S606: YES), step S607. The history setting process, the external output process of step S608, and the power failure response process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power failure response process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 143 reaches the HI level (step S1401: YES), in steps S1402 to S1406, the external output in the first embodiment is described. In the same manner as in steps S1002 to S1006 of the processing (FIG. 32), the number of balls entered for each of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated. .. Further, in step S1407, similarly to step S1007 of the external output process (FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S1408, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1008 of the external output processing (FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and in step S1409, for external output in the first embodiment. The total time is calculated in the same manner as in step S1009 of the process (FIG. 32). Then, the calculation result information in step S1408 and the calculation result information in step S1409 are written in the calculation result memory 207 (step S1410). In this case, if the calculation result memory 207 already stores information on other calculation results, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from RTC195, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, in step S1411, the number of various balls entered in the open / close execution mode is calculated in the same manner as in step S1011 of the external output process (FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and in step S1412, the first step is performed. Similar to step S1012 of the external output process (FIG. 32) in the embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the open / close execution mode is calculated. Further, in step S1413, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1013 of the external output process (FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S1414 is written in the calculation result memory 207 (step S1414). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 207. Further, the current date information and time information are read from RTC195, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, in step S1415, the number of various balls entered in the high frequency support mode is calculated in the same manner as in step S1015 of the external output process (FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and in step S1416, the above-mentioned first step. Similar to step S1016 of the external output process (FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the high frequency support mode and the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S1417, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S1417 is written in the calculation result memory 207 (step S1418). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 207. Further, the current date information and time information are read from RTC195, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing. After that, an infinite loop occurs, and the system waits until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 192 is completely stopped.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management side CPU 192. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 26).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 143 reaches the HI level (step S1501: YES), the output processing of the calculation result is executed (step S1502). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 207 are output to the reading terminal 182. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 182, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 207 are read. In this case, when only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of one calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 207, only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one calculation trigger are stored in the reading device. When it is read and various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of multiple calculation triggers are stored in the calculation result memory 207, the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of these multiple calculation triggers are read by the reading device. ..

After that, the history information output process is executed (step S1503). In the output process, all the history information stored in the history area 204 of the history memory 197 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 182. As a result, various history information stored in the history area 204 is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 182. By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the history information in this way, it is possible for the operator using the reading device to perform detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

After that, the clearing process is executed (step S1504). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 205 of the history memory 197 are cleared by "0", and the pointer area 206 is cleared by "0". As a result, the history area 204 is in the initialized state. Further, in the clearing process, all the areas of the calculation result memory 207 are cleared to "0". As a result, the operation result memory 207 is in the initialized state.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 143 is stopped, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 192. This makes it possible to manage various parameters on a business day basis.

When it is specified that the supply of the operating power is stopped in the main CPU 143, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to the HI level, so that the management side CPU 192 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible for the management side CPU 192 to calculate various parameters based on the instruction from the main side CPU 143.

Various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 192 are sequentially written in the calculation result memory 207. As a result, various parameters can be accumulated in the management IC 146, and when various parameters are read by the reading device, various parameters of a plurality of business days can be read together.

When various parameters are written in the calculation result memory 207, information that makes it possible to specify the time when the various parameters are calculated is written in the calculation result memory 207 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the timing when various parameters are calculated.

When a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters for the calculation result are written in the calculation result memory 207, the history memory 197 may be cleared to "0". As a result, in a situation where the maximum number of storable history information is already stored in the history memory 197, it becomes difficult for a new history information to be written to the history memory 197.

Further, the target information to be externally output to the reading device may be only the information of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 207, and the history information stored in the history memory 197 may not be output externally. .. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information output to the outside.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure response process executed by the management side CPU 192 is different from the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fourth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by the management side CPU 192 in the present embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 143 reaches the HI level (step S1601: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1602). In various arithmetic processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1409, steps S1411 to S1413, and steps S1415 to S1417 of the power failure response process (FIG. 49) in the fourth embodiment are executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter is within the reference range among the various parameters calculated in step S1602 (step S1603). In particular,
7th parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x ""Number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating opening" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning 34") ・ Eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x "general winning opening 31""Number of prize balls for winning" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Prize for winning the second operating port 34" The two parameters of the ratio of "number of balls") are set as parameters for determining whether or not they are within the reference range. Then, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, an affirmative determination is made in step S1603 assuming that the predetermined parameter is in the reference range.

The predetermined parameter is not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and may be configured in which other parameters are set as predetermined parameters in place of or in addition to these. for example,
Second parameter: As a configuration in which the ratio of the total number of game balls B1 to the general winning opening 31 K2 / the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) is set as a predetermined parameter. May be good. In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be in the reference range. Further, only the predetermined parameters to be determined in step S1603 may be calculated by various arithmetic processes in step S1602.

When the predetermined parameter is not in the reference range (step S1603: NO), various parameters calculated in step S1602 are written in the calculation result memory 207 (step S1604). In this case, if the calculation result memory 207 already stores information on other calculation results, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from RTC195, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined parameter is in the reference range (step S1603: YES), the process of step S1604 is not executed. As a result, only various parameters when the predetermined parameter is not in the reference range are written in the calculation result memory 207. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result memory 207 while leaving the history in the calculation result memory 207.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1603 or when the process of step S1604 is executed, the clear process of the history memory 197 is executed (step S1605). In the clearing process, all the history information storage areas 205 of the history memory 197 are cleared by "0", and the pointer area 206 is cleared by "0". As a result, the history area 204 is in the initialized state. After executing the process of step S1605, an infinite loop occurs, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 192 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether or not the contents of the various calculated parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters determined not to be included in the reference range are the operation result memory 207. Written in. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 207, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the calculation result memory 207.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger for causing the management side CPU 192 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fourth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 143. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 28).

It is determined whether or not the game ball B1 has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S1701). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the addition process of the ball entry counter provided in the main RAM 145 is executed (step S1702). In the addition process, the number of game balls B1 in which the ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is processed this time. It is specified based on the number of times step S705 is executed in the management output process (FIG. 28). Then, the number of the specified game balls B1 is added to the ball entry counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or more than the trigger reference number "500" (step S1703). When it is "500" or more (step S1703: YES), the subtraction process of the ball entry counter of the main RAM 145 is executed (step S1704). In the subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by "500". After that, the output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1705). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 202o in the input port 201 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a sufficient period for the management CPU 192 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 192. The arithmetic processing is a processing executed instead of the power failure response processing in the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 26), and in the management processing, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 143 (step S606: YES), in step S607. The history setting process, the external output process of step S608, and the arithmetic process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 143 reaches the HI level (step S1801: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1802). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as in steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure response process (FIG. 49) in the fourth embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 192. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 143, the game ball B1 in the game area PA is entered within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the sphere mode in detail.

Further, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on condition that the game is executed. The parameters are calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameter calculations from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger for causing the management side CPU 192 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the sixth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 143. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 28).

It is determined whether or not the game ball B1 has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S1901). If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S1902). The continuation counter is mainly on the main side for a period in which the game ball B1 does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It is a counter for specifying by CPU 143.

When the value of the continuation counter after 1 addition is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S1903: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 145 is cleared to "0" (step S1904). When the game ball B1 does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 for 5 seconds, a positive determination is made in step S1903. The stop reference value is set to. Further, the time measurement flag is a flag for the main CPU 143 to specify whether or not to measure the time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level, and is a time measurement flag. When the value of is "0", the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is "1", the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S1905).

When a negative determination is made in step S1903, when the process of step S1904 is executed, or when the process of step S1905 is executed, the time measurement flag of the main RAM 145 is set to "1" (condition). Step S1906: YES), the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S1907). The measurement counter is a counter used for measuring the time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

1 It is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter after addition is equal to or higher than the indicated reference value (step S1908). An instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S1908 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1908, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S1909), and the calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S1910). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 202o in the input port 201 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a sufficient period for the management CPU 192 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, since various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game round is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation where the game is not executed from the calculation targets of various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters in the situation where the game is being executed.

In addition, instead of the configuration in which whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed is measured by using the measurement counter, the configuration may be such that the RTC 195 is used for measurement.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger for executing the calculation of various parameters by the management side CPU 192 is different from the first embodiment, and the presence or absence of the calculation trigger is specified by the main CPU 143. It is not performed independently by the management side CPU 192. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 192. The calculation process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S812 in the history setting process (FIG. 29).

In the history setting process of this processing time, the game ball B1 has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It is determined whether or not the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 197 (step S2001). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the addition process of the ball entry counter provided in the management side RAM 194 is executed (step S2002). In the addition process, the number of game balls B1 in which the ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is processed this time. It is specified based on the number of times that the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball B1 is stored in the history setting process of the times. Then, the number of the specified game balls B1 is added to the ball entry counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or more than the trigger reference number "500" (step S2003). When it is "500" or more (step S2003: YES), the subtraction process of the ball entry counter of the main RAM 145 is executed (step S2004). In the subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by "500". After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2005). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as in steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure response process (FIG. 49) in the fourth embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 192. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 143, the game ball B1 in the game area PA is entered within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the sphere mode in detail.

Further, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on condition that the game is executed. The parameters are calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameter calculations from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

Further, the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management side CPU 192, and the management side CPU 192 determines whether or not the total number is equal to or more than the trigger reference number. That is, the calculation trigger of various parameters is independently determined by the management side CPU 192. As a result, it is not necessary for the main CPU 143 to execute the process for determining the calculation trigger of various parameters, so that the processing load of the main CPU 143 can be reduced.

<9th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 192 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the present embodiment, the operation result memory 207 is provided in the management IC 146 as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 46). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management side CPU 192 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 197, and writes the various parameters of the calculation result to the calculation result memory 207. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a signal indicating that the open / close execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the open / close execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high frequency support mode has started, and a high frequency support mode. A signal indicating that the front door frame 14 has been opened, a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has been completed are individually sent from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146. Will be sent to.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a history setting process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 192.

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 192 among the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 194 (step S2101). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 196 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 203a to 203o are blank is stored is specified, and the identification thereof is specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the present embodiment, information indicating that any of the ball entry portions is supported is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 203a to 203g, and the opening / closing execution mode is started in the eighth correspondence area 203h. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 203i, and information corresponding to the start of the high frequency support mode is stored in the tenth correspondence area 203j. Information corresponding to the end of the high frequency support mode is stored in the 11th correspondence area 203k, and information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14 is stored in the 12th correspondence area 203l. , Information corresponding to the end of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored in the thirteenth correspondence area 203m. Therefore, in step S2101, "13" is set in the confirmation target counter.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the 1st to 15th buffers 202a to 202o is changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 143 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2102). When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth buffers 202a to 202o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth buffer 202j is the confirmation target of the numerical information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 202e is the confirmation target of the numerical information. ..

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC195 (step S2103). Then, the writing process to the history memory 197 is executed (step S2104). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 204 currently being written is specified by referring to the pointer area 206 of the history memory 197, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S2103 is written in the history information storage area 205 of the history area 204. Further, the correspondence relation information is read from the correspondence relation areas 203a to 203o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, and the correspondence relation information is written in the history information storage area 205 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth correspondence area 203a to 203o is the target for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth correspondence area 203j is the target for reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 203e is the correspondence relation. Information is to be read out.

After that, the value of the target pointer is added by 1 (step S2105). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 206 of the history memory 197 is read, and the numerical information is added by 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 204 (step S2106).

When the maximum value is exceeded (step S2106: YES), various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2107). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as in steps S1002 to S1009, steps S1011 to S1013, and steps S1015 to S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 32) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters of the calculation result and information on the total time are written in the calculation result memory 207 (step S2108). In this case, if the calculation result memory 207 already stores information on other calculation results, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from RTC195, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, the status information takeover process is executed (step S2109). In the takeover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 197, whether the current state is in the open / close execution mode, whether the high frequency support mode is in the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 is being opened. It is determined whether or not it is. Then, those state information is written in the management side RAM 194.

After that, the clearing process of the history memory 197 is executed (step S2110). In the clearing process, all the history information storage areas 205 of the history memory 197 are cleared by "0", and the pointer area 206 is cleared by "0". As a result, the history area 204 is in the initialized state. Further, after executing the clearing process, the state information written in the management side RAM 194 is read out in step S2109. Then, when the state information indicating that the open / close execution mode is being stored is stored, the history information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in the open / close execution mode is stored in the history information storage area 205 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. At the same time as writing, the pointer information to be written is added by 1. In addition, when the status information indicating that the high frequency support mode is being stored is stored, the history information storage area corresponding to the pointer information to which the history information indicating that the high frequency support mode is being written is stored. While writing to 205, the pointer information to be written is added by 1. Further, when the state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, the history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open corresponds to the pointer information to be written. While writing to the history information storage area 205, the pointer information to be written is added by 1.

When a negative determination is made in step S2102, a negative determination is made in step S2106, or the process of step S2110 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 194 is subtracted by 1 (step S2111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2112). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2112: NO), the processing after step S2102 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 197 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 197. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the history information exceeds the upper limit of the number that can be stored in the history memory 197 and the history information becomes a storage target and the calculation of various parameters cannot be performed accurately.

Further, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 197 is initialized and all the history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that has already been the calculation target of various parameters from becoming the calculation target of various parameters again.

Further, even when the history memory 197 is initialized, the state information takeover process is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the status information.

<10th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 197 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 192 are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 197 in the present embodiment. The history memory 197 is provided with a total area 291, a first state area 292, a second state area 293, and a third state area 294. Each of these areas 291 to 294 is provided with first to fifteenth counters 291a to 291o, 292a to 292o, 293a to 293o, and 294a to 294o. The first counters 291a to 294a in each area 291 to 294 store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 202a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second counters 291b to 294b in each area 291 to 294 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 202b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third counters 291c to 294c in each area 291 to 294 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 202c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth counters 291d to 294d in each area 291 to 294 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth counters 291e to 294e in each area 291 to 294 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth counters 291f to 294f in each area 291 to 294 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh counters 291g to 294g of each area 291 to 294. The eighth counters 291h to 294h of each area 291 to 294 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 202h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth counters 291i to 294i in each area 291 to 294 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 202i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth counters 291j to 294j in each area 291 to 294 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 202j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 11th counters 291k to 294k in each area 291 to 294 store information on the number of times the output state of the 11th signal input to the 11th buffer 202k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 12th counters 291l to 294l in each area 291 to 294 store information on the number of times the output state of the 12th signal input to the 12th buffer 202l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 202m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the 13th counters 291m to 294m of each area 291 to 294. The 14th counters 291n to 294n in each area 291 to 294 store information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 202n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifteenth counters 291o to 294o in each area 291 to 294 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 202o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the measurement targets using the 1st to 15th counters 291a to 291o, 292a to 292o, 293a to 293o, 294a to 294o are the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operation. The first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g to which a signal corresponding to the result of entering the ball into any of the mouth 33 and the second operating port 34 is input. Therefore, the 8th to 8th signals corresponding to the state information such as whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is open are input. The 10 buffers 202h to 202j are excluded from the above measurement targets. The distinction as to whether or not the measurement target is made is performed based on the correspondence relation information stored in the correspondence relation areas 203a to 203o of the correspondence relation memory 196.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a history setting process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 192.

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 192 among the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 194 (step S2201). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 196 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 203a to 203o are blank is stored is specified, and the identification thereof is specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, information other than the information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 203a to 203j as described above. Therefore, in step S2201, "10" is set in the confirmation target counter. do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 202a to 202o corresponding to the current confirmation target counters are buffers to which the status information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 203a to 203o corresponding to the values of the current confirmation target counters, the correspondence information includes information indicating that the open / close execution mode is used, information indicating that the high frequency support mode is used, and information indicating that the high frequency support mode is used. It is determined whether or not any of the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, the state information setting process is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress is stored on the management side. It is stored in the RAM 194, and when the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the first state is erased from the management side RAM 194. In addition, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the second state indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is stored in the management side RAM 194. When the output state of the 9th signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the 2nd state is erased from the management side RAM 194. Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. Is stored in the management side RAM 194, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the third state is erased from the management side RAM 194.

When a negative determination is made in step S2202, it is stored in a buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o and in which a signal of information different from the state information is input. By confirming whether or not the numerical information is changed from "0" to "1", whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 143 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. It is determined whether or not (step S2204). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the corresponding total counter addition process is executed (step S2205). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 291a to 291o for totalization in the totalization area 291 of the history memory 197 is added by one. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 291e for totaling is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 291a for totalization is the addition target. ..

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 194, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the counter addition process for the corresponding first state is executed (step S2207). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 292a to 292o for the first state in the first state area 292 of the history memory 197 is added by one. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 292e for the first state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 292a for the first state is the addition target. It is subject to addition.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 194, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), the counter addition process for the corresponding second state is executed (step S2209). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 293a to 293o for the second state in the second state area 293 of the history memory 197 is added by one. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 293e for the second state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 293a for the second state is used. It is subject to addition.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 194, it is determined whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the counter addition process for the corresponding third state is executed (step S2211). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 294a to 294o for the third state in the third state area 294 of the history memory 197 is added by one. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 294e for the third state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 294a for the third state is the addition target. It is subject to addition.

When the process of step S2203 is executed, the negative determination is made in step S2204, the negative determination is made in step S2210, or the process of step S2211 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 194 is set to 1. Subtract (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2213). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the processing after step S2202 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history of the game ball B1 into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be obtained. It is not stored as the history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as the number of times information that the game ball B1 is detected by the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history memory 197 as compared with the configuration in which each history information is individually stored.

As described above, the configuration is such that the game ball B1 is stored as the number of times information detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a, so that the external output process (FIG. 32) in the present embodiment has an out port such as step S1002. Processing to calculate the number of balls B1 entering the game ball B1 into 24a, processing to calculate the number of balls B1 entering the special electric winning device 32 such as step S1004, processing to calculate the number of balls B1 entering the first operating port 33 such as step S1005 The process of calculating the number of balls entered and the process of calculating the number of balls B1 entered into the second operating port 34 such as step S1006 are not required. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

In the process of calculating the number of balls B1 to be entered into the general winning opening 31 such as step S1003, the first to third counters 291a to 291c, 292a to 292c, 293a to 293c, and 294a to 294c are all general winnings. Since it corresponds to the mouth 31, it is necessary to execute the process of summing the values of the first to third counters 291a to 291c, 292a to 292c, 293a to 293c, and 294a to 294c. Further, the number of balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the open / close execution mode cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 32) in the present embodiment. Similarly, the number of balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the high frequency support mode cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1016 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 32) in the present embodiment.

<11th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the storage means for storing the history information is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 58 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 142 in the present embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 142 is provided with a main CPU 143, a main ROM 144, a main RAM 145, a management IC 146, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 182. Further, the management IC 146 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 192, a management side ROM 193, and a management side RAM 194 as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 146 is not provided with the RTC 195, the correspondence-related memory 196, and the history memory 197. Instead, the management IC 146 is provided with the calculation result memory 207 as in the fourth embodiment. Since the management IC 146 is not provided with the RTC 195, the correspondence-related memory 196, and the history memory 197, the history information is not stored in the management IC 146 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 145. That is, the main RAM 145, in which the information necessary for executing the program in the main CPU 143 is temporarily stored, is also used as the memory for storing the ball entry history. Then, the management IC 146 can access the main RAM 145 through the management side I / F 111, and when a calculation trigger of various parameters occurs, the management IC 146 accesses the main RAM 145 to read the ball entry history and read the reading. Various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history. The various calculated parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 207. When the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182, various parameters are provided to the reading device from the calculation result memory 207, but the ball entry history stored in the main RAM 145 is not provided to the reading device. ..

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 143. The ball entry detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the 0th bit D0 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 122a 1 It is determined that the number of game balls B1 has been detected (step S2301: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S2302). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 as a winning history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 207 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 145 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 142 is stopped, the value of the general winning counter is the value even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. It is stored in memory. After that, the value of the 10 prize ball counters of the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S2303).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the first bit D1 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 123a is used for 1 It is determined that the number of game balls B1 has been detected (step S2304: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S2305). After that, the value of the 10 prize ball counters of the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S2306).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 124a 1 It is determined that the number of game balls B1 has been detected (step S2307: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S2308). After that, the value of the 10 prize ball counters of the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S2309).

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored for the third bit D3 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game is performed by the special electric detection sensor 125a. It is determined that the sphere B1 has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the special electric winning flag of the main RAM 145 (step S2311). Further, the value of the special electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S2312). The special electric winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 as a winning history. The value of the special electric winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 207 by the reading device. By the way, backup power is supplied to the main RAM 145 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 142 is stopped, so even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state, the value of the special power winning counter is It is stored in memory. After that, the value of the 15 prize ball counters of the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S2313).

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored for the 4th bit D4 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, the first actuating port detection sensor 126a 1 It is determined that the number of game balls B1 has been detected (step S2314: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 145 (step S2315). Further, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S2316). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the first operation port 33 as a ball entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 207 by the reading device. .. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 145 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 142 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. Is stored in memory. After that, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S2317).

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored for the 5th bit D5 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, the second actuating port detection sensor 127a 1 It is determined that the number of game balls B1 has been detected (step S2318: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 145 (step S2319). Further, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S2320). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 207 by the reading device. .. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 145 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 142 is stopped, the value of the second operation counter even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. Is stored in memory. After that, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S2321).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the 6th bit D6 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one out port detection sensor 128a is used. It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S2322: YES). In this case, the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S2323). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the out port 24a as an entry history. The value of the out counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 207 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 145 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 142 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. Be retained.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored for the 7th bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game is played by the gate detection sensor 129a. It is determined that the sphere B1 has been detected (step S2324: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the gate winning flag of the main RAM 145 (step S2325).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is recorded in each ball entry section. It is stored in the main RAM 145 as the number of balls entering the ball. As a result, every time a ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main CPU 143 to the management side CPU 192. No need to output. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting a signal from the main CPU 143 to the management CPU 192.

In the present embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management side CPU 192 reads out the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 from the general winning counter of the main RAM 145, and transfers from the special electric winning counter of the main RAM 145 to the special electric winning device 32. The number of balls entered is read, the number of balls entered from the first operation counter of the main RAM 145 into the first operating port 33 is read, and the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 is read from the second operating counter of the main RAM 145. The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read from the out counter of the main RAM 145. Then, the first parameter to the eighth parameter described in the first embodiment are calculated by using each of the read out numbers of balls. However, the number of each ball entered when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of each ball entered when the front door frame 14 is closed are not measured. Therefore, the first parameter to the eighth parameter are calculated in a state including the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is open. Further, since the number of each ball entered in the open / close execution mode and the number of each ball entered in the high frequency support mode are not individually measured, the first parameter to the eighteenth parameter and the twenty-first parameter described in the first embodiment are described above. The 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first parameter to eighth parameter are written in the calculation result memory 207. Then, when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 182, all the parameters written at that time in the calculation result memory 207 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 207 is cleared to "0".

It should be noted that the management IC 146 does not independently access the main RAM 145, but the information on the number of each incoming ball stored in the main RAM 145 as the incoming ball history is transmitted to the management IC 146 by transfer control by the main CPU 143. It may be configured as such. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent the event that the main CPU 143 and the management CPU 192 access the main RAM 145 at the same time.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 141, the type of the signal output from the main CPU 143 to the management side CPU 192, and the method of storing the ball entry history in each ball entry unit are different from those in the first embodiment. ing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 60 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 141 in the present embodiment. The MPU 142 is mounted on the main control board 141 as in the first embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 142 is provided with a main CPU 143, a main ROM 144, a main RAM 145, a management IC 146, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 182. Further, the management IC 146 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 192, a management side ROM 193, a management side RAM 194, a correspondence-related memory 196, and a history memory 197, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 146 is not provided with the RTC195. Also. In addition to the MPU 142, the main control board 141 is provided with a light emitting unit 301 for notification. The light emitting unit 301 for notification is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 143. The main CPU 143 can access the history memory 197 of the management IC 146, and calculates various parameters by using the information of the ball entry history to each ball entry unit read from the history memory 197. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 301 is controlled according to the contents of the various calculated parameters. The light emitting unit 301 for notification is housed in the accommodation space of the board box 140a of the main control device 140, but the board box 140a is transparently formed and the light emitting state of the light emitting unit 301 for notification is measured outside the board box 140a. A light emitting unit 301 for notification is provided so that it can be visually confirmed from the above. As a result, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the main control device 140 can be visually confirmed, so that the light emitting unit 301 for notification does not require opening work of the board box 140a. It is possible to visually confirm the light emitting state of.

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 201 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

The same type of signal as in the first embodiment is input to the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g and the sixteenth buffer 202p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 122a is input to the first buffer 202a, and the second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 123a is input to the second buffer 202b. A signal is input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 124a is input to the third buffer 202c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 125a is input to the fourth buffer 202d. Is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 126a is input to the fifth buffer 202e, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 127a is input to the sixth buffer 202f. The 6 signals are input, the 7th signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 128a is input to the 7th buffer 202g, and the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 202p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 202h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 202i as the ninth signal. The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 202j as the tenth signal, but in the present embodiment, the signal corresponding to these open / close execution modes, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and the front The signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is not input to the input port 201. That is, the signal related to the ball entry history is not input to the 8th to 15th buffers 202h to 202o.

What kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o has not been determined at the design stage of the management IC 146, and the type of these signals is determined by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 143. It is specified by the management side CPU 192. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 and the management CPU 192 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, it is determined at the design stage of the management IC 146 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 202p, and the management CPU 192 outputs to the 16th buffer 202p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 143. It is possible to specify that the instruction signal is input.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 197 in the present embodiment. The history memory 197 is provided with counters 302a to 302o for the first to fifteenth buffers. The first buffer counter 302a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 202a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second buffer counter 302b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third buffer counter 302c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 202c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth buffer counter 302d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth buffer counter 302e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth buffer counter 302f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 7th buffer counter 302g stores information on the number of times the output state of the 7th signal input to the 7th buffer 202g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eighth buffer counter 302h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 202h has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 302i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 202i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 302j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 202j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 11th buffer counter 302k stores information on the number of times the output state of the 11th signal input to the 11th buffer 202k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 302l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 202l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The thirteenth buffer counter 302m stores information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 202m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 14th buffer counter 302n stores information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 202n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 15th buffer counter 302o stores information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 202o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the measurement target using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 302a to 302o is any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. These are the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g to which the signal corresponding to the result of entering the ball is input. Therefore, the 8th to 15th buffers 202h to 202o are excluded from the above measurement targets. The distinction as to whether or not the measurement target is made is performed based on the correspondence relation information stored in the correspondence relation areas 203a to 203o of the correspondence relation memory 196.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by the management side CPU 192. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 26).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 192 among the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 194 (step S2401). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 196 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 203a to 203o are blank is stored is specified, and the identification thereof is specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. As described above in the pachinko machine 10, information other than the information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is blank is stored in the first to seventh response areas 203a to 203j, so that “7” is set in the confirmation target counter in step S2401. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the 1st to 15th buffers 202a to 202o is changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 143 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2402). When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth buffers 202a to 202o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 202e is the confirmation target of the numerical information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first buffer 202a is the confirmation target of the numerical information. ..

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, the corresponding buffer counters 302a to 302o are added (step S2403). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the counters 302a to 302o for the first to fifteenth buffers of the history memory 197 is added by one. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer counter 302e is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first buffer counter 302a is the addition target.

When a negative determination is made in step S2402, or when the process of step S2403 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 194 is subtracted by 1 (step S2404). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2405). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2405: NO), the processing after step S2402 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history of the game ball B1 into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be obtained. It is not stored as the history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as the number of times information that the game ball B1 is detected by the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history memory 197 as compared with the configuration in which each history information is individually stored.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an external output process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 192. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 26).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 143 reaches the HI level (step S2501: YES), the output target counters provided in the management side RAM 194 have the first to fifteenth buffer counters 302a to Of the 302o, the number of counters for which the number of times information is to be output is set in the management side CPU 192 (step S2502). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 196 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 203a to 203o are blank is stored is specified, and the identification thereof is specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the present embodiment, as described above, information other than the information indicating that the blank is stored is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 203a to 203g, so that “7” is set in the output target counter in step S2502. ..

After that, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the current output target counter in the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 203a to 203o in the correspondence memory 196 is read (step S2503), and the history is used. Among the counters 302a to 302o for the first to fifteenth buffers in the memory 197, the number of times information stored in the counter corresponding to the value of the current output target counter is read (step S2504). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is "n", the nth correspondence area 203a to 203o is the reading target of the correspondence information, and the nth buffer counters 302a to 302o read the number of times information. Be the target. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 203e is the target for reading the correspondence information, the fifth buffer counter 302e is the target for reading the number of times information, and the value of the output target counter is If it is "1", the first correspondence area 203a is the target for reading the correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 302a is the target for reading the number of times information.

After that, the information output process is executed (step S2505). In the information output process, the combination of the correspondence information read in step S2503 and the number of times information read in step S2504 is output to the reading terminal 182. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 182 can read the number of times information about the correspondence information that is the output target this time.

After that, the value of the output target counter of the management side RAM 194 is subtracted by 1 (step S2506). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2507). When the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S2507: NO), the processing after step S2503 is executed for the output target corresponding to the value of the new output target counter. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2507, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 302a to 302o are cleared to "0".

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the parameter management process executed by the main CPU 143. The parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16).

First, it is determined whether or not a calculation trigger for various parameters has occurred (step S2601). The calculation trigger is when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 is started, and as in the sixth embodiment, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, and the special electric winning opening. It occurs every time the total number of game balls B1 entered into the device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 reaches 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. Since the case where the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of operating power is started is set as the calculation trigger, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off and then turned on again to calculate various parameters. It is possible to easily generate an opportunity. Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters is executed as described later, so that the game area PA up to that point can be obtained simply by turning the power off and on. It becomes possible to grasp the entry mode of the game ball B1. Further, by configuring the configuration in which a calculation trigger is generated every time the total number of balls entered in the game ball B1 becomes 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number, the entry mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA can be managed in detail. Is possible.

When a calculation trigger occurs (step S2601: YES), the ball entry history is read from the counters 302a to 302o for the first to fifteenth buffers of the history memory 197, which are the targets for storing the ball entry history. Specifically, the numerical information of the counters 302a to 302g for the first to seventh buffers is read out. In this case, the main CPU 143 can recognize the buffer counters 302a to 302o to be read out from the ball entry history by the program and data stored in the main ROM 144.

After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2603). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the information on the entry history read in step S2602 and the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry history. In the main CPU 143, each ball entry history read in step S2602 by the program and data stored in the main ROM 144 is the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the first. It is possible to specify which of the two operating ports 34 corresponds to, and it is also possible to specify the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry history read in step S2602.

Specifically, the various parameters calculated in step S2603
7th parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x ""Number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating opening" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning 34") ・ Eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x "general winning opening 31""Number of prize balls for winning" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Prize for winning the second operating port 34" The ratio of "number of spheres") is calculated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the various calculated parameters are in the first range (step S2604). When the value of the 7th parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the 8th parameter is 0.6 or less, affirmative determination is made in step S2604 assuming that the various calculated parameters are in the first range. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, the first notification state setting process is executed (step S2605). In the setting process, the light emitting unit 301 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in the first notification state. In this case, the light emitting unit 301 for notification is in a blue light emitting state.

When a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined whether or not the calculated parameters are in the second range (step S2606). If only one of the conditions that the value of the 7th parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the various calculated parameters are the first. Assuming that there are two ranges, an affirmative determination is made in step S2606. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, the second notification state setting process is executed (step S2607). In the setting process, the light emitting unit 301 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in the second notification state. In this case, the light emitting unit 301 for notification is in a yellow light emitting state.

When a negative determination is made in step S2606, it means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the third notification state setting process is executed (step S2608). In the setting process, the light emitting unit 301 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in the third notification state. In this case, the light emitting unit 301 for notification is in a red light emitting state.

The light emitting state set in step S2605, step S2607 or step S2608 is stopped until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 301 or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 301 is stopped. Continue until. Further, since the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 301 is stored and held in the main RAM 145 and the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 145, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 is stopped and the notification light emitting unit Even if the 301 is turned off once, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 143 is resumed, the light emitting state corresponding to the type of information in the notification state stored in the main RAM 145 is set. The light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 301 is executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The entry history of the game ball B1 into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. It is stored as the number of times information that the game ball B1 is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history memory 197 as compared with the configuration in which each history information is individually stored.

A notification light emitting unit 301 for notifying the contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 192 is provided. As a result, the contents corresponding to various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so that the manager of the game hall or the like does not need to read the information stored in the history memory 197, but the game ball B1 in the game area PA. It becomes possible to grasp the entry mode of the ball.

The main control board 141 housed in the board box 140a is provided with a light emitting unit 301 for notification together with the MPU 142. This makes it difficult to illegally access the communication path between the MPU 142 and the light emitting unit 301 for notification.

Calculation of various parameters and light emission control of the light emitting unit 301 for notification are executed not by the management side CPU 192 but by the main side CPU 143. This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting unit 301.

When the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is set, and when the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is set, and the calculation results of various parameters are displayed. When neither the first range nor the second range is supported, the third notification state is set. That is, the various parameters are not notified as they are, but the contents corresponding to the range including the various parameters are notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification pattern in the notification light emitting unit 301 from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 301.

Even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 is stopped, immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 is stopped by continuing the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 301. It may be configured to maintain the light emitting state in. In this case, even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the entry mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA by checking the notification light emitting unit 301. Become.

Further, instead of the configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 is stopped, the notification light emitting unit 301 is turned off, but when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 is started. May be configured such that the light emitting unit 301 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in a light emitting state corresponding to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light emitting unit 301 in the game hall before the start of business, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball B1 on the immediately preceding business day.

The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the configuration of the light emitting unit 301 for notification, and may be a display device having a display surface such as a symbol display device 41, and the speaker unit 134 may be used. May be. Further, the signal corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be externally output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 177.

The special figure display unit 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the normal figure display unit 38a of the normal figure unit 38 may also have a function as a light emitting unit 301 for notification. For example, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 142 is started, various parameters are calculated, and the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range, or any other of them as in the above embodiment. Immediately after the start of supply of the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a or the normal figure display unit 38a may be configured to execute the notification corresponding to the calculation result. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition of the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a or the start condition of the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 38a is satisfied. The configuration may be such that it is temporarily interrupted when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, and restarted when the variable display of the pattern is completed. According to this configuration, the special figure display unit 37a or the normal figure display unit 38a can also be used as a notification means for notifying the entry mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA.

The notification light emitting unit 301 may be provided at a position where it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the light emitting unit 301 for notification may be provided at a position behind the pachinko machine 10 behind the window panel 132 and visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 132. In this case, it is possible to confirm the notification contents corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14.

<13th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for providing the information of each ball entry result to the management IC 146 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for inputting the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a to the main CPU 143 and the management IC 146.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 122a is input to the main CPU 143 through the first signal path SL11. Further, the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 123a is input to the main CPU 143 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 124a is input to the main CPU 143 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 125a is input to the main CPU 143 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 126a is input to the main CPU 143 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 127a is input to the main CPU 143 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the out port detection sensor 128a is input to the main CPU 143 through the seventh signal path SL17.

The first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 146. Further, the second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 146. Further, the third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 146. Further, the fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 146. Further, the fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 146. Further, the sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 146. Further, the seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 146.

With the above configuration, the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a are input to the management IC 146 without intervening processing by the main CPU 143. As a result, the main CPU 143 executes a process for causing the management side CPU 192 to recognize the ball entry results of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 143.

Further, the branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 142. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to access the branch point and each branch route SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which an abnormal entry result is input only to the management IC 146. ..

<14th embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the management IC 146 is provided on the MPU 142 of the main control board 141, but the management IC 146 is not provided in the present embodiment. Instead, the main CPU 143 executes a process for managing the entry history to each entry unit 24a, 31 to 34. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 67 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control device 140 and the voice emission control device 161 in the present embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 142 is provided on the main control board 141 of the main control device 140. The MPU 142 is provided with the main CPU 143, the main ROM 144, the main RAM 145 and the I / F 101 as in the first embodiment, but is not provided with the management IC 146. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 143 via the internal bus 183. The detection results from the sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 129a and the commands from the payout side CPU 172 are input to the MPU 142 through the input port of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. As described above, various processes are executed by the main CPU 143. Further, when a signal is output to devices such as the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a as a result of executing various processes by the main CPU 143, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101. At the same time, when a command is output to the payout side CPU 172 and the voice emission control device 161 as a result of executing various processes on the main side CPU 143, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

The main CPU 143 is electrically connected to the hall computer HC via an external terminal board 177 as in the first embodiment. Here, in the first embodiment, the signal is externally output from the main CPU 143 to the hall computer HC, but the signal is not output from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 143. However, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 143 is not output. A signal is externally output to the hall computer HC, and a signal is output from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 143. The type of signal externally output from the main CPU 143 to the hall computer HC, that is, the content of the information externally output from the main CPU 143 to the hall computer HC is the same as that of the first embodiment. Although the details will be described later from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 143, it is instructed to execute the calculation of various parameters by using the ball entry history to each entry section 24a, 31 to 34 and notify the calculation result. An instruction signal for starting the check is output.

During the execution of the calculation using the ball entry history and the execution of the notification of the calculation result, the execution mode of the display control of the symbol display device 41 becomes the corresponding mode. The execution instruction of the display control is executed by the voice emission control device 161 based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 143. Regarding the voice emission control device 161 In detail, the voice emission control device 161 includes a voice emission control board 311 on which the MPU 312 is mounted. The MPU 312 of the voice emission control board 311 includes a sound light side ROM 314, a sound light side RAM 315, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and data input / output, in addition to the sound light side CPU 313 which is a calculation processing device including a control unit and a calculation unit. It has a built-in circuit.

The sound-light side ROM 314 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used only for reading. The sound light side ROM 314 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the sound light side CPU 313.

The sound-light side RAM 315 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention of an SRAM, a DRAM, or the like, and is used for both reading and writing. The sound light side RAM 315 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the sound light side ROM 314 when compared with the same data capacity. The sound light side RAM 315 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the sound light side ROM 314.

The sound light side CPU 313 receives a command from the main side CPU 143, but does not send a command to the main side CPU 143. The sound / light side CPU 313 receives a variation command, a type command, and an opening command from the main side CPU 143 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. When the sound and light side CPU 313 receives these commands, it executes a process of determining the effect corresponding to the received command, and executes light emission control of the display light emitting unit 133 and sound output control of the speaker unit 134 according to the determined contents. .. Further, the command corresponding to the determined content is transmitted to the display control device 162. The display control device 162 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the content of the received command.

In addition to the above commands, the sound light side CPU 313 receives a demo start command and a check start command from the main side CPU 143. The demo start command is a command instructing to start the demo production. The demonstration effect is a start that is started by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 133, and the speaker unit 134 when a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec) has elapsed since the end of the previous game round. It is a waiting production. In the start waiting effect, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 133, and the speaker unit 134 execute an effect different from the effect for the game round and the effect for the open / close execution mode. The check start command will be described in detail later, but it corresponds to the execution mode of the display control of the symbol display device 41 during the execution of the calculation using the management result of the ball entry history and the execution of the notification of the calculation result. It is a command instructing that the mode is set.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 143.

In steps S2701 to S2705, the same processing as in steps S201 to S205 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16) in the first embodiment is executed. After that, the check process is executed (step S2706). Although the details of the check process will be described later, the process for notifying the calculation result is executed while performing the calculation of various parameters by using the ball entry history to each entry section 24a, 31 to 34.

After that, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped or the check result is displayed (step S2707). When it is confirmed that a predetermined event (for example, detection of illegal radio waves or detection of illegal vibration) has occurred in the fraud detection process (step S2705) as in the first embodiment, the main RAM 145. By setting "1" in the game stop flag of, it is determined in step S2707 that the game is stopped. When it is confirmed that the occurrence of the predetermined event has been canceled, the game stop flag is cleared to "0", so that it is not determined in step S2707 that the game is stopped. The check result display period is a period in which the calculation results of various parameters executed by using the ball entry history to each entry section 24a, 31 to 34 are notified, and the notification is made in step S2706. Is set to the check result display period when is started, and the check result display period is canceled when the notification is terminated in step S2706.

If a negative determination is made in step S2707, the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are executed in order to advance the game. Specifically, in step S2708, the port output process is executed in the same manner as in step S207 in the first embodiment, and in step S2709, the read process is executed in the same manner as in step S208 in the first embodiment, and step S2710. In step S2711, the timer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S210 in the first embodiment, and in step S2712, the launch control process is executed in the same manner as in step S211 in the first embodiment. In step S2713, the input state monitoring process is executed in the same manner as in step S212 in the first embodiment, in step S2714, the special electric power control process is executed, and in step S2715, step S214 in the first embodiment is executed. In step S2716, the display control process is executed in the same manner as in step S215 in the first embodiment, and in step S2717, the display control process is executed in the same manner as in step S216 in the first embodiment. The payout state reception process is executed, and in step S2718, the payout output process is executed in the same manner as in step S217 in the first embodiment, and in step S2719, the external information setting process is performed in the same manner as in step S218 in the first embodiment. Execute.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2707, the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are not executed. As a result, if the game is stopped in the fraud detection process of step S2705, or if the check result display period is set in the check process of step S2706, the game is advanced. Therefore, some of the necessary processes will not be executed.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process executed in step S2714.

First, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the demo display (step S2801). When the demo display is not performed and a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec) has elapsed since the end of the previous game round, it is determined that the demo display start timing is reached. When it is the start timing of the demo display (step S2801: YES), the demo start command is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 313 (step S2802).

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an effect control process executed by the sound / light side CPU 313. The effect control process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). When the sound / light side CPU 313 receives the demo start command from the main side CPU 143 (step S2902: YES), the sound / light side CPU 313 executes the effect determination process for the demo (step S2903). In the effect determination process for the demo, the data table of the demo effect is read from the sound / light side ROM 314 to the sound / light side RAM 315. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 133 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 134 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the demonstration effect is executed in the display light emitting unit 133 and the speaker unit 134. After that, the demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 162 (step S2904). By receiving the demo start command, the display control device 162 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the demo effect is executed.

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 69), when a negative determination is made in step S2801 or when the process of step S2802 is executed, the hold information acquisition process is executed (step S2803). In the hold information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, and if a winning has occurred, the number of holdings in the holding storage area 145a is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than the value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the number of holdings is less than the upper limit, the number of holdings is added by 1, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S2702 is used for holding. It is stored in the first holding area of the free holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE. If the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are winning at the same time, the process for acquiring the hold information is performed within the range in which the hold information acquisition process is executed once. Run multiple times.

Further, when a new acquisition of the hold information is performed, an acquisition command corresponding to the acquisition is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 313. When the sound / light side CPU 313 receives the acquisition command, it transmits the command corresponding to the acquisition command to the display control device 162 in another process (step S2914) in the effect control process (FIG. 70). Upon receiving the command, the display control device 162 changes the display mode in the hold display area Ga (FIG. 83 (b)) in the symbol display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to the increase in the hold information. The details of the reserved display area Ga will be described later.

After that, the information of the special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 145 is read (step S2804), and the special figure special electric address table provided in the main ROM 144 is read (step S2805). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S2806), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address among the processes of steps S2808 to S2814 (step S2807). ). The special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main CPU 143 to grasp which of the various processes in steps S2808 to S2814 should be executed, and the special figure special electric address table is a special figure special electric counter. Corresponding to the numerical information, the start address of the program for executing the process of step S2808 to step S2814 is set.

In step S2808, the special figure change start process is executed. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation start processing.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed on condition that the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE is 1 or more (step S3001: YES) (step S3002). In the data setting process, the number of holds is first subtracted by 1, and the data stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in each of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 toward the lower area side, clearing the data in the first reserved area RE1 and the second. The data in each area is shifted such as the holding area RE2 → the first holding area RE1, the third holding area RE3 → the second holding area RE2, the fourth holding area RE4 → the third holding area RE3. At this time, a shift command for recognizing that the data in the hold area has been shifted is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 313. When the sound / light side CPU 313 receives the shift command, it transmits the command corresponding to the shift command to the display control device 162 in another process (step S2914) in the effect control process (FIG. 70). Upon receiving the command, the display control device 162 changes the display mode in the hold display area Ga (FIG. 83 (b)) in the symbol display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to the decrease in the hold information. The details of the reserved display area Ga will be described later.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 71), after executing the data setting process, the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S3003). In the win / fail determination process, it is first determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the hit / fail table for the high probability mode provided in the main ROM 144 is referred to, and among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for hit / fail determination, that is, the hit random number counter C1 is related. It is determined whether or not the numerical information matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is for low probability by referring to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 144. Judge whether or not it matches the jackpot numerical information.

If the result of the hit / fail determination process is the jackpot winning result (step S3004: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S3005). In the distribution determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 is read out. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the main ROM 144, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information related to the read jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, it is specified which of the low probability jackpot result, the low winning high probability jackpot result, and the most advantageous jackpot result corresponds to.

After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S3006). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is stored in the main ROM 144 in advance from the stop result table for the jackpot result. It is specified, and the specified information is written to the main RAM 145. In the stop result table for the big hit result, the information of the mode of the picture stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is set differently for each type of the big hit result.

After that, the flag set process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S3007). Specifically, the main RAM 145 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S3007, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the distribution determination process of step S3005 is performed. Set "1" to the flag corresponding to the result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3004 that the result is not the jackpot winning result, the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed (step S3008). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is stored in advance in the main ROM 144 from the stop result table for the deviation result. It is specified, and the specified information is written to the main RAM 145. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After executing any of the processes of step S3007 and step S3008, the process of grasping the duration of the game times is executed (step S3009). In such processing, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 41 in this game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time are the low probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, if it is not the result of any big hit and the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display will occur, the duration of the game times corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation duration table stored in the main ROM 144. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the continuation of the game times corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is referred to by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 144. Get the period. Incidentally, the duration of the game times that can be acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game times that can be acquired by referring to the reach generation duration table.

The duration of the game times when the reach does not occur is set so that the larger the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE, the shorter the duration of the game times. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the duration of the shorter game times is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A duration table for non-reach is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the duration of the game may not change depending on the number of reserved information and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the duration of the game times when the reach occurs. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, the duration table may be set individually for each of the case of the out-of-reach case and the case of the out-of-reach non-occurrence case. In this case, the duration of the game is distributed according to the result of each game.

After that, the information on the duration of the game times acquired in step S3009 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main RAM 145 (step S3010). The update of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed in the timer update process (step S2711). By the way, as an effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern on the special symbol display unit 37a and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are performed, and when each of these variable displays is completed, the variable display is performed. The final stop is displayed over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) in the state where the stop result of is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the effective line). In this case, the duration of the game rounds acquired in step S3009 is the total time for one game round.

After that, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 313 (step S3011). The variable command includes information on the duration of the game. Here, as described above, the duration of the game times acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game times acquired by referring to the reach generation duration table. Even if the variation command does not include the information on whether or not the reach has occurred, the sound and light side CPU 313 can specify the presence or absence of the reach from the information on the duration of the game times. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command contains information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result.

When the sound / light side CPU 313 receives the variation command and the type command from the main side CPU 143, the sound / light side CPU 313 executes the effect determination process for the game round by making an affirmative determination in step S2905 of the effect control process (FIG. 70). S2906). In the effect determination process for the game round, the effect lottery process according to the contents of the variable command and the type command received this time is executed. Further, the data table corresponding to the combination of the contents of the variable command and the type command received this time and the result of the effect lottery process is read from the sound light side ROM 314 to the sound light side RAM 315. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 133 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 134 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the main CPU 143 executes the effect for the game round in the display light emitting unit 133 and the speaker unit 134 over the duration of the game round determined this time. After that, the variation pattern command corresponding to the type of the data table read in step S2906 is transmitted to the display control device 162 (step S2907). By receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 162 starts the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 to start the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 41, and the variation pattern command received this time. The symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled so that the effect for the game round corresponding to the above is executed.

Returning to the description of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 71), after the process of step S3011 is executed, the variation display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is started (step S3012). Then, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3013). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the processing of step S3013 is executed. ".

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 69), in step S2809, the special figure changing process is executed. In the special figure change processing, it is determined whether or not the timing is before the final stop display during the duration of the game round, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is ruled. Execute the process to change the target. When it is time to display the final stop, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the special figure fixing process. Update to one. In this embodiment, the final stop command is not transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the sound / light side CPU 313.

In step S2810, the process during the determination of the special figure is executed. In the process of determining the special figure, the display mode of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is set to the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. Further, in the process during the determination of the special figure, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs. If the transition to the open / close execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". When the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure confirmation processing to the one corresponding to the special electric start processing. Update.

In step S2811, the special electric start processing is executed. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the special electric start processing.

In the special electric power start processing, when the processing for starting the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has not been executed yet (step S3101: NO), the setting processing of the opening period is executed (step S3102). In the set processing, the information of the opening period (for example, 5 sec) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 145. Further, the opening command is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 313 (step S3103).

When the sound / light side CPU 313 receives the opening command from the main CPU 143, the sound / light side CPU 313 executes an effect determination process for the open / close execution mode by making an affirmative determination in step S2908 of the effect control process (FIG. 70) (step S2909). In the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the data table for the open / close execution mode is read from the sound light side ROM 314 to the sound light side RAM 315. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 133 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 134 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 133 and the speaker unit 134. After that, the opening command is transmitted to the display control device 162 (step S2910). By receiving the opening command, the display control device 162 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the open / close execution mode is executed.

In addition, as the effect for the open / close execution mode, the effect of the opening period that occurs when the open / close execution mode is started, the effect of the open / close period in which the opening / closing of the special electric winning device 32 is repeated after that, and the effect of the open / close execution mode are completed. It includes the production of the ending period that occurs when doing so. For example, in the symbol display device 41, an image indicating that the opening / closing execution mode has been started is displayed in the effect of the opening period, and an image indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed is displayed in the effect of the opening / closing period. In the effect of the ending period, an image indicating that the open / close execution mode ends is displayed. Further, the opening command includes information indicating the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the opening / closing execution mode this time, and the sound / light side CPU 313 and the display control device 162 refer to the information to obtain the jackpot result. The effect for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type is executed.

Returning to the description of the special electric power start process (FIG. 72), when the opening period has elapsed (step S3104: YES), the start process for starting the first round game is executed (step S3105). In the start processing, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and the end condition of the round game is set. When setting this end condition, the upper limit duration when the special electric winning device 32 in the first round game of this time is continued in the open state is set in the special electric special electric timer counter of the main RAM 145, and the first round of this time. In the game, the upper limit number of game balls B1 that can be won in the special electric winning device 32 is set in the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 145. The upper limit duration set in the special figure special electric timer counter is updated in the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68), and the upper limit number set in the winning number counter is the winning to the special electric winning device 32. Is subtracted by 1 each time. After that, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special electric power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power start processing to the one corresponding to the special electric power opening processing (step S3106).

Returning to the description of the special electric power control process (FIG. 69), in step S2812, the special electric power open processing is executed. In the processing during the opening of the special electric power, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. If the end condition is satisfied, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Then, if the round game ended this time is not the round game of the last execution time, the numerical information of the special electric counter is added by 1 to change the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special electric opening processing to the special electric closing processing. If the round game that ended this time is the round game of the last execution time, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2 to correspond to the processing while the special electric is open. Update from the one corresponding to the special train end processing.

In step S2813, the processing during closing of the special electric train is executed. In the special electric closed processing, it is determined whether or not the interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set in the special electric timer counter of the main RAM 145 when the previous round game ends, and the set value is updated in the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68). To. When the interval period has elapsed, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and the end condition of the round game is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing to the one corresponding to the special electric opening processing.

In step S2814, the special electric power termination process is executed. In the special electric end processing, if the processing for starting the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has not been executed yet, the information of the ending period (for example, 5 sec) is set in the special electric special electric timer counter of the main RAM 145, and the special electric timer counter is set. The ending command is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 313. When the sound light side CPU 313 receives the ending command from the main side CPU 143, the data table for the ending period is transferred from the sound light side ROM 314 to the sound light side RAM 315 in another process (step S2914) of the effect control process (FIG. 70). read out. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 133 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 134 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect of the ending period is executed in the display light emitting unit 133 and the speaker unit 134. After that, the ending command is transmitted to the display control device 162. By receiving the ending command, the display control device 162 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect of the ending period is executed.

Next, the ball entry detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68) in the main CPU 143 will be described.

First, the normal counter area 321 provided in the main RAM 145, the open / close execution mode counter area 322, and the high frequency support mode counter area 323 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 73. In each of these areas 321 to 323, general prize counters 321a, 322a, 323a, special electric prize counters 321b, 322b, 323b, first operation counters 321c, 322c, 323c, second operation counters 321d, 322d, 323d, and Out counters 321e, 322e, and 323e are provided. The general winning counters 321a, 322a, and 323a are counters for measuring the number of balls B1 entered into the general winning opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The special electric winning counters 321b, 322b, and 323b are counters for measuring the number of balls B1 entering the special electric winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The first operation counters 321c, 322c, and 323c are counters for measuring the number of balls B1 entering the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The second operation counters 321d, 322d, and 323d are counters for measuring the number of balls B1 entering the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The out counters 321e, 322e, and 323e are counters for measuring the number of balls of the game ball B1 entering the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start trigger.

Each of the counters 321a to 321e of the normal counter area 321 is a ball entry portion 24a, which is a target in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and is neither an open / close execution mode nor a high frequency support mode. It is used to measure the number of game balls B1 that have entered 31 to 34. The counters 322a to 322e of the counter area 322 for the open / close execution mode enter the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34, which are the targets in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the open / close execution mode is in the open / close execution mode. It is used to measure the number of game balls B1 that have been balled. Each of the counters 323a to 323e in the counter area 323 for the high frequency support mode is a ball entry portion 24a, 31 to 34, which is a target in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the counter area 323 is in the high frequency support mode. It is used to measure the number of game balls B1 that have entered the door. The situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is not subject to measurement because the game ball B1 is inserted into the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 with the front door frame 14 open. This is to exclude the number of balls entered from the measurement target when the ball is hit.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68) in the main CPU 143.

In the ball entry detection process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S3201: YES), the normal ball entry detection process (step S3204), the ball entry detection process in the open / close execution mode (step S3205), and the ball entry detection process. None of the ball entry detection processes (step S3206) in the high frequency support mode is executed. Since the game area PA is formed by the space partitioned in the front-rear direction by the back surface of the window panel 132 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24, when the front door frame 14 is opened. Even if the game area PA is opened toward the front and the game ball B1 is launched toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball B1 cannot normally flow down the game area PA. Further, when the game ball B1 enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the manager of the game hall is to maintain and solve the problem. This is a case where the front door frame 14 is opened and the game ball B1 enters due to maintenance or the like. Since the entry of the game ball B1 is not the entry of the game ball B1 in the normal game execution status, it is not necessary to manage the entry of the game ball B1. Therefore, in the ball entry detection process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes of steps S3204 to S3206 is executed.

When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is neither in the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode (step S3201 to step S3203: NO), a normal ball entry detection process is executed (step S3204). Further, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the open / close execution mode (step S3201: NO, step S3202: YES), the ball entry detection process in the open / close execution mode is executed (step S3205). Further, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the high frequency support mode (step S3201: NO, step S3203: YES), the ball entry detection process in the high frequency support mode is executed (step S3206).

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a normal ball entry detection process in step S3204.

When it is determined that one game ball B1 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 122a (step S3301: YES), it is determined that one game ball B1 is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 123a. When (step S3304: YES) or when it is determined that one game ball B1 is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 124a (step S3307: YES), the value of the general winning counter 321a for normal use is added by 1. (Step S3302, step S3305, step S3308). Further, the value of the 10 prize ball counters of the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S3303, step S3306, step S3309). If the ball entry detection process is in the open / close execution mode, the value of the general winning counter 322a for the open / close execution mode is added by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3302, step S3305, and step S3308, and the entry in the high frequency support mode is performed. In the case of the ball detection process, the value of the general winning counter 323a for the high frequency support mode is added by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3302, step S3305, and step S3308.

When it is determined that one game ball B1 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 125a (step S3310: YES), after setting "1" in the special electric winning flag of the main RAM 145 (step S3311), the special electric for normal use The value of the winning counter 321b is added by 1 (step S3312). Further, the value of the 15 prize ball counters of the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S3313). If the ball entry detection process is in the open / close execution mode, the value of the special electric winning counter 322b for the open / close execution mode is added by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3312, and if the ball entry detection process is in the high frequency support mode. As a process corresponding to step S3312, the value of the special electric winning counter 323b for the high frequency support mode is added by 1.

When it is determined that one game ball B1 is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 126a (step S3314: YES), after setting "1" to the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 145 (step S3315). , The value of the first operation counter 321c for normal use is added by 1 (step S3316). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S3317). If the ball entry detection process is in the open / close execution mode, the value of the first operation counter 322c for the open / close execution mode is added by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3316, and the ball entry detection process is performed in the high frequency support mode. For example, as a process corresponding to step S3316, the value of the first operation counter 323c for the high frequency support mode is added by 1.

When it is determined that one game ball B1 is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 127a (step S3318: YES), after setting "1" in the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 145 (step S3319). , The value of the second operation counter 321d for normal use is added by 1 (step S3320). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 145 is added by 1 (step S3321). If the ball entry detection process is in the open / close execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 322d for the open / close execution mode is added by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3320, and the ball entry detection process is in the high frequency support mode. For example, as a process corresponding to step S3320, the value of the second operation counter 323d for the high frequency support mode is added by 1.

When it is determined that one game ball B1 is detected by the out port detection sensor 128a (step S3322: YES), the value of the normal out counter 321e is added by 1 (step S3323). If the ball entry detection process is in the open / close execution mode, the value of the out counter 322e for the open / close execution mode is added by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3323, and if the ball entry detection process is in the high frequency support mode, the step is taken. As a process corresponding to S3323, the value of the out counter 323e for the high frequency support mode is added by 1.

When it is determined that one game ball B1 is detected by the gate detection sensor 129a (step S3324: YES), "1" is set in the gate winning flag of the main RAM 145 (step S3325).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the number of balls of the game ball B1 entered into the general winning opening 31 is measured using the general winning counters 321a, 322a, 323a, and the special electric winning device 32 is entered. The number of balls entered in the game ball B1 is measured using the special electric winning counters 321b, 322b, 323b, and the number of balls entered in the game ball B1 into the first operating port 33 uses the first operating counters 321c, 322c, 323c. The number of balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 is measured using the second operating counters 321d, 322d, and 323d, and the number of balls B1 entering the out port 24a is the out counter. It is measured using 321e, 322e, and 323e. This makes it possible for the main CPU 143 to grasp the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34. Further, since the counter area 321 for normal use, the counter area 322 for open / close execution mode, and the counter area 323 for high frequency support mode are provided separately, the situation is that it is neither the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode. It is possible for the main CPU 143 to grasp the ball entry history to each of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 by distinguishing between the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode.

Next, the check process executed in step S2706 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68) in the main CPU 143 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 76.

When it is neither the display period of the check result nor the check waiting period (step S3401 and step S3402: NO), it is determined whether or not the check start instruction signal is received from the hall computer HC via the external terminal board 177 (step S3401 and step S3402: NO). Step S3403). As already explained, the check start instruction signal is a hole for instructing to execute the calculation of various parameters by using the ball entry history to each entry section 24a, 31 to 34 and to notify the calculation result. It is output from the computer HC. The opportunity for the hall computer HC to output the check start instruction signal is arbitrary. For example, the manager of the game hall performs a predetermined operation on the hall computer HC to check all the pachinko machines 10 in the game hall. The start instruction signal may be output, or the check start instruction signal may be output from the hall computer HC to all pachinko machines 10 at a predetermined time. In the configuration, the hall computer HC may output the check start instruction signal to all the pachinko machines 10 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous check start instruction signal was transmitted.

When the check start instruction signal is received (step S3403: YES), the launch prohibition process of the game ball B1 is executed (step S3404). As a result, even if the launch operation device 28 performs an operation for launching the game ball B1 in a situation where the game ball B1 is normally stored in the upper plate 111a, the game ball B1 from the game ball launch mechanism 27 It will be in a state where it will not be fired. The state in which the launch of the game ball B1 is prohibited is canceled when the notification of the calculation results of various parameters using the ball entry history to each entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is completed.

After that, the interruption processing of the game times is executed (step S3405). In the interruption process of the game round, if the game round is not executed, the start of a new game round and the new start of the demo display are prohibited. As a result, even if the reserved information is newly acquired in the situation where the game round is not executed, the start of the game round triggered by the reserved information is waited for, and the new start of the demo display is also waited for. It should be noted that the execution of step S2802 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 69) is blocked, so that a new start of the demo display is prohibited.

Further, in the game round interruption process, if the game round is being executed, the measurement of the duration of the game round measured by the main CPU 143 is stopped. Specifically, during the execution of the game round, the duration of the game round is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 145, and the value of this special special electric timer counter is the timer of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68). It will be updated periodically in the update process (step S2711), but the update of the special figure special electric timer counter by this timer update process is stopped. When the interruption process of the game times is executed, the process for starting the game times and the process for advancing the game times are not executed in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 69). However, even if the interruption process of the game round is executed, the hold information acquisition process (step S2803) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 69) is executed.

After that, the interruption processing of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S3406). In the interrupt processing of the open / close execution mode, the start of a new open / close execution mode is prohibited if the open / close execution mode is not executed. Further, in the interrupt processing of the open / close execution mode, if the open / close execution mode is being executed, the measurement of the opening period, the upper limit duration of the round game, the interval period, or the ending period measured by the main CPU 143 is stopped. .. Specifically, during the opening period, the opening period is set in the special electric timer counter of the main RAM 145, and the upper limit duration of the special electric winning device 32 during the execution of the round game is the special electric timer of the main RAM 145. It is set in the counter, the interval period is set in the special electric timer counter of the main RAM 145 between a plurality of round games, and the ending period is set in the special electric timer counter of the main RAM 145 in the ending period. The value of this special figure special electric timer counter is periodically updated in the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68), but the special figure special electric timer counter is updated by this timer update process. Stop. Further, in the interruption process of the open / close execution mode, if the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. When the interruption process of the open / close execution mode is executed, the process for starting the open / close execution mode and the process for advancing the open / close execution mode are not executed in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 69). .. However, even if the interruption process of the open / close execution mode is executed, the hold information acquisition process (step S2803) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 69) is executed.

After that, the interruption processing of the Fuzu Fuden control is executed (step S3407). In the interrupt processing of the normal map display unit 38a, if the normal power display unit 38a is not in the variable display state and the normal power display unit 34a is not in the normal power open state, a new variable display time of the normal map display unit 38a is performed. Prohibit the start. As a result, even if the value of the Fuden accessory opening counter C4 is newly acquired in the situation where the control of the Fuzu Fuden is not executed, the new fluctuation display time of the Fuzu display unit 38a triggered by the value is obtained. The start of is awaited. Further, in the interruption process of the normal map normal electric control, if the change display of the normal figure display unit 38a is in progress, the update of the timer of the main RAM 145 measuring the change display period is stopped. Further, in the interruption process of the normal electric utility control, if the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the general electric accessory 34a is closed and the update of the opening time of the general electric accessory 34a is stopped. Even if the interruption process of the normal power control is executed, the value of the normal power charge opening counter C4 to the normal power holding area 145c for the occurrence of the game ball B1 entering the second operating port 34 The storage process is executed.

After that, the storage process of the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is executed (step S3408). In the storage process, the data indicating the current display content in the special figure display unit 37a is stored in the main RAM 145, and the data indicating the current display content in the normal figure display unit 38a is stored in the main RAM 145. After that, the start processing of the check waiting display of the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a is executed (step S3409). In the start processing of the check waiting display, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a are set to the display contents for notifying that the current state is the check waiting period. The check waiting period is a calculation of various parameters using the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 for the reception of the check start instruction signal after receiving the check start instruction signal from the hall computer HC. It is the waiting period until the notification of the result is started.

Here, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a will be described.

First, the special figure display unit 37a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 77 (a). FIG. 77 (a) is a front view of the special figure display unit 37a. The special figure display unit 37a is provided with seven display segments 331 to 337. Each display segment 331 to 337 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment 331 to 337. At the same time, any combination of display segments 331 to 337 can be turned on. Since all of the above individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments 331 to 337, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Different colors may be displayed in each of the display segments 331 to 337, or a plurality of types of colors may be displayed in each of the display segments 331 to 337. The first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are arranged so as to be a so-called 7-segment display. As a result, the special figure display unit 37a can display a plurality of types such as numbers "1" to "9" and alphabets "H" and "L".

FIG. 77 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a. When a variable display of a pattern is performed on the special figure display unit 37a during the execution of the game, only the second display segment 332 and the fifth display segment 335 are lit in the special figure display unit 37a → No. 1 A series of lighting states in which only the display segment 331 is lit → only the third display segment 333 and the sixth display segment 336 are lit → only the seventh display segment 337 is lit is repeated. Further, in the special figure display unit 37a, only the fourth display segment 334 is turned on as the stop result in the game times as a result of the deviation, and "2" or "4" is displayed as the stop result in the game times as a result of the low probability jackpot. It becomes a lighting state, and "6" or "9" is displayed as a stop result in the game round of the low winning high probability jackpot result, and "L" or "L" or "L" or "" is displayed as the stop result in the game round of the most advantageous jackpot result. "H" is displayed and the lighting state is set.

On the other hand, during the check waiting period, all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are lit. The display content corresponding to this check waiting period does not match any of the display contents of the situation where the special figure display unit 37a displays the variation of the pattern during the execution of the game round, and further, the stop result of the game round. It does not match all the displayed contents that can be displayed as. As a result, the manager of the game hall can clearly grasp whether or not the current state is the check waiting period by visually observing the special figure display unit 37a.

After the check waiting period ends, the notification of the calculation results of various parameters using the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is executed using the special figure display unit 37a. At the time of this notification, the special figure display unit 37a is in a lighting state in which "3", "5" or "7" is displayed. The display content corresponding to the display period of these check results does not match any of the display contents of the situation where the special figure display unit 37a displays the variation of the pattern during the execution of the game round, and further, the display content of the game round It does not match all the display contents that can be displayed as a stop result. Further, the display content corresponding to the display period of the check result does not match the display content corresponding to the check waiting period. As a result, the manager of the game hall can not only clearly grasp whether or not the current state is the check waiting period by visually observing the special figure display unit 37a, but also the current state is the display period of the check result. It is possible to clearly grasp whether or not it is.

Next, the general drawing display unit 38a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77 (b) is a front view of the normal drawing display unit 38a. The normal map display unit 38a is provided with seven display segments 341 to 347. Each display segment 341 to 347 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment 341 to 347. In addition, any combination of display segments 341 to 347 can be lit. Since all of the above individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments 341 to 347, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Different colors may be displayed in each of the display segments 341 to 347, or a plurality of types of colors may be displayed in each of the display segments 341 to 347. The first to seventh display segments 341 to 347 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 341 to 347 are arranged so as to be a so-called 7-segment display. As a result, it is possible to display a plurality of types such as numbers "1" to "9" and alphabets "H" and "L" on the general map display unit 38a.

FIG. 77 (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the normal drawing display unit 38a. When the pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the normal figure display unit 38a, only the second display segment 342 and the fifth display segment 345 are lit on the normal figure display unit 38a → only the first display segment 341. Is lit → Only the third display segment 343 and the sixth display segment 346 are lit → Only the seventh display segment 347 is lit, and a series of lighting states are repeated. Further, in the normal drawing display unit 38a, only the fourth display segment 344 is lit as a result of stopping the variable display times that resulted in the deviation in the normal electric opening lottery, and the variable display that was the winning result in the general electric opening lottery. As a result of stopping the number of times, "H" is displayed and the lighting state is set.

On the other hand, during the check waiting period, all of the first to seventh display segments 341 to 347 are lit. The display content corresponding to this check waiting period does not match any of the display contents of the situation where the pattern is variablely displayed on the normal map display unit 38a, and all that can be displayed as the stop result of the variable display times. It does not match the displayed contents of. As a result, the manager of the game hall can clearly grasp whether or not the current state is the check waiting period by visually observing the normal map display unit 38a.

Further, the display content corresponding to the check waiting period in the normal map display unit 38a matches the display content corresponding to the check waiting period in the special figure display unit 37a. That is, during the check waiting period, the same display content corresponding to the check is displayed on both the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a. This makes it easier for the manager of the game hall to grasp whether or not the current state is the check waiting period.

After the check waiting period ends, the notification of the calculation results of various parameters using the ball entry history to each entry section 24a, 31 to 34 is executed not only by using the special figure display section 37a but also by using the normal map display section 38a. Will be done. In this case, "2", "3", or "4" is displayed on the normal map display unit 38a at the time of this notification. The display content corresponding to the display period of these check results does not match any of the display contents of the situation where the pattern variation display is performed on the normal map display unit 38a, and further, as a stop result after the pattern variation display. It does not match all the display contents that can be displayed. Further, the display content corresponding to the display period of the check result does not match the display content corresponding to the check waiting period. As a result, the manager of the game hall can not only clearly grasp whether or not the current state is the check waiting period by visually observing the normal map display unit 38a, but also the current state is the display period of the check result. It is possible to clearly grasp whether or not it is.

Returning to the description of the check process (FIG. 76), after the process of step S3409 is executed, the set process to the check wait counter is executed (step S3410). In the set processing, information corresponding to the check waiting period is set in the check waiting counter provided in the main RAM 145. Specifically, the check waiting period is set to 5 sec. During this time, after the game ball B1 is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28, the launched game ball B1 is used in any of the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to the game area PA. It is more than the longest time required for the main CPU 143 to identify that the ball has entered the 34 and has been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a corresponding to the ball entry portions 24a and 31 to 34. Is set to a long time. Then, as described above, when the check start instruction signal is received from the hall computer HC, the launch of the game ball B1 is prohibited in step S3404. As a result, all the game balls B1 flowing down the game area PA by the time the check waiting period elapses do not exist, and the balls enter each of the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 by the time the check waiting period elapses. All the history has been acquired.

After that, "1" is set in the check waiting flag provided in the main RAM 145 (step S3411). The check waiting flag is a flag for the main CPU 143 to specify that the check waiting period is in effect. Further, in step S3412, the check start command is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 313.

When the sound light side CPU 313 receives the check start command, it sets "1" in the end standby flag provided in the sound light side RAM 315 by making an affirmative determination in step S2911 of the effect control process (FIG. 70). Step S2912). The end waiting flag is a flag for the sound light side CPU 313 to specify that it is in the end waiting state, and when "1" is set in the end waiting flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S2901. It becomes. The control contents in the end waiting state will be described in detail later. Further, in step S2913, the check display command is transmitted to the display control device 162. When the display control device 162 receives the check display command, the display control device 162 causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image corresponding to the end standby state. This display content will be described later.

Returning to the description of the check process (FIG. 76), the check wait period is set when "1" is set in the check wait flag of the main RAM 145 in step S3411. Therefore, an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, and the check waiting process is executed (step S3413). FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the check waiting process.

First, the value of the check waiting counter of the main RAM 145 is subtracted by 1 (step S3501). Then, when the value of the check wait counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3502: YES), the check wait flag of the main RAM 145 is cleared to "0" (step S3503). This ends the check waiting period.

After that, the aggregation process is executed (step S3504). In the aggregation process, the 7th parameter and the 8th parameter are calculated by using the various counters 321a to 321e of the normal counter area 321, and the 7th parameter is calculated by using the various counters 322a to 322e of the counter area 322 for the open / close execution mode. And the eighth parameter are calculated, and the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter are calculated by using various counters 323a to 323e in the high frequency support mode counter area 323. For details on these 7th and 8th parameters, the values of the out counters 321e, 322e, and 323e are set to K1, the values of the general winning counters 321a, 322a, and 323a are set to K2, and the values of the special electric winning counters 321b, 322b, and 323b. Is K3, the values of the first operation counters 321c, 322c, and 323c are K4, and the values of the second operation counters 321d, 322d, and 323d are K5.
7th parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x ""Number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating opening" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning 34") ・ Eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x "general winning opening 31""Number of prize balls for winning" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Prize for winning the second operating port 34" The number of balls ").

The seventh parameter and the eighth parameter calculated by using the various counters 321a to 321e of the normal counter area 321 are the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. It becomes the 7th parameter and the 8th parameter in a situation other than that (hereinafter, also referred to as various parameters in normal times). Further, the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter calculated by using the various counters 322a to 322e of the counter area 322 for the opening / closing execution mode are the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening / closing execution mode. It becomes the 7th parameter and the 8th parameter in (hereinafter, also referred to as various parameters in the open / close execution mode). Further, the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter calculated by using the various counters 323a to 323e of the counter area 323 for the high frequency support mode are in the high frequency support mode in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. It becomes the 7th parameter and the 8th parameter in a certain situation (hereinafter, also referred to as various parameters in the high frequency support mode).

Further, in the aggregation process, the same process as the parameter management process (FIG. 65) in the twelfth embodiment is performed by various parameters in the normal time, various parameters in the open / close execution mode, and various parameters in the high frequency support mode. Execute for. That is, when the value of the 7th parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the 8th parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 1st range, and the value of the 7th parameter is 0. If only one of the conditions of exceeding 7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 2nd range, and the 7th parameter is used. When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6, the determination process that the calculated various parameters are in the 3rd range is performed by the normal various parameters. It is executed for each of the various parameters in the open / close execution mode and the various parameters in the high frequency support mode. Then, the information of the determination result is written in the main RAM 145.

After executing the aggregation process in step S3504, the check result display start process is executed (step S3505). In the check result display start processing, after the display of the display contents of the check waiting period in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a is finished, the display corresponding to the result of the aggregation processing in step S3504 is displayed in the special figure display unit. It is started at 37a and the general drawing display unit 38a. In this case, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a do not continue the same display during the check result display period, but display and open / close execution modes corresponding to the above determination results for various parameters in normal times. The display corresponding to the above judgment result for various parameters at the time and the display corresponding to the above judgment result for various parameters in the high frequency support mode are sequentially displayed in this order, and the sequential display in this order is repeated. The special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a are displayed and controlled as described above.

Specifically, in the normal drawing display unit 38a, a display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for various parameters in the normal time, a display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for various parameters in the open / close execution mode, and a high-frequency support mode. A display indicating which of the displays corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for the various parameters of the above is the display target is performed. As described above, the lighting state in which "2", "3", and "4" are displayed is set as the display contents corresponding to the display period of the check result in the normal map display unit 38a. Of these, when the display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment results for various parameters in the normal time is to be displayed, "2" is displayed on the normal figure display unit 38a, and the above-mentioned judgment results for various parameters in the open / close execution mode are displayed. When the display corresponding to is the display target, "3" is displayed on the normal map display unit 38a, and when the display corresponding to the above determination result for various parameters in the high frequency support mode is the display target. Is displayed on the normal map display unit 38a.

Further, the special figure display unit 37a displays various parameters in the normal operation mode, various parameters in the open / close execution mode, and various parameters in the high frequency support mode corresponding to the above determination results. As described above, the lighting state in which "3", "5", and "7" are displayed is set as the display contents corresponding to the display period of the check result in the special figure display unit 37a. Of these, when the above determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and when the above determination result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display unit "5" is displayed on 37a, and "7" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when the above determination result corresponds to the third range.

When the check result display period is started, "2" is first displayed on the general map display unit 38a because the display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for various parameters in the normal time is displayed. In this normal target period, the special figure display unit 37a displays the above-mentioned determination results for various parameters in the normal time. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display unit "5" is displayed on 37a, and "7" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when the determination result corresponds to the third range. For example, if the determination result is in the first range, "2" is continuously displayed on the normal map display unit 38a and "3" is continuously displayed on the special map display unit 37a during the normal target period. The target period is usually continued for 5 sec.

When the normal target period has elapsed, the display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for various parameters in the open / close execution mode is subsequently displayed, so that "3" is displayed on the normal map display unit 38a. During the open / close execution mode target period, the special figure display unit 37a displays the various parameters in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the above determination results. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display unit "5" is displayed on 37a, and "7" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when the determination result corresponds to the third range. For example, if the determination result is in the second range, "3" is continuously displayed on the normal map display unit 38a and "5" is continuously displayed on the special figure display unit 37a during the open / close execution mode target period. .. The open / close execution mode target period is continued for 5 sec in the same manner as the normal target period.

When the open / close execution mode target period has elapsed, the display corresponding to the above determination results for various parameters in the high frequency support mode is subsequently displayed, so that "4" is displayed on the general map display unit 38a. .. During this high-frequency support mode target period, the special figure display unit 37a displays the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode corresponding to the above determination results. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display unit "5" is displayed on 37a, and "7" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when the determination result corresponds to the third range. For example, if the determination result is in the third range, "4" is continuously displayed on the normal map display unit 38a and "7" is continuously displayed on the special map display unit 37a during the high frequency support mode target period. To. The high frequency support mode target period is continued for 5 sec in the same manner as the normal target period and the open / close execution mode target period.

The check result display period is set to a period in which each of the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period occurs at least once. Specifically, the display period of the check result is set to 30 sec so that each of the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period occurs twice. Then, in the check result display period, the change of the period of the normal target period → the open / close execution mode target period → the high frequency support mode target period is repeatedly executed.

After the process of step S3505 is executed in the check waiting process (FIG. 78), the information corresponding to the check result display period (specifically, 30 sec) is set in the display counter provided in the main RAM 145 (specifically, 30 sec). Step S3506). After that, "1" is set in the displaying flag provided in the main RAM 145 (step S3507). The display flag is a flag for the main CPU 143 to specify that it is the display period of the check result.

When "1" is set in the display flag of the main RAM 145, an affirmative determination is made in step S2707 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68) of the main CPU 143. In this case, the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68) are not executed. For example, even if the game ball B1 enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 because the ball entry detection process (step S2710) is not executed, it is invalidated. However, as already explained, before the display period of the check result is started, the game ball B1 normally launched does not exist in the game area PA, so that the game ball B1 normally launched is not present. Does not enter any of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 during the check result display period. Further, when the special figure special electric control process (step S2714) is not executed, all the control of the special figure special electric power including the hold information acquisition process (step S2803) is stopped. Further, when the Fuzu Fuden control process (step S2715) is not executed, all the control of the Fuzu Fuden is stopped. Further, when the payout output process (step S2718) is not executed, all the payout instructions of the game ball B1 to the payout side CPU 172 are stopped. However, the payout of the game ball B1 based on the prize ball command for which the output to the payout side CPU 172 has already been completed is continued by the drive control by the payout side CPU 172.

In the check process (FIG. 76), when the display flag of the main RAM 145 is set to "1", the check result display process is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S3401 (step S3414). FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the process during display of the check result.

First, the value of the display counter of the main RAM 145 is subtracted by 1 (step S3601). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the display counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3602).

When the value of the displayed counter is not "0" (step S3602: NO), one of the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period is the target period in the check result display period. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to end and switch to the target period of the next order (step S3603). Judgment as to whether or not the switching timing of the target period is performed is performed based on the value of the display counter. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, the display content update process is executed (step S3604). In the update process, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal target period are displayed so that the display contents correspond to the next target period with respect to the current target period among the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period. Display control is performed on the figure display unit 38a. In this case, the display control is executed for the normal figure display unit 38a so that the display content corresponds to the target period of the switching destination, and the special figure display unit 37a is the total processing (step) of the check waiting process (FIG. 78). The display control is executed so that the display content of the determination result information written in the main RAM 145 in S3504) is the determination result information corresponding to the target period of the switching destination this time.

When it is determined in step S3602 that the value of the display counter of the main RAM 145 is "0", the display return processing of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is executed (step S3605). In the display return processing, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are the display contents stored in the main RAM 145 in step S3408 of the check processing (FIG. 76). Display control is performed on the display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a. As a result, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are restored to the display contents immediately before the check waiting period is started.

After that, the displaying flag of the main RAM 145 is cleared to "0" (step S3606). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68), and the process returns to the state in which the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are executed. Further, when the process of step S3606 is executed, the counters 321a to 321e of the normal counter area 321, the counters 322a to 322e of the counter area 322 for the open / close execution mode, and the counters 323a of the counter area 323 for the high frequency support mode are executed. Clear the value of ~ 323e to "0". As a result, the entry history of the entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 is initialized, and the management of the entry history can be newly started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the process of step S3606 is executed, the counters 321a to 321e of the normal counter area 321, the counters 322a to 322e of the counter area 322 for the open / close execution mode, and the high frequency support are provided. The values of the counters 323a to 323e in the mode counter area 323 may be maintained as they are. In this case, the ball entry history of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is accumulated so as to straddle the execution times of the notification of the calculation result using the ball entry history a plurality of times. Further, in the configuration, the entry history of the entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is based on the reception of the history deletion signal from the hall computer HC and the occurrence of the deletion operation using the operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10. May be configured to be erased.

After that, the resumption process of the game times is executed (step S3607). As a result, a new start of the game round is allowed, and if the check waiting period is started during the execution of the game round, the progress of the temporarily stopped game round is restarted. Specifically, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the game times once stopped is resumed. In addition, by restarting the update of the special figure special electric timer counter, the measurement of the duration of the game times is restarted. In addition, in the process of resuming the game round, the state in which the new start of the demo display is prohibited is also canceled. That is, the state in which the execution of step S2802 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 69) is prohibited is released.

After that, the resumption process of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S3608). As a result, a new start of the open / close execution mode is allowed, and if the check waiting period is started during the execution of the open / close execution mode, the progress of the temporarily stopped open / close execution mode is restarted. Specifically, the update of the special figure special electric timer counter is restarted. Further, when the check waiting period is started during the execution of the round game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened. In this case, in the restarted round game, the upper limit continuation period of the open state of the special electric winning device 32 is not remeasured from the beginning, but the measurement is restarted from the remaining upper limit continuation period when the round game is temporarily stopped. do.

After that, the resumption process of the Fuzu Fuden control is executed (step S3609). As a result, the start of a new variable display time of the normal map display unit 38a is allowed, and if the check waiting period is started during the execution of the normal map normal control, the normal stop wait period is started. Progress is resumed. Specifically, when the check waiting period is started during the fluctuation display of the normal map display unit 38a, the display control of the normal map display unit 38a is restarted, and the measurement of the continuation period of the fluctuation display time is restarted. Will be done. Further, when the check waiting period is started in the situation where the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state. In this case, in the reopened open state, the upper limit continuation period of the open state of the general electric accessory 34a is not measured again from the beginning, but is measured from the remaining upper limit continuation period when the open state is temporarily stopped. resume.

After that, the firing prohibition release process of the game ball B1 is executed (step S3610). As a result, by performing the launch operation of the game ball B1 on the launch operation device 28 in the situation where the game ball B1 is stored in the upper plate 111a, the state in which the game ball B1 is launched is restored.

Next, a state in which the check waiting period and the check result display period progress while referring to the time chart of FIG. 80 will be described. FIG. 80A shows the timing at which the check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC, FIG. 80B shows the execution period of the game round, and FIG. 80C shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode. 80 (d) shows the execution period of the normal signal control, FIG. 80 (e) shows the prohibition period of launching the game ball B1, and FIG. 80 (f) shows the check waiting period. g) indicates the display period of the check result.

First, a case where an instruction signal for starting a check is output during the execution of the game times and the normal power control will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80 (b), a hole is shown in FIG. 80 (a) at the timing of t1 during the execution of the game round and the execution of the normal power control as shown in FIG. 80 (d). When the check start instruction signal is output from the computer HC, the game rotation is interrupted as shown in FIG. 80 (b), and the normal drawing control is interrupted as shown in FIG. 80 (d). Further, at the timing of t1, the launch of the game ball B1 is prohibited as shown in FIG. 80 (e), and the check waiting period is set as shown in FIG. 80 (f). In this case, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are display contents for notifying that the check waiting period is in effect.

After that, at the timing of t2, the fixed T1 time elapses from the timing of t1, and the check waiting period ends. At the timing of t2, the calculation using the management result of the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is executed. In this case, during the time of T1, after the game ball B1 is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28, the launched game ball B1 is the entry portion of any of the game area PAs. The longest time required for the main CPU 143 to identify that the ball has entered the balls 24a, 31 to 34 and has been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a corresponding to the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34. It is set to a time that is sufficiently longer than the time. And, as already explained, the launch of the game ball B1 is prohibited at the timing of t1. Therefore, all the game balls B1 flowing down the game area PA by the time the check waiting period elapses do not exist, and the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 by the time the check waiting period elapses. Is in the acquired state.

As shown in FIG. 80 (g), the check result display period starts at the timing of t2. In the display period of the check result, as described above, the display corresponding to the judgment result for various parameters in the normal time is executed by the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a, and the open / close execution mode. The display corresponding to the judgment results for various parameters at the time corresponds to the judgment result for various parameters in the open / close execution mode target period in which the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are executed, and in the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode target period in which the display to be displayed is executed by the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a occurs in sequence.

After that, at the timing of t3, when the fixed time of T2 elapses from the timing of t2, the display period of the check result ends as shown in FIG. 80 (g). As a result, at the timing of t3, the state in which the launch of the game ball B1 is prohibited is released as shown in FIG. 80 (e). Further, at the timing of t3, the game rotation is restarted as shown in FIG. 80 (b), and the normal power control is restarted as shown in FIG. 80 (d).

Next, a case where a check start instruction signal is output during the opening / closing execution mode and the execution of the normal power control will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80 (a), at the timing of t4 during the execution of the open / close execution mode as shown in FIG. 80 (c) and the execution of the normal power control as shown in FIG. 80 (d). When the check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC, the open / close execution mode is interrupted as shown in FIG. 80 (c), and the normal electric control is interrupted as shown in FIG. 80 (d). To. Further, at the timing of t4, the launch of the game ball B1 is prohibited as shown in FIG. 80 (e), and the check waiting period is set as shown in FIG. 80 (f). In this case, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are display contents for notifying that the check waiting period is in effect.

After that, at the timing of t5, the fixed T1 time elapses from the timing of t4, and the check waiting period ends. At the timing of t5, the calculation using the management result of the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is executed. The time of T1 is the same as the time from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2.

As shown in FIG. 80 (g), the check result display period starts at the timing of t5. After that, at the timing of t6, when the fixed time of T2 elapses from the timing of t5, the display period of the check result ends as shown in FIG. 80 (g). The time of T2 is the same as the time from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3. Further, at the timing of t6, the state in which the launch of the game ball B1 is prohibited is released as shown in FIG. 80 (e). Further, at the timing of t6, the open / close execution mode is restarted as shown in FIG. 80 (c), and the normal power control is restarted as shown in FIG. 80 (d).

Next, the main process of the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 143 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, the same processes as in steps S101 to S109 and steps S112 to S115 of the main process (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment are executed in steps S3701 to S3703 and steps S3705 to S3714. On the other hand, in the main process in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S3704 that "1" is set in the check waiting flag or the display flag of the main RAM 145, the RAM of the power supply / emission control device 158 in step S3705. The process of step S3706 is executed without executing the process of determining whether or not the erase switch is operated. That is, the operation of the RAM erase switch is invalidated during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As a result, when the check waiting period is started and the progress of the game is stopped, the manager of the game hall misunderstands that the situation is due to an abnormality of the pachinko machine 10, and the main RAM 145 is initialized. Even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on while operating the RAM erase switch to execute the clearing process (step S3709), the clearing process of the main RAM 145 is not executed. Is possible. As in the first embodiment, the main RAM 145 receives power for storing and holding power from the power supply unit for power failure of the power supply / emission control device 158 even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF. Will be supplied.

On the other hand, even when "1" is set in the check waiting flag or the display flag of the main RAM 145, the processes of steps S3706 to S3708 are executed. That is, even during the check waiting period or the check result display period, if "1" is not set in the power failure flag (step S3706: NO), the main RAM 145 is cleared (step S3709). Even when the checksum calculation result is abnormal (step S3708: NO), the clearing process of the main RAM 145 is executed (step S3709). As a result, if the power failure process is not executed normally or if some abnormality occurs in the main RAM 145, the clear process of the main RAM 145 is executed even during the check waiting period or the check result display period. Then, it becomes possible to execute the initialization of the main RAM 145.

Next, the content of the execution control of the effect during the check waiting period or the display period of the check result and the display content of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

First, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the effect for game rounds is executed will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing individual symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a display surface of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (j), the symbols which are a kind of symbols include nine kinds of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" and shell-shaped symbols. It is composed of a sub-design consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 83A, the symbol display device 41 is set with three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 in the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, in the symbol display device 41, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the symbol display device 41 is set with standby areas SA1 to SA9 so that three symbols are displayed for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and as a result, 3 × 3 A total of 9 symbols are displayed at the same time. By the way, each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 includes a stop position, and when the symbol is finally displayed as a stop, the symbol waiting in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 is stopped at each stop position. Is displayed. Further, the symbol display device 41 is set with five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 so as to connect the three standby areas SA1 to SA9. Has been done. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the low probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result. In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when the most advantageous jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol is used. The combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a low probability jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Will be done.

In addition, in the case of a low winning high probability jackpot result, a predetermined combination of symbols that is not the same combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and may be configured such that only numbers are variablely displayed as the symbol, for example.

More specifically about the content of the variation display of the symbols in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, when the effect for the game round is started, the symbols of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the high-speed variation display which is a low identification mode. The variation display is started, and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are switched to the low-speed fluctuation display which is a high discrimination mode in a predetermined order, and the standby areas SA1 to SA9 on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the predetermined order. The symbol is displayed in standby mode. Then, in a state where the symbols are standby and displayed in each standby area of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, after the symbols are oscillated over the oscillating display period, those symbols are still displayed as the final stop display. And the static display state is continued for the final stop period. In this case, the swing display means that the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 swing in the same standby areas SA1 to SA9, and each symbol is in the corresponding standby areas SA1 to SA9. In the range including the stop position, each symbol swings in the range including the corresponding stop position. By performing the static display after the rocking display is performed in this way, when the symbol is finally statically displayed, the fluctuation display of the symbol in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 → the rocking display in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 → It is possible to make it a stepwise display such as a static display, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the symbol is finally displayed still.

When the display control device 162 receives a fluctuation pattern command from the sound / light side CPU 313, the display control device 162 reads a data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command from a ROM (not shown) provided in the display control device 162, and displays a symbol according to the data table. The display control of 41 is executed. In this case, this data table corresponds to the duration of the current game round, and by executing the display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the data table, high-speed fluctuation display → low-speed fluctuation in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3. Display-> standby display-> static display will be performed. That is, the command for recognizing the switching timing from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, the switching timing from the low-speed fluctuation display to the standby display, the switching timing from the standby display to the static display, and the end timing of the static display is display control. Not transmitted to device 162. This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands transmitted from the sound / light side CPU 313 to the display control device 162. Further, when the static display is started in the symbol display device 41, the final stop display of the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round is also started in the special symbol display unit 37a, but this final stop display is also started. At the start of, the main CPU 143 does not send the corresponding command to the sound / light side CPU 313. This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the sound / light side CPU 313.

It should be noted that, in a situation where the standby display is performed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 and the low-speed fluctuation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2, the symbols are different from the symbols displayed in the fluctuation display in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. A reach effect using a character image may be executed. Since the start timing and the end timing of the reach effect are also defined in the above data table, it is not necessary to send a command from the sound / light side CPU 313 to the display control device 162 at the start and end of the reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the symbol display device 41 has a hold display area Ga set in the center of the lower part. The hold display area Ga is divided and displayed so that the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1, Ga2, Ga3, and Ga4 as the maximum number of hold information stored in the hold area RE are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. There is. Specifically, the maximum number of hold information is 4, and correspondingly, the hold display area Ga includes the first unit hold display area Ga1, the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the third unit hold display area. Ga3 and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set. When the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE is 1, the predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, and the hold information stored in the hold area RE is displayed. When the number of is two, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1 and the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE is In the case of three, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the third unit hold display area Ga3, and is stored in the hold area RE. When the number of reserved information is 4, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the 1st unit reserved display area Ga1 to the 4th unit reserved display area Ga4. When the hold information is acquired, the sound and light side CPU 313 sends a command corresponding to the acquisition command to the display control device 162, so that a predetermined hold image is displayed. The number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4. Will increase. Further, when a new game round is started, a command corresponding to the shift command is transmitted from the sound / light side CPU 313 to the display control device 162, so that a predetermined hold image is displayed in the unit hold display area Ga1. ~ The number of Ga4 decreases.

Next, the content of the execution control of the effect during the check waiting period or the check result display period will be described.

As described above, when the check waiting period is started, the main CPU 143 transmits a check start command to the sound light side CPU 313 in step S3412 of the check process (FIG. 76). Then, when the sound light side CPU 313 receives the check start command, it sets the end standby state by setting the end wait flag of the sound light side RAM 315 to "1" in step S2912 of the effect control process (FIG. 70). .. Further, in step S2913, the check display command is transmitted to the display control device 162.

When the display control device 162 receives the check display command, the symbol display device 41 displays the notification image Gr indicating that it is the check waiting period or the check result display period. 84 (a) and 84 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b), the notification image Gr "checking" is displayed in the lower left corner portion and the lower right corner portion of the symbol display device 41. As a result, the player paying attention to the symbol display device 41 can confirm that the notification image Gr is the current state of the check waiting period or the check result display period. 84 (a) and 84 (b) show the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed, but the open / close execution mode is being executed and the demo effect is being executed. In the check waiting period or the check result display period, the notification image Gr is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a result, not only the situation in which the effect for the game round is being executed, but also the notification that the check waiting period or the check result display period is in effect even during the execution of the open / close execution mode and the execution of the demo effect is displayed. This can be done with the display device 41. The content of the notification image Gr is arbitrary, and for example, the notification may be performed by dimming the entire symbol display device 41.

When the display control device 162 receives the check display command, the display control device 162 not only executes the process for displaying the notification image Gr on the symbol display device 41, but also executes the process for continuing the execution of the display effect. Specifically, when a check display command is received in a situation where the demo effect is being executed, the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled so as to repeat a series of moving image displays for the demo effect.

If a check display command is received before the start of the final stop period in the game rotation effect while the game rotation effect is being executed, the timing at which the swing display is started in the game rotation effect and the timing of starting the swing display. Until then, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed according to the contents of the data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command received from the sound / light side CPU 313 at the start of the effect for this game round, but after the rocking display is started. Continues the oscillating display even when it is time to start the static display in the data table.

With reference to FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b), a mode in which the effect for game rounds is executed by the symbol display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 (a), in the situation where the fluctuation display of the symbol is performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the display area where the variation display of the symbol is performed and the position which does not overlap with the hold display area Ga. In, the notification image Gr indicating that it is the check waiting period or the check result display period is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the symbols are oscillatedly displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are displayed so as to swing in the same standby area SA1 to SA9 in a vertical direction different from the horizontal direction, which is the fluctuation direction of the symbols. Then, this swing display is continued even when the original static display is started.

When the check display command is received during the final stop period of the effect for the game round, the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled so that the state in which the symbol is still displayed is continued. When a check display command is received during the opening period of the open / close execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled so as to repeat a series of moving image displays during the opening period. When a check display command is received during the opening / closing period in which the opening / closing of the special electric winning device 32 is repeated in the opening / closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled so as to repeat a series of moving images during the opening / closing period. When a check display command is received during the ending period of the open / close execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled so as to repeat a series of operation displays during the ending period.

When the sound / light side CPU 313 is in the end standby state, an affirmative determination is made in step S2901 of the effect control process (FIG. 70). In this case, it is determined in step S2915 whether or not any of the effect commands has been received from the main CPU 143. The effect command is a command transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the sound / light side CPU 313 to instruct the start trigger of the effect, and specifically, the demo start command, the variation command, the opening command, and the ending command correspond to the effect command.

When any of the effect commands is received (step S2915: YES), the end waiting flag of the sound light side RAM 315 is cleared to "0" (step S2916). As a result, the end waiting state is released. After that, various effect determination processes at the time of canceling the end standby are executed (step S2917). In the various effect determination processes at the time of canceling the end wait, if the command received this time is a demo start command, the effect determination process for demo in step S2903 is executed, and if the command received this time is a variable command, the game in step S2906. If the command received this time is the opening command, the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode of step S2909 is executed, and if the command received this time is the ending command, the corresponding effect determination is executed. Execute the process.

After that, when the end waiting state ended this time is generated during the execution of the effect for the game round, and the standby display is performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 (step S2918: YES). ), The final stop process is executed (step S2919). When the sound light side CPU 313 controls the execution of the effect for the game round, the data table is read from the sound light side ROM 314 to the sound light side RAM 315 as described above, but the data table does not enter the end standby state. In this case, data indicating the timing at which the standby display is started during the execution period of the effect for the game round is set.

In the final stop processing, the effect content is adjusted so that the symbol is statically displayed over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) in the symbol display device 41 before the effect determined in step S2917. Specifically, after reading the data table for the final stop period as the data table for controlling the display light emitting unit 133 and the speaker unit 134 and executing the control based on the data table for the final stop period, step S2917 The control based on the data table corresponding to the content of the effect determined in is executed.

After that, the command transmission process at the time of canceling the end wait is executed (step S2920). In the command transmission process, the demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 162 when this time is the situation where the demonstration production should be started, and it is determined when this time is the situation where the production for the game round should be started. A fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the content of the effect is sent to the display control device 162, and if this time is the situation where the open / close execution mode should be started, an opening command is sent to the display control device 162, and this time the open / close execution is executed. When the ending period of the mode should be started, the ending command is transmitted to the display control device 162.

The display control device 162 controls the execution of the display effect on the symbol display device 41 as described above for the reception of each of the above commands, unless the situation is such that the swing display of the symbol is continued as the effect for the game round. I do. On the other hand, when the display control device 162 receives each of the above commands in a situation where the swing display of the symbol is continued as an effect for playing a game (specifically, it receives a demo start command, a variation command, or an opening command). (If this is the case), after each symbol to be oscillated is statically displayed for the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec), the display effect corresponding to the received command is started. In this case, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is a display effect having a fixed execution period such as an effect for game rounds and an effect for the opening period, the final stop period is generated first. Corresponding to, the execution period of the display effect to be executed after that is shortened by the final stop period.

Specifically, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is an effect for game rounds, the period during which the high-speed variable display is displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is shortened by the final stop period. As a result, it is possible to generate a final stop period before the start of a new effect for the game, while suppressing the influence on the appearance of the effect for the game.

Further, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is the effect of the opening period, the timing for starting the effect of the opening period is delayed by the final stop period. In the production for the opening / closing execution mode, the production of the opening / closing period is started as it is after the production of the opening period is completed, but in the production of the opening / closing period, a series of moving images are repeatedly displayed. Therefore, even if the end timing of the effect of the opening period is interrupted until after the start of the opening / closing period, the effect on the appearance of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is small.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When a ball enters the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 as a predetermined event, the values of the corresponding counters 321a to 321e, 322a to 322e, and 323a to 323e are added by 1, and the information on the ball entry history is added. It is stored in various counters 321a to 321e, 322a to 322e, and 323a to 323e. Then, by executing the calculation using the information stored in the various counters 321a to 321e, 322a to 322e, and 323a to 323e, a predetermined parameter is derived as the calculation result, and the derived calculation result information is obtained. Is notified. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the entry history of the game ball B1 into the entry portions 24a, 31 to 34. Further, since the information on the ball entry history is stored and retained by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or modification to the information on the ball entry history. In this case, in a situation where various parameters are derived using the information of the ball entry history, the progress of the game is restricted. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a situation different from the situation in which a normal game is performed. Therefore, it is not necessary to parallel the progress of the normal game and the derivation of various parameters, and the processing load can be reduced.

In a situation where various parameters are derived, the progress of the game is restricted by limiting the execution of at least a part of the processes for advancing the game. This makes it possible to prevent the number of processes per unit time from being extremely increased in the situation where various parameters are derived.

When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the calculation is performed after the launch of the game ball B1 is prohibited. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the entry of the game ball B1 into the entry units 24a, 31 to 34, which triggers the variation of various parameters, is restricted.

When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the game ball B1 launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 after the launch of the game ball B1 is restricted. Various parameters are calculated after a period longer than the maximum period assumed as the period required for the operation has elapsed. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the ball B1 does not surely enter the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34, which triggers the variation of various parameters.

In a situation where information is set to indicate that the situation is such that various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history and the calculation result is notified (that is, "1" is set for the check waiting flag or the displaying flag of the main RAM 145. Even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and off while the RAM erase switch is turned on, the clearing process (step S3709) of the main RAM 145 is blocked. As a result, when the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are calculated, even if the above clear operation is mistakenly performed in an attempt to release the restricted situation, the main RAM 145 is cleared. It is possible to prevent the process from being executed.

Even if the execution of the clear processing of the main RAM 145 for the clear operation is blocked as described above, the main processing (FIG. 81) is executed in the situation where "1" is not set in the power failure flag. If a checksum error occurs, the main RAM 145 is cleared. As a result, even when the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are calculated, it is possible to leave room for the clear processing of the main RAM 145 to be executed.

The state in which the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history is released when the predetermined check result display period elapses. This makes it possible to prevent the event of being left in a state where the progress of the game is restricted.

Even if the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the execution of the effect on the symbol display device 41 is continued. This makes it possible to prevent the production from ending immediately even if the progress of the game is restricted due to an opportunity for the player to calculate various parameters during the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the progress of the game is restricted.

If the progress of the game is restricted due to an opportunity to calculate various parameters in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed by the symbol display device 41, it is originally an opportunity to end the effect for the game round. Even if the duration of the game round has elapsed, the control for ending the effect for the game round is not executed. As a result, in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to keep the effect for the game round, and even in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are derived, the effect is produced. It is possible to make the player think that the execution of is continued.

In the situation where the progress of the game is restricted due to the calculation of various parameters, when the production for the game is continued, there are commands for starting a new production such as a variable command, an opening command, and a demo start command. It is released when it is transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the sound light side CPU 313. As a result, it is possible to cancel the state without transmitting a dedicated command for canceling the state in which the effect for the game round is continued from the main CPU 143 to the sound light side CPU 313.

When the effect for the game round is continued in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted due to the calculation of various parameters, the standby display in the previous stage where the symbol is stopped and displayed when the effect for the game round is terminated continues. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to continue the effect for playing the game in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while making the player aware of the stop result of the symbol. Further, when the restriction on the progress of the game is released and the effect for the game round is terminated, it is sufficient to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progress of the game is released. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the effect of playing the game against the release of the restriction on the progress of the game.

When the effect for playing the game is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to calculate various parameters, the corresponding notification is also executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being confused by the fact that the production for the game is continued for a longer time than expected.

Notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated using the ball entry history are sent to the special map display unit 37a in which the variation display of the special map is executed and the normal map display unit 38a in which the variation display of the normal map is executed. Is executed. As a result, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a can be used in combination as the display unit for performing the notification, and the configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the dedicated display unit is provided. Will be.

When the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed using the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a, the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a display the normal map. Is interrupted. This makes it possible to clarify the content of the notification in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a.

Further, when the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is completed by using the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, the notification of the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a is started. It returns to the display contents just before. As a result, it is possible to resume the display of the special map on the special map display unit 37a and the display of the normal map on the normal map display unit 38a after the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is completed.

When the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are used to perform notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters, the display mode used for displaying the special figure is the above-mentioned various parameters for the special figure display unit 37a. The display mode used for displaying the normal map is not used as the display mode of the notification corresponding to the contents of the above-mentioned various parameters for the normal map display unit 38a. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to clearly understand that the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed by using the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a.

When the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed by using the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a, the contents of different types of notification targets are sequentially switched and displayed. This makes it possible to display the contents of different types of notification targets using the same display units 37a and 38a.

<Another form of the 14th embodiment>
-When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history to the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34, the game ball B1 is prohibited from being launched, but the game is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the launch of the ball B1 is not prohibited. In this case, when the check start instruction signal is received, various parameters are calculated using the information of the ball entry history at that time, so that the launch of the game ball B1 is continued thereafter. It is possible to calculate various parameters without being affected by it.

-The device that performs notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated by using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is limited to the configuration of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a. The display and light emitting unit 133 provided on the front door frame 14 may be used in combination, or a dedicated display unit may be provided. By executing the above notification using the display light emitting unit 133 provided on the front door frame 14, it becomes possible to easily confirm the content of the notification. Further, by executing the above notification using the dedicated display unit, the device on which the above notification is executed becomes clear to the manager of the game hall.

Further, in the configuration in which the above notification is executed using the dedicated display unit, the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is used when an opportunity such as reception of a check start instruction signal occurs. Then, various parameters are calculated and the notification content of the calculation result is updated, and the notification based on the updated notification content may be continued until the next update is performed. As a result, by checking the dedicated display unit at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to grasp the notification content corresponding to the immediately preceding calculation result. Further, the dedicated display unit may be configured so that its display surface is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 132, and is provided in the board box of the main control device 140. It may be configured as a window.

-The trigger for executing the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is not limited to receiving the check start instruction signal from the hall computer HC of the game hall, for example. The trigger may be generated every time a predetermined time elapses, or the trigger may be generated every time the total period of the period during which the game ball B1 is launched becomes a predetermined period. However, the trigger may be generated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, or the trigger may be generated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the trigger may be generated when the demonstration effect continues for a predetermined period or longer, or the trigger may be generated when a predetermined operation unit provided on the pachinko machine 10 is operated. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to generate the trigger when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while the predetermined operation unit is operated.

-When the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 is executed, the payout of the game ball B1 is not stopped in the above embodiment, but instead of this, the game ball B1 The payout may also be stopped.

-Even when the calculation using the entry history to the entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is executed, the effects such as the effect for the game round, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, and the demonstration effect are displayed. The configuration is such that the speaker unit 134 and the symbol display device 41 continue as they are, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect may be temporarily interrupted. In this case, when the notification of the calculation result is completed, the effect is restarted from the temporarily interrupted state.

In a configuration in which the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 and the notification of the calculation result are performed by a control unit different from the main CPU 143 as in the first embodiment. In a situation where the calculation and the notification of the calculation result are executed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 may be stopped. Even in this case, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in the situation where the above calculation and the notification of the calculation result are executed.

-Assuming that the RTC is mounted on the main CPU 143 and the game ball B1 enters the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 in a situation where the date and time measured by the RTC is outside the business hours of the game hall. However, it may be configured so that it is not reflected in the entry history. In this case, for example, even if an attempt is made to make an intentional result of the entry history to the entry units 24a, 31 to 34 outside the business hours of the game hall, it is possible to make it impossible.

-Even if the game ball B1 enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 in a situation where the game ball B1 is not launched, it may not be reflected in the ball entry history. In this case, when the act of caring for the game ball B1 is performed on the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34, it is possible to prevent it from being reflected in the ball entry history.

-Although the game progress is restricted before the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is started, the game may be configured to occur at the same time, and the calculation is executed. The progress of the game may not be restricted at such a timing, and the progress of the game may be restricted at the timing when the calculation result is notified thereafter.

-The state in which the progress of the game is restricted due to the execution of the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is canceled due to a factor different from the elapse of the check result display period. It may be configured as such. For example, it may be released when a check end instruction signal is received from the hall computer HC in the game hall, or it may be released by operating an operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10.

-If an opportunity to execute a calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 occurs in a situation where the effect for the game round is being executed by the symbol display device 41, the game round during the execution. The effect is not limited to the configuration in which the effect for the game is waited in the standby display state, and for example, the effect for the next game round may be waited for after the stationary display is completed.

-When an operation for the opening / closing execution mode is executed on the symbol display device 41 and an execution trigger of the calculation using the entry history to the entry units 24a, 31 to 34 occurs, the opening / closing during the execution is performed. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the effect for the execution mode is continued, and the configuration may be temporarily interrupted at that point.

-In a configuration in which the progress of a game is restricted when it is detected that a fraudulent activity has occurred, even if a configuration is applied in which the execution of the effect is continued even under the situation where the progress of the game is restricted. good. Further, in the configuration in which the progress of the game is restricted when the state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a predetermined state, the configuration in which the execution of the effect is continued even under the situation where the progress of the game is restricted is applied. You may.

-In the configuration in which the final stop command is transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the sound / light side CPU 313 at the end of the effect for the game round, the final stop command is the main side when the standby display is continued on the symbol display device 41. It may be configured to be released based on the transmission from the CPU 143 to the sound / light side CPU 313. Even in this case, it is not necessary to send a dedicated command from the main CPU 143 to the sound / light side CPU 313 for canceling the state in which the standby display is continued on the symbol display device 41.

-The values of various parameters as a result of calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 may be notified as they are. This enables the manager of the game hall to grasp various parameters in detail.

-The result calculated using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 or the corresponding information is added to or replaced with the special figure display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a, and is a symbol display device. It may be the configuration displayed in 41. This makes it easier for the manager of the game hall to grasp the above calculation result.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the mode from the reception of the check start instruction signal to the start of the check waiting period is different from the above-mentioned 14th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above 14th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 14th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a check process in the present embodiment.

When it is neither the display period of the check result nor the check waiting period (step S3801 and step S3802: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the end trigger waiting flag provided in the main RAM 145 (step S3801 and step S3802: NO). Step S3803). The end trigger waiting flag is a flag for the main CPU 143 to specify that it is in a state of waiting for the start of the check waiting period after receiving the check start instruction signal.

When "1" is not set in the end opportunity waiting flag (step S3803: NO), on condition that the check start instruction signal is received from the hall computer HC (step S3804: YES), the current game is played. It is determined whether or not is being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, or the normal signal control is being executed (step S3805). When the game is currently being executed, the open / close execution mode is being executed, or the normal power control is being executed (step S3805: YES), "1" is set in the end opportunity waiting flag of the main RAM 145. (Step S3806). As a result, it becomes an end opportunity waiting period waiting for the start of the check waiting period. On the other hand, when the game is not currently being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, or the Fuzu-fuden control is being executed (step S3805: NO), the processes of steps S3809 to S3814 are executed. Further, when "1" is set in the end trigger waiting flag of the main RAM 145 and the end trigger waiting period is set (step S3803: YES), the game is currently being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, and the general figure is normal. After clearing the end trigger waiting flag of the main RAM 145 to "0" and ending the end trigger waiting period (step S3808), on condition that neither of them is executing the electric control (step S3807: NO), the step The processes of S3809 to S3814 are executed.

For details of the processes of steps S3809 to S3814, first, the launch prohibition process of the game ball B1 is executed in the same manner as in step S3404 of the check process (FIG. 76) in the 14th embodiment (step S3809). After that, in the same manner as in step S3408 of the check process (FIG. 76) in the 14th embodiment, the storage process of the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is executed (step S3810), and the above-mentioned first. Similar to step S3409 of the check process (FIG. 76) in the embodiment of 14, the start process of the check waiting display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a is executed (step S3811). Further, the setting process to the check waiting counter is executed in the same manner as in step S3410 of the check process (FIG. 76) in the 14th embodiment (step S3812), and the check process in the 14th embodiment (FIG. FIG. In the same manner as in step S3411 of 76), the check waiting flag of the main RAM 145 is set to "1" (step S3813), and further, the check is started in the same manner as in step S3412 of the check processing (FIG. 76) in the 14th embodiment. The command is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 313 (step S3814). As a result, the check waiting period is started.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a check start instruction signal is received during the execution of the game round, the open / close execution mode, or the execution of the normal power control, the start of the check waiting period is waited for, and the game round is started. The check waiting period is started when it is no longer being executed, in the open / close execution mode, or when the normal signal control is not being executed. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity and the processing load because it is not necessary to execute the process for interrupting these situations and recovering them thereafter. Further, since it is not necessary to interrupt each situation in this way, in the present embodiment, at the start of the check waiting period, the interruption processing of the game times (step S3405) and the interruption of the opening / closing execution mode as in the 14th embodiment are interrupted. The process (step S3406) and the interrupt process (step S3407) of the normal drawing control are not executed.

When the check wait flag of the main RAM 145 is set to "1" and the check wait period is reached, the check wait process is executed in step S3815 by making an affirmative determination in step S3802 of the check process. The processing content of the check waiting process is the same as the check waiting process (FIG. 78) in the 14th embodiment. Further, when the check waiting process is executed and the check waiting period is switched to the check result display period, a positive judgment is made in step S3801 of the check process, so that the check result display process is performed in step S3816. To execute.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the processing during display of the check result.

In the process of displaying the check result, first, the value of the displaying counter of the main RAM 145 is subtracted by 1 (step S3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the display counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3902).

When the value of the displayed counter is not "0" (step S3902: NO), one of the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period is the target period in the check result display period. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to end and switch to the target period of the next order (step S3903). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3903, the display content update process is executed (step S3904). In the update process, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal target period are displayed so that the display contents correspond to the next target period with respect to the current target period among the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period. Display control is performed on the figure display unit 38a. The processing contents of these steps S3903 and S3904 are the same as the processing contents of steps S3603 and S3604 of the process during display of the check result (FIG. 79) in the above 14th embodiment.

When it is determined in step S3902 that the value of the display counter of the main RAM 145 is "0", a special figure is displayed as in step S3605 of the check result display processing (FIG. 79) in the above 14th embodiment. The display return processing of the unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a is executed (step S3905). After that, the displaying flag of the main RAM 145 is cleared to "0" (step S3906). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68), and the process returns to the state in which the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are executed. After that, the launch prohibition release process of the game ball B1 is executed in the same manner as in step S3610 of the check result display process (FIG. 79) in the 14th embodiment (step S3907).

Next, a state in which the end opportunity waiting period, the check waiting period, and the check result display period progress with reference to the time chart of FIG. 87 will be described. FIG. 87 (a) shows the timing at which the check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC, FIG. 87 (b) shows the execution period of the game times, and FIG. 87 (c) shows the execution period of the normal power control. 87 (d) shows the prohibition period for launching the game ball B1, FIG. 87 (e) shows the end opportunity waiting period, and FIG. 87 (f) shows the check waiting period, FIG. 87 (g). Indicates the display period of the check result.

As shown in FIG. 87 (b), a check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. 87 (a) at the timing of t1 during the execution of the game round. In this case, the game round is continued without interruption at the timing of t1. Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 87 (e), the end opportunity waiting period is set.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the normal drawing control is started at the timing of t2 during the execution of the game round. Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), the game round ends at the timing of t3 during the execution of the Fuzu Fuden control. However, since the Fuzu Fuden control is still being executed, the waiting period for the end will continue.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the normal power control is completed. As a result, the situation is such that neither the game round is being executed, the open / close execution mode is being executed, nor the Fuzu-fuden control is being executed. Therefore, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 87 (e) and 87 (f), the end-triggered waiting period shifts to the check waiting period. In this case, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are display contents for notifying that the check waiting period is in effect. Further, at the timing of t4, the launch of the game ball B1 is prohibited as shown in FIG. 87 (d).

After that, at the timing of t5, the fixed T1 time elapses from the timing of t4, and the check waiting period ends. At the timing of t5, the calculation of various parameters using the ball entry history to each entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is executed. In this case, during the time of T1, after the game ball B1 is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28, the launched game ball B1 is the entry portion of any of the game area PAs. The longest time required for the main CPU 143 to identify that the ball has entered the balls 24a, 31 to 34 and has been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a corresponding to the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34. It is set to a time that is sufficiently longer than the time. And, as already explained, the launch of the game ball B1 is prohibited at the timing of t4. Therefore, all the game balls B1 flowing down the game area PA by the time the check waiting period elapses do not exist, and the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 by the time the check waiting period elapses. Is in the acquired state.

As shown in FIG. 87 (g), the check result display period starts at the timing of t5. In the display period of the check result, as described above, the display corresponding to the judgment result for various parameters in the normal time is executed by the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a, and the open / close execution mode. The display corresponding to the judgment results for various parameters at the time corresponds to the judgment result for various parameters in the open / close execution mode target period in which the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are executed, and in the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode target period in which the display to be displayed is executed by the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a occurs in sequence.

After that, at the timing of t6, when the fixed time of T2 elapses from the timing of t5, the display period of the check result ends as shown in FIG. 87 (g). As a result, at the timing of t6, the state in which the launch of the game ball B1 is prohibited is released as shown in FIG. 87 (d).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is performing a specific operation such as a game rotation, an opening / closing execution mode, and a normal power control, there is an opportunity to calculate various parameters using the ball entry history. Even if it occurs, the progress of the game is not restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game machine, the opening / closing execution mode, and the execution of the normal electric control from being hindered by the occurrence of the calculation trigger of various parameters.

When the calculation trigger of various parameters occurs in the situation where any of the game times, the open / close execution mode, and the normal power control is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the specific operation to be executed is completed. Later, the progress of the game is restricted. As a result, it is possible to derive various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in response to the occurrence of the calculation trigger of various parameters while not hindering the execution of the specific operation.

In the situation where the game is played, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the calculation trigger of various parameters occurs. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while not interrupting the game times.

In the situation where the open / close execution mode is performed, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the calculation triggers of various parameters occur. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while not interrupting the open / close execution mode.

When the special electric winning device 32 is open in the opening / closing execution mode, the execution of the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 and the restriction on the progress of the game are waited for, and the opening / closing execution is executed. Even in the mode, when the special electric winning device 32 is closed, the configuration may be such that the execution of the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 and the restriction on the progress of the game are not waited for. ..

<16th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the management of the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34, the calculation using the management result, and the notification of the calculation result are executed not by the main CPU 143 but by the sound light side CPU 313. It differs from the 14th embodiment in that it is different from the 14th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above 14th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 14th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 351 provided in the MPU 312 of the voice emission control device 161. The MPU 312 is provided with an input port for receiving a command from the main CPU 143 in addition to the input port 351.

The input port 351 is provided with a plurality of buffers 352a to 352g. Specifically, the first to seventh buffers 352a to 352g are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to seventh buffers 352a to 352g through the signal paths 353a to 353g, and each of the first to seventh buffers 352a to 352g is a signal to be input. When is at the LOW level, the information of "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is at the HI level, the information of "1" is stored as the second data. The relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 122a is input to the first buffer 352a. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level first signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 122a, and one by the first winning opening detection sensor 122a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the first signal of the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 313 to specify that the first signal of the HI level is input to the first buffer 352a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 123a is input to the second buffer 352b. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level second signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 123a, and one by the second winning opening detection sensor 123a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the second signal of the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 313 to specify that the second signal of the HI level is input to the second buffer 352b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 124a is input to the third buffer 352c. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level third signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 124a, and one by the third winning opening detection sensor 124a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the HI level third signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 313 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 352c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 125a is input to the fourth buffer 352d. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level fourth signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the special electric detection sensor 125a, and one game ball B1 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 125a. In that case, the HI level fourth signal is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 313 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 352d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 126a is input to the fifth buffer 352e. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the first operating port detection sensor 126a, and one by the first operating port detection sensor 126a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the HI level fifth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 313 to specify that the fifth signal of the HI level is input to the fifth buffer 352e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 127a is input to the sixth buffer 352f. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level sixth signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the second operating port detection sensor 127a, and one by the second operating port detection sensor 127a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 313 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 352f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 128a is input to the seventh buffer 352g. In this case, the main CPU 143 outputs a LOW level 7th signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the out port detection sensor 128a, and one game ball B1 is output by the out port detection sensor 128a. When detected, the HI level 7th signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 313 to specify that the HI level 7th signal is input to the 7th buffer 352g.

FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence area 354 provided in the sound / light side ROM 314. The correspondence area 354 corresponds to the first to seventh buffers 352a to 352g provided in the input port 351 of the MPU 312 of the voice emission control device 161 on a one-to-one basis, and the first to seventh correspondence areas 354a to 354 g is provided.

In the first correspondence area 354a, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the first buffer 352a by the sound light side CPU 313, the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. It is stored in advance in. Further, in the first correspondence area 354a, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used and information on the number of gaming balls B1 to be paid out when one gaming ball B1 enters the general winning opening 31 (10). ) Is also stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the second correspondence area 354b, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the second buffer 352b by the sound light side CPU 313, the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. It is stored in advance in. Further, in the second correspondence area 354b, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used and information on the number of gaming balls B1 to be paid out when one gaming ball B1 enters the general winning opening 31 (10). ) Is also stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the third correspondence area 354c, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the third buffer 352c by the sound / light side CPU 313, the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is provided is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. It is stored in advance in. Further, in the third correspondence area 354c, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used and information on the number of gaming balls B1 to be paid out when one gaming ball B1 enters the general winning opening 31 (10). ) Is also stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10.

In the fourth correspondence area 354d, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the fourth buffer 352d by the sound / light side CPU 313, the information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is used is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. It is stored in advance in. Further, in the fourth correspondence area 354d, information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is used and information on the number of gaming balls B1 to be paid out when one gaming ball B1 enters the special electric winning device 32 (15 pieces). ) Is also stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the fifth correspondence area 354e, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the fifth buffer 352e by the sound / light side CPU 313, the information indicating that the first operating port 33 is used is the shipment of the pachinko machine 10. It is pre-stored in the stage. Further, information indicating that the first operating port 33 is in the fifth correspondence area 354e and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 ( 1) is also stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the sixth correspondence area 354f, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the sixth buffer 352f by the sound light side CPU 313, the information indicating that the second operating port 34 is shipped is the shipment of the pachinko machine 10. It is pre-stored in the stage. In addition, information indicating that the second operating port 34 is in the sixth correspondence area 354f and information on the number of gaming balls B1 to be paid out when one gaming ball B1 enters the second operating opening 34 ( 1) is also stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the 7th correspondence area 354g, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the 7th buffer 352g by the management side CPU 192, the information indicating that the out port 24a is provided in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. It is stored.

In the 14th embodiment, the check process (step S2706) is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68), but the check process is not executed in the present embodiment. Along with this, in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68), not only the game is stopped but also the check result display period is determined. However, in the present embodiment, although the determination as to whether or not the game is stopped is executed, the determination as to whether or not it is the display period of the check result is not executed. Further, in the ball entry detection process in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68), the same process as the ball entry detection process (FIG. 18) in the first embodiment is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 68), the management output process is executed as the next process of the external information setting process in step S2719.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by the main CPU 143.

First, "7" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 145 (step S4001). The management target counter specifies in the main CPU 143 that there is a management target for which it has not yet been specified whether or not the signal output state to the sound / light side CPU 313 should be changed in this management output processing. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 143 to specify whether or not the signal output state to the sound / light side CPU 313 should be changed for any management target. The management target for which the main CPU 143 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the sound / light side CPU 313 should be changed in one management output process is the seven ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a. Is. Therefore, first, "7" is set in the managed counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the sound / light side CPU 313 for the management target corresponding to the value of the current management target counter is at the HI level (step S4002). When it is not the HI level (step S4002: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the output flag of the main RAM 145 corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S4003). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "7" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 122a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first output flag. When the value of the managed counter is "6" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 123a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second output flag, and the value of the managed counter is determined. Is "5" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 124a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third output flag, and the value of the managed counter is "4". Yes When the special electric detection sensor 125a is supported, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fourth output flag, the value of the managed counter is "3", and the first operating port detection sensor 126a. If it corresponds to, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fifth output flag, the value of the management target counter is "2", and it corresponds to the second actuating port detection sensor 127a. In that case, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the 6th output flag, and if the value of the managed counter is "1" and corresponds to the out port 24a, the 7th output flag is set to "1". It is determined whether or not "1" is set. It should be noted that these 1st to 7th output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 18) as in the first embodiment.

When "1" is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S4003: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. (Step S4004). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S4005).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level (step S4006). Specifically, has the HI output duration period (specifically, 10 msec) elapsed after switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the 1st to 7th signals from the LOW level to the HI level? Judge whether or not. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting processing described later for executing the monitoring of the input port 351 in the sound light side CPU 313, and the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level. It is a period during which the output state of can be reliably specified by the sound / light side CPU 313. When an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S4006: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level (step S4006: YES). Step S4007).

When a negative determination is made in step S4003, when the process of step S4005 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S4006, or when the process of step S4007 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main RAM 145 is set to 1. Subtract (step S4008). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4009). When the value of the managed target counter is 1 or more (step S4009: NO), the processes after step S4002 are executed for the managed target corresponding to the value of the new managed target counter.

Next, the effect control process of the present embodiment executed by the sound / light side CPU 313 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect control process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

When the sound light side CPU 313 receives the opening command from the main side CPU 143 (step S4101: YES), "1" is set in the open / close execution mode flag provided in the sound light side RAM 315 (step S4102). The open / close execution mode flag is a flag for the sound / light side CPU 313 to specify that the open / close execution mode is in effect. After that, the effect setting process for the open / close execution mode is executed (step S4103). In the effect setting process for the open / close execution mode, the data table for the open / close execution mode is read from the sound light side ROM 314 to the sound light side RAM 315. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 133 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 134 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 133 and the speaker unit 134. Further, the opening command is transmitted to the display control device 162. By receiving the opening command, the display control device 162 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the open / close execution mode is executed.

When the sound light side CPU 313 receives the ending command from the main side CPU 143 (step S4104: YES), the sound light side RAM 315 opens / close execution mode flag is cleared to "0" (step S4105). After that, the effect setting process for the ending is executed (step S4106). In the ending effect setting process, the ending data table is read from the sound / light side ROM 314 to the sound / light side RAM 315. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 133 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 134 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect of the ending period is executed in the display light emitting unit 133 and the speaker unit 134. Further, the ending command is transmitted to the display control device 162. By receiving the ending command, the display control device 162 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect of the ending period is executed.

When the sound light side CPU 313 receives the high frequency start command from the main side CPU 143 (step S4107: YES), "1" is set in the high frequency support flag provided in the sound light side RAM 315 (step S4108). The high frequency start command is transmitted from the main CPU 143 when the high frequency support mode is started. Further, the high frequency support flag is a flag for the sound light side CPU 313 to specify that it is in the high frequency support mode. After that, the effect setting process for high frequency support is executed (step S4109). In the effect setting process for high-frequency support, the data table for the high-frequency support mode is read from the sound-light side ROM 314 to the sound-light side RAM 315. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 133 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 134 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect for the high frequency support mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 133 and the speaker unit 134. In addition, a high-frequency start command is transmitted to the display control device 162. The display control device 162 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the high frequency support mode is executed by receiving the high frequency start command.

When the sound light side CPU 313 receives the high frequency end command from the main side CPU 143 (step S4110: YES), the high frequency support flag of the sound light side RAM 315 is cleared to "0" (step S4111). The high-frequency end command is transmitted from the main CPU 143 when the high-frequency support mode ends. After that, the effect setting process for low frequency support is executed (step S4112). In the effect setting process for low-frequency support, the data table for the low-frequency support mode is read from the sound-light side ROM 314 to the sound-light side RAM 315. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 133 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 134 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect for the low frequency support mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 133 and the speaker unit 134. In addition, a high-frequency end command is transmitted to the display control device 162. The display control device 162 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the low frequency support mode is executed by receiving the high frequency end command.

When the sound light side CPU 313 receives the door opening command from the main side CPU 143 (step S4113: YES), "1" is set in the door opening flag provided in the sound light side RAM 315 (step S4114). The door opening command is transmitted from the main CPU 143 when the front door frame 14 is changed from the closed state to the open state. Further, the door opening flag is a flag for the sound light side CPU 313 to specify that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. After that, the notification start process is executed (step S4115). In the notification start processing, the data table for door opening notification is read from the sound light side ROM 314 to the sound light side RAM 315. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 133 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 134 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the display light emitting unit 133 and the speaker unit 134 are notified that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Further, the door opening command is transmitted to the display control device 162. By receiving the door opening command, the display control device 162 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is executed.

When the sound light side CPU 313 receives the door closing command from the main side CPU 143 (step S4116: YES), the door opening flag of the sound light side RAM 315 is cleared to "0" (step S4117). The door closing command is transmitted from the main CPU 143 when the front door frame 14 is changed from the open state to the closed state. After that, the notification end process is executed (step S4118). In the notification end processing, the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 in the display light emitting unit 133 and the speaker unit 134 is in the open state is terminated. Further, the door closing command is transmitted to the display control device 162. Upon receiving the door closing command, the display control device 162 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is terminated.

After that, the history setting process is executed in step S4119, the check process is executed in step S4120, and then other processes are executed in step S4121. In other processing, processing such as when a variation command and a type command are received from the main CPU 143 is executed.

Next, the history setting process executed in step S4119 of the effect control process (FIG. 91) will be described.

First, the normal counter area 361, the open / close execution mode counter area 362, and the high frequency support mode counter area 363 provided in the sound / light side RAM 315 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In each of these areas 361 to 363, the first counter 361a, 362a, 363a, the second counter 361b, 362b, 363b, the third counter 361c, 362c, 363c, the fourth counter 361d, 362d, 363d, and the fifth counter 361e, 362e, 363e, sixth counters 361f, 362f, 363f, and seventh counters 361g, 362g, 363g are provided. The first counters 361a, 362a, and 363a store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 352a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second counters 361b, 362b, and 363b store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 352b has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third counters 361c, 362c, and 363c store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 352c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth counters 361d, 362d, and 363d store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 352d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth counters 361e, 362e, and 363e store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 352e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth counters 361f, 362f, and 363f store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 352f has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The seventh counters 361g, 362g, and 363g store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 352g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed in step S4119 of the effect control process (FIG. 91) in the sound / light side CPU 313.

In the history setting process, when "1" is set in the door opening flag of the sound light side RAM 315, that is, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S4201: YES), the normal history setting process is performed. (Step S4204), the history setting process in the open / close execution mode (step S4205), and the history setting process in the high frequency support mode (step S4206) are not executed. Since the game area PA is formed by the space partitioned in the front-rear direction by the back surface of the window panel 132 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24, when the front door frame 14 is opened. Even if the game area PA is opened toward the front and the game ball B1 is launched toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball B1 cannot normally flow down the game area PA. Further, when the game ball B1 enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the manager of the game hall is to maintain and solve the problem. This is a case where the front door frame 14 is opened and the game ball B1 enters due to maintenance or the like. Since the entry of the game ball B1 is not the entry of the game ball B1 in the normal game execution status, it is not necessary to manage the entry of the game ball B1. Therefore, in the history setting process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes of steps S4204 to S4206 is executed.

When "1" is not set in any of the door opening flag, opening / closing execution mode flag, and high frequency support flag of the sound / light side RAM 315, that is, the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening / closing execution mode and high frequency are set. When neither of the frequency support modes is used (step S4201 to step S4203: NO), the normal history setting process is executed (step S4204). In the normal history setting process, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 352a of the input port 351 has been switched to the HI level, the value of the normal first counter 361a is added by 1. When it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 352b has been switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 361b for normal use is added by 1, and the third signal input to the third buffer 352c is added. When it is confirmed that the signal has been switched to the HI level, the value of the normal third counter 361c is added by 1, and it is confirmed that the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 352d has been switched to the HI level. In this case, the value of the 4th counter 361d for normal use is added by 1, and when it is confirmed that the 5th signal input to the 5th buffer 352e has been switched to the HI level, the 5th counter 361e for normal use When the value is added by 1 and it is confirmed that the 6th signal input to the 6th buffer 352f has been switched to the HI level, the value of the 6th counter 361f for normal use is added by 1 to the 7th buffer 352g. When it is confirmed that the input 7th signal has been switched to the HI level, the value of the normal 7th counter 361g is added by 1.

When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the open / close execution mode (step S4201: NO, step S4202: YES), the history setting process in the open / close execution mode is executed (step S4205). In the history setting process in the open / close execution mode, the value of the first counter 362a for the open / close execution mode when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 352a of the input port 351 has been switched to the HI level. Is added by 1, and when it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 352b has been switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 362b for the open / close execution mode is added by 1, and the third buffer 352c is added. When it is confirmed that the third signal input to the HI level has been switched to the HI level, the value of the third counter 362c for the open / close execution mode is added by 1, and the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 352d is input. When it is confirmed that the switch has been made to the HI level, the value of the 4th counter 362d for the open / close execution mode is added by 1, and it is confirmed that the 5th signal input to the 5th buffer 352e has been switched to the HI level. If this is the case, the value of the 5th counter 362e for the open / close execution mode is added by 1, and when it is confirmed that the 6th signal input to the 6th buffer 352f has been switched to the HI level, the open / close execution mode is set. 6 The value of the counter 362f is added by 1, and when it is confirmed that the 7th signal input to the 7th buffer 352g has been switched to the HI level, the value of the 7th counter 362g for the open / close execution mode is added by 1. ..

When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the high frequency support mode (step S4201: NO, step S4203: YES), the history setting process in the high frequency support mode is executed (step S4206). In the history setting process during the high-frequency support mode, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 352a of the input port 351 has been switched to the HI level, the first counter 363a for the high-frequency support mode is used. When it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 352b has been switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 363b for the high frequency support mode is added by 1, and the first value is added. When it is confirmed that the third signal input to the 3 buffer 352c has been switched to the HI level, the value of the 3rd counter 363c for the high frequency support mode is added by 1 and input to the 4th buffer 352d. When it is confirmed that the 4th signal has been switched to the HI level, the value of the 4th counter 363d for the high frequency support mode is added by 1, and the 5th signal input to the 5th buffer 352e is switched to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the value has been changed, the value of the 5th counter 363e for the high frequency support mode is added by 1, and it is confirmed that the 6th signal input to the 6th buffer 352f has been switched to the HI level. When the value of the 6th counter 363f for the high frequency support mode is added by 1 and it is confirmed that the 7th signal input to the 7th buffer 352g has been switched to the HI level, the 7th for the high frequency support mode is used. The value of the counter 363 g is added by 1.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing a check process executed in step S4120 of the effect control process (FIG. 91) in the sound / light side CPU 313.

If it is not the check result display period (step S4301: NO), the processes of steps S4303 to S4308 are executed on condition that the check start command is received from the main CPU 143 (step S4302: YES). The check start command is transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the sound / light side CPU 313 when the check start instruction signal is transmitted from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 143. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a check start command may be transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the sound / light side CPU 313 when a predetermined period (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed from the start of the demo display. A check start command may be transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the sound / light side CPU 313 when a predetermined operation unit provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is operated, and the main side may be configured when the predetermined time is reached. The check start command may be transmitted from the CPU 143 to the sound / light side CPU 313, and the check starts from the main side CPU 143 to the sound / light side CPU 313 every time a predetermined period (for example, 120 min) elapses from the transmission time of the previous check start command. The command may be sent. Further, the trigger for executing the processes of steps S4303 to S4308 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is received from the main CPU 143, and the event that triggered the transmission of the check start command as described above is not limited to the configuration. When the sound / light side CPU 313 grasps whether or not the event has occurred and the sound / light side CPU 313 grasps that the event has occurred, the processes of steps S4303 to S4308 may be executed.

In the processing of steps S4303 to S4308, first, normal arithmetic processing is executed (step S4303). In the normal arithmetic processing, by referring to the contents of the 1st to 7th correspondence areas 354a to 354g of the sound light side ROM 314, the same ball entry portion of the 1st to 7th counters 361a to 361g for normal use is used. The values of the counters corresponding to 24a, 31 to 34 are summed. Specifically, since the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored in the first to third correspondence areas 354a to 354c as described above, these first to third correspondence areas 354a to K2, which is the total value, is calculated by summing the values of the first to third counters 361a to 361c for normal use corresponding to 354c. On the other hand, information corresponding to the separate ball entry portions 24a and 32 to 34 are stored in the fourth to seventh correspondence areas 354d to 354g, respectively. In this case, the values of the 4th to 7th counters 361d to 361g for normal use are grasped as the values of the different ball entry portions 24a and 32 to 34, respectively. Specifically, the value of the 7th counter 361g for normal use is set to K1 corresponding to the out port 24a, the value of the 4th counter 361d for normal use is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric winning device 32, and the 5th counter for normal use is used. The value of 361e is K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 361f for normal use is K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, the parameter 7 and the parameter 8 are calculated in the same manner as the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 78) in the 14th embodiment. After that, the same processing as the parameter management processing (FIG. 65) in the twelfth embodiment is executed for various parameters in the normal state. That is, when the value of the 7th parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the 8th parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 1st range, and the value of the 7th parameter is 0. If only one of the conditions of exceeding 7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 2nd range, and the 7th parameter is used. When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6, the determination process that the calculated various parameters are in the 3rd range is changed to the normal parameters. Execute against. Then, the information of the determination result is written in the main RAM 145.

After that, the arithmetic processing for the open / close execution mode is executed (step S4304). In the arithmetic processing for the opening / closing execution mode, K2, which is the total value, is calculated by summing the values of the first to third counters 362a to 362c for the opening / closing execution mode in the same manner as in the normal arithmetic processing (step S4303). .. Further, the value of the 7th counter 362g for the open / close execution mode is set to K1 corresponding to the out port 24a, and the value of the 4th counter 362d for the open / close execution mode is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric winning device 32, and is used for the open / close execution mode. The value of the fifth counter 362e is K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 362f for the open / close execution mode is K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, the parameter 7 and the parameter 8 are calculated in the same manner as the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 78) in the 14th embodiment. After that, the same processing as the parameter management processing (FIG. 65) in the twelfth embodiment is executed for various parameters in the open / close execution mode. That is, when the value of the 7th parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the 8th parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 1st range, and the value of the 7th parameter is 0. If only one of the conditions of exceeding 7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 2nd range, and the 7th parameter is used. When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6, the determination processing that the calculated various parameters are in the 3rd range is performed in the open / close execution mode. Execute for parameters. Then, the information of the determination result is written in the main RAM 145.

After that, the arithmetic processing for the high frequency support mode is executed (step S4305). In the arithmetic processing for the high-frequency support mode, K2, which is the total value, is obtained by summing the values of the first to third counters 363a to 363c for the high-frequency support mode as in the normal arithmetic processing (step S4303). calculate. Further, the value of the 7th counter 363g for the high frequency support mode is set to K1 corresponding to the out port 24a, and the value of the 4th counter 363d for the high frequency support mode is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric winning device 32. The value of the fifth counter 363e for the mode is K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 363f for the high frequency support mode is K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, the parameter 7 and the parameter 8 are calculated in the same manner as the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 78) in the 14th embodiment. After that, the same processing as the parameter management processing (FIG. 65) in the twelfth embodiment is executed for various parameters in the high frequency support mode. That is, when the value of the 7th parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the 8th parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 1st range, and the value of the 7th parameter is 0. If only one of the conditions of exceeding 7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 2nd range, and the 7th parameter is used. When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6, the determination process that the calculated various parameters are in the 3rd range is performed in the high frequency support mode. Execute for various parameters. Then, the information of the determination result is written in the main RAM 145.

After that, the display start processing of the calculation result is executed (step S4306). In the display start process, the determination result command corresponding to the information of each determination result derived in each of the arithmetic processes of steps S4303 to S4305 is transmitted to the display control device 162. When the display control device 162 receives the determination result command, the display control device 162 causes the symbol display device 41 to display all the information of each determination result derived in each of the arithmetic processes of steps S4303 to S4305. As a result, an image showing whether the various parameters in the normal state correspond to the first range, the second range, or the third range, and the various parameters in the open / close execution mode are the first range, the second range, and the first range. An image showing which of the three ranges is supported and an image showing whether the various parameters in the high frequency support mode correspond to the first range, the second range, or the third range are displayed as symbols. It is displayed on the device 41. In this case, the image corresponding to the information of these determination results corresponds to various parameters in the normal time, various parameters in the open / close execution mode, and various parameters in the high frequency support mode in the corner portion of the symbol display device 41. Each of these images is displayed in such a manner that the manager of the game hall can recognize whether or not the image is being played.

After that, the information corresponding to the display period (specifically, 30 sec) of the check result is set in the display counter provided in the sound / light side RAM 315 (step S4307). The value set in the display counter is periodically (for example, 4 msec cycle) subtracted. Further, "1" is set in the displaying flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 315 (step S4308). The display flag is a flag for the sound light side CPU 313 to specify that it is the display period of the check result.

When "1" is set in the display flag of the sound / light side RAM 315, an affirmative determination is made in step S4301. In this case, the value of the display counter of the sound / light side RAM 315 is subtracted by 1 (step S4309). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the display counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4310). When the value of the display counter is "0" (step S4310: YES), the operation result display end processing is executed (step S4311). In the display end process, a display end command is transmitted to the display control device 162 so that the display of the image corresponding to the information of each determination result in the symbol display device 41 is terminated. By receiving the display end command, the display control device 162 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display of the image corresponding to the information of each determination result is terminated.

After that, the displaying flag of the sound / light side RAM 315 is cleared to "0" (step S4312). Further, when the process of step S4312 is executed, the counters 361a to 361g of the normal counter area 361, the counters 362a to 362g of the counter area 362 for the open / close execution mode, and the counters 363a of the counter area 363 for the high frequency support mode are executed. Clear the value of ~ 363g to "0". As a result, the entry history of the entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 is initialized, and the management of the entry history is newly started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the process of step S4312 is executed, the counters 361a to 361g of the normal counter area 361, the counters 362a to 362g of the counter area 362 for the open / close execution mode, and the high frequency support are provided. The values of the counters 363a to 363g in the mode counter area 363 may be maintained as they are. In this case, the ball entry history of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is accumulated so as to straddle the execution times of the notification of the calculation result using the ball entry history a plurality of times. Further, in the configuration, the entry history of the entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is based on the reception of the history deletion signal from the hall computer HC and the occurrence of the deletion operation using the operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10. May be configured to be erased.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the accumulation of the ball entry history of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34, the calculation using the ball entry history, and the notification of the calculation result are not on the main side CPU 143 but on the sound light side. It is executed by the CPU 313. As a result, while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the main CPU 143 that centrally manages the progress of the game, the ball entry history of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is accumulated, and the calculation using the ball entry history is performed. , And the notification of the calculation result can be executed.

The ball entry results of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 are sounded from the main CPU 143 using a dedicated signal path provided separately from the signal path for transmitting a command from the main CPU 143 to the sound light side CPU 313. It is transmitted to the optical side CPU 313. As a result, it is possible to transmit the ball entry results of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 from the main side CPU 143 to the sound light side CPU 313 without increasing the number of commands.

Information indicating which signal path the signal path to which the ball entry results of the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 are transmitted corresponds to the ball entry result of the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34, and corresponding to each signal path. Information on the number of prize balls of the game ball B1 is stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 314. As a result, processing for grasping which signal path corresponds to the entry result of which entry portion 24a, 31 to 34, and information on the number of prize balls of the game ball B1 corresponding to each signal path. Is not required to be transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the sound / light side CPU 313.

It should be noted that the ball entry results of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 are limited to the configuration in which the ball entry results are transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the sound light side CPU 313 using a dedicated signal path different from the command signal path. However, for example, it may be configured to be transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the sound light side CPU 313 by using a signal path for a command. In this case, the command corresponding to the type of each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 may be transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the sound light side CPU 313. In the configuration, each command may include information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each of the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34, and the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each command is the sound / light side ROM 314. It may be a configuration stored in advance in.

<17th embodiment>
In the 14th embodiment, the notification of the calculation result of various parameters using the ball entry history to each entry section 24a, 31 to 34 is executed by using the special figure display section 37a and the normal map display section 38a. However, in the present embodiment, the display unit for executing this notification is different. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above 14th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 14th embodiment is basically omitted.

In the present embodiment, the notification display devices 365 to 367 are provided on the main control board 141 of the main control device 140. First, the main control device 140 will be described. 95 is a front view of the main control device 140, and FIG. 96 is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 95.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the main control device 140 includes a main control board 141 housed in a board box 140a. As shown in FIG. 96, the MPU 142 is mounted on the element mounting surface 141a, which is one of the plate surfaces of the main control board 141. The substrate box 140a is transparently formed so that the MPU 142 housed in the substrate box 140a can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 140a. Although the substrate box 140a is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 142 housed in the substrate box 140a can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 140a. The main control device 140 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 140b facing the element mounting surface 141a of the main control board 141 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 140a. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 to expose the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually recognize the facing wall portion 140b of the substrate box 140a. It becomes possible to visually check the MPU 142 through the facing wall portion 140b.

The substrate box 140a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 140c and 140d back and forth, and the plurality of case bodies 140c and 140d are separated from each other as shown in FIG. 95. A connecting portion 140e is provided for blocking and leaving a trace of the case bodies 140c and 140d when they are separated. A plurality of connecting portions 140e are arranged side by side on one side of the substrate box 140a having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. As a result, even if the partial coupling portion 140e is destroyed and the case bodies 140c and 140d are separated in a state where the separation of the case bodies 140c and 140d is prevented by using the partial coupling portion 140e, the case bodies 140c and 140d are subsequently separated. By putting another coupling portion 140e in the coupling state, it is possible to prevent the case bodies 140c and 140d from being separated again. Further, when the case bodies 140c and 140d are separated, the joint portion 140e is destroyed and a trace thereof remains. Therefore, by visually checking the joint portion 140e, it is possible to check whether the case bodies 140c and 140d are separated illegally. It becomes possible to grasp. Further, in the substrate box 140a, a sealing seal 140f is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 140c and 140d on the side opposite to the side on which the connecting portions 140e are arranged side by side. When the sealing seal 140f is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case bodies 140c and 140d. As a result, when the sealing seal 140f is peeled off when the case bodies 140c and 140d are separated, it is possible to leave a trace thereof.

In the main control device 140 having the above configuration, the main control board 141 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 365 to 367 as shown in FIG. 95. Specifically, a first notification display device 365, a second notification display device 366, and a third notification display device 367 are provided. The first to third notification display devices 365 to 367 are all segment display devices in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a single multicolor light emitting type is used. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to third notification display devices 365 to 367 are all installed so that the display surface faces the element mounting surface 141a of the main control board 141. This makes it possible to visually check the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 365 to 367 housed in the board box 140a from the outside of the board box 140a. Further, as described above, the main control device 140 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 140a so that the facing wall portion 140b facing the element mounting surface 141a of the main control board 141 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third are passed through the facing wall portion 140b. It becomes possible to visually check the notification display devices 365 to 367.

In the first notification display device 365, various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) in the normal state specified in the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 78) in the fourteenth embodiment are described. The judgment result of is displayed. In this case, when the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the first range are displayed on the first notification display device 365, and the determination result of the various parameters is displayed. When is in the second range, the characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the second range are displayed on the first notification display device 365, and when the determination result of the various parameters is in the third range, Characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the third range are displayed on the first notification display device 365.

In the second notification display device 366, various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) in the open / close execution mode specified in the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 78) in the fourteenth embodiment. The judgment result of the parameter) is displayed. In this case, when the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the first range are displayed on the second notification display device 366, and the determination result of the various parameters is displayed. Is in the second range, characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the second range are displayed on the second notification display device 366, and when the determination result of the various parameters is in the third range, The second notification display device 366 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the third range.

In the third notification display device 367, various parameters (7th parameter and 7th parameter) in the high frequency support mode specified in the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 78) in the 14th embodiment. The determination result of 8 parameters) is displayed. In this case, when the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the first range are displayed on the third notification display device 367, and the determination result of the various parameters is displayed. When is in the second range, characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the second range are displayed on the third notification display device 367, and when the determination result of the various parameters is in the third range, Characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the third range are displayed on the third notification display device 367.

Incidentally, the display of each determination result in the first to third notification display devices 365 to 367 is checked in the same manner as the display of each determination result in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a in the above 14th embodiment. It starts when the result display period is reached and ends when the check result display period ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first to third notification display devices 365 to 367 may be configured to constantly display the immediately preceding determination results. Further, when the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine main body 12, the first to third notification display devices 365 to 367 immediately before. The display of each determination result is started, and when it is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 that the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the first to third The display of each determination result in the notification display devices 365 to 367 may be terminated. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which the display is performed on the first to third notification display devices 365 to 367.

In the substrate box 140a, a blocking sheet 140g is provided in the facing region facing the first to third notification display devices 365 to 367 in the facing wall portion 140b facing the element mounting surface 141a of the main control board 141. The blocking sheet 140g is provided in order to make the inside of the substrate box 140a, more specifically, the first to third notification display devices 365 to 367, invisible through the region where the blocking sheet 140g is provided in the substrate box 140a. ing. Specifically, the hologram sheet is provided as the blocking sheet 140 g, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a reflective sheet or a diffused reflective sheet may be provided. Since the blocking sheet 140g is provided, even if the area where the blocking sheet 140g is provided is visually observed from the front in the substrate box 140a, the presence of the blocking sheet 140g causes the first to third notification display devices 365 to 367 to be displayed. It becomes impossible to see visually. As a result, when the game machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 for the purpose of maintenance or the like in a situation where the game is being played in the pachinko machine 10, the first to third players are allowed to play the game. The possibility that the notification display devices 365 to 367 are visually inspected is reduced.

On the other hand, since the blocking sheet 140g is provided in a part of the facing wall portion 140b, the facing wall portion 140b can be visually observed diagonally toward the first to third notification display devices 365 to 367. The display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 365 to 367 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 140a. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can visually check the notification contents of each determination result in the first to third notification display devices 365 to 367 from the outside of the board box 140a.

Incidentally, the blocking sheet 140g is not provided in the region facing the MPU 142 in the facing wall portion 140b. As a result, even if the blocking sheet 140 g is provided, it is possible to prevent the legibility of the MPU 142 from being deteriorated at the time of visual confirmation.

In addition, instead of the blocking sheet 140g, a member for reducing the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 365 to 367 may be provided. For example, a sheet that is colored and transparent but has low transparency may be provided in place of the blocking sheet 140 g. In this case, when the sheet is viewed from the front, the display surface of the first to third notification display devices 365 to 367 can be visually recognized, but the display content on the display surface becomes difficult to see.

<18th embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, an example in which the configuration for managing the game history is adopted in the pachinko machine 10 is shown, but in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration for managing the game history is adopted in the slot machine 410 is shown. First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 410 will be described. 97 is a front view of the slot machine 410, FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the slot machine 410 with the front door 412 open, and FIG. 99 is a front view of the housing 411.

As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, the slot machine 410 includes a housing 411 that forms its outer shell. The housing 411 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, a front door 412 is attached to the front side of the housing 411. The front door 412 is supported by the housing 411 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 411 with the shaft portion 412a provided on the left side thereof as a rotating shaft. The front door 412 is locked in an unopenable state by a locking device 412b provided on the back surface thereof, and this locked state is released by an unlocking operation with a predetermined key to the key cylinder 413.

As shown in FIG. 97, a game panel 414 is provided near the center of the front door 412. The game panel 414 is formed so that three vertically long display window portions 415L, 415M, and 415R are arranged side by side. The display window portions 415L, 415M, and 415R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 410 can be visually recognized through the display window portions 415L, 415M, and 415R.

As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, the inside of the housing 411 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 411a, and a reel unit 416 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 411a. The reel unit 416 includes a left reel 416L, a middle reel 416M, and a right reel 416R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape, respectively. Each reel 416L, 416M, 416R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R. The rotation axes of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 416L, 416M, 416R correspond one-to-one with the display window portions 415L, 415M, 415R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 416L, 416M, 416R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 415L, 415M, 415R, respectively. Further, when the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display window portions 415L, 415M, and 415R.

As shown in FIG. 97, a start lever 421 operated to start the rotation of each reel 416L, 416M, 416R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 414. When the start lever 421 is operated while a game medium such as a medal is bet, the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R start to rotate all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 421, stop buttons 422, 423, 424 operated to individually stop the rotating reels 416L, 416M, 416R are provided. Each stop button 422, 423, 424 is arranged directly below the display window portions 415L, 415M, 415R corresponding to the reels 416L, 416M, 416R to be stopped. Each stop button 422, 423, 424 is in a state where it can be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the left reel 416L.

The rotation of each reel 416L, 416M, 416R is started based on the operation of the start lever 421, and the rotation of each reel 416L, 416M, 416R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 422,423,424, and the game medium. It corresponds to one game (game times) until the execution of various processes such as the granting of the reels and the management of the game state is completed.

On the lower right side of the display window portions 415L, 415M, and 415R, a medal insertion slot 425 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. As shown in FIG. 98, the medals inserted from the medal slot 425 are guided to the hopper device 418 when reception is permitted by the selector 417 provided on the back surface of the front door 412, and when reception is prohibited. The medal ejection port 412c provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front door 412 leads to the medal tray 412d (see FIG. 97). The hopper device 418 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 412d through the medal discharge port 412c when a prize corresponding to the granting of the game medium is established on the effective line. There is.

Below the medal slot 425, as shown in FIG. 97, a return button 426 that is pressed when the medal inserted in the medal slot 425 is jammed in the selector 417 is provided. Further, on the lower left side of the display window 415L, 415M, 415R, a first credit insertion button 427 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and two virtual medals at a time are inserted. A second credit insertion button 428 for inserting a virtual medal and a third credit insertion button 429 for inserting one virtual medal at a time are provided.

A checkout button 431 is provided on the left side of the start lever 421. That is, this slot machine 410 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement button 431 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 412c as a real medal.

As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, a power supply device 419 is provided inside the housing 411. The power supply device 419 has a power switch 419a that is operated when the power is turned on or turned off, a reset button 419b for resetting various states of the slot machine 410, and setting states of the slot machine 410 from "setting 1" to "setting 1". A setting key insertion hole 419c that is operated to change within the range of "setting 6" is provided.

Next, the symbols attached to the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R will be described.

FIG. 100 shows a design arrangement of the left reel 416L, the middle reel 416M, and the right reel 416R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 416L, 416M, 416R. Further, numbers are assigned from "0" to "19" corresponding to each reel 416L, 416M, 416R, but these numbers are in a state where the main control device 440 can be visually recognized from the display window unit 415L, 415M, 415R. It is a number for recognizing the symbol which is, and is not actually attached to the reels 416L, 416M, 416R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the 19th of the left reel 416L), a "watermelon" symbol (for example, the 18th of the left reel 416L), a "cherry" symbol (for example, the 17th of the left reel 416L), and " "Replay" symbol (eg, 16th on left reel 416L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 15th on left reel 416L), "LUCKY" symbol (eg, 13th on left reel 416L), "Red 7" symbol (eg, 13th on left reel 416L) For example, there are eight types: the 12th of the left reel 416L) and the "white 7" symbol (for example, the 10th of the left reel 416L). As shown in FIG. 100, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 416L, 416M, 416R.

FIG. 101 is a front view of the display window portions 415L, 415M, and 415R. Each display window portion 415L, 415M, 415R is formed so that three of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 416L, 416M, 416R can be visually recognized. Therefore, when each reel 416L, 416M, 416R is stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized via the display window portion 415L, 415M, 415R.

In this slot machine 410, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R can be visually recognized. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 416L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 416M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 416R. When the rotation of each reel 416L, 416M, 416R is started with the specified number of medals bet, and the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of paying out the medals and the replay Either the benefit or the transition of the gaming state is given.

That is, in this slot machine 410, only one main line ML is set as a line in which a prize can be established. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the subline SUL1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 416L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 416M and the lower symbol of the right reel 416R, and the upper symbol of the left reel 416L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 416M and the upper symbol of the right reel 416R are combined. Subline SUL2 connecting the connected subline SUL2 and the lower symbol of the left reel 416L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 416M and the lower symbol of the right reel 416R, and the lower symbol of the left reel 416L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 416M and the right reel 416R. Even if a combination of symbols to be won is established on a line extending in a straight line such as the sub line SUL4 connecting the upper symbols, the prize is not established.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 102, the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won will be described. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won.

Small role prizes for which medals are paid out include the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the cherry prize. Specifically, on the mainline ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 416L is either the "BAR" symbol or the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 416M is the "bell" symbol, and the right reel 416R. If the stop symbol is a "bell" symbol, it will be the first supplementary prize. Further, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 416L is either a "watermelon" symbol or a "LUCKY" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 416M is a "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 416R is. If it is a "bell" symbol, it will be the second supplementary prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 416L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 416M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 416R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML. It will be the third supplementary prize. In the case of any of the first supplementary prize to the third supplementary prize, the number of game media to be granted is "1".

If the stop symbol of the left reel 416L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 416M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 416R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the bell is won. Will be. If the bell is won, the number of game media to be granted will be "9".

When the stop symbol of the left reel 416L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 416M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 416R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the first It will be a watermelon prize. If the first watermelon wins, the number of game media to be granted will be "7".

When the stop symbol of the left reel 416L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 416M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 416R is the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the second It will be a watermelon prize. If the second watermelon wins, the number of game media to be granted will be "7".

When the stop symbol of the left reel 416L is the "cherry" symbol on the main line ML, the cherry prize is won regardless of whether the stop symbol of the middle reel 416M or the stop symbol of the right reel 416R is. In the case of a cherry prize, the number of game media to be granted is "2".

Normal replay prize, 1st RT replay prize, 2nd RT replay prize, 1st fall replay are given as prizes that can be played in the next game without betting medals (or virtual medals). There is a prize and a second fall replay prize. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 416L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 416M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 416R is the "replay" symbol. In that case, it is usually a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 416L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 416M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 416R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the first RT It will be a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 416L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 416M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 416R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second RT It will be a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 416L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 416M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 416R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the first It will be a fall replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 416L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 416M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 416R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the second It will be a fall replay prize.

If any of the above replay prizes are won, it is possible to play the next game while eliminating the need for bets on both medals and virtual medals. Specifically, if one of the replay prizes is won in a game in which three medals are bet, the game of the next game can be started in the state of three bets while eliminating the need for bets on both medals and virtual medals. It will be possible.

Of the various replay prizes mentioned above, the 1st RT replay prize, the 2nd RT replay prize, the 1st fall replay prize, and the 2nd fall replay prize not only serve as an opportunity to grant the benefits of the replay prize, but also as an opportunity to shift the game state. Become. In this slot machine 410, a plurality of types of gaming states are set so that the types of winning combinations to be drawn and the winning probabilities of each winning combination are different in the winning combination lottery process, and the transition between these gaming states is the transition of the gaming states. Occurs when a trigger replay prize is established.

There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as a state transition prize in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 416L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 416M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 416R is "red 7". If it is a symbol, it will be the first BB prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 416L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 416M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 416R is the "white 7" symbol on the main line ML. , The second BB prize. When the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

The BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be granted per unit game number is higher than in the normal mode described later and the non-AT state (this state is also referred to as a normal gaming state). Furthermore, the BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be granted per unit number of games is higher than any of the gaming states other than the BB state. Specifically, the winning combination that enables the winning of the bell is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.1) than in other gaming states, and if the winning combination is won, each reel 416L. , 416M, 416R, and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 422 to 424 with respect to the rotation position of each reel 416L, 416M, 416R, the bell winning is established. The BB state continues over a plurality of games and ends when the end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The end condition is arbitrary, but in this slot machine 410, it is set as the end condition that the total number of game media given after the BB state is started is equal to or more than the end reference number (for example, "350"). There is.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

As shown in FIG. 97, an upper lamp 432 and a speaker 433 are provided on the upper part of the front door 412, and an image display device 434 is provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 410, the upper lamp 432 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 432 is light-emitting controlled so as to perform a light-emitting effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 434. The speakers 433 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 410, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that is output. Further, the speaker 433 is sound output controlled so that the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 434 is performed.

The image display device 434 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a DRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 410, the display is controlled so that the image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 434 is controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface.

The game panel 414 of the front door 412 has a credit display unit 435 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored at a position below the display window units 415L, 415M, and 415R, and is a target for granting a small winning combination. A grant number display unit 436 that displays the number of game media is provided. These display units 435 and 436 are composed of a 7-segment display, and a monochromatic light emitting type LED such as green is used for each segment.

The slot machine 410 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 99, a main control device 440 is provided above the reel unit 416. The main control device 440 is attached to a back plate 411b that raises the back surface portion of the housing 411. The main control device 440 is configured such that the main control board 441 is housed in the board box 445.

The MPU 442 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one of the plate surfaces of the main control board 441. The substrate box 445 is transparently formed so that the MPU 442 housed in the substrate box 445 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 445. Although the substrate box 445 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 442 housed in the substrate box 445 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 445. The main control device 440 is mounted on the back surface of the back plate 411b of the housing 411 so that the facing wall portion 445a facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 441 faces the front of the slot machine 410 in the board box 445. Therefore, by opening the front door 412 in front of the slot machine 410 with respect to the housing 411 to expose the internal space of the housing 411, it becomes possible to visually check the facing wall portion 445a of the board box 445. The MPU 442 can be visually observed through the facing wall portion 445a.

The substrate box 445 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies in the front-rear direction, and the plurality of case bodies are used to prevent the case bodies from being separated and to leave a trace thereof when the case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 445b is provided. A plurality of connecting portions 445b are arranged side by side on one side of the board box 445 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. As a result, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joint portion 445b in a state where the separation of the case body is prevented by using a part of the joint portion 445b, another joint portion 445b is subsequently separated. It is possible to prevent the separation of the case body again by putting the case in a bonded state. In addition, when the case body is separated, the joint portion 445b is destroyed and its trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is illegally separated by visually checking the joint portion 445b. Become. Further, in the substrate box 445, a sealing seal 445c is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies on one side different from the one side on which the connecting portions 445b are arranged side by side. When the seal seal 445c is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 445c is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace thereof.

In the main control device 440 having the above configuration, the main control board 441 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 446 to 448. Specifically, a first notification display device 446, a second notification display device 447, and a third notification display device 448 are provided. The first to third notification display devices 446 to 448 are all segment display devices in which seven LED display segments are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a single multicolor light emitting type is used. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to third notification display devices 446 to 448 are all installed so that their display surfaces face the same direction as the element mounting surface of the main control board 441. This makes it possible to visually check the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448 housed in the board box 445 from the outside of the board box 445. Further, as described above, the main control device 440 is mounted on the back plate 411b of the housing 411 so that the facing wall portion 445a facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 441 faces the front of the slot machine 410 in the board box 445. Therefore, when the front door 412 is opened to the front of the slot machine 410 with respect to the housing 411 to expose the internal space of the housing 411 to the front of the slot machine 410, the first to first doors are passed through the facing wall portion 445a. 3 It becomes possible to visually check the notification display devices 446 to 448. The management result of the game history is notified by using the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448. This will be described in detail later.

The visual confirmation of the main control device 440 is performed by opening the front door 412 in front of the slot machine 410 with respect to the housing 411. Lighting devices 449a and 449b are provided in the housing 411 in order to improve the visibility of the visual confirmation of the main control device 440 performed by opening the front door 412. One lighting device 449a and one 449b are provided on the back surface of the left side plate 411c and the back surface of the right side plate 411d of the housing 411 so as to form a pair on the left and right. The lighting devices 449a and 449b are provided with a high-intensity LED as a light emitting body, and are installed so that the irradiation direction of the light is the main control device 440. The light irradiation range IR by the lighting devices 449a and 449b includes a range facing the MPU 442 in the facing wall portion 445a of the main control device 440. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the MPU 442. Further, the irradiation range IR includes a range facing the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448 in the facing wall portion 445a of the main control device 440. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448. Further, the irradiation range IR includes a range in which the coupling portion 445b is provided in the substrate box 445 of the main control device 440 and a range in which the sealing seal 445c is provided. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the joint portion 445b and the sealing seal 445c.

The irradiation of light from the lighting devices 449a and 449b is performed according to the opening angle of the front door 412 with respect to the housing 411, although the details will be described later. As shown in FIG. 98, an opening angle sensor 412e is provided on the back surface of the front door 412 at a position adjacent to the shaft portion 412a in order to detect the opening angle of the front door 412. The opening angle sensor 412e can detect whether or not the front door 412 is closed with respect to the housing 411, and when the front door 412 is open, the opening angle is a predetermined opening angle. It is possible to detect whether or not it exceeds. The method of detecting the opening angle of the front door 412 by the opening angle sensor 412e is arbitrary, but for example, when the front door 412 is in the closed state, it is in a pressed state and the front door 412 is in the open state. The detection unit that releases the pressed state and the detection unit that does not enter the pressed state until the opening angle of the front door 412 exceeds the predetermined opening angle to enter the pressing state and the opening angle of the front door 412 reaches the predetermined opening angle. A configuration having each of and is conceivable.

The slot machine 410 is provided with an effect control device 450 as shown in FIG. 98 in addition to the main control device 440. The effect control device 450 is arranged on the front door 412 so as to be overlapped behind the image display device 434. The effect control device 450 controls the upper lamp 432, the speaker 433, and the image display device 434 based on the command received from the main control device 440. In the effect control device 450, the control board is housed in the board box as in the main control device 440.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 410 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 103.

The main control device 440 includes a main control board 441 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 442 is mounted on the main control board 441. The MPU 442 is a ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 443 is executed. A certain RAM 444, a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 443 and the RAM 444 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 442, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 442, a reel unit 416, a start detection sensor 421a for detecting the operation of the start lever 421, stop detection sensors 422a, 423a, 424a for individually detecting the operation of each stop button 422, 423, 424, and a medal are inserted. The insertion medal detection sensor 425a that detects the medals inserted from the mouth 425, the credit insertion detection sensors 427a, 428a, 429a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion button 427, 428, 429, and the operation of the settlement button 431 are detected. The settlement detection sensor 431a, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 418, the sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 419b provided in the power supply device 419, and the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion hole 419c provided in the power supply device 419. Various sensors such as a sensor for detecting the above and an opening angle sensor 412e for detecting the opening angle of the front door 412 are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 442.

On the output side of the MPU 442, the reel unit 416, the selector drive unit 417a provided in the selector 417, the payout motor of the hopper device 418, the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448, the lighting devices 449a and 449b, and The effect control device 450 and the like are connected. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 416L, 416M, 416R of the reel unit 416 is performed by the MPU 442. As described above, the selector 417 guides the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 425 to the hopper device 418 after detecting the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 425 by the insertion medal detection sensor 425a when reception is permitted, and inserts medals when reception is prohibited. It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 412d without being detected by the detection sensor 425a. The selector drive unit 417a has a function for switching the state of the selector 417 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. Specifically, the passage switching piece provided in the selector 417 is positioned for reception permission. And operate between the reception prohibited position. The MPU 442 switches the state of the selector 417 between the acceptance permitted state and the acceptance prohibited state by switching the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 417a.

Further, the MPU 442 executes the drive control of the hopper device 418 when the small winning combination is established and the medal is paid out. Further, the MPU 442 starts the display for notifying the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448 when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 442 is started, and also starts the display of the game history. The display contents are updated every time the management result is updated. Further, the MPU 442 executes light emission control of the lighting devices 449a and 449b according to the opening angle of the front door 412. Further, the MPU 442 transmits a command to the effect control device 450 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to notify the effect control device 450 of the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R in the image display device 434. ..

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 419 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442 (not shown). The power supply device 419 is equipped with a power supply unit and a power failure monitoring circuit that supply drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 410 including the main control device 440, and the power failure monitoring circuit is applied from an external power source to the power supply unit. The voltage is monitored, and when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 442. The MPU 442 executes the power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and makes it possible to return to the processing state before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the power supply device 419 is provided with a power supply unit during power failure to supply backup power to RAM 444 as power during power failure when the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, the data is stored and retained in the RAM 444 in the situation where the backup power can be supplied in the power supply unit during the power failure (for example, 1 day or 2 days). Will be done. However, the data stored and held in the RAM 444 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 410 while pressing the reset button 419b provided on the power supply device 419.

The effect control device 450 includes an effect control board 451 for controlling various notifications and execution of various effects. The MPU 452 is mounted on the effect control board 451. The MPU 452 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a ROM 453 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 452 and a control program stored in the ROM 453. A RAM 454 is built in, and a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 453 and the RAM 454 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 452, and each may be individually chipped. Further, the RAM 454 is configured such that the backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit during the power failure of the power supply device when the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is cut off, but the backup power is supplied to the RAM 454. good.

The MPU 452 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As described above, the MPU 442 of the main control device 440 is connected to the input side of the MPU 452, and various commands are received from the MPU 442. An upper lamp 432, a speaker 433, and an image display device 434 are connected to the output side of the MPU 452. Based on the command received from the MPU 442 of the main control device 440, the MPU 452 executes various notifications and various effects by executing light emission control of the upper lamp 432, sound output control of the speaker 433, and display control of the image display device 434. To be done.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 442, ROM 443 and RAM 444 of the main control device 440 are referred to as the main side MPU 442, the main side ROM 443 and the main side RAM 444, respectively, and the effect control device 450 MPU 452, ROM 453 and RAM 454 are referred to as the effect side, respectively. It is called MPU 452, effect side ROM 453, and effect side RAM 454.

Next, the process executed by the main MPU 442 will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the main MPU 442.

In the main process, the initialization process is first executed (step S4401). In the initialization processing, interrupts by timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are performed for the register group in the main MPU 442, the I / O device, and the like. After the initialization process is completed, the display start process is executed (step S4402). In the display start processing, the display on the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448 is started. In this case, if the main RAM 444 stores information on the management result of the game history immediately before the previous power failure, the first to third notification display devices 446 to display the information corresponding to the information. 448 display control is executed. On the other hand, if the main RAM 444 does not store the information on the management result of the game history immediately before the previous power failure, or if the regular information is not stored as the information, a predetermined initial display (for example, all lighting) is performed. ) Is executed to control the display of the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 419c and the power is turned on (step S4403). If the power is turned on with the setting key inserted (step S4403: YES), and if the reset button 419b is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S4404: NO), the winning probability is as it is. The setting process is executed (step S4406). On the other hand, if the reset button 419b is turned on when the power is turned on (step S4404: YES), the winning probability setting process is executed after the clear process (step S4405) is executed (step S4406).

In the clear process, the entire area in the main RAM 444 is initialized. In this case, in the main RAM 444, an area for storing the set value of the slot machine 410, an area for storing data indicating whether or not the slot machine is in the BB state, and data indicating the total number of gaming media in the BB state are stored. Area, area where data indicating whether or not it is in AT state is stored, area where data for specifying the end condition of AT state is stored, data indicating the type of lottery mode described later, management result of game history Clear each area of the main RAM 444 including the area in which the information of the above is stored, the total number of games counter 444a, and the advantageous game number counter 444b. As a result, when the clear process is executed, the normal game state is set regardless of the state before the power cutoff, and the state before the power cutoff is in a state where the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of an abnormality. If there is, the abnormal state is canceled.

In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on condition that the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 435 provided on the game panel 414. When the clearing process (step S4405) of the main RAM 444 is executed, the credit display unit 435 is displayed corresponding to "setting 1" at the start of the winning probability setting process, and the clearing process (step S4405) is performed. If is not executed, the display corresponding to the set value in the state before the power is cut off is displayed. In the winning probability setting process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 419b is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display unit 435. If the reset button 419b is operated while the set value is "setting 6", the set value is updated to "setting 1". When the ON operation of the setting key is canceled after the start lever 421 is operated, the winning probability setting process is terminated. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display unit 435 ends. After executing the winning probability setting process, the process proceeds to the normal process (step S4407). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S4403: NO), the power recovery process after step S4408 is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 410 to the state before the power is cut off. In the power recovery process, it is determined whether or not the set value of the slot machine 410 is normal by checking the main RAM 444 (step S4408). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S4409). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 444, and when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 442 is stopped and the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to "1". Will be set. When the power failure flag is set to "1", it is confirmed whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (step S4410). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 444 is checked, and it is confirmed whether or not the value is normal.

When an affirmative judgment is made in all of steps S4408 to S4410, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 444 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 442, and the data saved in the main RAM 444 is returned to the register of the main MPU 442, so that the register of the main MPU 442 The state is returned to the state before the power was cut off (step S4411). Further, the power failure flag of the main RAM 444 is cleared to "0" (step S4412). After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effector MPU 452 (step S4413), the process returns to the address before the power is cut off (step S4414).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S4408 to S4410, the operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 105) is prohibited (step S4415), and all the actuators connected to the output port are cleared by clearing all the output ports of the main MPU 442. Is set to the OFF state (step S4416), and an error notification process for notifying the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error is executed (step S4417). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the clear process (step S4405).

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 442 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started every 1.49 msec, for example.

In the register save process (step S4501), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 442 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 444. In step S4502, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag, and if "1" is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S4503 to execute the power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 419 is input to the main MPU 442. In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored, and the command transmission is terminated. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 442 is stored in the main RAM 444. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 442 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 444 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 444, and subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the fact that the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If "1" is not set in the power failure flag in step S4502, various processes after step S4504 are performed. In step S4504, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S4505, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the main MPU 442 itself. In step S4506, in order to rotate each reel 416L, 416M, 416R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor provided on each of these reels 416L, 416M, 416R is performed. In step S4507, the state of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and a sensor monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the read result is normal is performed.

In step S4508, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S4509, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the outside. In step S4510, a command output process for transmitting various commands to the effect side MPU 452 is performed. In step S4511, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S4512, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 444 in the previous step S4501 is returned to the corresponding register in the main MPU 442. In step S4513, a management process for managing the game history and displaying the display corresponding to the management result on the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448 is executed. In step S4514, a lighting process for controlling light emission of the lighting devices 449a and 449b is executed according to the opening angle of the front door 412. After that, in step S4515, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated. The details of the management process in step S4513 and the lighting process in step S4514 will be described later.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a normal process executed by the main MPU 442.

In the normal process, the start wait process is first executed (step S4601). In the start waiting process, if any of the replay prizes has occurred in the previous game, an automatic input process is performed so that the same number of game media as the number of bets in the previous game are bet. Further, in the start waiting process, when a medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 425a, if the current number of bets is not "3" or more, which is the maximum specified number, the number of bets is added by 1 and the number of bets is increased. If is 3 or more, which is the maximum specified number, the value of the credit counter provided in the main RAM 444 is added by 1. The credit counter is a counter for specifying the number of stored virtual medals on the main MPU 442.

In the start waiting process, when the automatic input process is not executed and any of the credit input buttons 427 to 429 is operated, the credit for setting the bet number corresponding to the operation. Executes the input response process. In the credit insertion processing, when the first credit insertion button 427 is operated, the maximum amount of game media that can be bet at that time is bet, and the second credit insertion button 428 or the second credit insertion button 428 or the second. 3 When the credit insertion button 429 is operated, the bet state corresponding to it is set. In this case, when a virtual medal is used for the bet, the value corresponding to the number of the bet virtual medals is subtracted from the credit counter. In addition, if the number of virtual medals required to set the number of bets corresponding to the operated credit insertion buttons 427 to 429 is not stored and stored, it is possible to bet in relation to the stored and stored virtual medals. The maximum amount of game media is bet.

In the start waiting process, when the number of bets is equal to or greater than the maximum specified number and the value of the credit counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit storage number (specifically, "50"), the acceptance prohibition process is executed. In the reception prohibition process, the selector 417 is set to the reception prohibition state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 417a. As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 425, the medal is not detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 425a and is ejected to the medal tray 412d. On the other hand, if the number of bets is less than the maximum specified number or the value of the credit counter is less than the upper limit storage number, the acceptance permission process is executed. In the acceptance permission process, the selector 417 is set to the acceptance permission state by starting the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 417a. As a result, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 425 are collected by the hopper device 418 after being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 425a. In the start waiting process, when the settlement button 431 is operated and the automatic insertion process is not executed, medals corresponding to the total number of bets and credit counter values are issued via the medal ejection port 412c. The hopper device 418 is driven and controlled so that the medal tray 412d is ejected. As a result, the internally stored game medium is paid out to the player as an actual medal.

After executing the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on the medal has reached the specified number (“3” in the present embodiment) (step S4602), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process is started. The process returns to the wait process (step S4601). When the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 421 has been operated (step S4603). If the start lever 421 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S4601). On the other hand, when the start lever 421 is operated, the reception prohibition process is executed after the main line ML is activated (step S4604). As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 425, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 412d without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 425a. After that, a lottery process for drawing a winning combination in the current game is executed (step S4605), and each reel 416L, 416M, 416R is driven and controlled in an manner corresponding to the result of the current lottery process (step S4605). (Step S4606).

After that, the medal payout process is executed (step S4607). In the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is established in this game, a process for granting a player a number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when granting a virtual medal, the value corresponding to this small winning combination is added to the credit counter, and if the value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit storage number, the upper limit storage number is exceeded. The hopper device is driven and controlled so that only a few minutes of medals are paid out to the medal tray 412d.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state corresponding to the result of the current game (step S4608). Then, the reception permission process is executed (step S4609). As a result, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 425 are collected by the hopper device after being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 425a.

The lottery process executed in step S4605 of the normal process (FIG. 100) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 107.

First, a random number used when determining whether or not a combination is correct is acquired (step S4701). In this slot machine 410, when the start lever 421 is operated, the hard circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the main MPU 442 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the main RAM 444 after confirming the operation of the start lever 421. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 421 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 410 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 421 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, the lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is read from the main ROM 443 (step S4702). Here, in this slot machine 410, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 419c to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. By performing the above, it is possible to set which winning probability the lottery process is to be executed based on. It should be noted that "setting n + 1" has a more advantageous winning probability for the player than "setting n". Further, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery tables are different in the main MPU 442 even if the set values are set at the same stage: a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode. Further, as a game state, a BB state exists in addition to the state of each of these lottery modes. In step S4702, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value and the current gaming state is selected.

The lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode will be described by taking the case of "setting 3" as an example. First, the lottery table for the normal mode selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a normal mode. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 109 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 108, an index value IV is set in the lottery table for the normal mode, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the free run counter.

Specifically, the bell winning data and the first supplementary winning data are set in the index value IV = 1. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 109, when the first stop (the reel on which the stop command is first generated) is the left reel 416L, the second stop target and the third stop target are selected. The bell prize is surely generated regardless of the type of the reel and the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424, and in other cases, the first supplementary prize is surely generated.

In this slot machine 410, reel control capable of sliding up to four symbols after the stop buttons 422 to 424 are operated is performed for each reel 416L, 416M, 416R. In other words, reel control is performed for each reel 416L, 416M, 416R to stop the reels until a predetermined time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 422 to 424 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to easily establish a prize corresponding to the winning combination, and it is possible to prevent the winning corresponding to the winning combination from being established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R that can be slid is limited as described above, one reel 416L, 416M, 416R constitutes a combination of symbols for establishing a prize. If there are 5 or more symbols between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 422 to 424 (the event is also called "missing"). say). The first supplementary prize to the third supplementary prize, the bell prize, and various replay prizes are prize modes in which the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R are not dropped when the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R are stopped in the corresponding order. The watermelon prize, cherry prize, first BB prize, and second BB prize are prize modes in which omission may occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 422 to 424 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R.

As shown in FIG. 108, the bell winning data and the second supplementary winning data are set in the index value IV = 2. When winning with an index value IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 109, when the first stop is the middle reel 416M, the types of reels to be stopped second and third to be stopped, and each stop button 422 to 424. The bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and in other cases, the second supplementary prize is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 108, the bell winning data and the third supplementary winning data are set in the index value IV = 3. When winning with an index value IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 109, when the first stop is the right reel 416R, the types of reels to be stopped second and third to be stopped, and each stop button 422 to 424. The bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and in other cases, the third supplementary prize is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 108, only the first watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 4. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 109, the first watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424, the first watermelon winning may not be established.

As shown in FIG. 108, only the second watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 5. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 109, the second watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424, the second watermelon winning may not be established.

As shown in FIG. 108, only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 6. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 109, the cherry winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 422 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 416L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning will not be established.

As shown in FIG. 108, the first BB winning data is set at the index value IV = 7. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 109, the first BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424, there is a possibility that the first BB prize will not be established. Further, as shown in FIG. 108, the second BB winning data is set at the index value IV = 8. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 109, the second BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424, there is a possibility that the second BB prize will not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the 1st BB winning data and the 2nd BB winning data are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is established, and are held in the subsequent games of the winning game. Not over. On the other hand, in the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data, the corresponding BB winning is established even in the next and subsequent games of the winning game, except when the main RAM 444 is cleared. Is stored until. In this case, in the game in which the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is carried over, the first BB winning data and the index value IV corresponding to the second BB winning data are excluded from the lottery target. This makes it possible to prevent the BB winning data from being newly stored even though the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is already stored, and a plurality of BB winning data are accumulated. It is possible to prevent it from being memorized.

As shown in FIG. 108, the index values IV = 9 to 12 are set to the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data. In this case, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 109, the first stop is the middle reel 416M, and the second stop (the reel on which the second stop command is generated) is the left reel 416L. When the third stop (the reel for which the stop command was last generated) is the right reel 416R, the first RT replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424, and in other cases. The normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 10, when the first stop is the middle reel 416M, the second stop is the right reel 416R, and the third stop is the left reel 416L, each stop button 422 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 424, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 11, when the first stop is the right reel 416R, the second stop is the left reel 416L, and the third stop is the middle reel 416M, each stop button 422 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 424, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 12, when the first stop is the right reel 416R, the second stop is the middle reel 416M, and the third stop is the left reel 416L, each stop button 422 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 424, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424.

When the lottery table for the normal mode of FIG. 108 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 2, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 3 are selected. The probability of winning is about 1 / 5.0, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 4 is about 1/131, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 5 is about 1. / 187, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 6 is about 1/423, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 7, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 8. The probabilities are about 1/218, respectively, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 9, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 10, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 11. And the probability of winning when the index value IV = 12 is about 1 / 28.0, respectively.

Here, as described above, in the lottery table for the normal mode, the first RT replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data as the winning data having the index value IV = 9 to 12 (see FIG. 108). The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is about 1 / 7.0. When the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R are won with any of the index values IV = 9 to 12, the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R corresponds to the winning combination. When the order is reached, the first RT replay prize is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When the mode shifts to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 107) becomes the lottery table for the first RT mode.

Next, the lottery table for the first RT mode selected in the case of "setting 3" and the first RT mode will be described. 110 and 111 are explanatory views for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the 1st RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 110, the winning combination data set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the normal mode lottery table (FIG. It is the same as 108). In this case, a combination that enables the addition of a game medium is set to the index values IV = 1 to 6, and the winning combination data and each winning probability set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 6 are set. By being the same, the types of combinations that enable the addition of the game medium and the winning probabilities of those combinations are the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode. Further, BB winning data is set for the index values IV = 7 to 8 as in the normal mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the same as that of the normal mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning either BB combination in the normal mode and the first RT mode is the same.

The winning combination data set after the index value IV = 9 is different from the normal mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 110, the second RT replay winning data is set as the winning data having the index value IV = 9 to 12, in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is about 1 / 10.1. When winning with an index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 111, when the first stop is the middle reel 416M, the second stop is the left reel 416L, and the third stop is the right reel 416R. The second RT replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 10, the second RT replay winning is won when the first stop is the middle reel 416M, the second stop is the right reel 416R, and the third stop is the left reel 416L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 11, the second RT replay winning is won when the first stop is the right reel 416R, the second stop is the left reel 416L, and the third stop is the middle reel 416M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424. If the winner is won with an index value of IV = 12, the second stop is the right reel 416R, the second stop is the middle reel 416M, and the third stop is the left reel 416L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424. In the 1st RT mode, any of the index values IV = 9 to 12 is won, and the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R corresponds to the winning combination. When becomes, the second RT replay winning is established and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When the mode shifts to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 107) becomes the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 110, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, the first fall replay winning data is set as the winning data having the index value IV = 13 to 18, in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 13 to 18 is about 1 / 10.9.

When the lottery table for the first RT mode is won with an index value IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 111, the first stop is the left reel 416L, the second stop is the middle reel 416M, and the third stop is. When the right reel is 416R, the normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424, and in other cases, the first fall replay prize is the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424. It will definitely occur regardless. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 14, the first stop is the left reel 416L, the second stop is the right reel 416R, and the third stop is the middle reel 416M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 422 to 424, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 15, the first stop is the middle reel 416M, the second stop is the left reel 416L, and the third stop is the right reel 416R. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 422 to 424, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 16, the first stop is the middle reel 416M, the second stop is the right reel 416R, and the third stop is the left reel 416L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 422 to 424, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 17, the first stop is the right reel 416R, the second stop is the left reel 416L, and the third stop is the middle reel 416M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 422 to 424, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 18, the first stop is the right reel 416R, the second stop is the middle reel 416M, and the third stop is the left reel 416L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 422 to 424, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424. When the first fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When the mode shifts to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 107) becomes the lottery table for the normal mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 19. The probability of winning at an index value IV = 19 is set higher than the probability of winning another combination, and specifically, the probability of winning is about 1 / 6.7. Then, when the winning is achieved with this index value IV = 19, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R and the stop operation timing of each reel 416L, 416M, 416R. ..

The lottery table for the first RT mode is set with an index value IV = 9 to 19 to enable the establishment of a replay prize. Since the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probabilities of the winning combinations (hereinafter, also referred to as replay probabilities) that enable the establishment of the replay winning in the first RT mode are about 1. It is /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 7.0. That is, the first RT mode is in a gaming state in which the replay probability is higher than that in the normal mode.

Next, the lottery table for the second RT mode selected in the case of "setting 3" and the second RT mode will be described. 112 and 113 are explanatory views for explaining the second RT mode lottery table.

In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 112, the winning combination data set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 108) and the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 110). In this case, a combination that enables the addition of a game medium is set to the index values IV = 1 to 6, and the winning combination data and each winning probability set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 6 are set. By being the same, the types of combinations that enable the addition of the game medium and the winning probabilities of those combinations are the same in each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. Further, BB winning data is set in the index value IV = 7 to 8 as in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery. It is the same as the table. That is, the probability of winning any BB combination in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode is the same.

The winning combination data set after the index value IV = 9 is different from the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 112, as the winning data of the index value IV = 9 to 14, the second falling replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. .. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 14 is about 1 / 5.5.

When the lottery table for the second RT mode is won with an index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 113, the first stop is the left reel 416L, the second stop is the middle reel 416M, and the third stop is. When the right reel is 416R, the normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize is the operation timing of each stop button 422 to 424. It will definitely occur regardless. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 10, the first stop is the left reel 416L, the second stop is the right reel 416R, and the third stop is the middle reel 416M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 422 to 424, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 11, the first stop is the middle reel 416M, the second stop is the left reel 416L, and the third stop is the right reel 416R. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 422 to 424, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 12, the first stop is the middle reel 416M, the second stop is the right reel 416R, and the third stop is the left reel 416L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 422 to 424, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 13, the first stop is the right reel 416R, the second stop is the left reel 416L, and the third stop is the middle reel 416M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 422 to 424, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 14, the first stop is the right reel 416R, the second stop is the middle reel 416M, and the third stop is the left reel 416L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 422 to 424, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 422 to 424. When the second fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When the mode shifts to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 107) becomes the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 15. The probability of winning at an index value IV = 15 is set higher than the probability of winning another combination, and specifically, the probability of winning is about 1 / 6.3. Then, when the winning is achieved with this index value IV = 15, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R and the stop operation timing of each reel 416L, 416M, 416R. ..

The lottery table for the second RT mode is set with an index value IV = 9 to 15 to enable the establishment of a replay prize. Since the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probabilities of the winning combinations (hereinafter, also referred to as replay probabilities) that enable the establishment of the replay winning in the second RT mode are about 1. It is /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 7.0. That is, the second RT mode is in a gaming state in which the replay probability is higher than that in the normal mode. On the other hand, the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1 / 2.9. That is, the replay probability of the second RT mode is the same as that of the first RT mode. However, the replay probability in the first RT mode is not limited to the same configuration as the replay probability in the second RT mode. For example, although the replay probabilities are slightly different between the first RT mode and the second RT mode, they are substantially the same. It may be a configuration in which the second RT mode has a higher replay probability than the first RT mode, and the first RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the second RT mode.

The lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the lottery table for the second RT mode are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the set value is high. The more the winning probability of the BB combination is, the higher the winning probability is, but the replay probability set in each lottery mode is the same or substantially the same regardless of the set value. In addition, in the situation where one of the BB combinations is won, the first BB combination and the second BB are selected regardless of whether the normal mode, the first RT mode, or the second RT mode is used so that the BB combination is not won twice. The role is excluded from the lottery. In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 443 has a BB lottery referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 107) when it is in the BB state. The table is remembered. In the BB lottery table, only three types of winning roles, a bell role, a first watermelon role, and a second watermelon role, are set as lottery target roles, and the winning probability of the bell role is set to about 1 / 1.1. , The winning probability of the first watermelon combination is set to about 1/100, and the winning probability of the second watermelon combination is set to about 1/100. As a result, in the BB state, the expected number of game media to be granted per unit game number is higher than in other game states.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process (FIG. 107), after selecting the lottery table (step S4702), the index value IV is set to "1" (step S4703), and the determination value DV used when determining the winning or losing of the winning combination is set. (Step S4704). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S4701 is used as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV “1” is added to this random number value. A new determination value DV is used.

After that, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is performed (step S4705). In the winning / failing determination of the combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it exceeds "65535", the winning data acquisition process for setting the data of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 444 is executed (step S4706). In the winning data acquisition process, all of the winning data set for the index value IV this time in the lottery table to be referred to is set in the main RAM 444. In the state where the winning data is set, if the winning data is winning data other than the BB winning data, "0" is cleared after the end of this game regardless of whether or not the winning data corresponding to the winning data is established, and the BB is set. If it is winning data, "0" is cleared when the prize is established.

When the determination value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S4705: NO), it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 (step S4707), and it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not the index value IV is correct (step S4708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the added index value IV exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S4704 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S4704, a new determination value DV is obtained by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for the determination of whether or not the previous combination is successful. In step S4705, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S4706 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S4708, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In this case, after executing the stop information setting process for setting the stop information for reel stop control (step S4709), the game start command is set as the transmission target to the effect side MPU 452 (step S4710). The game start command is a command for causing the production side MPU 452 to recognize that a new game has started, and the current game state is any of the normal game state, the BB state, and the AT state in the game start command. Information indicating the existence and information corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 107) in this game are included.

When the production side MPU 452 receives the game start command, the production side MPU 452 grasps the contents of the outline of the production in this game based on the contents of the game start command, and the details of the production in the manner corresponding to the contents of the grasped outline of the production. The content of is decided by lottery. Then, a data table corresponding to the determined content of the effect is read from the effect side ROM 453 to the effect side RAM 454, and according to the read data table, the light emission control of the upper lamp 432, the sound output control of the speaker 433, and the display of the image display device 434 are performed. Take control.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S4606 of the normal process (FIG. 106) will be described.

In the reel control process, the rotation of each reel 416L, 416M, 416R is started in the situation where the rotation of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R is not started. In this case, the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R are driven and controlled so as to rotate at a constant speed after a predetermined acceleration period. The operation of each stop button 422 to 424 is invalid until the constant speed rotation is achieved.

In the reel control process, the stop buttons 422 to 424 corresponding to the reels 416L, 416M, 416R that are rotating after each reel 416L, 416M, 416R starts to rotate at a constant speed are operated. The reels 416L, 416M, 416R corresponding to the stop buttons 422 to 424 are stopped. In this case, in the information for stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (step S4605) in this game, and in the reels 416L, 416M, 416R which are the targets of the stop operation at the timing when the stop operation is performed. The number of slips until the symbol is actually stopped is determined based on the symbol existing at a predetermined position (for example, the lower row). Then, the reels 416L, 416M, 416R to be stopped are stopped at the timing when the reels 416L, 416M, 416R to be stopped are moved in the rotation direction by the determined number of slips. The number of slips is any one of "0", "1", "2", "3" and "4". In addition, the number of slips makes it possible to stop on the main line ML of the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination as much as possible, while ensuring that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the main line ML. It is set to avoid. Further, since the index value IV after IV = 1 to 3 and IV = 9 has a configuration in which the winning combination changes according to the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R, such an index value IV is won. If this is the case, the information for stop control is changed according to the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R. Further, in the reel control process, when all the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R are stopped, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the main line ML. Then, if any of the replay prizes is established, the privilege of the replay is given, and if any of the prizes corresponding to the grant of the game medium is established, the prize is dealt with. Make settings so that a number of game media are given.

Next, the corresponding processing at the end of the game executed in step S4608 of the normal processing (FIG. 106) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 114.

In the corresponding processing at the end of the game, the value of the total number of games counter 444a (see FIG. 103) provided in the main RAM 444 is added by 1 (step S4801). The total number of games counter 444a is a counter for measuring the number of games digested regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. The AT state is more for the player than the case where the stop order of the stop buttons 422 to 424 is the correct answer order, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the stop order is established on the main line ML. In the situation where the lottery combination that is advantageous is won, the stop order that is the correct answer order is notified. The lottery combination corresponding to the stop order can be won in both the non-AT state and the AT state, but the stop order that is the correct answer order is not notified in the non-AT state, whereas the stop order that is the correct answer order is not notified in the AT state. Since the order is notified, the AT state is more advantageous to the player than the non-AT state. Specifically, when the index value IV of the winning combination is won according to the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R at the index value IV = 1 to 3 and the index value IV = 9 or later, in the AT state. If there is, the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R for establishing the winning of the winning combination that is advantageous to the player is notified, and if it is in the non-AT state, the notification of such stop order is not executed. Further, in the notification of the stop order, when the lottery process (FIG. 107) of the winning combination is executed, the game start command corresponding to the lottery result is transmitted from the main side MPU 442 to the production side MPU 452, and the production side is based on the game start command. By controlling the display of the image display device 434 by the MPU 452, the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R are started before the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R can be stopped in the game corresponding to the execution times of the lottery process (FIG. 107) of the winning combination. The ART state is a gaming state in which the player stays in the first RT mode or the second RT mode in the AT state. In the ART state, the probability of winning the replay prize increases, and as described above, the expected number of game media to be granted in one game increases. Therefore, it is possible to make the ART state an advantageous gaming state.

In the corresponding process at the end of the game, if any of the BB combinations is in the winning state or the CB state (step S4802: YES), the BB process is executed (step S4803). In the BB process, if one of the BB roles has been won, it is determined whether or not the BB prize corresponding to the winning BB role has occurred in this game, and the BB prize is generated. If so, by setting "1" to the BB state flag provided in the main RAM 444, the game state is shifted to the BB state. As a result, the BB lottery table will be referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 107) in the next and subsequent games. Further, by transmitting a command indicating that the state has changed to the BB state to the effect side MPU 452, the effect for the BB state is started in the upper lamp 432, the speaker 433, and the image display device 434. By deleting the BB winning data from the main RAM 444 when the state is shifted to the BB state, the state of winning the BB combination is released. In addition, the same BB state is obtained regardless of whether the first BB prize or the second BB prize occurs.

In the BB process in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the game medium has been granted in this game, and if the game medium has been granted, the total number of grant counters provided in the main RAM 444 is displayed. Add up the number of game media given in this game. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the total number of grant counters after the addition is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the end reference number. If it is less than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the BB process is terminated as it is. If it is equal to or more than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the BB state is terminated by clearing the BB state flag of the main RAM 444 to "0". Further, by transmitting a command indicating that the BB state has ended to the effect side MPU 452, the ending image is displayed on the image display device 434, and then for the BB state on the upper lamp 432, the speaker 433, and the image display device 434. End the production of.

When the BB state ends, the lottery mode becomes the normal mode regardless of which mode the lottery mode is before the start of the BB state. Further, when the BB state is started in the AT state, the ART preparation state processing described later is executed after the end of the BB state regardless of the state before the start of the BB state.

When a negative determination is made in step S4802, or when the process of step S4803 is executed, it is determined whether or not the state is AT (step S4804). If it is not in the AT state (step S4804: NO), the RT mode transition process (step S4805) and the transition chance management process (step S4806) are executed. When the stop operation for the middle reel 416M or the right reel 416R is performed first in the game in a state that is neither the BB state nor the AT state, the notification indicating that the stop operation should be performed is executed from the left reel 416L. However, no penalty is given to limit the granting of profits in subsequent games.

In the RT mode transition process (step S4805), if it is specified that the first RT replay prize has occurred in this game, the game shifts to the first RT mode, and the second RT replay prize occurs in this game. If it is specified that the game is present, the mode shifts to the second RT mode. In addition, in the RT mode transition process, if it is specified that the second fall replay prize has occurred in this game, the game shifts to the first RT mode, and the first fall replay prize occurs in this game. If it is specified that it is, it shifts to the normal mode.

In the transition chance management process (step S4806), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 115, it is determined whether or not the special combination has been won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 107) in this game (step S4901). The special role is one of the index values IV = 4 to 6. When the special combination is won (step S4901: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag provided in the main RAM 444 (step S4902). The advantageous regulation flag is a flag for the main MPU 442 to specify that the transition to the AT state (that is, the ART state) is prohibited. The processing when "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag will be described later.

When "1" is not set in the advantageous regulation flag (step S4902: NO), the transition lottery table corresponding to the content of the stock privilege is read from the main side ROM 443 to the main side RAM 444. The stock privilege can be accumulated when the special combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 107) in the normal gaming state when the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 444 is set to "1". It is a privilege. Six stages of "0" to "5" are set for the stock privilege, and the stock privilege is "0" when there is no accumulated privilege. In the transition lottery table corresponding to the stock privilege being "0", if the index value IV = 4 wins, there is a 5% probability that the AT transition wins and the index value IV = 5 wins. In that case, the AT transition is won with a probability of 10%, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, the AT transition is won with a probability of 15%. The contents of the transition lottery table referred to when the stock privilege is "1" to "5" will be described later.

After reading the transition lottery table in step S4903, the AT transition lottery process is executed (step S4904). In the AT transition lottery process, the value of the transition lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) updated in the main RAM 444 is read, and the read value of the transition lottery counter is referred to the transition lottery table. Match.

When the AT transition is won in the shift lottery process to the AT state (step S4905: YES), the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the content of the stock privilege is read from the main side ROM 443 to the main side RAM 444 (step S4906). In the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the stock privilege being "0", the probability that 50 games are selected is 90%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 9%, and 200 games are selected. The probability of being played is 1%. The contents of the initial game number lottery table referred to when the stock privilege is "1" to "5" will be described later.

After reading the initial game number lottery table in step S4906, the initial game number lottery process is executed (step S4907). In the initial game number lottery process, the value of the game number lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) updated in the main RAM 444 is read, and the value of the read game number lottery counter is used as the initial game number. Match against the lottery table. Then, the initial number of games corresponding to the collation result is set in the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 444 (step S4908).

After that, it is determined whether or not the current RT mode is the second RT mode (step S4909). In the case of the second RT mode (step S4909: YES), since it is not necessary to wait for promotion to the second RT mode in the AT state, the transition chance management process is terminated as it is. As a result, the gaming state is the AT state and the ART state, which is the second RT mode. In this case, a command indicating that the ART state has started is transmitted to the effect side MPU 452. By receiving the command, the effecting side MPU 452 causes the upper lamp 432, the speaker 433, and the image display device 434 to perform an effect indicating that the ART state has started, and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the ART state is performed. It is performed by the upper lamp 432, the speaker 433, and the image display device 434. After that, the value of the stock privilege counter provided in the main RAM 444 is cleared to "0" (step S4909). The stock privilege counter is a counter for specifying the presence / absence of the stock privilege and the value of the stock privilege on the main MPU 442.

If it is not in the second RT mode (step S4910: NO), it is necessary to wait for promotion to the second RT mode as the ART preparation state, so "1" is set in the ART preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 444. (Step S4911). The ART preparation status flag is a flag for the main MPU 442 to specify that the ART preparation status is in the ART preparation status.

Returning to the explanation of the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 114), when the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 444 is 1 or more, or when "1" is set in the ART preparation status flag of the main RAM 444. , A positive determination is made in step S4804. In this case, the ART preparation state processing is executed (step S4808) on condition that "1" is set in the ART preparation state flag of the main RAM 444 (step S4807: YES).

In the ART preparation state processing, it is determined whether or not the promotion to the second RT mode has occurred, and if the promotion to the second RT mode has occurred, the ART preparation state flag of the main RAM 444 is cleared to "0". As a result, the gaming state shifts from the AT state to the ART state. In addition, a command indicating that the ART state has been started is transmitted to the effect side MPU 452. By receiving the command, the effecting side MPU 452 causes the upper lamp 432, the speaker 433, and the image display device 434 to perform an effect indicating that the ART state has started, and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the ART state is performed. It is performed by the upper lamp 432, the speaker 433, and the image display device 434.

When the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the player wins at any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 regardless of whether or not "1" is set in the ART preparation status flag. In this case, the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is notified. When the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 108) or the lottery for the first RT mode is used regardless of whether or not the ART preparation status flag is set to "1". When the index value IV = 9 to 12 in the table (FIG. 110) is won, the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R for establishing the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is notified. .. Further, when the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the index value IV in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 110) = regardless of whether or not "1" is set in the ART preparation status flag. If any of 13 to 18 is won, the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R for establishing the normal replay winning is notified.

If a negative determination is made in step S4807, ART state processing is executed (step S4809). FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing ART state processing.

First, the value of the advantageous game number counter 444b (see FIG. 103) provided in the main RAM 444 is added by 1 (step S5001). The advantageous game number counter 444b is a counter for measuring the number of games consumed from the time when the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 444 becomes “0”. The value of the advantageous game number counter 444b is maintained without being cleared even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 444 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. .. That is, the advantageous game number counter 444b is used to measure the total number of games generated in a plurality of ART states.

After that, the transition process of the RT mode is executed (step S5002). In the RT mode transition process, when it is specified that the 1st RT replay winning has occurred, it is shifted to the 1st RT mode, and when it is specified that the 2nd RT replay winning has occurred, it is shifted to the 2nd RT mode, and the second When it is specified that the 1st fall replay winning has occurred, the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and when it is specified that the 2nd falling replay winning has occurred, the mode is shifted to the 1st RT mode.

After that, it is determined whether or not the special role has been won in the role lottery process (FIG. 107) in this game (step S5003). The special role is one of the index values IV = 4 to 6. When the special role is won (step S5003: YES), the lottery process for adding the number of continuous games is executed (step S5004). In the lottery process for adding the number of continuous games, it is determined whether or not to add the number of continuous games in the ART state, and if it is added, the number of additional games is determined. In the additional lottery process for the number of continuous games, the additional lottery table for the number of continuous games corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is read from the main ROM 443 and periodically (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) in the main RAM 444. The value of the updated game number lottery counter is read out, and the value of the lottery counter is collated with the additional lottery table for the number of continuous games. The additional lottery table for the number of continuous games is set so that the probability that additional games will occur in the order of IV = 4 → IV = 5 → IV = 6 will increase, and the expected number of additional games will increase in that order. ing. When the additional game number is added and won in the additional lottery process (step S5005: YES), the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is added to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 444 (step S5006). ..

When a negative determination is made in step S5003, a negative determination is made in step S5005, or the process of step S5006 is executed, the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 444 is subtracted by 1 (step S5007). Then, when the value of the ART game number counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S5008: YES), the ART state termination process is executed (step S5009). In the end processing, a command indicating that the ART state has ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 452. Upon receiving the command, the effect side MPU 452 has an upper lamp 432, a speaker 433, and an image display device 434 so that an effect corresponding to the normal gaming state is executed after the effect indicating that the ART state has ended is executed. Control each of them.

Returning to the explanation of the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 114), when the process of step S4806 is executed, the process of step S4808 is executed, or the process of step S4809 is executed, the game end command is issued to the effect side MPU452. (Step S4810). When the effect side MPU 452 receives the game end command, the effect side lamp 432 controls each of the upper lamp 432, the speaker 433, and the image display device 434 so that the effect executed in this game is terminated. After that, the game management process is executed (step S4811).

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a game management process.

In the game management process, when "1" is not set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 444 (step S5101: NO), the value of the total number of games counter 444a of the main RAM 444 is the value corresponding to the number of management trigger games. It is determined whether or not it is "3000" or more (step S5102). The number of management-triggered games is not limited to 3000 games, and may be, for example, 6000 games. In addition, the number of management opportunity games is not limited to the configuration set to less than the maximum number of games that can be consumed in one business day in the game hall, but is set to about the maximum number of games. It may be a configuration that is set to the maximum number of games or more. When the value of the total number of games counter 444a is equal to or greater than the number of management trigger games (step S5102: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 444b of the main RAM 444 to the value of the total number of games counter 444a is calculated (step S5102: YES). Step S5103). That is, the calculation is executed so that the calculation result = "value of advantageous game number counter 444b" / "value of total game number counter 444a".

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds the regulation target ratio (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the result calculated in step S5103 exceeds the regulated ratio "0.7". That is, when the total number of games in all the gaming states including the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state, and the ART state reaches 3000 games, the game is digested in the AT state after the ART state or the BRT state is started. It is determined whether or not the total number of games exceeds 2100 games, which is 70% of 3000 games.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5104, the calculation process for the number of restricted games is executed (step S5105). In the calculation process of the number of regulated games, the number of regulated games that prohibit the transition to the AT state and the ART state is calculated in order to ensure that the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is lower than the ratio of the regulated target. Specifically, the number of regulated games = "value of advantageous game counter 444b"-"value of total game counter 444a" x "ratio of regulated targets (that is," 0.7 ")) +" number of additional games (specifically) In the meantime, "100") is calculated. Then, the calculated value of the regulated game number is set in the regulated game number counter provided in the main RAM 444 (step S5106). The regulated game number counter is a counter for specifying the number of games for which the transition to the AT state and the ART state is prohibited by the main MPU 442. Further, "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 444 (step S5107). This prohibits the transition to the AT state and the ART state.

After that, when "1" is set in the ART preparation status flag of the main RAM 444 (step S5108: YES), the ART preparation status flag is cleared to "0" as various clear processes, and the ART game of the main RAM 444 is played. Clear the number counter to "0" (step S5109). As a result, when "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 444 in the ART preparation state, the ART preparation state ends without the transition to the ART state. In this case, since the AT state ends, the notification of the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R for establishing the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is not executed, and the first fall replay is not executed. The notification of the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R for avoiding the winning or the establishment of the second fall replay winning is not executed. After that, the normal return process is executed (step S5110). In the normal return process, a normal return command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 452. When the effecting side MPU 452 receives the normal return command, the effect indicating that the ART preparation state is completed and the normal game state is restored without the transition to the ART state occurs is executed, and then the normal game state is entered. Each of the upper lamp 432, the speaker 433, and the image display device 434 is controlled so that the corresponding effect is executed.

When "1" is not set in the ART preparation status flag of the main RAM 444 (step S5108: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 444 is 1 or more (step S5111). .. When the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more (step S5111: YES), that is, in the ART state, the value of the ART game number counter is cleared to "0" (step S5112). As a result, when "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 444 in the ART state, the ART state ends even if the number of continuous games in the ART state remains. In this case, since the AT state ends, the notification of the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R for establishing the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is not executed, and the first fall replay is not executed. The notification of the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R for avoiding the winning or the establishment of the second fall replay winning is not executed.

After that, the termination process of the ART state is executed (step S5113). In the end processing, a command indicating that the ART state has ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 452 as in step S5009 in the ART state processing (FIG. 116). Upon receiving the command, the effect side MPU 452 has an upper lamp 432, a speaker 433, and an image display device 434 so that an effect corresponding to the normal gaming state is executed after the effect indicating that the ART state has ended is executed. Control each of them. The effect executed in this case is executed when the process of step S5009 in the ART state process (FIG. 116) is executed, that is, when the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 444 becomes "0". It is the same as the production. As a result, when the ART state ends, when the ART state ends when "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 444 in the middle of the ART state, and the rest of the ART state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which of the cases where the ART state ends when the number of continuous games in the game becomes "0".

Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 118 (a), in the ART state, the image display device 434 has an index value of IV = 1 to 3 and an index value of IV = 9 or later in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 107). When the winning is achieved, the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, 416R is notified. In FIG. 118 (a), an image G1 showing that the middle reel 416M is stopped first, an image G2 showing that the left reel 416L is stopped next, and an image G3 showing that the right reel 416R is finally stopped are shown. Is displayed. In the situation where the image notifying the stop order of the reels 416L, 416M, and 416R is displayed in this way, the ART of the main RAM 444 is set in the upper left corner portion of the image display device 434 after the current ART state is started. A digested game number image G4 (specifically, an image of "30 games in progress") showing the number of games digested before the value of the game number counter becomes "0" is displayed. Further, a character image G5 "How long will it continue?" Is displayed at the lower part of the image display device 434.

However, the image notifying the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state this time, that is, the value set in the ART game number counter of the main RAM 444 is not displayed on the image display device 434. Further, the notification that enables the player to recognize the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state this time is not executed including the image display device 434. As a result, when the value of the total number of games counter 444a is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the number of managed games, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 444b to the value of the total number of games counter 444a exceeds the regulated ratio. In that case, even if the ART state is forcibly terminated even in the middle of the ART state, the termination of the ART state is due to the forced termination, or the number of continuous games remaining in the BRT state is "0". It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether it is due to the fact that the value has become.

Returning to the explanation of the game number management process (FIG. 117), when the process of step S5110 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S5111, or when the process of step S5113 is executed, the total number of games counter of the main RAM 444 is executed. Clear each of the value of 444a and the value of the advantageous game number counter 444b of the main RAM 444 by "0" (step S5114). On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5102 or a negative determination is made in step S5104, the process of step S5114 is not executed. As a result, the value of the total number of games counter 444a becomes the number of management-triggered games, and the total number of games counter 444a and the advantageous number of games counter 444b are used to manage the game, provided that the execution of the AT state and the ART state is restricted. The existing game history will be cleared once by "0".

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of step S5114 may be executed even when a negative determination is made in step S5104. In this case, when the value of the total number of games counter 444a is equal to or greater than the number of management-triggered games, the total number of games is set regardless of whether or not "1" is set in the advantage regulation flag of the main RAM 444. The game history managed by using the counter 444a and the advantageous game number counter 444b is temporarily cleared to "0".

When "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 444, an affirmative determination is made in step S4902 in the transition chance management process (FIG. 115). In this case, the stock privilege grant lottery process is executed (step S4912). Grant of stock benefits In the lottery process, it is determined whether or not to grant stock benefits. Specifically, in the stock privilege grant lottery process, the stock privilege grant lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is read from the main ROM 443 and periodically (for example, 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 444. The value of the stock privilege lottery counter updated in the cycle) is read out, and the value of the lottery counter is collated with the above-mentioned stock privilege grant lottery table. The lottery table for granting stock benefits is set so that the probability of winning the grant of stock benefits increases in the order of IV = 4 → IV = 5 → IV = 6. Grant of stock privilege When the grant is won in the lottery process (step S4913: YES), the value of the stock privilege counter provided in the main RAM 444 is added by 1 (step S4914).

Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 118 (b), when the value of the stock privilege counter is 1 or more, the stock privilege image G6 indicating that the stock privilege is given to the image display device 434 is displayed. Will be done. In addition, the same number of privilege number images G7 as the number of stock benefits granted is displayed. In the case of FIG. 118 (b), since the value of the stock privilege counter is “2”, two privilege number images G7 are displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the stock privilege is given, and it is possible to make the player recognize the number of the given stock privilege.

When the stock privilege is given, in step S4903 of the transition chance management process (FIG. 115), the transition lottery table corresponding to the value of the granted stock privilege is read out. In this case, the larger the value of the stock privilege, the more advantageous the transition lottery table for the player is read. Specifically, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "0" as already explained, if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 5% probability that the AT transition will be won. If the index value IV = 5 wins, there is a 10% chance of winning the AT transition, and if the index value IV = 6 wins, there is a 15% chance of winning the AT transition. ing. On the other hand, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "1", if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 15% probability that the AT transition is won and the index value IV =. If you win at 5, there is a 20% chance that you will win the AT transition, and if you win at the index value IV = 6, you will have a 25% chance of winning the AT transition. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "2", if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 25% probability that the AT transition is won and the index value IV = 5 is won. If it becomes, there is a 30% probability that the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, there is a 35% probability that the AT transition will be won. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "3", if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 35% probability that the AT transition is won and the index value IV = 5 is won. If it becomes, there is a 40% probability that the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, there is a 45% probability that the AT transition will be won. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "4", if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 45% probability that the AT transition is won and the index value IV = 5 is won. If it becomes, there is a 50% probability that the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, there is a 55% probability that the AT transition will be won. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "5", if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 55% probability that the AT transition is won and the index value IV = 5 is won. If it becomes, there is a 60% probability that the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, there is a 65% probability that the AT transition will be won. With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the stock privilege, and even in the situation where "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 444. It is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player for winning the special role in the role lottery process (FIG. 107). Since the process of clearing the stock privilege counter of the main RAM 444 to "0" is executed when the AT transition is won in the AT transition lottery process, the AT transition is performed in the AT transition lottery process until the AT transition is won. The probability of winning does not decrease.

Further, when the stock privilege is given, in step S4906 of the transition chance management process (FIG. 115), the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the value of the given stock privilege is read out. In this case, the larger the value of the stock privilege, the more advantageous the initial game number lottery table for the player is read. Specifically, as described above, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "0", the probability that 50 games will be selected is 90%, and the probability that 100 games will be selected is 90%. It is 9% and the probability that 200 games will be selected is 1%. On the other hand, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "1", the probability that 50 games are selected is 80%, and the probability that 100 games are selected is 14%. , The probability that 200 games will be selected is 6%. Further, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "2", the probability that 50 games are selected is 70%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 19%, and 200 games are selected. Has an 11% probability of being selected. Further, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "3", the probability that 50 games are selected is 60%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 24%, and 200 games are selected. Is 16% likely to be selected. Further, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "4", the probability that 50 games are selected is 50%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 29%, and 200 games are selected. Has a 21% probability of being selected. Further, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "5", the probability that 50 games are selected is 40%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 34%, and 200 games are selected. Is 26% likely to be selected. With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the stock privilege, and even in the situation where "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 444. It is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player for winning the special role in the role lottery process (FIG. 107).

Returning to the description of the game management process (FIG. 117), when "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 444 (step S5101: YES), the value of the restricted game number counter of the main RAM 444 is subtracted by 1. (Step S5115). Then, when the value of the regulated game number counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S5116: YES), the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 444 is cleared to "0" (step S5117). As a result, the state in which the execution of the AT state and the ART state is restricted is released. Incidentally, the value of the regulated game number counter is not notified, and the notification indicating that the execution of the AT state and the ART state is released from the restricted state is not executed. This makes it impossible for the player to know at what timing the release of the regulation will occur.

Next, a management process executed by the main MPU 442 to manage the game history and notify the management result will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 119. The management process is executed in step S4513 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 105).

First, the value of the total number of games counter 444a of the main RAM 444 is grasped (step S5201), and the value of the advantageous game number counter 444b of the main RAM 444 is grasped (step S5202). Then, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 444b of the main RAM 444 to the value of the total game number counter 444a is calculated (step S5203). That is, the calculation is executed so that the calculation result = "value of advantageous game number counter 444b" / "value of total game number counter 444a". Then, among the values obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100, the 100th place is displayed on the first notification display device 446, the 10th place is displayed on the second notification display device 447, and the 1st place is the 1st place. 3 The display control of the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448 without going through other control devices so as to be displayed by the notification display device 448 (step S5204). The above calculation result is notified as a percentage display. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "35", "0" is displayed on the first notification display device 446 and "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 447. , "5" is displayed on the third notification display device 448. Further, for example, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100", "1" is displayed on the first notification display device 446, "0" is displayed on the second notification display device 447, and the second notification display device 447 displays "0". 3 “0” is displayed on the notification display device 448.

By executing the management process as described above, the management result of the game history is always displayed on the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448, and the manager of the game hall is the front door 412. It is possible to grasp the management result of the game history by visually observing the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448 in the open state. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 105) is executed in a cycle shorter than the shortest period required for digesting one game, and more specifically, the shortest time required from the end of one game to the start of the next one game. It is executed in a cycle shorter than the period. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp the management result of the history of the game up to the game completed immediately before by visually observing the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448.

Next, the flowchart of FIG. 120 is shown with respect to the lighting process for executing the light emission control of the lighting devices 449a and 449b provided for the purpose of irradiating the main control device 440 with light when the front door 412 is in the open state. It will be explained with reference to it. The lighting process is executed in step S4514 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 105).

When no light is emitted from the lighting devices 449a and 449b (step S5301: NO), it is determined whether or not the front door 412 is in the open state based on the state of the signal input from the open angle sensor 412e. (Step S5302). When the front door 412 is in the open state (step S5302: YES), it is determined whether or not the opening angle of the front door 412 is within a predetermined angle range (step S5303). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening angle of the front door 412 exceeds a predetermined opening angle based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 412e. This predetermined opening angle is set as an angle of 86% with respect to the maximum opening angle of the front door 412. Specifically, since the state where the front door 412 is opened 90 ° with respect to the housing 411 is the maximum opening angle of the front door 412, the state where the front door 412 is opened about 77 ° with respect to the housing 411 is predetermined. It is set to the opening angle of. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5303, that is, when the front door 412 is not in the closed state and the opening angle of the front door 412 is 77 ° or less, a drive signal is output to the pair of lighting devices 449a and 449b (step). S5304). As a result, light is irradiated from the pair of lighting devices 449a and 449b to the irradiation range IR including the main control device 440. Then, this light irradiation state is continued until the process of step S5306 described later is executed.

When light is emitted from the lighting devices 449a and 449b (step S5301: YES), the front door 412 is closed or the front door 412 is closed based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 412e. It is determined whether the opening angle exceeds a predetermined opening angle (step S5305). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5305, the output of the drive signal to the pair of lighting devices 449a and 449b is stopped (step S5306). As a result, the pair of lighting devices 449a and 449b are put into a non-lighting state, and the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 449a and 449b toward the irradiation range IR is stopped.

Here, the relationship between the opening angle of the front door 412 and the control state of the lighting devices 449a and 449b will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b). FIG. 121A shows the state of the front door 412, and FIG. 121B shows the control state of the lighting devices 449a and 449b. Further, in the following description, FIGS. 122 (a) and 122 (b) will be referred to as appropriate. FIG. 122A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting devices 449a and 449b when the front door 412 is in the open state and the opening angle is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle, and FIG. 122B is ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting devices 449a and 449b when the opening angle of the front door 412 is the maximum opening angle exceeding a predetermined opening angle.

First, a case where the opening operation of the front door 412 is stopped when the opening angle of the front door 412 is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle will be described.

As shown in FIG. 121 (a), when the front door 412 is in the closed state, the opening operation of the front door 412 is started at the timing of t1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 449a and 449b is started at the timing of t1. After that, at the timing of t2, the opening operation of the front door 412 is stopped in a state before the opening angle of the front door 412 exceeds a predetermined opening angle. In this state, as shown in FIG. 122A, light is emitted from the pair of lighting devices 449a and 449b toward the main control device 440. As a result, the main control device 440 is brightly illuminated even when the front door 412 is slightly opened, so that the manager of the game hall can use the board box 445 of the main control device 440 and the first to third notifications. It is possible to visually confirm the display contents of the display devices 446 to 448. In this case, since it is not necessary to open the front door 412 to the end during the confirmation work, the confirmation work can be facilitated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), the closing operation of the front door 412 is started at the timing of t3, and the front door 412 is closed at the timing of t4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 449a and 449b is stopped at the timing of t4.

Next, a case where the opening operation of the front door 412 is performed until the opening angle of the front door 412 reaches the maximum opening angle will be described.

As shown in FIG. 121 (a), when the front door 412 is in the closed state, the opening operation of the front door 412 is started at the timing of t5. In this case, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 449a and 449b is started at the timing of t5. After that, at the timing of t6, the opening angle of the front door 412 exceeds a predetermined opening angle as shown in FIG. 121 (a). As a result, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 449a and 449b is stopped at the timing of t6.

After that, the opening operation of the front door 412 is stopped in a state where the opening angle of the front door 412 reaches the maximum opening angle at the timing of t7. In this state, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), the pair of lighting devices 449a and 449b do not irradiate the main control device 440 with light. When the opening angle of the front door 412 exceeds the predetermined opening angle, such as when the opening angle reaches the maximum opening angle, the inside of the housing 411 is illuminated by the light or sunlight of the lighting inside the game hall. .. In this case, if the main control device 440 is illuminated by the lighting devices 449a and 449b, there is a concern that the visibility of the main control device 440 and the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448 will deteriorate. Will be done. On the other hand, when the opening angle of the front door 412 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 449a and 449b is stopped, which causes such an inconvenience. It is possible to avoid it.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), the closing operation of the front door 412 is started at the timing of t8, and the opening angle of the front door 412 becomes equal to or less than the predetermined opening angle at the timing of t9. In this case, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 449a and 449b is started at the timing of t9. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), the front door 412 is closed at the timing of t10. In this case, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 449a and 449b is stopped at the timing of t10.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The total number of games digested regardless of the game state is measured by the total number of games counter 444a of the main RAM 444, and the number of games digested in the AT state after the ART state or the BRT state is started is the main. It is cumulatively measured by the advantageous game number counter 444b of the side RAM 444. Then, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated, and when the calculated ratio is the ratio to be regulated, the progress of the game is restricted. This makes it possible to restrict the progress of the game according to the mode in which the ART state is generated, and if the mode in which the ART state is generated does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the slot machine 410, it is possible to use it. It will be possible to deal with it.

When the progress of the game is restricted according to the calculation result of the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the progress of the game is restricted so that the ratio deviates from the regulated ratio. As a result, even if the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is the ratio subject to regulation, it is possible to make the ratio within the range assumed at the design stage of the slot machine 410. ..

When the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is the ratio to be regulated, the ART state is terminated even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 444 is not "0". As a result, when the above ratio becomes the regulated ratio, it is possible to forcibly terminate the ART state, and the mode of occurrence of the ART state does not match the mode assumed at the design stage of the slot machine 410. In such a case, it is possible to impose restrictions on the execution mode of the gaming state.

The total number of games measured by the total number of games counter 444a is greater than or equal to the number of games that can be initially set when the ART state is newly started, which is greater than the number of continuous games in the ART state. In such a situation, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated, and when the calculated ratio is the ratio to be regulated, the ART state is forcibly terminated. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the forced termination of the ART state occurs.

In the ART state, the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state is not notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly terminated because the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is the ratio subject to regulation.

When the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becomes the ratio to be regulated, the transition to the ART state is regulated. As a result, it is possible to forcibly prevent the transition to the ART state according to the mode in which the ART state is generated, and the mode in which the ART state is generated does not seem to match the mode assumed in the design stage of the slot machine 410. In such a case, it is possible to restrict the execution mode of the gaming state.

The period during which the transition to the ART state is restricted varies depending on the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games. This makes it possible to prevent the limit of transition to the ART state from being set too small or too large regardless of the above ratio.

When the special role is won in the role lottery process (Fig. 107) in a situation where the transition to the ART state is prevented because the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is the ratio subject to regulation. , The process for deciding whether or not to shift to the ART state is not executed, but the stock privilege is given as an alternative privilege. As a result, the player does not think that it was useless when the special role was won in the role lottery process (Fig. 107) in the situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented. It becomes possible to do.

The more stock benefits granted, the better for the player. This makes it possible to maintain the player's expectation of winning a special role in the role lottery process (Fig. 107) even in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented. Become.

If a stock benefit is granted, the corresponding notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to continue the game from being lost even in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented.

When the stock privilege is given, the transition to the ART state is likely to occur after the state in which the transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked is released. This makes it possible to associate the granting of stock benefits with the transition to the ART state. Therefore, even if a special role is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 107) in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented, the player is notified of the transition to the ART state. It will be possible to expect.

By providing the lighting devices 449a and 449b for illuminating the main control device 440, it becomes easy to perform the confirmation work of the main control device 440 performed by opening the front door 412. In this case, when the front door 412 is closed, the lighting devices 449a and 449b are in a non-lighting state. This makes it possible to prevent the lighting devices 449a and 449b from being in a meaningless lighting state in a situation where the main control device 440 is not confirmed. Further, when the front door 412 is opened, the lighting devices 449a and 449b are naturally in the lighting state. This makes it easier to check the main control device 440 because it is not necessary to separately perform an operation for setting the lighting devices 449a and 449b to the lighting state.

The lighting devices 449a and 449b are provided in the housing 411 in which the main control device 440 is provided. This facilitates lighting of the main control device 440 by the lighting devices 449a and 449b in response to the opening operation of the front door 412.

Regardless of which open position the front door 412 is arranged, the lighting devices 449a and 449b are not in the illuminated state, but the lighting devices 449a and 449b are selectively illuminated in some open positions. It becomes a state. As a result, if the lighting devices 449a and 449b are set to the lighting state and the lighting devices 449a and 449b are set to the lighting state only in a favorable situation when checking the main control device 440, it is difficult to check the main control device 440. The lighting devices 449a and 449b can be put into a non-lighting state.

When the front door 412 is present in the maximum open position, the lighting devices 449a and 449b are in the non-lighting state. As a result, the lighting devices 449a and 449b are in a non-lighting state when the main control device 440 is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the lighting of the game hall. Therefore, the main control device 440 is instead lit by the lighting by the lighting devices 449a and 449b. It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as difficulty in confirming.

<Another form of the eighteenth embodiment>
-The total number of games digested regardless of which game state is used and the total number of advantageous games digested in the ART state are stored as history information, and the number of advantageous games with respect to the total number of games is stored. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the number of winnings of the predetermined winning combination to be the target of the lottery and the total number of games are stored as history information in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 107). It may be configured to calculate the winning probability of the predetermined combination. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as the target predetermined combination, and the number of winnings is individually stored as history information for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination, and the first The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. In addition, the number of winnings may be individually stored as history information for each of all the winning combinations, and the winning probability may be calculated for each of the winning combinations. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the winning probability of the role to be managed.

Further, the total number of game media granted and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the number of game media granted per unit game may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the number of game media granted per unit game number. In addition, the combination of the total number of game media granted and the total number of games is individually stored as history information for each of the BB state, ART state, and normal game state, and the number of game media granted per unit game number is stored. It may be configured to calculate individually for each of the BB state, the ART state and the normal game state.

Further, the number of transitions to the BB state and the total number of games digested in the gaming state other than the BB state may be stored as history information, and the transition probability to the BB state may be calculated. Further, the number of transitions to the ART state and the total number of games digested in the gaming state other than the ART state may be stored as history information, and the transition probability to the ART state may be calculated. In addition, the total number of transitions to the BB state and the ART state and the total number of games digested in the game state other than the BB state and the ART state are stored as history information, and the transition probability to the BB state and the ART state is stored. It may be configured to calculate.

The display of each determination result in the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448 may be configured to start when the check result display period is reached and end when the check result display period ends. .. Further, when it is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the front door 412 that the front door 412 is opened with respect to the housing 411, each determination immediately before is made by the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448. The display of the result is started, and the first to third notification display devices are detected when the front door 412 is closed with respect to the housing 411 by the sensor that detects the opening of the front door 412. The display of each determination result in 446 to 448 may be terminated. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which the display is performed on the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448.

-Although the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state is not notified, the number of continuous games may be notified. In this case, if the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the reason for the forced termination may be notified by the image display device 434. .. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being confused by the fact that the ART state is forcibly terminated even though the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state is not "0". Will be.

Further, if the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state is larger than the number of games in which the ART state is forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the ART state is forced. The number of remaining games until the game is terminated may be notified as the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state. In this case, even if the ART state is forcibly terminated, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, the ART state is terminated until the number of games for which the ART status is forcibly terminated due to the relationship between the number of continuous games remaining in the ART status or the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games reaches 10. The number of remaining games up to is not notified, and when the number of any of these games reaches 10, the number of remaining games until the end of the ART state may be notified. In this case, it is possible to make the player recognize that the ART state is 10 games or less remaining, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly terminated. It will be possible.

-If the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state is greater than or equal to the number of games for which the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state is continued. Even if an opportunity to increase the number of games occurs, the addition may not occur.

-If the ART state is forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the next ART state is forcibly terminated in relation to the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state at the time when the forced termination occurs. It may be configured such that the advantage of is changed. For example, as the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state at the time of the forced termination is large, the number of initial continuous games may be large or likely to increase in the next ART state, and the number of continuous games in the next ART state may be large. The configuration may be such that addition is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the forced termination of the ART state when the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state is large, according to the remaining number of continuous games.

The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration performed by the first to third notification display devices 446 to 448, and for example, the credit display unit 435 and the grant number display unit 436 are used. It may be configured to be performed. As a result, the credit display unit 435 and the grant number display unit 436 can be used in combination as the display unit for notifying the calculation result. Further, in the configuration, when a plurality of types of events to be notified exist, the events of each type to be notified may be sequentially switched and displayed as in the 14th embodiment. When the display is sequentially switched in this way, for example, the type of the event to be notified is displayed on the credit display unit 435, and the calculation result or the content of the calculation result for the event to be notified is displayed on the grant number display unit 436. The information corresponding to the above may be displayed. As a result, even when a plurality of types of events to be notified exist, it is possible to notify the events of the plurality of types of notification targets by using a small number of display units.

-The counter may be provided with a counter for measuring the game history up to the number of management-triggered games (specifically, 3000 games) and a counter for measuring the game history beyond the number of management-triggered games. In this case, the former counter is used to perform a calculation using the game history up to the number of management-triggered games, and the control corresponding to the calculation result is performed. Then, when the operation is performed, the former counter clears "0". On the other hand, the latter counter is configured to cumulatively store the game history without clearing "0" even if the above calculation is performed, and perform the calculation using the cumulative game history. As a result, it is possible to manage the game history in a range exceeding the number of management-triggered games while enabling execution of control corresponding to the calculation result each time the number of management-triggered games is reached.

-The target forcibly terminated in relation to the management result of the game history is not limited to an advantageous game state such as an ART state, and may be a disadvantageous game state.

Even when the front door 412 is in the open state, an operation unit operated to forcibly put the lighting devices 449a and 449b into the non-lighting state may be provided. In this case, when the lighting by the lighting devices 449a and 449b is unnecessary, the lighting devices 449a and 449b can be put into a non-lighting state. Further, the operation unit may be provided at a position where it can be operated even when the front door 412 is closed, and when the front door 412 is closed, it cannot be operated and the front door 412 is opened. It may be configured to be provided at a position where it can be operated.

When the front door 412 is in the open state, the lighting devices 449a and 449b are always in the lighting state, and when the front door 412 is in the closed state, the lighting devices 449a and 449b are always in the non-lighting state. It may be configured.

-Even if the front door 412 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the lighting devices 449a and 449b are maintained in the non-lighting state until the predetermined opening angle is reached, and then the lighting device is maintained at the predetermined opening angle or more for lighting. The devices 449a and 449b may be configured to be in the illuminated state. Further, in addition to the configuration, when the front door 412 is in the maximum open position as in the above embodiment, the lighting devices 449a and 449b may be in a non-illuminated state.

The intensity of the light emitted from the lighting devices 449a and 449b may be changed according to the opening angle of the front door 412. For example, when the front door 412 is closed, the lighting devices 449a and 449b are in a non-lighting state or a lighting state with a relatively weak intensity, the front door 412 is in an open state, and the opening angle of the front door 412 is a predetermined opening. If the angle is less than or equal to the angle, the lighting state may be set to a relatively strong intensity, and if the opening angle of the front door 412 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, the lighting state may be set to a relatively weak intensity.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) In the second embodiment, the design pieces 219 and 221 are rotated so that the switching window portions 213 and 214 return to the closed state by using the weight 222. It may be applied to the first design piece 51, 52 in the embodiment of 1. Specifically, the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a of the first design pieces 51 and 52 are provided with a region protruding outside the first rotation shaft 85, and the plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a are provided in the region. There is a weight fixing part that stands upright from the back of the. A recessed portion formed from the back surface to the front halfway position is formed in the weight fixing portion, and a metal plate-shaped weight is fixed to the recessed portion by an adhesive. The plate-shaped weight is fixed to the weight fixing portion at an angle at which the thickness direction of the plate-shaped weight is orthogonal to the vertical direction. As a result, the dimension of the weight fixing portion protruding outward from the first rotation shaft 85 is suppressed. Further, by fixing a metal plate-shaped weight having a specific gravity larger than that of the resin, the protrusion dimension of the weight fixing portion from the first rotation shaft 85 to the outside is suppressed. With these configurations, the first design pieces 51 and 52 whose contact state with the game ball B1 has been eliminated can be independently returned to the closed state while suppressing the outward protrusion dimension of the first design pieces 51 and 52. It can be possible.

(2) In the first embodiment or the like, all of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are the targets for storing history information (or ball entry history). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is history information. It may be a configuration that is a storage target of. For example, the configuration may be such that only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating port 34 are the storage targets of the history information, and only the general winning opening 31 is the storage target of the history information. Good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball B1 in a predetermined period for the ball entry portion for which the history information is stored.

(3) In the first embodiment or the like, the first winning opening detection sensor 122a, the second winning opening detection sensor 123a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 124a are associated with each other to correspond to the entry result of the game ball B1. Although the configuration is such that the signal paths 198a to 198c for transmitting the information to be transmitted are set, the information is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the ball entry result for the same type of ball entry part is the same type. Even if there are a plurality of ball entry portions and a plurality of ball entry detection sensors are present in accordance with the plurality of ball entry portions, the configuration may be such that one type of information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146.

(4) In the first embodiment or the like, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146 and the buffers 202a to 202o is transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in advance in the management IC 146. In this case, it is not necessary to execute the process for causing the management IC 146 to recognize the correspondence information, so that the processing load of the main CPU 143 can be reduced.

(5) In the first embodiment or the like, transmission of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146 and the buffers 202a to 202o from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146. However, the configuration is such that the operation power is supplied to the main CPU 143 at the start of supply, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a signal requesting transmission of the relational information is received, the correspondence relational information may be transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146. In this case, the correspondence-related memory 196 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence-related information provided from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146 after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main CPU 143. Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped, the memory is stored and held in the corresponding memory 196. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

(6) In the first embodiment or the like, transmission of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146 and the buffers 202a to 202o from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146. However, the configuration is such that the signal paths 198a to 198g for transmitting the detection result information of each ball entry detection sensor 122a to 128a are used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the correspondence-related information is mainly used. A configuration may be provided in which a dedicated signal path for transmission from the side CPU 143 to the management IC 146 is provided. As a result, the management IC 146 can grasp which type of information is being received from the main CPU 143 by the type of the buffers 202a to 202o that receive the information.

(7) In the first embodiment or the like, information is transmitted from the main CPU 143 to the management IC 146, while information is not transmitted from the management IC 146 to the main CPU 143, but the configuration is limited to this. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 146 to the main CPU 143. For example, various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 192 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main side CPU 143. In this case, the main CPU 143 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means as in the twelfth embodiment in order to perform notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters. By transmitting a command corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the voice emission control device 161 by the main CPU 143, the display light emission unit 133, the speaker unit 134, and the symbol display device 41 are used to change the contents of the various parameters. It may be configured so that the corresponding notification is executed.

(8) When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 143 or the management side CPU 192 based on the history information stored in the history memory 197, and the calculation is performed. The contents of various parameters may be notified by using the display light emitting unit 133, the speaker unit 134, the symbol display device 41, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entry mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA on the immediately preceding business day is normal at the start of business of the game hall.

(9) If various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 197 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start the game until the prohibition release operation is performed. May be. As a configuration for preventing the start of the game, for example, the launch of the game ball B1 may be prohibited, or the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 129a may be disabled, and the first operation may be performed. Even if a prize is won in the opening 33 or the second operating port 34, the winning / failing determination process may not be executed. Further, the prohibition release operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again with the RAM erasing switch turned on, and can be operated when the game machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. It may be the operation of the operation means. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the ball entering mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is an abnormal mode.

(10) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a is stored in the history memory 197, the calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed by either the main CPU 143 or the management side CPU 192. May not be executed. In this case, the history information is read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 182, and the operator of the reading operation executes operations of various parameters using the read history information. Often, the reading device may be configured to execute operations of various parameters using the read history information. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 143 and the management CPU 192.

(11) The management IC 146 may not be provided, and the main CPU 143 may have a function of executing storage processing of history information and a function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments, and the payout side may be provided. The configuration may be provided by the CPU 172, or may be the configuration provided by the voice emission control device 161. When the payout side CPU 172 or the voice emission control device 161 is provided with these functions, information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a is transmitted from the main side CPU 143 to the control entity having the functions. It will be.

(12) The management IC 146 is provided with a power supply separate from the main CPU 143, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 143 is stopped, the management IC 146 calculates various parameters using the history information. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that history information or information of various parameters can be output. As a result, the history information and various parameters can be read by the reading device even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 143 is stopped.

(13) The reading terminal 182 used for reading the program from the main ROM 144 is also used as a terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the reading device, but the configuration is limited to this. The terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 182 for reading the program from the main ROM 144. In this case, the terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters may be provided on the MPU 142, or may be provided at a position different from the MPU 142 on the main control board 141.

(14) The correspondence-related memory 196, the history memory 197, and the calculation result memory 207 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the configuration provided as the non-volatile storage means such as the flash memory, for example, these memories. One of 196, 197, and 207 is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and retain information, and by supplying backup power to the memory, operating power to the main CPU 143 is provided. The information may be stored and retained even if the supply of the device is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for the memory, or the backup power may be supplied to the memory from the power supply / emission control device 158 that supplies the backup power to the main RAM 145. May be good.

(15) The game ball B1 is not limited to the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the history information is not stored and retained by any of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a. The configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated and updated each time when is newly detected. In this case, although the calculation frequency of various parameters is high, it is possible to extract various parameters at arbitrary timings.

(16) The management IC 146 is not limited to a configuration in which the management side CPU 192 is provided as a general-purpose CPU, and history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing are executed based on the programs and data stored in the management side ROM 193. A hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 146. Specifically, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 143 indicating that the game ball B1 is detected by any of the detection sensors 122a to 128a. In this case, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer receiving the signal is stored in the history memory 197 from the correspondence memory 196, and the information of the RTC 195 at that time is stored in the history memory 197. To. Further, for example, in the tenth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 143 indicating that the game ball B1 has been detected by any of the detection sensors 122a to 128a, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by 1. Further, when the calculation trigger in the first embodiment or the like occurs, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters by using the history information at that time. Further, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 182 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters as calculation results and externally outputs history information.

(17) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the detection result information of the ball entry detection sensors 122a to 128a is stored as history information, the configuration in which the transition to the open / close execution mode is stored as history information is also possible. Often, the configuration may be such that the transition timing and the end timing to the open / close execution mode are stored as history information, or the transition to the high frequency support mode may be stored as history information, and a predetermined abnormality may be obtained. It may be configured that the occurrence of is stored as history information. Further, the configuration may be such that the transition probability to the open / close execution mode is calculated by using the history information as described above, or the transition probability to the high frequency support mode may be calculated. The configuration may be such that the frequency of occurrence is calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device.

(18) The main CPU 143 and the management IC 146 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate boards, or may be provided as separate control devices.

(19) In the first embodiment or the like, the number of balls entered into the game ball B1 into the out opening 24a is measured, while the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating opening 33 are measured. The history information including the RTC information may be stored with respect to the payout of the prize ball of the game ball B1 such as the second operating port 34 and the entry into the privilege trigger entry ball portion that triggers the winning / failing determination process. This makes it possible to extract the entry history of the game ball B1 into the privilege-triggered ball section, and calculate the frequency of entry of the game ball B1 into each privilege-triggered ball section with respect to the total number of discharged game balls B1. Is possible.

(20) The configuration may include items other than those in each of the above embodiments as targets to be left as history information. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower plate 136a is full, the timing when the full tank is started, and the timing when the full tank is released may be stored as history information, and the tank 155 may be stored. At least one of the timing when the ball-free state is started, the timing when the ball-free state is released, and the timing when the ball-free state is released may be stored as history information, and the payout device 156 is in an abnormal state. That is, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 156 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 156 is released may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(21) In the first embodiment or the like, it is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 146 that the 16th buffer 202p of the input port 201 on the management side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the 16th buffer 202p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 146 by transmitting the type identification command from the main CPU 143. It may be configured. In this case, it is not necessary to set in advance the correspondence between the buffers 202a to 202p and the types of signals input to the buffers 202a to 202p in the management IC 146.

(22) The number of balls entered into the predetermined ball entry portion generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is stored as history information, and the ball entry grasped by using the history information is stored. The number may be output to the reading device externally. As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B1 that have entered the predetermined entry portion in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. .. Further, the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entering portion generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of balls entered is an abnormal number. In that case, the abnormality notification may be executed. This makes it possible to deal with fraudulent acts in which the front door frame 14 is illegally opened to allow the game ball B1 to enter a predetermined ball entry portion.

(23) The management IC 146 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 143 when it is operating normally. In this case, it is possible for the main CPU 143 to monitor whether or not the management IC 146 is operating normally.

(24) In the first embodiment or the like, the order in which the management side CPU 192 executes the confirmation processing of the first to fifteenth buffers 202a to 202o may be the reverse of that in the first embodiment or the like. In this case, the order in which the output state change processing of each signal is executed by the main CPU 143 and the order in which the confirmation processing of the buffers 202a to 202o is executed by the management side CPU 192 are the same.

(25) When the information stored in the main ROM 144 is output to the outside by using the reading terminal 182, one of the program and the data may be selectively output to the outside, and a predetermined program may be used. It may be configured so that only can be output to the outside. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. As a configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside, the main CPU 143 selects information to be externally output from the selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 182, and outputs the selected information to the outside. Can be considered.

(26) The other information of the target to be externally output through the reading terminal 182 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 144 is not limited to the history information and various parameters, for example, when an abnormality occurs. May be configured to store the history information of the abnormality occurrence and output the stored history information to the outside through the reading terminal 182.

(27) Detection sensors 122a to 128a are individually provided for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 122a to 128a are provided. The total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA is grasped by totaling the number of game balls B1 detected, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA. A passage area through which all the game balls B1 pass one by one may be provided, and an discharge detection sensor for detecting the game ball B1 passing through the passage area may be provided. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. Further, in the same configuration as in each of the above embodiments, detection for detecting the number of balls entered in each of the game balls B1 of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. By providing the sensors 122a to 127a, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls B1 that have entered each entry portion to the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA.

(28) Display control based on the command transmitted from the main control device 140 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 162 is controlled by the voice emission control device 161 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 140. The device 162 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 161. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 161 and the display control device 162 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 140, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 140. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 140 to the voice emission control device 161 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 161 to the display control device 162 are also arbitrary.

(29) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball B1 enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated when the ball B1 is inserted and a big hit, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable / closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls B1 stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel by the rotation of the reel.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, for example, the result of a lottery process of a winning combination executed when one game is started based on the operation of a start lever is historical information. It may be configured to calculate the actual winning probability of each role by using the history information, and when a transition to a special gaming state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history is stored. The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special gaming state, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special gaming state to the total number of digested games may be calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device, or the gaming machine itself may be notified of the calculation results of the various parameters.

(30) The characteristic configurations of the first to eighteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the seventh embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the thirteenth embodiment may be combined, and the third embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fifth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the ninth embodiment may be combined. Further, the characteristic configuration of the 17th embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the 18th embodiment may be combined. Further, the configuration of another embodiment may be applied in any combination to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to 17th embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A predetermined area (passage portion 46a to 50a, flow-down space 224) into which a game ball (game ball B1) flowing down the game area (game area PA) can flow in, and
Decorative means for producing decoration (plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a, switching plate portions 219f and 221f) and
A state changing means (first design piece 51) capable of changing the state of decoration in the decorative means depending on whether the game ball is present in the predetermined area and the game ball is not present in the predetermined area. , 52, upper design piece 219, lower design piece 221),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, by providing a decorative means that changes the state of decoration according to the position of the game ball, it is possible to enhance the appearance decorativeness and to attract the attention of the player around the decorative means. It will be possible.

Feature A2. The state changing means has receiving portions (rotating standing wall portions 51d, 52d, rod-shaped contact portions 51e, 52e, rear contact portions 51f, 52f, guide plate portions 219e, 221e) that receive external force from the gaming ball that has flowed into the predetermined region. ), The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that the state of decoration in the decorative means is changed by receiving the external force at the receiving portion.

According to the feature A2, it is possible to change the state of decoration in the decorative means in an manner according to the position of the game ball while not providing the means for detecting the game ball. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration of the state changing means and reduce the space occupied by the state changing means in the gaming area.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the state changing means is provided so that the decorative means is displaced by an external force received by the receiving portion.

According to the feature A3, by using the external force of the game ball as the driving force of the decorative means, the decorative means can be displaced while the means for electrically driving the decorative means is not provided. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration of the state changing means.

Feature A4. The predetermined area has a first predetermined area (a region guided by the rear guide portions 57 and 72 and a region guided by the upper guide plate portion 219e) and a second predetermined region (rear) due to a change in the passage direction on the way. It has passage portions 49a and 50a, and an area guided by the lower guide plate portion 221e).
The feature A2 or A3 is characterized in that the receiving portion is provided so as to be able to receive an external force from a gaming ball flowing down the predetermined region in both the first predetermined region and the second predetermined region. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature A4, the game ball is decelerated by changing the traveling direction to secure a long time for the game ball to be present in the predetermined area, and the game ball is present in the first predetermined area. , And in both situations where the game ball is present in the second predetermined area, the decoration of the decorative means can be changed by the game ball. This makes it possible to keep the state in which the decoration is changed by the game ball for a long time and make the state easily visible to the player.

Feature A5. The receiving portion is provided so as to be able to continuously receive an external force from a gaming ball flowing down the predetermined region from at least an intermediate position of the first predetermined region to at least an intermediate position of the second predetermined region. The gaming machine according to feature A4, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature A5, in the process of shifting from the situation where the game ball exists in the first predetermined area to the situation where the game ball exists in the second predetermined area, the decoration of the decorative means is changed by the game ball. It is possible to avoid interruptions. This makes it possible to continuously continue the state in which the decoration is changed by the game ball for a long time.

Feature A6. It is equipped with another decorative means (second design piece 53, 54) that causes decoration.
The state changing means receives the weight of the other decorative means when the game ball does not exist in the predetermined area from the situation where the game ball exists in the predetermined area. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, which is characterized by returning to an initial position.

According to the feature A6, a means for enhancing the decorativeness and a means for assisting the return to the initial position by allowing another decorative means to have both a role of enhancing the decorativeness and a role of assisting the return of the decorative means to the initial position. The configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which and is provided separately. Further, as the shape and dimensions of the decorative means, it is possible to adopt a shape and dimensions in which the decorative means cannot return to the initial position by itself. This can increase the degree of freedom in design regarding the decorative means.

Feature A7. The state changing means is provided so that the decorative means is displaced by an external force received by the receiving portion.
The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the other decorative means is provided so as to follow the displacement when the decorative means is displaced by an external force received by the receiving portion.

According to the feature A7, by displacing the other decorative means so as to follow the decorative means, the state of decoration by the decorative means and the different decorative means can be significantly changed at the same time. This makes it possible to attract the player's attention to the area around the decorative means and the area around another decorative means.

Feature A8. The decorative means has a first position (positions of the first design pieces 51, 52 in the closed state, design pieces 219,221 in the closed state) that make the predetermined area invisible or relatively difficult to see. (Position) and a second position (positions of the first design pieces 51, 52 in the open state, design pieces 219,221 in the open state) that make the predetermined area visible or relatively easy to see the predetermined area. It is provided so that it can be displaced at each of the positions).
The state changing means causes the decorative means to be arranged at the first position when the game ball does not exist in the predetermined area, and the decorative means when the game ball exists in the predetermined area. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that the machine is arranged at the second position.

According to the feature A8, the game ball existing in the predetermined area becomes invisible and the player avoids losing sight of the game ball, and at the timing when the game ball does not exist in the predetermined area, the front of the predetermined area is also decorated. It becomes possible to display the decoration of the means.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the decorative means is provided so that at least a part thereof is hidden behind another decorative means (design member 105) when the decorative means is arranged at the second position. ..

According to the feature A9, it is possible to prevent other decorative means from hiding behind the decorative means arranged at the second position. This makes it possible to provide other decorative means in front of at least a part of the decorative means in the second position, and provide other decorative means around the decorative means in the first position to enhance the appearance decorativeness. Can be done.

Feature A10. The predetermined region includes a first predetermined region (a region extending from the upper passage portion 46a to the upper rear passage portion 49a, a region above the upper guide plate portion 219e in the flow space 224) and a second predetermined region (central passage portion 47a). A region extending from the lower rear passage portion 50a and a region lower than the upper guide plate portion 219e).
The decorative means are a first decorative means (plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a in the upper design pieces 51 and 52, an upper switching plate portion 219f) and a second decorative means (plate-shaped in the lower design pieces 51 and 52). The front portions 51a and 52a and the lower switching plate portion 221f) are provided.
The state changing means changes the state of decoration in the first decorative means depending on whether the game ball is present in the first predetermined area and the game ball is not present in the first predetermined area. It is possible to change the state of decoration in the second decorative means depending on the situation where the game ball is present in the second predetermined area and the situation where the game ball is not present in the second predetermined area. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A9, which is characterized by being capable of.

According to the feature A10, the decoration state of the first decorative means and the second decorative means can be changed in a manner corresponding to the position of the game ball in the predetermined area. This makes it possible for the player to grasp a rough position within a predetermined area of the game ball even when the player is not gazing at the decorative means.

Feature A11. The first decorative means is provided so as to be displaceable from the first predetermined position (the position of the upper switching plate portion 219f in the closed state).
The second decorative means is provided so as to be displaceable from the second predetermined position (the position of the lower switching plate portion 221f in the closed state).
When the first decorative means is displaced from the first predetermined position by the game ball flowing into the first predetermined region, the state changing means also displaces the second decorative means from the second predetermined position. The gaming machine according to the feature A10.

According to the feature A11, by moving the second decorative means in conjunction with the first decorative means, the decorative state of the decorative means can be greatly changed at one time. This allows the player's attention to be drawn around the decorative means.

Feature A12. The state changing means has a receiving portion (upper guide plate portion 219e) that receives an external force due to a game ball that has flowed into the first predetermined region, and receives the external force at the receiving portion to provide the first decorative means. Displaced from the first predetermined position
The game according to feature A11, wherein the second decorative means is displaced from the second predetermined position by applying an external force due to the displacement of the first decorative means to the second decorative means. Machine.

According to the feature A12, two decorative means (first decorative means and second decorative means) existing at different positions can be displaced at the same time by an external force applied from one game ball to one receiving portion. can. This makes it possible to attract the attention of the player by making the change of state of the decoration in the decoration means complicated. Further, by displacing the first decorative means and the second decorative means by an external force applied from the game ball, the state changing means is not equipped with an electrical configuration for displacing the first decorative means and the second decorative means. It is possible to simplify the configuration.

Feature A13. In the state changing means, when the game ball does not exist in the first predetermined area, but the game ball exists in the second predetermined area, the first decorative means is arranged at the first predetermined position. The gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, wherein the second decorative means is arranged at a position displaced from the second predetermined position while being in the same state.

According to the feature A13, in the situation where the game ball exists in the first predetermined area, the game ball is in a state where both the first decorative means and the second decorative means are arranged at the displaced positions. Is not present in the first predetermined region and is present in the second predetermined region, it is possible that only the second decorative means is arranged at the displaced position. This makes it possible to attract the attention of the player by making the change of state of the decoration in the decoration means complicated. The state of decoration of the decorative means differs between the situation where the game ball exists in the first predetermined area and the situation where the game ball does not exist in the first predetermined area and exists in the second predetermined area. Therefore, the player can grasp the rough position of the game ball in the predetermined area even when the decorative means is not watched.

Feature A14. The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein a gaming ball that has passed through the first predetermined region flows into the second predetermined region.

According to the feature A14, after both the first decorative means and the second decorative means are arranged in the displaced position, only the second decorative means is arranged in the displaced position. As a result, it is possible to first drastically change the state of decoration of the decorative means to attract the attention of the player, and then focus the attention on the periphery of the second decorative means. Further, by changing the decorative state of the decorative means step by step, it becomes possible to attract the attention of the player by making the change of the decorative state complicated.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features A1 to A14, the features A1 to A14, the features B1 to B5, the features C1 to C41, the features D1 to D20, the features E1 to E19, the features F1 to F7, the features G1 to G4, and the features H1 to H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H10, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J17, features K1 to K5, features L1 to L15, and features M1 to M7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature A group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a game board that defines a game area in which a game ball flows down, and the game board is provided with nails and a nail to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area. Various members such as a wind turbine are arranged. Further, the game board is provided with an opening for paying out the game ball, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. Further, there is known a gaming machine in which a design member having a design surface is arranged on the gaming board for the purpose of improving the appearance decoration of the gaming board.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to appropriately dispose the design member on the gaming board, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. The first displacement means (first design pieces 51, 52, upper design piece 219) provided so as to be displaceable from the first predetermined position, and
A second displacement means (second design piece 53, 54, lower design piece 221) provided so as to be displaceable from the second predetermined position, and
When the first displacement means is displaced from the first predetermined position by applying an external force to the first displacement means, the external force is applied from the first displacement means to the second displacement means. Transmission means (interlocking protrusions 97, 98, 252) that displace the second displacement means from the second predetermined position, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, it is possible to displace both the first displacement means and the second displacement means existing at different positions while reducing the place where external force needs to be applied to one place (first displacement means). Become.

Feature B2. When the state in which an external force is applied to the first displacement means is released, the first displacement means receives a force that displaces the second displacement means in a direction of returning to the second predetermined position. 1 The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the displacement means returns to the first predetermined position.

According to the feature B2, the shape and dimensions of the first displacement means are returned to the first predetermined position by themselves by configuring the first displacement means to return to the first predetermined position with the assistance of the second displacement means. It is also possible to adopt shapes and dimensions that cannot be achieved. This increases the degree of freedom in designing the first displacement means.

Feature B3. In the transmission means, when an external force is not applied to the first displacement means, but an external force is applied to the second displacement means, the first displacement means is arranged at the first predetermined position. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the second displacement means is arranged at a position displaced from the second predetermined position as it is.

According to the feature B3, in a configuration in which the second displacement means can be arranged at a position displaced from the second predetermined position in conjunction with the first displacement means, the second displacement means can be displaced from the second predetermined position by itself. It can be placed in the designated position. As a result, in a state where an external force is applied to the first displacement means and a state where an external force is not applied to the first displacement means and an external force is applied to the second displacement means, the first displacement means can be used. It is possible to make different combinations of the existing position and the existing position of the second displacement means. The player can grasp the position where the external force is applied from the combination.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein when an external force is applied to the first displacement means, the external force is subsequently applied to the second displacement means.

According to the feature B4, the target to which the external force is applied is changed stepwise in the order of the first displacement means and the second displacement means, so that the position where the first displacement means exists and the second displacement means exist. It is possible to change the combination with the position in stages. The player can grasp the current stage from the combination in the process of changing the target to which the external force is applied.

Feature B5. Both the first displacement means and the second displacement means have decorative surfaces (front surfaces of plate-shaped front portions 51a and 52a, front surfaces of main body portions 53a and 54a, and front surfaces of switching plate portions 219f and 221f). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4.

According to the feature B5, while reducing the place where external force needs to be applied to one place (first displacement means), the decoration of two decorative surfaces existing at different positions (decoration of the first displacement means existing at the first predetermined position). The surface and the decorative surface of the second displacement means existing at the second predetermined position different from the first predetermined position) can be simultaneously displaced to attract the attention of the player.

For the configurations of features B1 to B5, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B5, features C1 to C41, features D1 to D20, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G4, and features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H10, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J17, features K1 to K5, features L1 to L15, and features M1 to M7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature B group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a game board that defines a game area in which a game ball flows down, and the game board is provided with nails and a nail to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area. Various members such as a wind turbine are arranged. Further, the game board is provided with an opening for paying out the game ball, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. Further, there is known a gaming machine provided with a displacement member capable of changing the appearance of the gaming board to attract the attention of the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to appropriately dispose the displacement member on the gaming board, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the specific storage execution means (main side CPU 143) executes the ball entry detection process so that the corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means (main side RAM 145). Function) and
A privilege to execute a process for giving a privilege to a player based on the information corresponding to the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means. Granting means (a function of executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 143, a function of executing the process of step S408 in the payout side CPU 172), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the storage is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 197, 11th embodiment in the first to tenth, twelfth to thirteenth embodiments). Then, the predetermined information (first) is executed in the main RAM 145) so that the number or frequency of the game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means can be specified by the game machine or a device outside the game machine. Predetermined storage execution means (first) for storing history information in the ninth and thirteenth embodiments and numerical information measured by a counter in the tenth to twelfth embodiments in the predetermined storage means. In the tenth, twelfth to thirteenth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 192, and in the eleventh embodiment, steps S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, and step S2316 in the main CPU 143. A gaming machine comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S2320 and S2323).

According to the feature C1, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, the player is given a privilege. Will be done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number or frequency of the game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means. The predetermined information that can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or the device outside the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, the predetermined information is used. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger execution of a process for granting a privilege to the player.

According to the feature C2, the purpose is to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means because the predetermined information does not trigger the execution of the process for granting the privilege to the player. It is possible to store and retain predetermined information in the form of information.

Feature C3. It is provided with specific entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
The predetermined storage executing means causes the predetermined storage means to execute the storage of information corresponding to the case where the game ball enters the specific entry means, and the game ball enters the specific entry means. Specific information that enables the number of balls to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine (history information in the first to ninth and thirteenth embodiments, and a counter in the tenth to twelfth embodiments). The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to the feature C3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means but also the mode of entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball entry frequency between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Feature C4. All the ball-in means for discharging the entered game ball from the game area, including the predetermined ball-in means, are to be stored in the predetermined storage means for information corresponding to the occurrence of the in-game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, which is characterized by being a ball entry means.

According to the feature C4, all the ball entry means for discharging the game ball from the game area are subject to management using the information stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the ball entry frequency for any ball entry means is reached. Can be managed by using the information stored in the predetermined storage means. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means to the number of game balls ejected from the game area by using the information stored in the predetermined storage means.

Feature C5. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

According to the feature C5, since the predetermined information includes the information corresponding to the timing when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the predetermined information can be used to obtain the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means. It is possible to grasp the entry history in detail.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the predetermined information is counting information of the number of gaming balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

According to the feature C6, since the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means, the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means while suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information. Can be managed.

Feature C7. The predetermined storage executing means is a means (first) for storing information that makes it possible to specify whether or not a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means in a predetermined situation. In the first to eighth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 192, in the ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 192, and in the tenth embodiment, management. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2203 in the side CPU 192).

According to the feature C7, it is possible to manage the ball entry mode of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined.

Feature C8. Any of the features C1 to C7 characterized by having an external output means (a function of executing an external output process in the management side CPU 192) that outputs information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature C8, the information stored in the predetermined storage means can be read from the gaming machine, and the read information can be used to analyze the entry mode of the game ball into the predetermined entry means.

Feature C9. It is equipped with a program output means (a function to execute the process of step S903 in the main CPU 143) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine by using the information output unit (reading terminal 182).
The gaming machine according to feature C8, wherein the external output means uses the information output unit to output information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature C9, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature C10. A means (mainly) for identifying which of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program is the information to be output from the information output unit, and outputting the information corresponding to the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature C9, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S902 in the side CPU 143).

According to the feature C10, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is externally output by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the game machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, it is possible to read only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature C11. The first control means (main side CPU 143) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 192) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10.

According to the feature C11, the processing load of the first control means is extremely increased because the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific storage execution means has the predetermined storage execution means. It is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already explained while avoiding it.

Feature C12. The gaming machine according to feature C11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to the feature C12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means can be performed. It will be possible to prevent it.

Feature C13. It is provided with specific entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the predetermined memory execution means stores information corresponding to the game ball in the specific entry means so that the predetermined storage means can execute the game to the specific ball entry means. Specific information that enables the number or frequency of balls to be entered to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine (history information in the first to ninth and thirteenth embodiments, tenth to tenth). In the twelfth embodiment, the numerical information measured by the counter) is stored in the predetermined storage means.
The first control means is
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first transmission means (first to seventh signals in the main CPU 143) that transmits the first information to the second control means using the first signal path. Function to output either) and
When the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the second transmission means (the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 143) that transmits the second information to the second control means by using the second signal path. Function to output either) and
The gaming machine according to the feature C11 or C12, which comprises the above-mentioned feature C11 or C12.

According to the feature C13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means but also the mode of entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball entry frequency between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Further, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the game ball enters the specific entry means. The second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted and the signal path correspond to each other, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Feature C14. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits identification information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not it is a predetermined situation to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, fourth to tenth, thirteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 143, and in the third embodiment, the open / close execution mode signal in the main CPU 143, The gaming machine according to feature C13, which is characterized by having a function of outputting either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door-opening signal).

According to the feature C14, it is possible to manage the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means and the mode of entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined. Further, since the identification information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the second control means transfers the identification information to the first information and the first information. 2 It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as information.

Feature C15. The first control means uses the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature C13 or C14, which comprises a means for transmitting identification information to be transmitted (a function of executing recognition processing in the main CPU 143).

According to the feature C15, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the correspondence of these information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature C16. The gaming machine according to feature C15, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the feature C16, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means In a situation where a game ball can enter the ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature C17. 5. The feature C15 or C16, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to the feature C17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Feature C18. When the identification information is received, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means. One of the features C15 to C17, which is characterized by having a means (a function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management side CPU 192) to store the correspondence information to be stored in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 196). The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature C18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the ball entry means corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. You don't have to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature C19. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, fourth to tenth, thirteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 143, and in the third embodiment, the open / close execution mode signal in the main CPU 143, Equipped with a function to output either the high frequency support mode signal or the door open signal)
The feature C15 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even if the identification information is not received. The gaming machine according to any one of C18.

According to the feature C19, it is possible to manage the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means and the mode of entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined. Further, the information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the third information is in a predetermined situation can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature C20. The second control means has more information than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means as a receiving unit capable of receiving the information from the first control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C13 to C19, characterized in that a large number of receiving units (buffers 202a to 202p) are provided.

According to the feature C20, the second control means is provided with a number of receiving units larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the model of the gaming machine can be used. Even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases accordingly, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration of the receiving unit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature C21. A first external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it recognizable corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means to a device outside the gaming machine. (Function to execute external output processing in the side CPU 192) and
A second external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it recognizable corresponding to the specific ball entry means to a device outside the gaming machine. (Function to execute external output processing in the side CPU 192) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C13 to C20, which comprises the above-mentioned feature C13 to C20.

According to the feature C21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and the read information is used to enter the game ball into the predetermined entry means and the game ball to the specific entry means. It is possible to specify the ball entry mode. Further, when the external output is performed, the information of the combination of the predetermined information and the information that makes it recognizable that the predetermined ball entry means is supported is output externally, and the specific information and the specific ball entry means are supported. Information in combination with information that makes it recognizable is output externally. This makes it possible to specify each ball entry mode by using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature C22. Information calculation means (first, third, seventh, ninth, tenth, tenth, third) for calculating aspect information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball in the game area by using the predetermined information. 11. In the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 192 is executed, and in the fourth embodiment, the processing of step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 192 is executed. A function, a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 192 in the fifth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 192 in the sixth embodiment, and a function in the management side CPU 192 in the eighth embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C21, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2005, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 143 in the twelfth embodiment). ..

According to the feature C22, the mode information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball is calculated by the gaming machine by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entering mode of the gaming ball, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. ..

Feature C23. The predetermined storage executing means is a means (first) for making information that can specify whether or not the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means is in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage means. In the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 192, in the ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 192, and in the tenth embodiment, the management side. A function of executing the process of step S2203 in the CPU 192) is provided.
The information calculation means is a means (first, third, third) for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined situation. In the seventh, ninth, tenth, eleventh, and thirteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management side CPU 192, and in the fourth embodiment, step S1408 in the management side CPU 192, A function of executing the processes of steps S1413 and S1417, a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 192 in the fifth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 192 in the sixth embodiment. The feature C22 is characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 192 in the eighth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 143 in the twelfth embodiment). The described gaming machine.

According to the feature C23, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation and calculate the aspect information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball.

Feature C24. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first, third, ninth, tenth, eleventh, thirteenth implementations). The feature C22 or C23 is characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management side CPU 192 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management side CPU 192 in the fifth embodiment). Game machine.

According to the feature C24, when the predetermined information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that the event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is unlikely to occur. It is possible to make it.

Feature C25. Even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the characteristic C22 is characterized in that the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is maintained in the state of being stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine according to C23.

According to the feature C25, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the aspect information is read out and the game ball enters the ball. When analyzing the aspect, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information which is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature C26. The information calculation means is when the supply of the operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of the operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features C22 to C25, which comprises calculating the aspect information.

According to the feature C26, the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature C27. The information calculation means is characterized in that the aspect information is calculated when an operation trigger that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of C26.

According to the feature C27, the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, so that the mode information is managed in detail within one business day. Is possible.

Feature C28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 145) becomes a predetermined period.
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features C22 to C27.

According to the feature C28, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, the calculation frequency of the aspect information can be easily adjusted only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is being executed.

Feature C29. Features C22 to C28 characterized by having an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management side CPU 192) that outputs the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature C29, since the aspect information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the entering aspect of the gaming ball.

Feature C30. The gaming machine according to feature C29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature C30, when not only the aspect information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine to read the aspect information and analyze the entering mode of the game ball, not only the aspect information but also the aspect information thereof. It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature C31. The first control means (main side CPU 143) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 192) having the external output means, and
Equipped with
The feature C29 or the external output means is characterized in that when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in C30.

According to the feature C31, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to output the information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature C32. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the information calculation means calculates the mode information.
The result storage execution means (in the fourth embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 192) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 207). The gaming machine according to any one of features C22 to C31, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of the above, and a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 192 in the fifth embodiment).

According to the feature C32, the aspect information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the entering mode of the game ball.

Feature C33. The result storage execution means is
A means for determining whether or not the aspect information is storage target information (a function of executing the process of step S1603 in the management side CPU 192) and
When the aspect information is the storage target information, a means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means (a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 192) and
The gaming machine according to feature C32, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature C33, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result storage means.

Feature C34. The game according to feature C32 or C33, wherein the result storage executing means stores information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated to be attached to the aspect information and stores the result storage means in the calculation result storage means. Machine.

According to the feature C34, the information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information is calculated.

Feature C35. The first control means (main side CPU 143) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 192) having the information calculation means, and
Equipped with
The information calculation means according to any one of features C22 to C34, characterized in that when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means, the information calculation means calculates the aspect information. Gaming machine.

According to the feature C35, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to make the information calculated by the second control means.

Feature C36. It is provided with a notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 143) that controls the notification means (notifying light emitting unit 301) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C22 to C35.

According to the feature C36, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the entry mode of the game ball without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature C37. The control board (main control board 141) provided with the notification control means is housed in the board box.
The gaming machine according to feature C36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature C37, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature C38. The first control means (main side CPU 143) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 192) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature C36 or C37, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to the feature C38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof. It is possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature C39. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the mode information is the information in the first range, and when the mode information is the information in the second range, the notification control means controls the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C36 to C38, characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature C39, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature C40. Features C1 to feature C1 to include means for externally outputting corresponding information when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means (a function of executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 143). The gaming machine according to any one of C39.

According to the feature C40, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means in the configuration in which the corresponding information corresponding to the game ball is externally output when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means. As a result, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means can be used for predetermined entry while simply grasping the number of balls and the frequency of entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means by using the corresponding information. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the ball means and the frequency of entry.

Feature C41. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C40, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature C41, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C41, the features A1 to A14, the features B1 to B5, the features C1 to C41, the features D1 to D20, the features E1 to E19, the features F1 to F7, the features G1 to G4, and the features H1 to H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H10, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J17, features K1 to K5, features L1 to L15, and features M1 to M7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 197 in the first to tenth, twelfth to thirteenth embodiments, and the main side in the eleventh embodiment. By making it executed in the RAM 145), predetermined information (history information in the first to ninth and thirteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) is predetermined. Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (a function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 192 in the first to tenth and twelfth to thirteenth embodiments, and a main CPU 143 in the eleventh embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323) in
The first, third, seventh, ninth, tenth, eleventh, and thirteenth embodiments (first, third, seventh, ninth, tenth, eleventh, and thirteenth embodiments) that use the predetermined information to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 192, the function of executing the processing of step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 192 in the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment. The function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 192, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 192 in the sixth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 192 in the eighth embodiment. Function, in the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 143) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, when a predetermined event occurs, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is appropriate to manage the mode of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output mode information which is the result of calculation using the predetermined information. Become.

Feature D2. The predetermined storage execution means is a means (in the first to eighth embodiments) for causing information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation to be the predetermined storage means. The function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 192, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 192 in the ninth embodiment, and the processing of step S2203 in the management side CPU 192 in the tenth embodiment. Has a function to execute)
The information calculation means is a means (first, third, seventh, ninth, ninth, third) for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation. In the tenth, eleventh, and thirteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management side CPU 192, and in the fourth embodiment, the processing of steps S1408, step S1413, and step S1417 in the management side CPU 192. The function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 192 in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 192 in the sixth embodiment, and the management in the eighth embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature D1, comprising: a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the side CPU 192, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 143 in the twelfth embodiment).

According to the feature D2, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the situation is predetermined, and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature D3. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first, third, ninth, tenth, eleventh, thirteenth implementations). The feature D1 or D2 is characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management side CPU 192 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management side CPU 192 in the fifth embodiment). Game machine.

According to the feature D3, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that the event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is unlikely to occur. It is possible to make it.

Feature D4. Even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is maintained in a state of being stored in the predetermined storage means D1. Or the gaming machine described in D2.

According to the feature D4, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the aspect information can be read out and the game in a predetermined period can be played. When analyzing the result of the above, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information which is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature D5. The information calculation means is characterized in that the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means (MPU 142) is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of D4.

According to the feature D5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the mode information is calculated in units of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature D6. The information calculation means is any one of the features D1 to D5, characterized in that the mode information is calculated when a calculation trigger that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where the control means (MPU 142) is supplied with operating power. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature D6, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within one business day. Is possible.

Feature D7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 145) becomes a predetermined period.
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6.

According to the feature D7, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, the calculation frequency of the aspect information can be easily adjusted only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is being executed.

Feature D8. Features D1 to D7 are provided with an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management side CPU 192) that outputs the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature D8, since the aspect information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the entering aspect of the gaming ball.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to feature D8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature D9, when not only the aspect information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine to read the aspect information and analyze the entering mode of the game ball, not only the aspect information but also the aspect information thereof. It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature D10. The first control means (main side CPU 143) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 192) having the external output means, and
Equipped with
The feature D8 or the external output means is characterized in that when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in D9.

According to the feature D10, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to output the information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature D11. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the information calculation means calculates the mode information.
The result storage execution means (in the fourth embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 192) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 207). The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, which comprises a function of executing the process of the above, and a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 192 in the fifth embodiment).

According to the feature D11, the mode information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the mode of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature D12. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means (a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 192) when the mode information is the storage target information. The gaming machine according to feature D11.

According to the feature D12, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result storage means.

Feature D13. The game according to the feature D11 or D12, wherein the result storage executing means stores information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated to be attached to the aspect information and stores the result storage means in the calculation result storage means. Machine.

According to the feature D13, the information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information is calculated.

Feature D14. The first control means (main side CPU 143) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 192) having the information calculation means, and
Equipped with
Described in any one of features D1 to D13, wherein the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Game machine.

According to the feature D14, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to make the information calculated by the second control means.

Feature D15. It is provided with a notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 143) that controls the notification means (notifying light emitting unit 301) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D14, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature D15, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature D16. The control board (main control board 141) provided with the notification control means is housed in the board box.
The gaming machine according to feature D15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature D16, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature D17. A first control means (main side CPU 143) having the information calculation means and the notification control means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 192) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
The gaming machine according to the feature D15 or D16, which comprises the above-mentioned feature D15 or D16.

According to the feature D17, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof. It is possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature D18. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the mode information is the information in the first range, and when the mode information is the information in the second range, the notification control means controls the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D15 to D17, characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature D18, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature D19. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 197, 11th embodiment in the first to tenth and twelfth to thirteenth embodiments). Then, by making it executed in the main RAM 145), predetermined information (history information in the first to ninth and thirteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the tenth to twelfth embodiments). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management side CPU 192 in the first to tenth and twelfth to thirteenth embodiments, and in the eleventh embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323) in the main CPU 143).
Information calculation means (1st, 3rd, 7th, 9th, 10th, 10th, 3rd) using the predetermined information to calculate the aspect information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball in the game area in the predetermined period. 11. In the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 192 is executed, and in the fourth embodiment, the processing of step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 192 is executed. A function, a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 192 in the fifth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 192 in the sixth embodiment, and a function in the management side CPU 192 in the eighth embodiment. A function of executing the process of step S2005, a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 143 in the twelfth embodiment), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D19, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage process of the corresponding information is executed for the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, the predetermined information is used. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entering mode of the gaming ball, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. ..

Feature D20. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D19, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature D20, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D20, the features A1 to A14, the features B1 to B5, the features C1 to C41, the features D1 to D20, the features E1 to E19, the features F1 to F7, the features G1 to G4, and the features H1 to H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H10, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J17, features K1 to K5, features L1 to L15, and features M1 to M7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 197 in the first to tenth, twelfth to thirteenth embodiments, and the main side in the eleventh embodiment. By making it executed in the RAM 145), predetermined information (history information in the first to ninth and thirteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) is predetermined. Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (a function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 192 in the first to tenth and twelfth to thirteenth embodiments, and a main CPU 143 in the eleventh embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323) in
Information calculation means (1st, 3rd, 7th, 9th) for calculating mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period by using the predetermined information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs. In the tenth, eleventh, and thirteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management side CPU 192, and in the fourth embodiment, steps S1408, step S1413, and step S1417 in the management side CPU 192. The function of executing the process of step S1602 in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 192 in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 192 in the sixth embodiment, the eighth embodiment. Then, the function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 192, and the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main side CPU 143 in the twelfth embodiment).
The result storage execution means (in the fourth embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 192) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 207). The function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 192 in the fifth embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. .. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number of balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of entry of the game balls into the predetermined ball entry means, and by using this managed information, the predetermined number of balls is predetermined. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and retained by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output mode information which is the result of calculation using the predetermined information. Become.

In addition, it becomes possible to accumulate the aspect information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the mode of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature E2. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means (a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 192) when the mode information is the storage target information. The gaming machine according to the feature E1.

According to the feature E2, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result storage means.

Feature E3. The game according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the result storage executing means stores information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated to be attached to the aspect information and stores the result storage means in the calculation result storage means. Machine.

According to the feature E3, the information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information is calculated.

Feature E4. The predetermined storage execution means is a means (in the first to eighth embodiments) for causing information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation to be the predetermined storage means. The function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 192, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 192 in the ninth embodiment, and the processing of step S2203 in the management side CPU 192 in the tenth embodiment. Has a function to execute)
The information calculation means is a means (first, third, seventh, ninth, ninth, third) for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation. In the tenth, eleventh, and thirteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management side CPU 192, and in the fourth embodiment, the processing of steps S1408, step S1413, and step S1417 in the management side CPU 192. The function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 192 in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 192 in the sixth embodiment, and the management in the eighth embodiment. Described in any one of the features E1 to E3, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the side CPU 192, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 143 in the twelfth embodiment). Game machine.

According to the feature E4, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the situation is predetermined, and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature E5. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first, third, ninth, tenth, eleventh, thirteenth implementations). One of the features E1 to E4, characterized in that the embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management side CPU 192, and a fifth embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management side CPU 192. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature E5, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that the event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is unlikely to occur. It is possible to make it.

Feature E6. Even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is maintained in a state of being stored in the predetermined storage means E1. The gaming machine according to any one of E5.

According to the feature E6, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the aspect information can be read out and the game for a predetermined period can be played. When analyzing the result of the above, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information which is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature E7. The information calculation means is characterized in that the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means (MPU 142) is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of E6.

According to the feature E7, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the mode information is calculated in units of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature E8. The information calculation means is any one of the features E1 to E7, characterized in that the mode information is calculated when a calculation trigger that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where the control means (MPU 142) is supplied with operating power. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature E8, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in a situation where the control means is supplied with operating power, the mode information is managed in detail within one business day. Is possible.

Feature E9. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 145) becomes a predetermined period.
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E8.

According to the feature E9, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, the calculation frequency of the aspect information can be easily adjusted only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is being executed.

Feature E10. Features E1 to E9 characterized by having an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management side CPU 192) that outputs the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature E10, since the aspect information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the entering aspect of the gaming ball.

Feature E11. The gaming machine according to feature E10, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature E11, when not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine to read the mode information and analyze the entering mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the mode information thereof. It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature E12. The first control means (main side CPU 143) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 192) having the external output means, and
Equipped with
The feature E10 or the external output means is characterized in that when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in E11.

According to the feature E12, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to output the information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature E13. The first control means (main side CPU 143) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 192) having the information calculation means, and
Equipped with
The information calculation means is described in any one of the features E1 to E12, which is characterized in that when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means, the information calculation means calculates the aspect information. Gaming machine.

According to the feature E13, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to make the information calculated by the second control means.

Feature E14. It is provided with a notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 143) that controls the notification means (notifying light emitting unit 301) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E13, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature E14, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature E15. The control board (main control board 141) provided with the notification control means is housed in the board box.
The gaming machine according to feature E14, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature E15, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature E16. The first control means (main side CPU 143) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 192) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature E14 or E15, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to the feature E16, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof. It is possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature E17. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the mode information is the information in the first range, and when the mode information is the information in the second range, the notification control means controls the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E14 to E16, characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature E17, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature E18. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 197, 11th embodiment in the first to tenth and twelfth to thirteenth embodiments). Then, by making it executed in the main RAM 145), predetermined information (history information in the first to ninth and thirteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the tenth to twelfth embodiments). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management side CPU 192 in the first to tenth and twelfth to thirteenth embodiments, and in the eleventh embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323) in the main CPU 143).
Information calculation means (first, first) for calculating mode information corresponding to the entry mode of a game ball in the game area in a predetermined period by using the predetermined information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs. 3, In the seventh, ninth, tenth, eleventh, and thirteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management side CPU 192, and in the fourth embodiment, the step in the management side CPU 192. The function of executing the processing of S1408, step S1413 and step S1417, the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 192 in the fifth embodiment, and the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 192 in the sixth embodiment. The function, in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 192, and in the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main side CPU 143).
The result storage execution means (in the fourth embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 192) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 207). The function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 192 in the fifth embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E18, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage process of the corresponding information is executed for the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number of balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of entry of the game balls into the predetermined ball entry means, and by using this managed information, the predetermined number of balls is predetermined. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and retained by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entering mode of the gaming ball, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. ..

In addition, it becomes possible to accumulate the aspect information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the mode of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature E19. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E18, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature E19, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features E1 to E19, the features A1 to A14, the features B1 to B5, the features C1 to C41, the features D1 to D20, the features E1 to E19, the features F1 to F7, the features G1 to G4, and the features H1 to H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H10, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J17, features K1 to K5, features L1 to L15, and features M1 to M7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 197 in the first to tenth, twelfth to thirteenth embodiments, and the main side in the eleventh embodiment. By making it executed in the RAM 145), predetermined information (history information in the first to ninth and thirteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) is predetermined. First storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (a function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 192 in the first to tenth and twelfth to thirteenth embodiments, and the main side in the eleventh embodiment. A function of executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323 in the CPU 143).
When a specific event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, so that the specific information (history information in the first to ninth and thirteenth embodiments, the first In the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the second storage executing means (the first to tenth and the twelfth to thirteenth embodiments) so that the numerical information measured by the counter is stored in the predetermined storage means. A function to execute the history setting process in the management side CPU 192, and in the eleventh embodiment, a function to execute the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323 in the main side CPU 143). ,
A first external output means (management side CPU 192) that outputs the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that the predetermined information can be recognized as corresponding to the predetermined event. (Function to execute processing for external output) and
A second external output means (management side CPU 192) that outputs the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that the specific information can be recognized as corresponding to the specific event. (Function to execute processing for external output) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, the information stored in the predetermined storage means can be read from the gaming machine, and the read information can be used to specify the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event. In addition, when the external output is performed, the predetermined information is output externally so that it can be recognized that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event, and the specific information corresponds to the specific event. The specific information is output to the outside so that the information can be recognized. As a result, even if the information is not processed by the second control means, it is possible to specify the occurrence mode of each event by using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that it includes means for externally outputting corresponding information when the predetermined event occurs (a function of executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 143).

According to the feature F2, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means in the configuration in which the corresponding information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event is externally output. As a result, the number of occurrences and frequency of occurrence of predetermined events can be easily grasped by using the correspondence information, and the number and frequency of occurrence of predetermined events can be accurately grasped by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to grasp.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the predetermined information is information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

According to the feature F3, the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is the counting information of the number of times the specific event has occurred, so that the information capacity of the predetermined information and the specific information is suppressed. It is possible to manage the mode of occurrence of a predetermined event and the mode of occurrence of a specific event.

Features F4. It is equipped with a program output means (a function to execute the process of step S903 in the main CPU 143) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine by using the information output unit (reading terminal 182).
The first external output means and the second external output means use the information output unit to output information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of F3.

According to the feature F4, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature F5. A selection means (selection means for specifying which of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program is the information to be output from the information output unit and outputting the information corresponding to the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature F4, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S902 in the main CPU 143).

According to the feature F5, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is externally output by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the game machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, it is possible to read only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature F6. Based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit, the selection means stores the information to be output from the information output unit in the predetermined storage means and the control program. The gaming machine according to feature F5, which is characterized by specifying which of them is.

According to the feature F6, it is specified which information should be output from the information output unit based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature F7. The chip (MPU 142) having the program storage means (main side ROM 144) for storing the control program in advance is characterized by having the information output unit, the first external output means, and the second external output means. The gaming machine according to any one of F4 to F6.

According to the feature F7, the signal path for the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. This makes it possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult for unauthorized access to the signal path to the information output unit.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features F1 to F7, the features A1 to A14, the features B1 to B5, the features C1 to C41, the features D1 to D20, the features E1 to E19, the features F1 to F7, the features G1 to G4, and the features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H10, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J17, features K1 to K5, features L1 to L15, and features M1 to M7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A program output means (a function of executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 143) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 182), and
An information output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 192) that outputs special information using the information output unit, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, it is possible to output special information to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature G2. A selection means (step S902 in the main CPU 143) for identifying which of the special information and the control program the information to be output from the information output unit is, and outputting the information corresponding to the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature G1, which is characterized by having a function of executing the processing of the above.

According to the feature G2, in the configuration in which the special information is output externally by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be output externally is either the control program or the special information. The program is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, it is possible to read only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature G3. The selection means determines whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. The gaming machine according to feature G2, which is characterized by specifying.

According to the feature G3, it is specified which information should be output from the information output unit based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Features G4. One of the features G1 to G3, wherein the chip (MPU 142) having the program storage means (main side ROM 144) for storing the control program in advance has the information output unit and the information output means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature G4, the signal path for the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. This makes it possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult for unauthorized access to the signal path to the information output unit.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features G1 to G4, the features A1 to A14, the features B1 to B5, the features C1 to C41, the features D1 to D20, the features E1 to E19, the features F1 to F7, the features G1 to G4, and the features H1 to H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H10, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J17, features K1 to K5, features L1 to L15, and features M1 to M7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A first control means (main side CPU 143) and a second control means (management side CPU 192) are provided.
The first control means is
A privilege granting means (a function of executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 143, a function of executing the process of step S408 in the payout side CPU 172) for granting the privilege to the player when a predetermined event occurs, and
An information transmission means (a function for executing management output processing in the main CPU 143) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs, and
Equipped with
When the predetermined event information is received, the second control means stores the information corresponding to the predetermined event information (in the first to tenth, twelfth to thirteenth embodiments, the history memory 197, eleventh). In the embodiment, the predetermined information (1st to 9th) that enables the occurrence number or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event to be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine by executing the execution in the main RAM 145). , The predetermined storage executing means (first to tenth) so that the history information in the thirteenth embodiment and the numerical information measured by the counter in the tenth to twelfth embodiments are stored in the predetermined storage means. In the twelfth to thirteenth embodiments, the function for executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 192, and in the eleventh embodiment, steps S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S2323).

According to the feature H1, a privilege is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that a predetermined event occurs. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. The predetermined information to be stored will be stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is appropriate to manage the mode of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege granting means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load of the first control means does not increase extremely. However, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already explained.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to the feature H2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means can be performed. It will be possible to prevent it.

Feature H3. When a specific event occurs, the predetermined storage executing means executes a storage process of information corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event in the predetermined storage means, so that the number or frequency of occurrence of the specific event can be determined by the gaming machine or outside the gaming machine. Specific information that can be specified by the apparatus (history information in the first to ninth and thirteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. To be done
The first control means is
A function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 143 to transmit the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs. )When,
A function of outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 143 to transmit the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the specific event occurs. )When,
The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or H2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature H1 or H2.

According to the feature H3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the mode of occurrence of a predetermined event but also the mode of occurrence of a specific event. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the frequency of occurrence between the predetermined event and the specific event.

Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted and the signal path correspond to each other, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Features H4. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits identification information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not it is a predetermined situation to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, fourth to tenth, thirteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 143, and in the third embodiment, the open / close execution mode signal in the main CPU 143, The gaming machine according to feature H3, which is characterized by having a function of outputting either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door-opening signal).

According to the feature H4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of a predetermined event and the occurrence mode of a specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, since the identification information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the second control means transfers the identification information to the first information and the first information. 2 It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as information.

Feature H5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature H3 or H4, which comprises a transmission means (a function of executing recognition processing in the main CPU 143).

According to the feature H5, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined event and the second information corresponds to a specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. It is not necessary to store the correspondence of these information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature H6. The gaming machine according to feature H5, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the feature H6, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that a predetermined event and a specific event may occur. In the situation, it is possible to make it possible for the second control means to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature H7. 5. The feature H5 or H6, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Gaming machine.

According to the feature H7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a configuration dedicated to transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Feature H8. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. 1 Game machine.

According to the feature H8, the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event is stored in the second control means. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. You don't have to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature H9. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, fourth to tenth, thirteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 143, and in the third embodiment, the open / close execution mode signal in the main CPU 143, Equipped with a function to output either the high frequency support mode signal or the door open signal)
The feature H5 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even if the identification information is not received. The gaming machine according to any one of H8.

According to the feature H9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of a predetermined event and the occurrence mode of a specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, the information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the third information is in a predetermined situation can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature H10. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature H10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configurations of features H1 to H10, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B5, features C1 to C41, features D1 to D20, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G4, and features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H10, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J17, features K1 to K5, features L1 to L15, and features M1 to M7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, and the feature H group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing a game ball given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game ball stored in the dish storage section is guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the game balls surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to manage the gaming machine preferably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic I group>
Features I1. The first control means (main CPU 143) and
A second control means (management side CPU 192) that receives information transmitted from the first control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
A function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 143 to transmit the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs. )When,
A function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 143 to transmit the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs. )When,
The identification information transmitting means (main side) that transmits the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means. (Function to execute recognition processing in CPU 143) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature I1, when the first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the second event occurs, the second signal path is used. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted and the signal path correspond to each other, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Further, since the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information It is not necessary to store the correspondence between the above in the second control means in advance. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the feature I2, since the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means. In a situation where a game ball can enter the ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature I3. 5. The feature I1 or I2, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Gaming machine.

According to the feature I3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Feature I4. When the identification information is received, the second control means makes it possible to identify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. One of the features I1 to I3, which is characterized by having a means (a function of executing a correspondence relationship setting process in the management side CPU 192) for storing the relational information in the correspondence relation storage means (correspondence relation memory 196). The described gaming machine.

According to the feature I4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. As a result, it is necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. Is gone. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature I5. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, fourth to tenth, thirteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 143, and in the third embodiment, the open / close execution mode signal in the main CPU 143, Equipped with a function to output either the high frequency support mode signal or the door open signal)
The feature I1 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even if the identification information is not received. The gaming machine according to any one of I4.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the first event and the occurrence mode of the second event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined. Further, the information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the third information is in a predetermined situation can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature I6. As a signal path capable of transmitting information from the first control means to the second control means, a number larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, characterized in that a signal path is provided.

According to the feature I6, since the number of signal paths provided is larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the information can be obtained according to the model of the gaming machine. Even if the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration related to the signal path. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature I7. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature I7, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configurations of features I1 to I7, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B5, features C1 to C41, features D1 to D20, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G4, and features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H10, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J17, features K1 to K5, features L1 to L15, and features M1 to M7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature I group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing a game ball given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game ball stored in the dish storage section is guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the game balls surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to make a configuration related to communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the predetermined storage means (normal counter area 321 in the fourteenth embodiment, open / close execution mode counter area 322, and high frequency support mode counter area 323). ), Predetermined information (numerical information measured in each of the counters 321a to 321e, 322a to 322e, 323a to 323e in the 14th embodiment) is stored in the predetermined storage means. Predetermined storage execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3204 to S3205 of the main CPU 143 in the 14th embodiment) and
Information derivation means (a function of executing the process of step S3504 of the main CPU 143 in the 14th embodiment) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period by using the predetermined information.
In the situation where the mode information is derived by the information deriving means, the processing of the limiting means (processes S3404 to S3407 of the main CPU 143 in the 14th embodiment) is executed so that the progress of the game is restricted. The function, the function of executing the process of step S3809 of the main CPU 143 in the fifteenth embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, when a predetermined event occurs, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is appropriate to manage the mode of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived by the gaming machine. As a result, for example, the gaming machine itself can perform processing corresponding to the result of the gaming in a predetermined period.

Further, in the situation where the aspect information is derived, the progress of the game is restricted. This makes it possible to derive the aspect information in a situation different from the situation in which a normal game is performed. Therefore, it is not necessary to parallel the progress of the normal game and the derivation of the mode information, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the limiting means limits the execution of at least a part of the processes for advancing the game.

According to the feature J2, the execution of at least a part of the processes for advancing the game is restricted in the situation where the aspect information is derived, so that the processing per unit time is performed in the situation where the aspect information is derived. It is possible to prevent the number from increasing extremely.

Feature J3. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, wherein the information deriving means derives the aspect information after the progress of the game is restricted by the limiting means.

According to the feature J3, since the mode information is derived after the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to derive the mode information in a situation where a predetermined event does not newly occur with the progress of the game.

Features J4. Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
Equipped with
The predetermined storage executing means is such that when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means as the predetermined event, the storage of information corresponding to the occurrence occurs in the predetermined storage means. The information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the information is stored in the predetermined storage means.
The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the limiting means limits the launching of a gaming ball by the launching means.

According to the feature J4, since the aspect information is derived after the launch of the game ball is restricted, the aspect information is restricted in the situation where the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means that triggers the variation of the aspect information is restricted. Can be derived.

Feature J5. The information deriving means derives the aspect information after a predetermined period has elapsed after the launching of the game ball by the launching means is restricted by the limiting means.
The feature J4 is characterized in that the predetermined period is set to a longer period than the longest period assumed as the period required for the gaming ball launched from the launching means to enter the predetermined ball entering means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature J5, when the aspect information is derived, it is assumed as the period required from the restriction of the launch of the game ball to the time when the game ball launched from the launching means enters the predetermined ball entry means. The aspect information is derived after a period longer than the longest period has elapsed. As a result, it becomes possible to derive the aspect information in a situation in which the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means that triggers the variation of the aspect information does not surely occur.

Features J6. The limiting means limits the progress of the game based on the occurrence of the trigger for deriving the mode information, and the trigger for deriving the mode information occurs in a situation where a specific operation is performed in the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, characterized in that the progress of the game is not restricted even if the game is played.

According to the feature J6, in the situation where the specific operation is performed in the gaming machine, the progress of the gaming is not restricted even if the trigger for deriving the mode information occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the specific operation from being hindered by the occurrence of the trigger for deriving the mode information.

Feature J7. The limiting means is characterized in that when the trigger for deriving the aspect information occurs in a situation where the specific operation is being performed in the game machine, the progress of the game is restricted after the end of the specific operation. Features The gaming machine described in J6.

According to the feature J7, when the trigger for deriving the mode information occurs in the situation where the specific motion is performed in the gaming machine, the progress of the game is restricted after the end of the specific motion, so that the execution of the specific motion is hindered. It is possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in response to the occurrence of the trigger for deriving the mode information.

Features J8. A lottery processing execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S3003 of the main CPU 143 in the 14th embodiment) that executes the lottery processing when the lottery conditions are satisfied.
Game round control means (14th implementation) that controls the game round execution means (special figure display unit 37a) so that the game round operation is performed for a predetermined continuation period and the state corresponds to the lottery result of the lottery process. The function of executing the processes of steps S2808 to S2810 of the main CPU 143 in the embodiment) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature J6 or J7, wherein the situation in which the specific operation is performed includes a situation in which the game rotation operation is performed by the game rotation executing means.

According to the feature J8, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the trigger for deriving the mode information occurs in the situation where the game rotation operation is performed. This makes it possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while not interrupting the game rotation operation.

Features J9. Equipped with a variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) capable of opening a game ball flowing down the game area so that the ball can enter.
The gaming machine according to any one of features J6 to J8, wherein the situation in which the specific operation is performed includes a situation in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state.

According to the feature J9, in the situation where the variable ball entry means is in the open state, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the trigger for deriving the mode information occurs. This makes it possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while not interrupting the open state of the variable ball entry means.

Features J10. Information storage means (main side RAM 145) in which information necessary for controlling the progress of the game is written in the control means (main side CPU 143), and
An initialization execution means (a function of executing the process of step S3709 of the main CPU 143 in the 14th embodiment) that executes initialization of the information storage means when an initialization trigger occurs.
When the information is set so that the progress of the game is restricted by the limiting means, the means for preventing the initialization of the information storage means by the initialization executing means (main in the fourteenth embodiment). (Function to execute the process of step S3704 of the side CPU 143) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J9.

According to the feature J10, when the information is set so that the progress of the game is restricted by the limiting means, the initialization of the information storage means is prevented in response to the occurrence of the initialization trigger. As a result, when the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the aspect information is derived, even if an operation that erroneously generates an initialization trigger in an attempt to release the restricted situation is performed, information is given to it. It is possible to prevent the initialization of the storage means from being executed.

Features J11. Another execution means for executing the initialization of the information storage means when another trigger different from the initialization trigger occurs (a function of executing the processes of steps S3706 to S3708 of the main CPU 143 in the 14th embodiment). Equipped with
Even when the information setting for limiting the progress of the game is performed by the limiting means, the initialization of the information storage means by the other executing means is executed. Features The gaming machine described in J10.

According to the feature J11, even if the information is set so that the progress of the game is restricted by the restricting means, the information storage means is initialized when another opportunity occurs. .. As a result, even when the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the aspect information is derived, it is possible to leave room for the initialization of the information storage means to be executed.

Features J12. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J11, wherein the state in which the progress of the game is restricted by the limiting means is released when the restricted period elapses.

According to the feature J12, the state in which the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the mode information is derived is released after the restriction period elapses, so that the state in which the progress of the game is restricted is left as it is. It is possible to prevent an event from occurring.

Feature J13. It is provided with effect control means (sound / light side CPU 313, display control device 162) for controlling the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the effect is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J12, wherein the effect control means is such that the execution of the effect is continued even if the restriction means limits the progress of the game. ..

According to the feature J13, even if the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the aspect information is derived, the execution of the effect in the effect execution means is continued. As a result, even if a player has an opportunity to derive mode information during the game and the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to prevent the production from ending immediately. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the progress of the game is restricted.

Feature J14. The effect control means is a series of effect control means (14th) that controls the effect execution means so that a series of effects (effects for game rounds) is executed over a predetermined effect period when a predetermined start trigger occurs. The display control device 162) is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S2905 to S2907 of the sound light side 163 in the embodiment of the above.
The series of effect control means is a control for ending the series of effects even if the predetermined effect period has elapsed when the restriction means limits the progress of the game in the situation where the series of effects is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature J13, which is characterized in that it does not execute.

According to the feature J14, when the progress of the game is restricted due to the trigger for deriving the mode information in the situation where the series of effects is executed by the effect execution means, the predetermined trigger is originally the trigger for ending the series of effects. Even if the effect period has elapsed, the control for ending the series of effects is not executed. As a result, it is possible to make a series of effects continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, and even if the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where the mode information is derived, the effect can be executed. It is possible to make the player think that it is being continued.

Feature J15. The first control means (main side CPU 143) having the limiting means and
A second control means (sound / light side CPU 313, display control device 162) having the effect control means, and
Equipped with
The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a new effect is started when the second control means receives start trigger information from the first control means.
The series of effect control means ends the series of effects even if the predetermined effect period elapses due to the restriction on the progress of the game by the limiting means in the situation where the series of effects is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature J14, wherein the situation in which the control for performing the game is not executed is released when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means.

According to the feature J15, the state in which the series of effects is continued in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive the mode information is started from the first control means to the second control means in order to start a new effect. It is canceled when the trigger information is sent. As a result, it is not necessary to transmit the dedicated information for canceling the state in which such a series of effects is continued from the first control means to the second control means.

Features J16. As the series of effects, the effect execution means performs variable display of the pattern, and when the series of effects ends, the pattern is stopped in the standby area after the standby display is performed. It is the configuration to be displayed,
The series of effect control means is characterized in that when the restriction means limits the progress of the game in a situation where the series of effects is being executed, the standby display is continued even after the predetermined effect period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to the feature J14 or J15.

According to the feature J16, when the series of effects is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive the mode information, the standby display in the stage before the pattern is stopped and displayed when the series of effects is terminated is continued. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to continue a series of productions in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while making the player aware of the stop result of the pattern. Further, when the restriction on the progress of the game is released and the series of effects is terminated, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progress of the game is released. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the series of effects against the release of the restriction on the progress of the game.

Feature J17. The effect control means allows the execution of the effect to be continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means, but the notification corresponding to the restriction is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of J13 to J16.

According to the feature J17, when the series of effects is continued in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive the mode information, the corresponding notification is also executed, so that the series of effects is longer than expected. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused about what is going on.

For the configurations of features J1 to J17, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B5, features C1 to C41, features D1 to D20, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G4, and features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H10, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J17, features K1 to K5, features L1 to L15, and features M1 to M7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. The effect control means (sound / light side CPU 313, display control device 162) that controls the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the effect is executed, and
A limiting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3404 to S3407 of the main CPU 143 in the 14th embodiment) for limiting the progress of the game based on the occurrence of the limiting trigger, and
Equipped with
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the effect is continued even if the restriction means limits the progress of the game.

According to the feature K1, the progress of the game is restricted based on the occurrence of the restriction opportunity, so that the game machine can be appropriately managed. In this case, even if the progress of the game is restricted, the execution of the effect in the effect execution means is continued. This makes it possible to prevent the production from ending immediately even if a restriction trigger occurs while the player is playing the game and the progress of the game is restricted, and the progress of the game is restricted. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the above occurs.

Feature K2. The effect control means is a series of effect control means (14th) that controls the effect execution means so that a series of effects (effects for game rounds) is executed over a predetermined effect period when a predetermined start trigger occurs. The display control device 162) is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S2905 to S2907 of the sound and light side CPU 313 in the embodiment of the above.
The series of effect control means is a control for ending the series of effects even if the predetermined effect period has elapsed when the restriction means limits the progress of the game in the situation where the series of effects is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature K1, which is characterized in that it does not execute.

According to the feature K2, when a restriction trigger occurs and the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where the series of effects is being executed by the effect execution means, a predetermined effect period that would normally be an opportunity to end the series of effects has elapsed. Even if this is done, the control for ending the series of effects is not executed. As a result, it is possible to make a series of effects continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, and the player states that the execution of the effects is continued even when the progress of the game is restricted. It becomes possible to make you think.

Feature K3. The first control means (main side CPU 143) having the limiting means and
A second control means (sound / light side CPU 313, display control device 162) having the effect control means, and
Equipped with
The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a new effect is started when the second control means receives start trigger information from the first control means.
The series of effect control means ends the series of effects even if the predetermined effect period elapses due to the restriction on the progress of the game by the limiting means in the situation where the series of effects is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the situation in which the control for the purpose is not executed is released when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means.

According to the feature K3, in the state where the series of effects is continued in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted, the start trigger information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means in order to start a new effect. Will be released. As a result, it is not necessary to transmit the dedicated information for canceling the state in which such a series of effects is continued from the first control means to the second control means.

Features K4. As the series of effects, the effect execution means performs variable display of the pattern, and when the series of effects ends, the pattern is stopped in the standby area after the standby display is performed. It is the configuration to be displayed,
The series of effect control means is characterized in that when the restriction means limits the progress of the game in a situation where the series of effects is being executed, the standby display is continued even after the predetermined effect period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to the feature K2 or K3.

According to the feature K4, when the series of effects is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, the standby display in the stage before the pattern is stopped and displayed when the series of effects is terminated is continued. As a result, it is possible to continue a series of productions in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while making the player aware of the stop result of the pattern. Further, when the restriction on the progress of the game is released and the series of effects is terminated, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progress of the game is released. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the series of effects against the release of the restriction on the progress of the game.

Feature K5. The effect control means allows the execution of the effect to be continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means, but the notification corresponding to the restriction is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K4.

According to the feature K5, when the series of effects is continued in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted, the corresponding notification is also executed, so that the series of effects continues longer than expected. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

For the configurations of features K1 to K5, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B5, features C1 to C41, features D1 to D20, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G4, and features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H10, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J17, features K1 to K5, features L1 to L15, and features M1 to M7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means by executing the storage of the corresponding information in the predetermined storage means (advantageous game number counter 444b). Predetermined storage execution means (a function of executing the process of step S5001 of the main MPU 442 in the 17th embodiment) and
An information derivation means (a function of executing the process of step S5103 of the main MPU 442 in the eighteenth embodiment) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period by using the predetermined information.
Restriction means for restricting the progress of the game based on the aspect information derived by the information derivation means (processing of steps S5107 to S5113 of the main MPU 442 in the eighteenth embodiment). Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L1, when a predetermined event occurs, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Then, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived by using the predetermined information, and when the derived mode information is the information corresponding to the regulation, the progress of the game is restricted. .. This makes it possible to restrict the progress of the game according to the mode in which the predetermined event occurs, and if the mode in which the predetermined event occurs does not match the mode assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine, it is dealt with. It becomes possible to do. From the above, it becomes possible to suitably manage the gaming machine.

Feature L2. The constraint means is characterized in that it imparts a constraint that makes it possible to prevent the aspect information from becoming the regulation-compliant information based on the aspect information being the regulation-compliant information. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature L2, even if the aspect information becomes the regulation-compliant information, a restriction is given so that the aspect information does not become the regulation-compliant information. As a result, even if the aspect information becomes the information corresponding to the regulation, it is possible to make the aspect information the information within the range assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature L3. A state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (a function of executing the processes of steps S4906 to S4911 of the main MPU 442 in the eighteenth embodiment) and
A predetermined termination means (a function of executing the process of step S5009 of the main MPU 442 in the eighteenth embodiment) for terminating the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined termination opportunity occurs.
Equipped with
The limiting means is described in the feature L1 or L2 characterized in that the predetermined gaming state is terminated even if the predetermined termination trigger has not occurred, based on the aspect information being the information corresponding to the regulation. Gaming machine.

According to the feature L3, when the aspect information is the information corresponding to the regulation, the predetermined gaming state is terminated even if the predetermined termination trigger has not occurred. As a result, it is possible to forcibly terminate the predetermined gaming state according to the occurrence mode of the predetermined event, and when the occurrence mode of the predetermined event does not match the mode assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine. It is possible to give restrictions to the execution mode of the gaming state.

Feature L4. The gaming machine according to feature L3, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to the feature L4, when the mode in which a predetermined event occurs does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, it is possible to limit the advantage.

Feature L5. The gaming machine according to feature L3 or L4, wherein the predetermined event is an event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature L5, when the occurrence mode of the predetermined event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, the predetermined gaming state is forcibly terminated. This makes it possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state from remaining different from the mode assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature L6. The predetermined period is configured to elapse when the number of games is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number.
The gaming machine according to feature L5, wherein the predetermined reference number of times is larger than the number of continuous games of the predetermined gaming state that can be set when the predetermined gaming state is newly started.

According to the feature L6, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the predetermined gaming state is forcibly terminated in relation to the occurrence mode of the predetermined event from occurring in each predetermined gaming state.

Feature L7. The gaming machine according to any one of features L3 to L6, wherein the condition for generating the predetermined end trigger is not notified in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature L7, the condition for the predetermined end trigger to occur in the predetermined game state is not notified, so that the player feels uncomfortable even if the predetermined game state is forcibly terminated in relation to the occurrence mode of the predetermined event. It is possible not to give.

Feature L8. A state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (a function of executing the processes of steps S4906 to S4911 of the main MPU 442 in the eighteenth embodiment) and
A predetermined termination means (a function of executing the process of step S5009 of the main MPU 442 in the eighteenth embodiment) for terminating the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined termination opportunity occurs.
Equipped with
The restricting means is any one of the features L1 to L7, which regulates the subsequent transition to the predetermined gaming state based on the mode information being the information corresponding to the regulation. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature L8, when the aspect information is the information corresponding to the regulation, it is regulated that the transition to the predetermined gaming state occurs. As a result, it is possible to forcibly prevent the transition to the predetermined gaming state according to the occurrence mode of the predetermined event, and the occurrence mode of the predetermined event does not match the mode assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine. In some cases, it is possible to restrict the execution mode of the gaming state.

Feature L9. The gaming machine according to feature L8, wherein the restricting means changes a period in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted after that, depending on the aspect information.

According to the feature L9, since the period in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted varies depending on the aspect information, the limitation of the transition to the predetermined gaming state is underestimated regardless of the aspect information. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent it from being set excessively.

Feature L10. The state transition means is a transition determination means (the main MPU 442 in the eighteenth embodiment) that executes a transition determination process for determining whether or not to transition to the predetermined gaming state based on the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity. A function to execute the processing of steps S4903 to S4905) is provided.
In the present gaming machine, when the predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted by the restricting means, the present gaming machine grants an alternative privilege instead of executing the transition determination process. The gaming machine according to feature L8 or L9, which comprises a privilege granting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4912 to S4914 of the main MPU 442 in the eighteenth embodiment).

According to the feature L10, in order to determine whether or not to shift to the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented in relation to the aspect information. Although the migration decision process of is not executed, the alternative privilege is given. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that it was useless when a predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented.

Feature L11. In the alternative privilege granting means, the more the number of times the predetermined opportunity occurs in the situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted by the restricting means, the more advantageous the content of the alternative privilege is. The gaming machine according to feature L10, characterized in that the content of the alternative privilege is likely to be advantageous.

According to the feature L11, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation that a predetermined opportunity will occur even in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented.

Feature L12. The gaming machine according to feature L10 or L11, which comprises means for notifying that the alternative privilege has been granted.

According to the feature L12, by notifying that the alternative privilege is given, the player's motivation to continue the game is lost even in the situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Feature L13. When the alternative privilege is given, the transition to the predetermined gaming state is likely to occur after the situation in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted by the restricting means is released. The gaming machine according to any one of the features L10 to L12.

According to the feature L13, it is possible to associate the granting of the alternative privilege with the transition to the predetermined gaming state. As a result, even if a predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented, the player can expect the transition to the predetermined gaming state. ..

Feature L14. The gaming machine according to any one of features L8 to L13, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to the feature L14, when the mode in which a predetermined event occurs does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, it is possible to limit the advantage.

Feature L15. The gaming machine according to any one of features L8 to L14, wherein the predetermined event is an event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature L15, when the mode of occurrence of a predetermined event that occurs in a predetermined gaming state does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented. To. This makes it possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state from remaining different from the mode assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine.

For the configurations of features L1 to L15, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B5, features C1 to C41, features D1 to D20, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G4, and features H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H10, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J17, features K1 to K5, features L1 to L15, and features M1 to M7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. An opening and closing body (front door 412) that can be opened and closed,
A predetermined device (main control device 440) provided in a predetermined area exposed when the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing body is performed, and
Lighting means (lighting devices 449a, 449b) capable of illuminating at least a part of the predetermined device by being in a lighting state, and
Lighting control means (a function of executing lighting processing in the main MPU 442) that adjusts the control state of the lighting means according to the position of the opening / closing body, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature M1, in a configuration in which the opening / closing operation is performed when confirming the presence or absence of an abnormality in the predetermined device, a lighting means for illuminating at least a part of the predetermined device is provided. It becomes easier to make the confirmation. In this case, the control state of the lighting means is adjusted according to the position of the opening / closing body. This makes it possible to illuminate by the illuminating means in a preferable manner according to the position of the opening / closing body. Therefore, it is possible to suitably manage the gaming machine.

Features M2. The lighting control means controls the lighting means so as to be in a non-lighting state when the opening / closing body is closed and to be in a lighting state based on the opening operation of the opening / closing body. The gaming machine according to the feature M1.

According to the feature M2, when the opening / closing body is closed, the lighting means is in a non-lighting state. This makes it possible to prevent the lighting means from being in a meaningless lighting state in a situation where the predetermined device is not confirmed. Further, when the opening / closing operation is performed, the lighting means is naturally in the lighting state. This makes it easier to check the predetermined device because it is not necessary to separately perform an operation for setting the lighting means to the lighting state.

Features M3. The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, wherein the lighting means is provided in the predetermined area.

According to the feature M3, since the lighting means is provided in the predetermined area, it becomes easy to illuminate the predetermined device by the lighting means according to the opening operation of the opening / closing body.

Features M4. The opening / closing body can be displaced within a predetermined displacement range from the closed position to the maximum open position.
The lighting control means controls the lighting means so that the lighting state is set when the opening / closing body is present in a part of the predetermined displacement range in the lighting corresponding range, and the opening / closing body is opened. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M3, characterized in that the lighting means is controlled so as to be in a non-lighting state when the lighting means is not present in the lighting corresponding range.

According to the feature M4, the illuminating means is not in the illuminating state regardless of which open position the opening / closing body is arranged, but the illuminating means is selectively in the illuminating state in some open positions. .. As a result, it is possible to put the lighting means in the illuminated state only in a preferable situation when checking the predetermined device, and to put the lighting means in the non-lighting state in the situation where it is difficult to check the predetermined device instead when the lighting means is in the lighting state. Become.

Feature M5. The maximum open position is not included in the illumination range, and the maximum open position is not included.
The gaming machine according to feature M4, wherein the lighting control means controls the lighting means so as to be in the non-lighting state when the opening / closing body is present at the maximum open position.

According to the feature M5, when the opening / closing body is present in the maximum open position, the lighting means is in a non-lighting state. As a result, in a situation where the predetermined device is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the lighting of the game hall, the lighting means is in a non-lighting state, so that there is no inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the predetermined device by the lighting by the lighting means. It becomes possible to do so.

Features M6. The predetermined device is any one of the features M1 to M5, which is a control device having a control board (main control board 441) and a transparent box (board box 445) for accommodating the control board. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature M6, since the control device is illuminated by the lighting means in response to the opening operation of the opening / closing body, it becomes easy to confirm the control board and the board box of the control device.

Feature M7. Equipped with a box body (housing 411) that is open toward the front of the gaming machine,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the front opening of the box body is closed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M6, wherein the predetermined region exists in the internal space of the box body.

According to the feature M7, it is possible to make a predetermined device provided inside the box body illuminated by the opening operation of the opening / closing body.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features M1 to M7, the features A1 to A14, the features B1 to B5, the features C1 to C41, the features D1 to D20, the features E1 to E19, the features F1 to F7, the features G1 to G4, and the features H1 to H1 to One or a plurality of configurations of H10, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J17, features K1 to K5, features L1 to L15, and features M1 to M7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature J group, the feature K group, the feature L group, and the feature M group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing a game ball given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game ball stored in the dish storage section is guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the game balls surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to manage the gaming machine preferably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... pachinko machine, 24a ... out port, 31 ... general winning port, 32 ... special electric winning device, 33 ... first operating port, 34 ... second operating port, 41 ... symbol display device, 46a ... upper passage, 47a ... Central passage portion, 48a ... lower passage portion, 49a ... upper rear passage portion, 50a ... lower rear passage portion, 51 ... left first design piece, 51a ... left plate-shaped front portion, 51d ... left rotating standing wall portion, 52 ... Right side first design piece, 52a ... Right plate-shaped front part, 52d ... Right side rotating upright wall part, 53 ... Left side second design piece, 53a ... Main body part, 54 ... Right side second design piece, 54a ... Main body part , 57 ... Upper rear guide, 72 ... Lower rear guide, 97, 98 ... Interlocking protrusion, 105 ... Design member, 141 ... Main control board, 142 ... MPU, 143 ... Main CPU, 145 ... Main RAM , 162 ... Display control device, 172 ... Payout side CPU, 182 ... Reading terminal, 192 ... Management side CPU, 196 ... Corresponding related memory, 207 ... Calculation result memory, 219 ... Upper design piece, 219e ... Upper guide plate 219f ... Upper switching plate, 221 ... Lower design piece, 221e ... Lower guide plate, 221f ... Lower switching plate, 224 ... Flow space, 252 ... Interlocking protrusion, 301 ... Light emitting unit for notification, 313 ... Sound / light side CPU, 321 ... Normal counter area, 321a to 321e ... Counter, 322 ... Open / close execution mode counter area, 322a to 322e ... Counter, 323 ... High frequency support mode counter area, 323a to 323e ... Counter 411 ... Housing, 412 ... Front door, 440 ... Main control unit, 441 ... Main control board, 442 ... Main side MPU, 444b ... Advantageous game counter, 445 ... Board box, 449a, 449b ... Lighting device, B1 … Game ball, PA… Game area.

Claims (1)

Predetermined detection means to detect the game ball,
A game value-adding means that is electrically connected to the predetermined detection means and executes a process for adding a game value to the game.
A processing execution means that is electrically connected to the game value-adding means and executes a predetermined process,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game value-adding means is
A first reference information storage means for storing reference information, which is information used in the process for imparting the game value and is information referred to for the detection of the predetermined detection means.
The reference stored in the first reference information storage means after the predetermined supply of power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started. A first transmission means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the information to the processing execution means, and
A second transmission means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on the ball entry information, which is information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, to the processing execution means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images